JP7484427B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a play area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the play area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the play area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of game balls. The ball entry section is variable, and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the game situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-78904 A

In the above-mentioned types of gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in their configuration in order to increase the attention paid to the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The present invention relates to
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A game ball launching means capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine including a payout means for paying out gaming balls based on a ball entering a ball entry portion provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball is scored into the starting scoring section as the scoring section;
an acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
a game round control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, which is counted as one game round;
The predetermined determination information includes first determination information and second determination information,
a special game state transition means for transitioning a game state to a special game state which is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined game state, based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game round operation by the game round control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section as the ball entry section that can be switched between an entry state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-entry state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the entry state;
A variable ball entry section control means for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism that can be switched between an acceptance state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece that can be displaced to a first position that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit that drives the movable piece, and is configured such that the movable piece is in the receiving state when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-receiving state when it is displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode, a second switching mode set so that a period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepted state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode set so that a period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepted state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode;
A third game state corresponding to the third switching mode is provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
The movable piece has a distribution section that distributes the game ball to a first flow path that guides the game ball to a starting ball entry section and a second flow path that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section that guides the game ball that has passed through an inlet portion of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and is configured such that when the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the distribution section is located at a first flow path forming position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is arranged at the second position, the distribution section is located at a position that forms the second flow path,
A first inflow passage and a second inflow passage are formed in the play area as inflow passages into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism,
A moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inlet passage is configured to be slower than a moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inlet passage,
The variable mechanism control means is configured to drive and control the drive unit so that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution part, and to drive and control the drive unit so that, when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution part.

The present invention can effectively increase attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. This is an oblique view of the game board unit from the rear side. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. A front view showing the rear pack unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the high probability mode. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for a big win, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for a special miss. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the lottery mode and support mode; FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special miss and the lottery mode and support mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing a support lottery table for low frequency support mode, (b) a schematic diagram showing a support lottery table for high frequency support mode A, and (c) a schematic diagram showing a support lottery table for high frequency support mode B. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an overview of a support mode. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to deviations from normal. FIG. A schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to a jackpot. This is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for special misses. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing a through gate control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process for a through gate. 13 is a schematic diagram comparing the display times of pictures in the through gate display section. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for power supply support. 13 is a flowchart showing an electric utility switching process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for confirmation display. 13 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device and the display control device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display control process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. A flowchart showing the first variable display control process. A flowchart showing the first fluctuation start processing. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an outline of a game presentation. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a big win, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a special miss. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a special miss triggers a transition to the fourth normal game state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. 11 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a change in a ball. (a) A schematic diagram comparing support modes in the second embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A1, and (c) a schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A2. 10 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to deviations from normal. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to deviations from normal. FIG. 1 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. A front view of a game board unit in a third embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the first operating port. FIG. A schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for the second operating port. 1 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for operating ports in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first change start processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a first special effect, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a second special effect. 1 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. A front view of the game board unit in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable winning device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for a first operating port, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for a second operating port. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a first operating port, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a second operating port. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the behavior when a special winning result is obtained, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the transition pattern of the game state. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process. 13 is a flowchart showing the transition process to a special winning game state. 13 is a flowchart showing the special winning start processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of ending a special winning game. 13 is a flowchart showing a V allocation setting process. A flowchart showing V winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the transition process to a jackpot gaming state. A flowchart showing the transition process at the end of a big win. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a pre-check process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a special variable display time table for the second operating port. 1 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. A schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for an operating port in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a transition pattern of a game state. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. A front view of the game board unit in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the first operating port. FIG. A schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a first operating port, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a second operating port. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type and the lottery mode and support mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. A front view of the game board unit in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the high probability mode. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the first operating port, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type and the lottery mode and support mode. 11 is a flowchart showing a transition process executed by the MPU of the main control device when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 10 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process executed by the MPU of the main control device. A schematic diagram showing a win/lose table in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for big wins, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the win type and the lottery mode and the support mode. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram comparing support modes, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram comparing the display time of a pattern in a through gate display section. 11 is a flowchart showing a transition process executed by the MPU of the main control device when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing the game round ending process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 11 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a change in a ball. (a) A schematic diagram comparing support modes in the tenth embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A1, and (c) a schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A2. 1 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the lottery result and the image displayed on the operating port display unit in the eleventh embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to deviations from normal. FIG. This is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for special misses. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display mode of the patterns on the display screen. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing support mode switching processing in the twelfth embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. (a) Flowchart showing the special notification processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device, and (b) and (c) are schematic diagrams showing special notifications. 4 is a flowchart showing a special notification control process executed by the MPU of the main control device. A front view of the game board unit in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the high probability mode. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the first operating port, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type and the lottery mode and support mode. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of a gaming state. A flowchart showing the first change start processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 1 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. A schematic diagram showing an allocation table for special failure results in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration related to the pattern display. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a pattern displayed on a display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an arrangement of patterns displayed on a display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a big win result, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a special miss result. (a) A flowchart showing the special miss setting process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special miss result and the number of rotations. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing for the latter part of a special miss executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. This is a flowchart showing the special miss variation end processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a timing chart showing a flow of notification of the end reference number of times. A front view of the game board unit in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the first operating port. FIG. A schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a pre-check process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a hold command executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot preview effect setting process executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. A flowchart showing the process of determining the details of the big win preview performance. A schematic diagram showing the hold notification presentation. A flowchart showing command response processing for hold display control executed by the MPU of the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the hold display process executed by the MPU of the display control device. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a first type preview performance, and (b) a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a second type preview performance. FIG. 1A to 1C are schematic diagrams showing various display modes of the special effect device. 13 is a flowchart showing the special miss notice performance setting process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. A flowchart showing the process of determining the details of a special miss preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a special miss notice performance execution process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the special miss preview performance. A front view of the game board unit in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special effect device. 1A is a front view of the special effect device, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between the path of the light-emitting body and the light diffusion section and non-light diffusion section. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram comparing light emission modes. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of a light emitter and the light emission mode. FIG. 1A to 1C are schematic diagrams illustrating changes in light emission modes. A cross-sectional view of the special effect device in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 1A to 1C are schematic diagrams showing various display modes of the special effect device. A front view of the game board unit in the 18th embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the prize-winning device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for an operating port. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for an operating port. This is a schematic diagram comparing various jackpot results. 13 is a flowchart showing a V allocation setting process. A flowchart showing V winning processing. A flowchart showing the transition process at the end of a big win. 13 is a flowchart showing a pre-check process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a hold command executed by the MPU of the main control device. A schematic diagram showing the hold notification presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing for the ceiling reaching confirmation presentation executed by the MPU of the notification/presentation control device. This is a timing chart illustrating the flow of a game when a ceiling reaching confirmation effect is executed. A partially enlarged view of the game board unit showing the actuation port unit and its surroundings in the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the movement of a game ball. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the electrical support process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing utility switching processing. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram comparing support modes, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram comparing the display time of a pattern in a through gate display section. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the time required for a game ball to pass through. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of game balls being discharged. FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of an electric accessory. A schematic diagram showing an actuation port unit in the twentieth embodiment. A flowchart showing the electric support processing in the 21st embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram comparing open patterns. 4 is a flowchart showing an electric switching process executed by the MPU of the main control device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram comparing support modes. 13 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of a game when the support mode is switched. 13 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of a game when the support mode is switched. 13 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of a game when the support mode is switched. 13 is a timing chart comparing the flow of a game when the support mode is switched. 13 is a timing chart comparing the flow of a game when the support mode is switched. 13 is a timing chart comparing the flow of a game when the support mode is switched. 13 is a timing chart comparing the flow of a game when the support mode is switched. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram comparing opening patterns in the twenty-second embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and Figures 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 3.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a main machine part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting four long frame materials on all four sides, and is formed into a rectangular frame shape overall. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the game hall, etc.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the gaming machine main section 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 (see Figures 3 and 4).

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the gaming machine main part 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end of rotation and the right side as the tip end of rotation when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Fig. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front area of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20 so that substantially the entire area of a play area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front, and the window portion 21 is blocked from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, and both glass panels 23 face each other from the front and rear with the partition in between. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the playing area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame body 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more. However, in consideration of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels and have each glass panel face each other at a specified gap from the front to the back. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a panel member made of a transparent synthetic resin instead of the glass panels.

Around the glass unit 22 (more specifically, the window section 21), various light-emitting means such as lamps are provided. For example, a circular illumination section 26 incorporating a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The circular illumination section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 that lights up when an error or other malfunction occurs is provided at the center of the circular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and on the left and right of this are prize ball lamp sections 28 that light up while prize balls are being paid out. In addition, speaker sections 29 that output sound effects and background music according to the game state are provided close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28 (see FIG. 3).

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 2). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 34 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 and the function of a receiving tray for storing game balls that are fired by the game ball firing mechanism but do not reach the game area PE (see Figure 3) when the game balls are returned to the player.

A performance button 35 that is operated by the player is disposed in the upper bulge 31 in the front portion of the upper tray 33. This performance button 35 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, which executes operation-responsive performances etc. based on the operation of the performance button 35.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32 so as to protrude towards the front. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launching handle 41 increases, and the game ball will reach the game area PE when this operation amount is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount. Furthermore, by adjusting this operation amount, the player can selectively hit the game ball into the right route or left route described below.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner, and the receiving portion is divided into left and right by a partition wall to separate the entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and the entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage lead to the game ball distribution section described later, and game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

The rear surface of the front door frame 14 has protruding shafts at its upper and lower ends on the pivot base side. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 5. Figure 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the configuration within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 has been omitted in Figure 5, just like Figure 3.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50, the outer shape of which is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is disposed close to the upper frame part of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame part of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The fascia board is disposed below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, its lower end part), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the fascia board. A slight clearance may be provided between the fascia board and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71, 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown, the support brackets 71, 72 have shafts, and bearings provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shafts, so that the front door frame 14 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotation tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described later), and has front door hook members 76 arranged in a scattered manner in its longitudinal direction (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has slits formed corresponding to each front door hook member 76 for protruding the hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 to the front side of the inner frame 13. The front door hook members 76 protruding through the slits are engaged with the front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 75 also has inner frame hook members 77 that extend to the rear side of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 hook onto hook receiving members 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, locking the gaming machine main part 12 in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

The inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75) is provided with a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (hook members 76, 77 and interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise), the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A storage recess 51 for storing the game board unit 80 is formed in the center of the inner frame base body 50. The storage recess 51 is recessed toward the rear of the gaming machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed in place by a manual locking mechanism while fitting into this storage recess 51 from the front of the gaming machine. A roughly rectangular window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess 51, and the rear structure of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b described later) protrudes through this window hole 52 to the rear of the inner frame 13. Note that almost the entire area of this window hole 52 is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is formed by integrating a game board 80a formed mainly of wooden board material with a back block 80b provided on the back side of the game board 80a and having various game components (variable display device, control device, movable presentation mechanism, etc.) described later mounted on a base body 251.

The above-mentioned play area PE, where the game balls flow down, is formed on the front of the game board 80a. As already explained, the play area PE is covered by a glass unit 22 (more specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is arranged so that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, so that the game balls flowing down the play area PE are not lined up front and back at the same point in the play area PE. This prevents balls from clogging the play area PE. Note that the game board 80a is not limited to being made of wood, but can also be made of synthetic resin.

The game board unit 80 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) will be described below with reference to Figures 6 and 7. Figure 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and Figure 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the rear.

The game board 80a has a number of openings, large and small, that penetrate in the thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable winning device 83, a through gate 84, etc. When game balls enter the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable winning device 83, the game balls are detected by detection sensors provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and based on the detection results, a bonus such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player. In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (game area PE), and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 86. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 86, the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable winning device 83 is also referred to as "winning".

In addition, various game components such as numerous game nails 87 and windmills 94 are arranged on the game board 80a to appropriately distribute the flow path of the game balls. The various configurations of these game nails 87 and windmills etc. differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and there is a moderate probability of winning the general winning hole 81 etc. described above.

A central opening is formed in the center of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached to cover this central opening from the rear side of the game board unit 80. Behind this central opening, the variable display unit 85 and other parts belonging to the rear block 80b are located, and the variable display unit 85 and other parts can be seen through the central opening (opening cover) from the front of the game machine.

The operating port unit 82 and through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening. The operating port unit 82 has a first operating port 91 arranged below the variable display unit 85 and a second operating port 92 arranged below the first operating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the second operating port 92 is provided with an electric device 93 as an opening/closing ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 93 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and can be switched between an open state (assistance state) that allows the ball to enter the second operating port 92 and a closed state (non-assistance state) that does not allow the ball to enter the second operating port 92.

The electric device 93 may be configured so that when it is in the closed state, it is difficult to insert a ball into the second operating port 92, but when it is switched to the open state, it is easier to insert a ball into the second operating port 92 than when it is in the closed state.

The through gate 84 is located upstream of the second operating port 92, more specifically to the side of the variable display unit 85. If a support lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 84 is won, the electric device 93 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

When a ball enters the first operating port 91, three game balls are dispensed, and when a ball enters the second operating port 92, four game balls are dispensed, but the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above.

The variable winning device (special ball winning device or special ball winning means) 83 is provided with a large winning opening and a shutter that can be switched between a permissive state that allows a ball to enter the large winning opening and a blocked state that prevents the ball from entering. In the following explanation, the state of the variable winning device 83 when the shutter is in the permissive state is referred to as the "open state," and the state of the variable winning device 83 when the shutter is in the blocked state is referred to as the "closed state."

The variable winning device 83 may be configured so that when it is in a closed state, it is difficult for a ball to enter the variable winning device 83, and by switching to an open state, it is easier for a ball to enter the variable winning device 83 than when it is in the closed state.

In the normal game state described below, an internal lottery is executed based on winning entries in the actuation ports 91, 92, and if the player wins this internal lottery (for example, a jackpot), the game transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The variable winning device 83 is maintained in a closed state, and is configured to switch to an open state when the game transitions to the special game state. In the special game state, the game is set to repeatedly switch to the open state for multiple rounds (for example, 6 rounds), with one round being defined as the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (for example, 10 prizes).

Next, a supplementary explanation will be given about the variable display unit 85. The variable display unit 85 has a pattern display device 95 that variably displays (variably displays) patterns when a winning entry into the actuation ports 91 and 92 is triggered. The pattern display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, for example, patterns are displayed in a line at the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by scrolling horizontally. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a preset pay line, and the game moves to the above-mentioned opening and closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). The pattern display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

The game board 80a is provided with a center frame 96 surrounding the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the game board 80a, so that the gap dimension between the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the pattern display device 95, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into the right route that bypasses the variable display unit 85 (more specifically, the center frame 96) from the right side, and the left route that bypasses it from the left side. In this embodiment, the various game components provided in the game area PE are arranged symmetrically (a so-called symmetrical gauge), and there is no advantage or disadvantage between the right and left routes. Game balls launched either to the right or left route can enter the actuation ports 91, 92, the through gate 84, and the variable winning device 83.

A stage on which game balls can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion constituting the lower part of the center frame 96. Game balls flowing in from an inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 are discharged onto the stage through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. The stage is configured so that game balls that reach the stage can relatively easily flow into the first operating port 91, specifically, so that game balls that do not pass through the stage can easily flow into the first operating port 91, which contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game balls on the stage. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with a transparent opening cover, and game balls that reach the stage are restricted from moving toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 85).

The actuation ports 91, 92 are positioned closer to the variable display unit 85. Since a win in the actuation ports 91, 92 can trigger a transition to a special game state, it is thought that the player will pay attention to whether or not a win will be made in the actuation ports 91, 92, and also to the symbol display device 95 to determine whether or not a transition to a special game state will occur. Providing the actuation ports 91, 92 closer to the variable display unit 85 is a device to concentrate the player's attention on the area around the variable display unit 85.

A play area partitioning member 98 is disposed at the right end of the play board 80a, which defines the play area PE together with the guide rail 100 described below. A stopper member and a main display unit 99 are disposed on the play area partitioning member 98, against which the play balls flying along the guide rail 100 collide. The stopper member is a buffer member disposed near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the momentum of the play balls that collide with the stopper member is weakened before they flow down the play area PE. In other words, the stopper member is endowed with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the game balls that collide with it.

Here, we will provide additional information about the main display unit 99. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the play area partition member 98, and a portion of it is positioned so as to face the glass unit 22. This facing portion is provided with a main display section D on which a predetermined image or the like is displayed. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), the main display unit D has a first actuation port display unit D1 that displays the result of a lottery based on winning at the first actuation port 91, and a second actuation port display unit D2 that displays the result of a lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92. In the first actuation port display unit D1, a winning at the first actuation port 91 is used as a trigger to display a varying pattern, and the result of the varying display being stopped is clearly displayed as the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the first actuation port 91. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the first actuation port 91 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to the special game state, the varying display is stopped in the first actuation port display unit D1, a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the special game state is transitioned to.

In the second actuation port display section D2, a winning entry into the second actuation port 92 is used as a trigger to display a varying pattern, and the result of the varying display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the second actuation port 92. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the second actuation port 92 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the varying display in the second actuation port display section D2 is stopped, a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then a transition to the special game state is made according to the result.

Here, based on a winning entry into any of the actuation ports 91, 92, a variable display is started in the corresponding actuation port display section D1, D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped (confirmed display), and one game round corresponds to the time when the fixed display time has elapsed while maintaining that state. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is performed in that single display area regardless of whether a winning entry into any of the actuation ports 91, 92 occurs, it is also possible to count one game round as the time when the variable display is started in that single display area, the variable display is stopped (confirmed display) while displaying a predetermined stop result, and the fixed display time has elapsed while maintaining that state.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which game balls are reserved up to four times each through the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92 (up to eight balls in total), and the main display section D of the main display unit 99 is provided with a reserved number display section S1 for the first actuation port and a reserved number display section S2 for the second actuation port, which display the reserved number of balls through the actuation ports 91 and 92, respectively.

In addition to the above-mentioned operating port display sections D1 and D2, the main display section D of the main display unit 99 is also provided with a through gate display section DS that displays the lottery result based on winning at the through gate 84. In the through gate display section DS, winning at the through gate 84 is used as a trigger to display the varying patterns, and as a result of stopping the varying display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 84 is clearly displayed (a final display is executed). If the result of the support lottery based on winning at the through gate 84 is a support winning result, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display section DS, the varying display is stopped, and after the final display is completed, the electric role opening state is entered. In the electric role opening state, the above-mentioned electric role 93 provided next to the second operating port 92 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that a game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is reserved up to four times, and the main display section D of the main display unit 99 is provided with a reserved number display section SS that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display section D described above can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and visibility is guaranteed because the game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display sections.

Referring again to FIG. 5 to explain the configuration of the inner frame 13, below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies the game ball to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby being integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the game board unit 80. The launch rail 112 is formed with a groove having a roughly V-shaped cross section, and is configured so that the game ball fits into the groove to determine the front-to-rear position of the game ball.

A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is located near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is located further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the game board unit 80, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100, together with the play area partitioning member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the board), partitions the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is partitioned and formed by both rails 101 and 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that opens at the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the play area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion 105 of the game board unit 80, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, preventing game balls that have already reached the game area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

Each of the rails 101, 102 that make up the guide rail 100 is arc-shaped with its center at approximately the center of the play area PE. For this reason, a game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, i.e., while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated by the game ball itself. In other words, when a game ball is launched so as to reach the play area PE, the area of the guide passage 103 along the outer rail 102 essentially constitutes a passing area (passing path) through which the game ball passes, and the area along the inner rail 101 is essentially an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board unit 80. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the lower edge of the game board unit 80. This brings the rails 100, 112 closer to the lower edge of the game board unit 80, while forming a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is molded integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and returns inside the guide passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage through the above-mentioned gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This prevents interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

A through hole is formed in the inner frame base body 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is arranged in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 are connected to the game ball distribution section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 122, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

An opening/closing member 124 that opens and closes the upper tray passage 122 on the main body side and the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the upper tray passage 122 on the main body side and the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, this biasing force causes each opening/closing member 124 to be in a closed state, thereby preventing game balls from falling out of each passage 122, 123. In contrast, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the upper tray passage 122 on the main body side and the upper tray passage on the front door side are connected, and further, the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side and the lower tray passage on the front door side are connected.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8. Figure 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the pivot base end side (right side in Figure 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 at vertical intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. In addition, a plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, a window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess (game board storage section) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is open to the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 stored in the storage recess 51. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back of the game board unit 80 will be explained with reference to Figure 7.

As already explained, the rear block 80b is attached to the rear of the game board 80a. The rear block 80b has a roughly box-shaped base body 251 that is open on the game board 80a side, and this base body 251 is fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80, thereby integrating the game board 80a and the rear block 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is the area for arranging the movable performance mechanism, etc., and the rear side is the area for arranging the control device that controls these various components and the variable display unit 85 (pattern display device 95) mentioned above.

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned pattern display device 95 (see FIG. 6) and a display control device for driving the pattern display device 95 are attached to this protruding portion. The pattern display device 95 and the display control device are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) so that the pattern display device 95 is at the front and the display control device is at the rear. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 140 is mounted on the rear portion of the base body 251, positioned behind the display control device.

The notification/performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification/performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device described below, and the notification/performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/performance control device 140, covering the base body 251 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 has a main control board that has the function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and the function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other by a box sealing section 164 as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing section 164 as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the box sealing section into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the board box 163 being opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily detected by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected by the base seal 165 in an unopenable manner. More specifically, the base seal 165 has a locking hole and a locking pin, just like the box seal 164, and the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected inseparably by inserting the locking pin into the locking hole. This makes it easier to know if the board box 163 has been illegally removed.

In the front part of the base body 251, facing the lower part of the back of the game board unit 80, a recovery passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning port 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning device 83 and gathers in one place downstream. As a result, all game balls that win the general winning port 81, etc. are configured to collect below the game board unit 80 via the recovery passage. In other words, the base body 251 is given the function of recovering game balls that win in the various winning ports.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is provided below the game board unit 80, and game balls that have gathered below the game board unit 80 are led into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The outlet 86 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are led into the discharge passage via the outlet 86.

The base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b is also equipped with detection sensors for each of the ball entry sections described above, including a general entry port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the general entry port 81, and an operating port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the operating ports 91 and 92, and these various detection sensors form a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signal) to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 as the main body of the back pack unit 15, and a dispensing mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage panel and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, comprises a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. The external terminal board is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. Also, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the latch pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by abutting against the base portion 211 from the rear with the fixing levers 134 inserted into the insertion portions.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail 222 that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution section 225 provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution section 225 has the function of distributing the game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that its inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage 122 and front door side upper tray passage, and its outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and front door side lower tray passage.

The discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end from the front and rear. A discharge passage that is open to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage panel facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 242 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board that controls the payout device 224 is housed in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply/launch control device 243 has a power supply/launch control board housed in a board box 246. The power supply/launch control board generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 that constitutes the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive of the ball sending device 113.

The power supply/launch control device 243 is also provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power supply switch 247, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (ON state) and a cut-off state (OFF state).

The pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power returns, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. For example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement parlor closes, the state before the power outage is stored and retained. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166 on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the main machine part 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the back of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the main machine part 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, the various switches are difficult to operate when the main machine part 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (e.g., a fraudster) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

(Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 402. The MPU 402 is an element that incorporates a ROM 403 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 402, a RAM 404 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 403, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, etc. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of the ROM 403 and the RAM 404, may be configured to be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 402 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 405 provided in the main control unit 162, a dispensing control unit 242, various detection sensors, and the like. The power outage monitoring board 405 is connected to the power supply and launch control unit 243, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, a ball entry detection sensor 391a that detects balls (winning) entering the general winning port 81, a ball entry detection sensor 391b that detects balls (winning) entering the variable winning device 83, a ball entry detection sensor 391c that detects balls (winning) entering the first operating port 91, a ball entry detection sensor 391d that detects balls (winning) entering the second operating port 92, and a ball entry detection sensor 391e that detects balls (winning) entering the through gate 84 are connected, and the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 judges whether a ball has entered each entry section (ball entry judgment). In addition, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92, and executes a support lottery based on winning entries into the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the notification/presentation control device 140. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based on the winning judgment result for the winning ball entry section such as the above-mentioned operation port 91, 92, etc. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced. Then, when a winning ball is identified in the general winning port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, when a winning ball is identified in the variable winning device 83, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, when a winning ball is identified in the first operation port 91, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output, and when a winning ball is identified in the second operation port 92, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

Various commands, such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command, are output from the main control device 162 to the notification and performance control device 140. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, the output side of the MPU 402 is connected to a variable winning drive section that opens and closes the shutter of the variable winning device 83, an electric role drive section that opens and closes the electric role 93 of the second operating port 92, and the main display unit 99. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 controls the drive of the various drive sections through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 402 controls the driving of the variable winning drive unit so that the variable winning device 83 opens and closes. Also, if the support lottery for the electric role device 93 is won, the MPU 402 controls the driving of the electric role device drive unit so that the electric role device 93 opens and closes. Also, the MPU 402 controls the display of the main display section D of the main display unit 99.

In addition, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and information regarding ball entry into various entry areas and lottery results such as jackpots are output via this external output terminal board 213 to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation, etc.

The power failure monitoring board 405 relays between the main control board 401 and the power supply/launch control device 243, and is provided with the function of monitoring the stable DC voltage of 24 V, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement facility. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a specified power path. The power supply and launch control device 243 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is driven when specified launch conditions are met.

The notification/performance control device 140 is provided with a notification/performance control board equipped with an MPU. The MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into a single chip for the MPU, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. The MPU of the notification/performance control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 installed in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 410.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the pattern display device 95 based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 140. In this case, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 95 (for example, whether or not a reach has occurred and the contents of the reach performance, etc.) and the stopped display mode of the patterns (the type of pattern combination that will finally be stopped when the variable display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of the symbols for each game round and the contents of the variable display will be explained. In the following explanation, Figures 12 and 13 will be referred to as appropriate. Figures 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.
For ease of explanation, in FIG. 13 and other figures, the background image and the like displayed on the display screen 95a are omitted.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. The character ROM prestores data for nine main patterns numbered "1" to "9" (see Figs. 12(a) to (i)) and data for sub-patterns not numbered (see Fig. 12(j)).

As shown in FIG. 13(a), three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, which are an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is configured with main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 95a, the patterns of each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper pattern row Z1, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In the lower pattern row Z3, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In other words, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are composed of 18 patterns. In contrast, in the middle pattern row Z2, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main pattern of "4" additionally arranged between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1", with one sub-pattern between each of these main patterns. In other words, the middle pattern row Z2 alone is composed of 20 patterns, with 10 main patterns arranged.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), the display screen 95a is designed to display three symbols per symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3×3 fashion. Five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5, are set on the display screen 95a. The display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. If the display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., a symbol combination with the same number) being formed on any of the active lines, a jackpot video is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a guaranteed jackpot result.

In consideration of the fact that the variable display of each pattern row is stopped as described above, the upper pattern row Z1 can be called the first pattern row (or first picture row), the lower pattern row Z3 can be called the second pattern row (or second picture row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called the third pattern row (or third picture row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols". When a special jackpot result is achieved, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is displayed as a stopped symbol. When a normal jackpot result is achieved, the same non-specific symbol combination is displayed as a stopped symbol.

The manner in which the pattern display device 95 changes the patterns is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows may be set vertically.

A reserve display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95a, specifically below the variable display area ME which is made up of a variable display area for the upper pattern row, a variable display area for the middle pattern row, and a variable display area for the lower pattern row. The reserve display area is made up of a reserve number display area Da which is partitioned so that unit reserve display areas of the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls when game balls enter the operation ports 91, 92 are lined up in the left and right direction, and an execution target display area Dc which can display a reserve image (reserve icon) corresponding to the game round being played in the variable display area ME.

More specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held when game balls enter the operating ports 91, 92 is eight, and corresponding to this, the reserved number display area Da is set with a first unit reserved display area, a second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, a fourth unit reserved display area, a fifth unit reserved display area, a sixth unit reserved display area, a seventh unit reserved display area, and an eighth unit reserved display area.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the operating ports 91, 92 is one, a predetermined reserved image (reserved icon) is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the operating ports 91, 92 is four, a predetermined reserved image (reserved icon) is displayed in each of the first unit reserved display area to the fourth unit reserved display area. Figure 13(b) shows an example where the number of reserved balls in the operating ports 91, 92 is three. In the following explanation, "reserved number" is also simply referred to as "reserved number".

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during play to perform jackpot lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 99 (main display section D), setting the pattern display of the pattern display device 95, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, it uses a hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a type counter C2 used to determine the type of hit such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a reach random number counter C3 used for a reach lottery when the pattern display device 95 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the change display time of the pattern on the operation port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 and the change display time of the pattern on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95. In addition, it uses an electric role release counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric role 93 attached to the second operation port 92 is in an electric role release state.

Each counter C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 431 set in a specified area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an operating port reserved area RE, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area.

The actuation port reserve area RE has a first area, a second area, a third area, a fourth area, a fifth area, a sixth area, a seventh area, and an eighth area, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 is stored in one of the first to eighth areas as the reserved information described above, according to the winning history of the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, the first to eighth areas store the numerical information in chronological order from the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area. Up to four winning balls in the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92 are reserved and stored. The reserved ball storage area 432 also has a total reserved number storage area, which stores information for specifying the number of winning balls in the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92 that are reserved and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE for the operating port when the display of changing patterns begins on the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here is some additional information about the various counters.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the reserved ball storage area 432 of RAM 404 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored as a hit/miss table (win/miss information group) in a hit/miss table storage area 421, which serves as a hit/miss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 15, a hit/miss table for a low probability mode (low probability hit/miss information group) and a hit/miss table for a high probability mode (high probability hit/miss information group) are set as hit/miss tables. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively low and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively high are set as lottery modes in the hit/miss lottery selection means.

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15(a)) is referenced in the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15(b)) is referenced in the above lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597". In other words, out of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the jackpot result. Incidentally, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a jackpot can be any number.

In this embodiment, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot corresponds to a miss result. Miss results are broadly divided into normal miss results and special miss results. Details will be described later, but special miss results are more favored than normal miss results in that they trigger the support mode of the electric device 93 to switch to high-frequency support mode A, which will be described later, and if a special miss occurs under specified conditions, the support mode will switch to high-frequency support mode after the game round related to the special miss has ended. In the following explanation, normal miss results will also be simply referred to as "miss results".

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15(a)) is referred to in the above lottery, the random number values that result in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are "111", "333", and "555", a total of three. In other words, "111", "333", and "555" out of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599" correspond to the special loss result. On the other hand, in a game state where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15(b)) is referred to in the above lottery, the random number values that result in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are "111", "333", and "555", a total of three. In other words, "111", "333", and "555" out of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599" correspond to the jackpot result. In other words, the probability of a special loss is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

Next, the type counter C2 will be described. The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after it reaches the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results have differences in two conditions: (1) a selection mode in the win/lose selection means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode by the electric role 93 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

The support modes by the electric device 93 attached to the second operating port 92 are set to a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency with which the electric device 93 of the second operating port 92 opens per unit time is relatively high and low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously launched in a similar manner into the play area PE. The high-frequency support modes are broadly divided into high-frequency support mode A, which is entered when a special miss or the like described above occurs, and high-frequency support mode B, which is entered when a jackpot occurs. The differences between these support modes will be described later.

The type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, it is stored in the actuation port reserve area RE of the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404.

The allocation destination of the game results for the type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in the allocation table storage area 422, which serves as an allocation information group storage means in the ROM 403. The contents of the allocation table will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 16. As the allocation table, an allocation table for a big win (first allocation information group) shown in FIG. 16(a) and an allocation table for a special miss (second allocation information group) shown in FIG. 16(b) are set.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), in the jackpot allocation table, the allocation destinations of game results are set to a 6R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result) and a 6R special jackpot result (high probability special game result). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, and "15 to 29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), a 6R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends. This high frequency support mode B ends when the number of games executed during the high frequency support mode B reaches the termination reference number or when a jackpot result occurs before the termination reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition is made to the special game state), and the mode switches to the low frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination reference number is set to 40 times.

The 6R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode becomes high probability mode and the support mode becomes high frequency support mode B after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends. This high frequency support mode B continues until the next jackpot result occurs and the game transitions to the special game state, at which point it switches to low frequency support mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16(b), in the allocation table for special losses, special loss result A and special loss result B are set as the allocation destinations of the game results. Specifically, of the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 23" correspond to special loss result A, and "24 to 29" correspond to special loss result B.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), neither special miss result A nor special miss result B triggers a change in the lottery mode, but rather triggers a change in the support mode by the electric role device 93.

Specifically, the special failure result A triggers the support mode to switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game in which the special failure result A occurred. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of games played during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the termination reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition to a special game state occurs), and the mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination reference number is set to 20 times.

The special miss result B also triggers the support mode to switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game in which the special miss result B occurred. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of games played during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the end reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition is made to a special game state), and the mode transitions to low-frequency support mode. Note that in this embodiment, the end reference number is set to 40 times.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the actuation port reserve area RE of the reserved ball storage area 432 of RAM 404 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of ROM 403.

However, in a game that transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually for each game state. For example, a configuration may be used in which the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set to be greater when the support mode is a high frequency support mode than when it is a low frequency support mode.

Here, the term "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state for making a player believe that the game machine is in a state where the stop display result after the variable display is likely to be a special display result after the variable display has started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, in a game machine that has a pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) capable of displaying a variable (or variably) pattern (picture), and in which the stop display result after the variable display can be a special display result in a game round in which the game result corresponds to the open/close execution mode.

In other words, it is a display state in which the patterns of some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 are stopped to display a reach pattern combination that may result in a pattern combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and in this state, the patterns of the remaining pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to terminating the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a stop of a reach pattern combination that has the possibility of forming a pattern combination corresponding to the occurrence of an open/close execution mode on a preset effective line in the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, and the changing display of the patterns is performed by the final stop pattern sequence under the condition that the reach line is formed.

To explain the display contents on the display screen 95a in more detail, first the display of the changing patterns in the upper pattern row is terminated, and then when the display of the changing patterns in the lower pattern row is terminated, a reach line is formed by the main patterns with numbers attached that make up the winning pattern combination being displayed stationary on one of the active lines, and when the reach line is formed, the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern row is performed, resulting in a reach display. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern row is terminated by causing the main patterns that form the reach line and the main patterns with numbers attached that make up the winning pattern combination to be displayed stationary on the reach line.

The reach display also includes a reach effect in which, while the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are changed and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing the reach symbol combination or making it non-displayable and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 95a. In addition, when the reach display is being performed or before the reach display, the decision of whether to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 402 to determine the variation display time in the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display section D) and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is obtained when the variation display in the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 starts, and when the pattern display device 95 starts to vary the pattern.

The electric role opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric role reserve area 433 of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric role 93 of the second operating port 92 to an open state, based on the stored value of the electric role opening counter C4. Below, a supplementary explanation of the support mode is provided with reference to the schematic diagrams of Figures 18 and 19.

The random number value that results in a support win is stored as a support lottery table (win/lose information group) in a win/lose table storage area 421, which serves as a win/lose information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 18, the support lottery tables include a support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (win/lose information group for low probability), a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A (win/lose information group for low probability), and a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B (win/lose information group for high probability).

In a situation where the support lottery table for low frequency support mode (Figure 18(a)) is referenced in the above lottery, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7", ... "595", "597", and "599", a total of 300 values. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7", ... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to non-support win results.

In a situation where the support selection table for high frequency support mode A (Figure 18 (b)) is referenced in the above selection, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7", ... "595", "597", and "599", a total of 300 values. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7", ... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to support non-win results. In other words, the support selection table for high frequency support mode A is shared with the support selection table for low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in a situation where the win/lose table for high-frequency support mode B (Figure 18 (c)) is referenced in the above lottery, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are all 598 values except for "4" and "304". In other words, all values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599" except for "4" and "304" correspond to a support win result. In other words, high-frequency support mode B is differentiated from the high-frequency support mode A and low-frequency support mode in that support wins occur in almost all support lotteries.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the support is 1/2, the number of times the electric role device 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) when a support win occurs is set to "1 time," and the time the electric role device 93 is maintained in the open state (opening time) is set to "0.1 sec." In this way, by making the opening time extremely short, winning at the second operating port 92 is essentially avoided during the low-frequency support mode.

In the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support is 1/2, which is the same as in the low-frequency support mode. However, the number of times the electric role 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) when the support is won is set to "2 times", the time during which the electric role is kept in the open state (opening time) is set to "2 seconds", and the interval time during which it is kept in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds". By extending the opening time compared to the low-frequency support mode in this way, winning is allowed in the second operating port 92 during the high-frequency support mode A. In this way, winning in the second operating port 92 occurs appropriately, making it possible to play while suppressing the loss of balls (investment). In other words, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode A is configured so that the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of game balls fired (so-called base) is higher.

In the high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support is 1/1.1, and the number of times (number of openings) that the electric role 93 switches to the open state when the support is won is set to "2 times", the time (opening time) that the electric role is maintained in the open state is set to "2 seconds", and the interval time that it is maintained in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds". By extending the opening time compared to the low-frequency support mode in this way, winning is allowed in the second operating port 92 during the high-frequency support mode B. In the high-frequency support mode B, the frequency of winning in the second operating port 92 is higher than in the high-frequency support mode A, making it possible to play while further suppressing the loss of balls (investment). In other words, compared to the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode A, the high-frequency support mode B is configured so that the ratio (so-called base) of the number of winning balls to the number of game balls fired is higher.

As already explained, the game states in this embodiment are roughly divided into a normal game state in which the game progresses by repeating the game rounds based on the ball entering the actuation ports 91, 92, and a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the game is transitioned to in response to a big win and the variable winning device 83 is opened and closed. The normal game states are composed of a first normal game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, a second normal game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode B, a third normal game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode B, and a fourth normal game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode A. The player's advantage is differentiated in the order of the first normal game state < the fourth normal game state, and the third normal game state < the second normal game state.

(Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162)
Next, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed in the progress of the game by the MPU 402 in the main control device 162. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 402 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these various types of processing will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 20. This process is started by the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, a process of reading various winning detection sensors (e.g., the above-mentioned detection sensors 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of the various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the next step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the next step S104, a winning process for through is executed in response to winning at the through gate 84. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and if the flag is stored, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in the above step S103 is stored in the electric role holding area 433, provided that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 stored in the electric role holding area 433 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved role memories SN) is less than 4. Then, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, where the winning process for the actuation port associated with the winning at actuation ports 91 and 92 is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

(Winning process for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 21 and 22.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (won) the first operating port 91. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 91, the process proceeds to step S202, and a winning ball command is set to cause the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls.

In the next step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer in the gaming hall indicating that a gaming ball has entered the first actuation port 91. This allows the hall computer to understand that a ball has entered the first actuation port 91. In the next step S204, a value corresponding to the first actuation port 91 is read from the reserved number storage area, and this value is set as the reserved memory number RaN for the first actuation port (hereinafter also referred to as the reserved memory number RaN for the first actuation port). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, etc., and this winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the first operating port 91, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether the game ball has entered (won) the second operating port 92. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating port 92, the process proceeds to step S207, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is sent to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described below.

In the next step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer in the gaming hall indicating that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 92. This allows the hall computer to understand that a ball has entered the second actuation port 92. In the next step S209, a value corresponding to the second actuation port 92 is read from the reserved number storage area, and this value is set as the reserved memory number RbN for the second actuation port (hereinafter also referred to as the reserved memory number RbN for the second actuation port). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, etc., and this winning process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in both steps S201 and S206, i.e., if no ball has entered either the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, the winning process ends.

Here, the information acquisition process of step S205 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

(Information Acquisition Processing)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S301, it is determined whether the number of activated pending memories N stored in the reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432, more specifically, the number of activated pending memories N (RaN or RbN) related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among the first activation port 91 and the second activation port 92, is less than an upper limit (in this embodiment, "4"). If the number of activated pending memories N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step S302, the number of activated pending memories N of the corresponding activation port is incremented by 1, and in step S303, the total number of reserved memories stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in the above step S103 are stored in the first memory area among the free memory areas of the operation port holding area RE, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common holding number CRN incremented by 1 in the above step S302.

In other words, when the first actuation port reserved memory number RaN is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in step S103 above are stored in the first free memory area in the actuation port reserved area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the actuation reserved memory number N added by 1 in step S302 above.

In addition, if the second activation port reserved memory number RbN is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 above are stored in the first free memory area in the activation port reserved area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the activation reserved memory number N added by 1 in step S302 above.

After storing the reserved information, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, a display update process is executed for the reserved number display section of the main display unit 99. In the display update process, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first actuation port 91, the display in the reserved number display section S1 for the first actuation port is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second actuation port 92, the display in the reserved number display section S2 for the second actuation port is updated.

Each of the reserved number display sections S1, S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit on the reserved number display sections S1, S2 matches the reserved number related to the first actuation port 91 and the reserved number related to the second actuation port 92. If the reserved number related to the first actuation port 91 increases as a result of the current win, the number of lit LEDs on the reserved number display section S1 for the first actuation port is increased accordingly, and if the reserved number related to the second actuation port 92 increases, the number of lit LEDs on the reserved number display section S2 for the second actuation port is increased accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are the sub-side (auxiliary) control devices, are made to recognize that a win has occurred in the actuation ports 91 and 92, and a pre-confirmation process and a hold command setting process are carried out to execute the hold notice, etc., described below, and the information acquisition process is terminated. Note that the hold command includes information as to whether the win is based on the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92.

The pending command set in the pending command setting process in step S307 will be transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described below.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 23. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S401 to S407 is executed as regular processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S409 and S410 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step S401, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output processing in step S401, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device and hall computer on the sub side.

Specifically, it determines whether or not there is a prize ball command, and if a prize ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 242. In addition, if various commands are set, such as performance commands such as a fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command, hold command, and shift command described below, it sends them to the notification/performance control device 140.

Moreover, although details will be described later, for example, each time the display of the changing patterns is completed on the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display section D, an external signal indicating that the pattern has been confirmed is output to the hall computer, and when in the opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in is output to the hall computer, and when in the high frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is in is output to the hall computer.

Next, in step S402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the next step S403, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. This game round control process performs a jackpot determination, sets the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 95, and controls the display of the main display unit 99.

After executing the game count control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, where a game state transition process is executed. Details will be described later, but this game state transition process transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode), high probability mode, high frequency support mode B, etc. Details of the game count control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, a through gate control process is executed, including a support lottery process based on winning the through gate 84, and in step S406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the electric role device 93 attached to the second operating port 92. The through gate process in step S405 and the electric role support process in step S406 will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S407, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined interval period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply/launch control device 243. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the game area PE.

In the next step S408, it is determined whether the next execution timing of normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether one period (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the next execution timing of normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

The execution time of each process in steps S401 to S407 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated in the same way.

(Game play control process)
Next, the game play control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 24 to FIG.

First, in the game round control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) is in progress. If the game round is in the open/closing execution mode, the game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step S502 onwards, i.e., the game round start process in steps S503 to S506 and the game round progress process in steps S507 to S509.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, it is determined in steps S502 and S503 whether a game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are displaying a change. If a change is being displayed, a negative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether the confirmation display in the operating port display sections D1 and D2 has ended. If a positive determination is made in step S503, the process proceeds to the game start process in steps S504 to S506. In the game start process, first in step S504, it is determined whether the total number of start reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". If the common reserved number CRN is "0", this means that reserved information is not stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, the game control process is terminated as is.

On the other hand, if the common reserve number CRN is not "0", in step S505, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserve area RE for the operating port in the reserved ball storage area 432 for variable display, and in step S506, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the operating port display sections D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 and the variable display of the pattern display device 95, and then this game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S505 and the fluctuation start process in step S506 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, the number of reserved activation memories N stored in the reserved number storage area, which is the target of the current setting process, and the common reserved number CRN are decremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of reserved activation information stored in the reserved area RE for the activation port (see FIG. 14), that is, the number of reserved activation memories N, is "0" or not. If the number of reserved activation memories N is "0", this data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved activation memories N is not "0", the data (reserved information) stored in the first area of the reserved area RE for the activation port is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the data (reserved information) stored in the second area to the eighth area of the reserved area RE for the activation port is shifted in order to the lower area side. As a result, for example, as data from the first area moves to the execution area AE, the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, the fifth area to the fourth area, the sixth area to the fifth area, the seventh area to the sixth area, and the eighth area to the seventh area, and so on.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information for making the notification/performance control device 140 recognize that a data shift has been made in the operating port holding area RE. After that, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (Figure 23). This shift command is then also sent to the display control device 410 via the notification/performance control device 140.

(Change start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start process in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, an update process is executed for the number of times played counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404. The number of times played counter is cleared to 0 when the special game state is entered, and is incremented by "1" each time the update process of step S701 is executed. The MPU 402 can determine the number of times played after the special game state ends by referencing the value of this number of times played counter.

In the next step S702, a win/loss determination process based on the winning of the operation ports 91 and 92 is executed. This win/loss determination process is a process for determining whether or not the reserved information referenced in the current fluctuation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, the information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the win random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the above-mentioned grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot, and if the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the above-mentioned grasped information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot.

In the next step S703, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination process in step S702 corresponds to a jackpot. If the result corresponds to a jackpot, the process of determining the type of jackpot is executed in step S704.

In this type determination process, the type determination information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the information obtained from the type counter C2, is identified. In addition, the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R special jackpot result.

If it is a 6R special jackpot, a positive judgment is made in step S705 and the process proceeds to step S706, where the process executes the stop result setting process for the 6R special jackpot. If it is a 6R regular jackpot, a negative judgment is made in step S705 and the process proceeds to step S707, where the process executes the stop result setting process for the 6R regular jackpot.

Returning to the explanation of step S703, if a negative judgment is made in step S703, i.e., if there is no jackpot, the process proceeds to step S708. If the current lottery result is a normal miss as described above, a negative judgment is made in step S708 and the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, the process of setting the stop result for a normal miss is executed. If the current lottery result is a special miss as described above, a positive judgment is made in step S708 and the process proceeds to step S709 and the process of determining the type of special miss is executed.

In this type determination process, the type determination information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the information obtained from the type counter C2, is identified. In addition, the distribution table for special misses stored in the distribution table memory area 422 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information corresponds to special miss result A or special miss result B.

If the result is special miss A, a positive judgment is made in step S710 and the process proceeds to step S711, where the stop result setting process for special miss A is executed. If the result is special miss B, a negative judgment is made in step S710 and the process proceeds to step S712, where the stop result setting process for special miss B is executed.

In each of the stop result setting processes of steps S706, S707, and S711 to S713, information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 99 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and the identified information is stored in the RAM 404.

In steps S706 and S707, information for the MPU 402 to identify whether the win/loss determination result for the current game round is a 6R special jackpot result or a 6R regular jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S706, a 6R special jackpot flag is stored, and in step S707, a 6R regular jackpot flag is stored.

In addition, in steps S711 and S712, information for the MPU 402 to identify whether the win/loss determination result for the current game round is special loss result A or special loss result B is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S711, the special loss A flag is stored, and in step S712, the special loss B flag is stored.

After executing any one of steps S706, S707, and S711 to S713, in step S714, a process for setting the variable display time is executed. In the process for setting the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, etc. Then, the obtained variable display time information is set in a variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404.

After executing the process of setting the variable display time in step S714, proceed to step S715 to set a variable start command and a type command. The variable start command includes information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the variable display time. The type command also includes information on the game result. In other words, the type command includes, as game result information, information on the 6R special jackpot result, information on the 6R normal jackpot result, information on the special miss result A, information on the special miss result B, and the like. Note that in step S713, the value of the number of plays counter is referenced to determine whether or not the ceiling has been reached, and this information is also included in the variable start command.

The fluctuation start command and type command set in step S715 are sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 in normal processing (FIG. 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the output pattern of the sound (BGM and sound effects) from the speaker unit 29 for that game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and controls the lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 so that the determined content of the performance is executed. In addition, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the details of the game performance, such as the fluctuation display pattern of the pattern on the pattern display device 95 for that game round, based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and sends the determined information to the display control device 410 by adding it to the fluctuation start command and type command. The display control device 410 controls the display of the pattern display device 95 so that the game performance (display performance) is executed in the manner determined by the notification/performance control device 140 based on the received fluctuation start command and type command.

Then, in step S716, the display of the changing patterns is started on the corresponding one of the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 of the main display unit 99, and then this change start process is terminated. Note that it is also possible to configure the display of the changing patterns, etc. to start before the lottery is executed.

(Setting process for variable display time)
Next, the outline of the variable display time setting process (step S714) will be described with reference to Figs. 27 to 29. As already described, in this embodiment, the reserved information is acquired based on the ball entering the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92, and the variable display to the final display of the picture or pattern in the game round is executed based on the acquired reserved information. Here, the variable display time of the picture or pattern is set according to the current game state, the result of the current winning/losing lottery based on the ball entering the actuation ports D1 and D2, the number of reserved information stored in the actuation port reserved area RE, etc. In addition, when comparing the big win result and the loss result, the variable display time is configured to be longer for the former than the latter, and in the case of a loss result and no reach display is generated, the more the number of reserved information stored, the shorter the variable display time becomes.

In the process of setting the variable display time, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S702 described above resulted in a jackpot or special miss. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the following flags is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404: a 6R guaranteed jackpot flag, a 6R normal jackpot flag, a special miss A flag, or a special miss B flag.

(Time table showing fluctuations in response to deviations from normal)
If the lottery result is a normal miss (complete miss) not corresponding to reaching the ceiling (not reached), it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display on the symbol display device 95 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display by referring to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE and the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area of the ROM 403. Then, it refers to a variable display time table corresponding to a complete miss from various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403, and sets the variable display time according to the current game state, the number of reserved information stored in the operation port reserve area RE, and whether or not a reach has occurred.

Figure 27 (a1) shows an example of the variable display time in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode when there is a complete miss. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 seconds", when the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, or 9 seconds", and when the number of reserved information stored is "3" to "8", the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the first normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

27(a2) shows an example of the variable display time in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A, in the case of a complete miss. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, 14 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, 9 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "3" to "8", the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, 5 sec". In addition, in the fourth normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display section D1, D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec". In other words, the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal game state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the first normal game state.

Figure 27 (a3) shows an example of the variable display time in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B, in the case of a complete miss. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0", the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds", and when the number of reserved information stored is "1" to "8", the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds". In the second normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 27 (a4) shows an example of the variable display time in the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B, in the case of a complete miss. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 seconds", and when the number of reserved information stored is "1" to "8", the variable display time is set to one of "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting mode of the variable display time in the third normal game state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the second normal game state. In addition, in the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Incidentally, for any of the first through fourth normal game states, in a game round in which a reach display corresponding to a miss result (miss reach) occurs, the variable display time is set to anywhere from "20 to 30 seconds" regardless of the number of reserved information stored. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result (see FIG. 28), and in the case of a jackpot result, a relatively long time within that range is likely to be set, and in the case of a miss result, a relatively short time within that range is likely to be set. In other words, a difference is provided so that a reach display with a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a reach display with a short variable display time.

In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, when the number of plays in the normal game state reaches a preset upper limit (hereinafter also referred to as the ceiling) while the game is progressing without a jackpot, the support mode may be forcibly switched to high frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling. In the play round in which the ceiling is reached, a variable display time (20 to 30 seconds in detail) corresponding to the reach display is set, similar to the play round in which a jackpot is won or a special miss is reached.

However, this is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to configure the variable display time to be set in a game where the ceiling is reached, without corresponding to the reach display. For example, regardless of whether the ceiling is reached or not, the variable display time setting may be unified for game times where the ceiling is reached and game times where the ceiling is not reached.

Incidentally, the term "complete miss" in the following explanation is a general term for a game result that does not fall into any of the following categories: a jackpot, a special miss, or a normal miss that does not correspond to reaching the ceiling.

(Variable display time table for big wins)
When the lottery result is a jackpot (6R sure-variable jackpot or 6R normal jackpot), a variable display time table corresponding to the jackpot is referenced from various variable display time tables stored in a variable display time table storage area 423 of a ROM 403, and the variable display time is set regardless of the current game state and the number of reserved information stored in an operating port reserved area RE.

In FIG. 28, the variable display time in the case of a complete miss in the first to fourth normal game states is illustrated. Regardless of whether the number of reserved information stored is "0" to "8", the variable display time is set to "20 to 30 sec". The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case of the miss reach described above, and it is easier to set a relatively long time compared to a relatively short time in this range. In the first, third, and fourth normal game states, the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95 are "1 sec", and in the second normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95 are "0.5 sec".

(Time table showing fluctuations for special deviations)
When the lottery result is a special miss (special miss A or special miss B), the variable display time is set by referring to the variable display time table corresponding to the special miss from various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403.

Figure 29 (c1) shows the variable display time in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode when there is a special miss. Even if the number of reserved information stored is anything between "0" and "8", the variable display time is set to anything between "20 and 30 seconds". The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case where the miss reach described above occurs, and within that range, a relatively long time is more likely to be set than a relatively short time. Note that in the first normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 29 (c2) shows the variable display time in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A when there is a special miss. Even if the number of reserved information stored is anything from "0" to "8", the variable display time is set to anything from "20 to 30 sec". The range of this variable display time is the same as the range when the miss reach occurs as described above, and within that range, it is easier to set a relatively long time compared to a relatively short time. Note that in the first normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the operation port display parts D1, D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

Figure 29 (c3) shows the variable display time in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B when there is a special miss. Even if the number of reserved information stored is anything from "0" to "8", the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 sec". The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case of a complete miss described above, making it difficult to identify a special miss from the variable display time. Note that in the second normal game state, the final display time of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

Figure 29 (c4) shows the variable display time in the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B when there is a special miss. Even if the number of reserved information stored is anything from "0" to "8", the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 sec". The range of this variable display time is the same as that of the complete miss described above, making it difficult to identify a special miss from the variable display time. Note that in the third normal game state, the final display time of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, when the number of plays in the normal game state reaches a preset upper limit (ceiling) while the game is proceeding without a jackpot, the support mode may be forcibly switched to the high-frequency support mode A in response to the reaching of the ceiling. Although the ceiling is not reached during the high-frequency support mode B, it may occur in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, or in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high-frequency support mode A. In the game round in which the ceiling is reached in the first normal game state or the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is set to the same variable display time as the reach display, etc. (more specifically, 20 to 30 sec). In other words, the reach display is executed in the game round in which the ceiling is reached.

Returning to the explanation of the game play control process (FIG. 24), if the operating port display sections D1 and D2 on the main display unit 99 are displaying a variable or fixed value, the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter in RAM 404 (variable display time information) has become "0". This value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S508. In the variable display process, the display mode of the corresponding one of the operation port display sections D1, D2 is changed. After that, this game number control process is terminated. If the variable display time has elapsed, a final display process is executed in step S509, and then this game number control process is terminated. Details of this final display process will be described later.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the game is in the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). If the game is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, where it is determined whether or not one game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a preset fixed display time (stopped display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended on either of the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display section D. If the game round has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the timing when the game round has ended, a positive judgment is made in step S802 and the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round (the result of the win/lose lottery described above) corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether a 6R special jackpot flag or a 6R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process ends.

If any of the above flags are stored, the opening and closing execution mode start process is executed in step S804. This start process releases the operation restriction of the variable winning device 83 by the lock device, and the opening and closing operation of the variable winning device 83 is permitted until the opening and closing execution mode ends. In addition, in the start process of step S804, an opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and a waiting time for opening in the opening and closing execution mode is set. In addition, in the above step S801, whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in progress is determined based on the presence or absence of the opening and closing execution mode flag.

In the following step S805, the round counter RC1 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "6". The round counter RC1 functions as a means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 83 has been opened. After executing the processing of step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, where the high frequency support mode flags A and B stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased. As a result, the support mode during the opening and closing execution mode is forcibly switched to the low frequency support mode. Thereafter, the opening command setting process is executed in step S807, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S808, after which the game state transition process is terminated.

The opening command set in step S807 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 in normal processing (FIG. 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode of the pattern display device 95, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/performance control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. The display control device 410 executes display control of the pattern display device 95 so that a display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a moving image of a character or the like as the display content corresponding to a jackpot, or a background image or the like is switched based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 140.

The external signal set in step S808 is also sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23), and the hall computer can determine that it is in the opening/closing execution mode based on this external signal.

Returning to the explanation of step S801, if it is determined in step S801 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the big prize opening opening/closing process is executed in step S810. Here, the big prize opening opening/closing process will be explained with reference to FIG. 31.

(Big prize opening and closing process)
In the large prize opening opening/closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize winning device) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable prize winning device drive unit of the variable prize winning device 83. If the large prize winning device is not open, in step S902, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S902 is positive, the large prize winning device opening/closing process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether the value of timer counter TC1 is "0". Timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time or interval time of the large prize opening, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S903, the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904, where the opening process of the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning device drive unit is driven to open the large winning opening.

Then, steps S905 and S906 are executed as a process for setting the closing conditions (opening setting process) for the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning port). Specifically, in step S905, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 seconds), and in the following step S906, the first prize-winning counter PC1 is set to "10."

After executing the process of step S906, an opening command is set in step S907 to indicate that the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) has been opened, and the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal processing (see FIG. 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S908, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S909, where it is determined whether a game ball has won the large winning opening based on a detection signal from a detection sensor disposed in the variable winning device 83.

If a win has occurred, a win command output process is executed in step S910. The win command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, and the win command is configured to change the performance during the opening/closing execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, for example.

After executing the command output process in step S910, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S911, the value of the first winning counter PC1 is decremented by 1, and in the following step S912, it is determined whether the value of the first winning counter PC1 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the process of opening and closing the large winning port is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S912, i.e., if the value of the first winning counter PC1 is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S908 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is judged to be "0"), this means that the condition for closing the large winning opening is met. In this case, in step S913, the variable winning device drive unit is set to a non-driven state to close the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening).

In the next step S914, an update process of the round counter RC1 is executed. Specifically, if the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the round counter RC1 is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the value of the round counter RC1 is maintained at "0".

Then, in step S915, it is determined whether the updated value of round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S915 is negative, the process proceeds to step S916, where timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec).

After executing the process of step S916, a close command is set in step S917, and the process of opening and closing the main prize opening is terminated. This set close command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the close command based on the received close command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S915, if it is determined in step S915 that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S918. In step S918, the process executes the ending start process. In the start process, a waiting time for the ending in the open/close execution mode is set so that the player can wait without starting the next round of play. Specifically, the waiting time counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to the waiting time information for the ending that is pre-stored in the ROM 403.

Then, in step S919, an ending command is set, and the main prize opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 30), after executing the large prize opening and closing process in step S810, the process proceeds to step S811, where it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process ends. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S813, the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. The transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 32.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether the current open/close execution mode is triggered by a 6R special jackpot. If the determination is affirmative in step S1001, the process proceeds to step S1002, where a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag thus set, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced in the win/lose lottery for the subsequent game rounds.

Then, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag thus set, the D support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode B is referenced in the support lottery in the subsequent electric role support processing, and the variable display time table for the high-frequency support mode B is referenced as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the image in the through gate display section DS.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if the jackpot that triggered the current open/close execution mode is a 6R normal jackpot, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 (step S1004), and the continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "40". After that, the process proceeds to step S1003, and a high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

The value of the continuation counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played, and high-frequency support mode B ends when the value of the continuation counter reaches "0." In other words, the value of the continuation counter determines the upper limit (the above-mentioned termination reference number) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

After executing the process of step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1006, where the value of the number of plays counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is cleared (reset) to 0. Then, in step S1007, the various flags (jackpot flag, etc.) for the open/close execution mode stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is stopped.

Next, the through gate control process of step S405 in normal processing will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 33 and 34.

(Through gate control process)
In the through gate control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not support is being performed by the electric role object 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. The support flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage area 435 when support by the electric role object 93 starts, and is deleted from the various flag storage area 435 when support ends.

If a support flag is stored, this through gate control process ends. If a support flag is not stored, a negative judgment is made in step S1101 and the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not a changing or final display of a pattern is being performed in the through gate display section DS in the main display section D. If a negative judgment is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is reserved up to four times, that is, up to four reserved information (electric role reserved) based on winning at the through gate 84 is stored in the electric role reserved area 433. In step S1103, it is determined whether the number of reserved roles SN is "0". If the number of reserved roles SN is "0", a positive determination is made in step S1103 and this through gate control process is terminated. If the number of reserved roles SN is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S1103 and the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the electric role reserved area 433 for variable display.

In this data setting process, the number of reserved reel memories SN is decremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of reserved information stored in the electric reel reservation area 433 is "0". If the number of reserved reel memories SN is "0", this data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved reel memories SN is not "0", the data (reserved information) stored in the first area of the electric reel reservation area 433 is moved to the execution area. Then, the data (reserved information) stored in the second area to the fourth area of the electric reel reservation area 433 is shifted in order to the lower area side. As a result, for example, as the data in the first area is moved to the execution area, the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area.

After executing the data setting process in step S1104, the process to start changing the image in the through gate display section DS is executed in step S1105, and then the through gate control process is terminated. Here, the change start process in step S1105 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 34.

(Change start processing)
In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode B. If the current support mode is either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode A, a negative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, a support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to a support lottery table (see FIG. 18(a) and (b)) corresponding to the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode A. If the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode B, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, a support lottery process (high-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to a support lottery table (see FIG. 18(c)) corresponding to the high-frequency support mode B.

If the support is selected in the support lottery process of steps S1202 and S1203, a positive judgment is made in step S1204, and the process proceeds to step S1205, where the stop result setting process for the support selection is executed. If the support is not selected in the support lottery process of steps S1202 and S1203, a negative judgment is made in step S1204, and the process proceeds to step S1206, where the stop result setting process for the support selection is executed.

After the stop result setting process in steps S1205 and S1206 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1207, where a process for setting the variable display time of the picture in the through gate display section DS is executed.
The variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 stores a variable display time table for the low-frequency support mode and a variable display time table for the high-frequency support mode. When the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the pattern is set by referring to the variable display time table for the low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time set by referring to the variable display time table for the low-frequency support mode is specified to be "10 to 20 sec" (see FIG. 35). On the other hand, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode A or B, the variable display time of the pattern is set by referring to the variable display time table for the high-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time set by referring to the variable display time table for the high-frequency support mode is specified to be "0.5 sec" (see FIG. 35). That is, in the high-frequency support modes A and B, the variable display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS is significantly shortened compared to the low-frequency support mode.

In addition, in all support modes, the time for the image to be displayed on the through gate display unit DS is standardized to 0.5 seconds.

After executing the setting process of step S1207, the display of the changing image on the through gate display unit DS is started in step S1208, and the through gate control process is terminated.

(Electricity support processing)
Next, the electric support process in step S406, which is executed as part of the normal process, will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

In the electric role support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is being performed by the electric role 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If support is not being performed, a negative determination is made in step S1301 and the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the timing has come when the final display of the pattern has ended in the through gate display unit DS. If the timing has not come when the final display of the pattern has ended, a negative determination is made in step S1302 and the electric role support process ends. If the timing has come when the final display of the pattern has ended, a positive determination is made in step S1302 and the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the support has been won in the support lottery based on winning the through gate 84. If the support has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S1303, and the process for the electric role support ends. If the support has been won in the support lottery based on winning the through gate 84, a positive determination is made in step S1303, and the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If it is low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "1". The round counter RC2 functions as a means for grasping the number of times the electric role 93 has been opened. If it is high-frequency support mode A or B, the process proceeds to step S1306, and the round counter RC2 is set to "2".

After executing the processes of steps S1305 and S1306, the process proceeds to step S1307, where a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. After that, the opening start process is executed in step S1308, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. In the opening start process, a waiting time for the opening is set. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric role 93 will begin.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301, if a positive judgment is made in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, it is judged whether or not the opening waiting time set in step S1308 has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative judgment is made in step S1309, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive judgment is made in step S1309, and the process proceeds to step S1310. Here, the electric role opening/closing process in step S1310 will be explained with reference to FIG. 37.

(Electrical switching processing)
In the electric role opening/closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the electric role 93 is open (open state). Whether the electric role 93 is open is determined by whether the electric role drive unit is in a driving state. If the electric role 93 is open, proceed to step S1402, and determine whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric role opening/closing process ends as it is. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", proceed to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is "0". The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time and interval time of the electric role 93, and its value is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the electric role opening/closing process ends as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the electric role release process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the electric role drive unit (solenoid) is started, and the electric role 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state. After that, in step S1405, the second winning counter PC2 is set to "10". In the following step S1406, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A or B. If it is the high frequency support mode A or B, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 sec) (step S1407), and if it is the low frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 sec).

Returning to the explanation of step S1401, if a positive judgment is made in step S1401, that is, if the electric role 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is judged whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, it is judged whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92 based on a detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If a win has not occurred, the electric role opening and closing process is terminated. If a win has occurred, the value of the second winning counter PC2 is decremented by 1 in step S1411, and in the following step S1412, it is judged whether the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the electric role opening and closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1412, i.e., if the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S1409 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is judged to be "0"), this means that the condition for ending the opening of the electric role 93 has been met. In this case, in step S1413, the output of the drive signal to the electric role drive unit is stopped to close the electric role 93 (second operating port 92).

In the next step S1414, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the round counter RC2 is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is maintained at "0".

Thereafter, in step S1415, it is determined whether or not the updated value of round counter RC2 is 0. If a negative determination is made in step S1415, the process proceeds to step S1416, in which timer counter TC2 is set to 100 (corresponding to 0.2 sec).
If it is determined in step S1415 that the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, an ending start process is executed. In this start process, a waiting time for the ending of the electric role support is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is stored in advance in the ROM 403, is set in a waiting time counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 36, after executing the electric role opening and closing process of step S1310, proceed to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1311, the process for supporting the main electric role is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1311, proceed to step S1312 and determine whether the waiting time for the ending set in step S1417 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1312, the process for supporting the main electric role is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1312, proceed to step S1313. In step S1313, the support flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased and the process for supporting the main electric role is terminated. This releases the restriction on the support lottery based on winning the through gate 84.

As described above in detail, the support mode of the electric device 93 is mainly configured to switch from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode via the special game state, but in the event of the above-mentioned special miss or reaching the ceiling, there are cases where the mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode without going through the special game state. Below, with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 38 and 39, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the configuration related to the switching of support modes, specifically, the confirmation display process (step S509) of the game number control process (Figure 24) executed as part of the normal process.

(Processing for confirmation display)
As shown in Fig. 38, in the confirmed display process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a confirmed display is being performed on the actuation port display units D1 and D2. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, a process for setting a confirmed display time is executed. In this embodiment, the confirmed display time is set to "1 sec" in the first normal game state, the third normal game state, and the fourth normal game state, and the confirmed display time is set to "0.5 sec" in the second normal game state.

In the next step S1503, the start process of the final display is executed. In this start process, the display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 is controlled to stop the pattern determined in each process of steps S706, S707, S711 to S713. After that, in step S1504, a change end command is set and this final display process is terminated. The change end command is output to the notification/performance control device 140 etc. in step S401 of the normal process, and the notification/performance control device 140 ends the change display of the pattern being executed on the pattern display device 95 etc. based on receiving the change end command (transitions to the final display).

Returning to the explanation of step S1501, if a positive judgment is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is judged whether or not the final display time of the image in the actuation port display section D1, D2 has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S1505, the process for the final display ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S1505, the process for switching the support mode is executed in step S1506, and the process for the final display ends. Here, the process for switching the support mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 39.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is high frequency support mode B. If a positive determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not a count limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, an update process of the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is performed. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1604, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S1604 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1605, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are erased, and the switching process is terminated. By erasing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1601, if a negative judgment is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A. If a positive judgment is made in step S1606, the process proceeds to step S1607. In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of plays counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative judgment is made in step S1607, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, an update process of the continuation number counter is performed. Specifically, the value of the continuation number counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1609, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S1609, the switching process is terminated as it is. If a positive judgment is made in step S1609, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number of plays limit flag are erased in step S1605, and the switching process is terminated. In other words, if the number of games played during high frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode will switch to low frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1606, if a negative judgment is made in step S1606, that is, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, it is determined whether the value of the game play counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative judgment is made in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether the current game play corresponds to a special miss. If it does not correspond to a special miss, a negative judgment is made in step S1611, and this switching process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1611 (if it corresponds to a special miss) or if a positive judgment is made in step S1610 (if the ceiling has been reached), the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, a high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the following step S1613, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Then, proceed to step S1614, execute the continuation counter setting process, and end this switching process.

In the setting process of the continuation counter, if the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (if the ceiling is reached) in the current play, the continuation counter is set to "400". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is reached during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of play times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 400. If the current play result is special miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is reached during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of play times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 20. If the current play result is special miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is reached during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of play times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 40.

Returning to the explanation of step S1607, if the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (if the ceiling is reached) during high-frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter is set (overwritten) to "400" in step S1614, and this switching process is terminated. This means that high-frequency support mode A is extended so that it continues until the number of plays executed during that high-frequency support mode A reaches 400. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss, the number of plays for which high-frequency support mode A will continue is reset (overwritten), and the upper limit of the fourth normal game state is raised without going through other normal game states, etc.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of Figure 40, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

The notification/performance control board 441 provided in the notification/performance control device 140 is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 has built-in ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, RAM 444 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 443 and RAM 444 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 442, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This is also true for the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game round control commands (game round control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and furthermore, opening and closing execution mode commands (opening and closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 140 are sent (transferred) to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information format.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are integrated into a chip, a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 472, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/presentation control device 140, or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the various commands received, to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 performs a process to identify the variable display pattern for each game round in the pattern display device 95 based on the commands sent from the notification/presentation control device 140, as well as a process related to hold notices, etc., and performs drawing processing for the VDP 475 in response to the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 472 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 474.

The VDP 475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 95. The VDP 475 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 472, video RAM 477, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 95.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 95. This character ROM 476 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 476 and have each character ROM 476 store image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 476 to store JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473.

Video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on pattern display device 95, and the display content of pattern display device 95 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 477.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern on the display screen 95a is identified by the notification/performance control device 140 with reference to commands from the main control device 162, and the details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 410 based on the identification results. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 executes a variable display control process as part of periodic processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and this variable display control process identifies the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 41.

(Variable display control process)
In the variable display control process, if the game state is the first normal game state, a positive judgment is made in step S1701, and a first variable display control process for the first normal game state is executed in step S1702. If the game state is the second normal game state, a negative judgment is made in step S1701 and a positive judgment is made in step S1703, and a second variable display control process for the second normal game state is executed in step S1704. If the game state is the third normal game state, a negative judgment is made in steps S1701 and S1703, and a third variable display control process for the third normal game state is executed in step S1705. If the game state is the fourth normal game state, a negative judgment is made in steps S1701 and S1703, and a positive judgment is made in step S1707, and a fourth variable display control process for the fourth normal game state is executed in step S1708.

(First variable display control process)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of Figure 42, the first variable display control process executed in the first normal gaming state will be described.

In the first variable display control process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not one game round is being played, i.e., whether or not the variable display or final display of the patterns for one game round is being performed on the pattern display device 95. If it is determined that a game round is not being played, the process proceeds to step S1802, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1802, the variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S1802, the first variable start process described below is executed in step S1803, and then the variable display control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1801, if a positive judgment is made in step S1801, i.e., if it is judged that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is judged whether or not a fluctuation end command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S1804, the process for during fluctuation is executed in step S1805, and then this fluctuation display control process is terminated. The process for during fluctuation is a process for executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game round started by the process for starting fluctuation.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1806, where a process for ending the variation is executed, and then this variation display control process is terminated. In the process for ending the variation, the pattern variation display and the currently being performed presentation are terminated (confirmed and stopped) in accordance with the hold information for the relevant game round. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to perform a presentation corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 410, and then this variation end process is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the pattern display device 95 to confirm and stop the pattern based on the received confirmation command.

(First fluctuation start processing)
Here, the first fluctuation start process of step S1803 will be explained in more detail with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 43. The first fluctuation start process is a process for starting the presentation for a game round based on receiving a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162. In the first fluctuation start process, settings such as reach display are made as the presentation for a game round.

In the first fluctuation start process, first, in step S1901, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S1601, the type command received together with the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and various information related to the game result, such as information on the guaranteed jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special miss result, information on the normal miss result, and information on reaching the ceiling, are identified from the above-mentioned identified information. Then, in step S1901, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won, information on the type of special miss if a special miss, information on the type of special miss if a special miss, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won and there is no special miss, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on the fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped from the above-mentioned identified information, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 442.

In the next step S1902, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result based on the information obtained in step S1901. If the game result of the current round is a jackpot result (6R special jackpot result or 6R normal jackpot result), the next step S1903 executes a jackpot presentation setting process. The jackpot presentation setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the jackpot symbol combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the symbol combination is stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result in which the same symbol combination is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following symbol combinations are defined as symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot: "1", "1", "1" symbol, "2", "2", "2" symbol, "3", "3", "3" symbol, "4", "4", "4" symbol, "5", "5", "5", "6", "6", "6", "6", "7", "7", "7", "8", "8", "8", "9", "9", "9" symbol, and "9" symbol combination (see FIG. 45(a) for example).

As already explained, in the event of a jackpot result, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for a jackpot, the variable display pattern tables for reach display stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 are obtained, and the presentation pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, it is determined whether the ceiling will be reached in the current game round. If the ceiling will be reached, a positive determination is made in step S1904 and the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, a performance setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The performance setting process for reaching the ceiling is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the process of determining the stop result for reaching the ceiling, a stop result in which a combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination that corresponds to reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45(b)).

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for reaching the ceiling, the variable display pattern tables for reach display stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 are obtained, and the presentation pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs in the game round where the ceiling is reached, the jackpot is prioritized. In other words, the symbol combination and the variable display mode that are stopped and displayed in that game round are set by the setting process in step S1903.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is judged whether or not the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive judgment is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, a special miss presentation setting process is executed. The special miss presentation setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the special miss pattern combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the special miss pattern combination is stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the special miss pattern.

In the process of determining the stop result for a special miss, the stop result in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss, just as when the ceiling is reached (see FIG. 45(b)).

If a special miss occurs, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for a special miss, the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 are obtained, and the presentation pattern of a normal reach display or a super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1908, and the effect setting process for a complete miss is executed. In the effect setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the effect setting process for a reach occurrence is executed, and if a reach will not occur, the effect setting process for a reach not occurring is executed.

The effect setting process for a reach occurrence is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed when the reach is completely missed and the effective line on which the symbol combination is to be displayed, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol when the reach is completely missed.

In the stop result determination process for reach-compatible complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they are not any of the symbol combinations that correspond to a big win result, the symbol combinations that correspond to a special miss result, or the symbol combinations that correspond to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The process of determining the variable display mode for reach-compatible complete misses acquires the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The effect setting process for when a reach does not occur is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed as a reach-not-corresponding complete miss and the effective line on which the symbol combination will be displayed as a reach-not-corresponding complete miss, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol for the reach-not-corresponding complete miss.

In the stop result determination process for reach-free complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they are not any of the symbol combinations that correspond to a jackpot result, the symbol combinations that correspond to a special miss result, or the symbol combinations that correspond to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process of determining the variable display mode for a complete miss that does not correspond to a reach, the variable display pattern table for a miss that does not correspond to a reach stored in various table areas of the ROM 443 is obtained, and a presentation pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

After executing any one of steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, a process is executed to output commands including information on the stop result and presentation pattern determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round.

After executing the process of step S1909, in the following step S1910, a process for starting the presentation for the game round is executed, and then this process for starting the fluctuation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the presentation pattern determined in the above steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908, and the presentation for the game round is started.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the display mode of the patterns displayed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 based on the schematic diagram in Figure 44.

(Display Mode)
The variable display modes of the symbols executed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 95a are roughly divided into five types: non-reach miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. For these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and it is possible to grasp the outline of the variable display mode for each game based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162.

Specifically, the variable display time for a reach non-compatible miss is "1 sec to 14 sec" (the difference is set according to the game status, number of reserved balls, etc.), the variable display time for normal reach A is "20 sec", the variable display time for normal reach B is "25 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A, and the variable display time for super reach A to C is "30 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A and B. For example, when the information on the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "20 sec", the notification/presentation control device 140 will understand that normal reach A should be executed, and when the information on the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "25 sec", the notification/presentation control device 140 will understand that normal reach B should be executed. In contrast, if the information regarding the variable display time given in the command from the main control device 162 is "30 seconds," the decision as to which of Super Reach A to C to execute is left to the notification and performance control device 140.

In this determination, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot, the order of selection is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A, and in a game round corresponding to a complete miss, the order of selection is Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In other words, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result, the order of selection is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A, and in a game round corresponding to a miss, the order of selection is Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In other words, the longer the variable display time, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot, and the order of the expected probability is set to be Super Reach A < Super Reach B < Super Reach C.

In addition, for play times that correspond to special misses, the order of likelihood of selection is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A, and in play times that result in the ceiling being reached, the selection rates are equally divided so that Super Reach C = Super Reach B = Super Reach A.

Here, the variable display mode of normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 44(a). When normal reach A and B are selected, first the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row (upper symbol row Z1) is ended (stopped and displayed), and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row (lower symbol row Z3) is ended (stopped and displayed). In this way, when the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13(a)), forming a reach line. Then, when the reach line is formed, the variable display of the middle symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) is performed, resulting in a reach display (reach variable display). After the reach display is reached, the variable display is ended by stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2. When the same symbols as those constituting the reach display stop on the reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has been won, and when other symbols stop on the same reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has not been won. In this way, the final combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed is maintained as is for a predetermined period of time. In other words, the current game round continues until the stopped display period has elapsed, and when the stopped display period has elapsed, it is permitted to move on to the next game round.

In this embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is ensured by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle pattern row Z2 after the reach line is formed, but the method for setting the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in the variable display time by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display begins to when the reach line is formed.

Next, the variable display mode of the super reach A, B, C will be explained based on the variable display mode of the normal reach A, B described above. As shown in FIG. 44 (b) to (c), for the super reach A, B, C, the above-mentioned reach line is formed through the same process as for the normal reach A, B. Then, after the reach line is formed, a predetermined character is displayed as a video in conjunction with the variable display of the middle pattern column Z2, thereby performing a reach performance. Specifically, in the super reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), in the super reach B, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in the super reach C, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

Next, referring to FIG. 46, the flow of the game when a special miss or reaching the ceiling triggers a transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A will be described. FIG. 46 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when a special miss triggers a transition to the fourth normal game state.

At the timing of ta1 during the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the display of the changing patterns in the operation port display section and the display of the changing patterns in the pattern display device 95 are started based on the winning of the operation port. Since this game corresponds to a special miss for this round, the display of the changing patterns is switched to a reach display at the timing of ta2, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display of the changing patterns and patterns started. After that, at the timing of ta3, the pattern combination corresponding to the special miss is displayed as a stopped display (confirmed display) prior to the confirmed display of the patterns in the operation port display section. Immediately after that, at the timing of ta4, the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 goes dark, and at the timing of ta5, the pattern corresponding to the special miss is displayed as a stopped display in the operation port display section, and a message indicating a transition to the high frequency support mode A (for example, the words "Entering the Chance Zone") is displayed on the display screen 95a.

At time ta6, which is the determined display time after time ta5, the support mode switches to high frequency support mode A, and the background of the display screen 95a switches to a background corresponding to high frequency support mode A. In addition, the remaining number of plays until high frequency support mode A will continue is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

As described above, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss is displayed prior to the confirmed display of the symbol on the operation port display section, and the notification time indicating the transition to high frequency support mode A is increased, thereby preventing the notification from being overlooked.

The game flow when the trigger for transition to high frequency support mode A is reaching the ceiling is basically the same as the game flow when the trigger for transition is a special miss. However, unlike the case of a special miss, during the game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A transition triggered by reaching the ceiling, the display of the remaining number of plays on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 is omitted.

(Overview of the Game)
Next, an overview of the game of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 47 and 48. Figure 47 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state, and Figure 48 is a timing chart showing an example of the change in the number of balls held as the game progresses.

As already explained, the first normal game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is the most disadvantageous game state for the player, and in the first normal game state, the aim is to generate a win in the first operating port 91 and transition to another game state such as a special game state. As described above, the game board 80a shown in this embodiment is a so-called left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), and winning in the first operating port 91 can occur regardless of whether the game ball is fired toward the right route or the left route. In addition, a through gate 84 is disposed on each of the right route and the left route, and a part of the game ball fired aiming at the first operating port 91 can win in the through gate 84. However, the opening time of the electric role 93 in the case where a support lottery based on winning in the through gate 84 during the low frequency support mode is extremely short, and winning in the second operating port 92 is practically impossible. In other words, during the first normal game state, the player cannot enjoy the benefits of the electric device 93, and the number of balls in his possession decreases more quickly as the game progresses (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIG. 47, if a 6R special jackpot occurs in the first normal game state, the game transitions through a special game state to a second normal game state that supports high probability mode and high frequency support mode B.

In the second normal game state, the electric device 93 is opened frequently and the opening time is set to a length that allows a winning entry into the second operating port 92. Therefore, in addition to winning entry into the first operating port 91, a winning entry into the second operating port 92 occurs, and a predetermined number of prize balls (four in this embodiment) are awarded to the player based on the winning entry into the second operating port 92. As a result, during the second normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses is mitigated compared to the first normal game state, making it possible to play while suppressing investment (decrease in the number of balls held). In addition, since the second normal game state continues until the next jackpot, the balls held can be greatly increased by continuously transitioning to the special game state. In addition, if a 6R special jackpot occurs in the second normal game state, the game returns to the second normal game state via the special game state. In this way, the number of balls held is greatly increased by looping between the second normal game state and the special game state (see FIG. 48).

If a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the first normal game state or the second normal game state, the game will transition through a special game state to a third normal game state that supports low probability mode and high frequency support mode B.

In the third normal game state, the electric device 93 is opened at a high frequency, and the opening time is set to a length that allows a winning entry into the second operating port 92. Therefore, in addition to winning entries into the first operating port 91, winning entries into the second operating port 92 occur, and a predetermined number of prize balls (four in this embodiment) are awarded to the player based on the winning entry into the second operating port 92. As a result, during the third normal game state, the loss of balls is mitigated as in the second normal game state, making it possible to play while suppressing investment (loss of balls). However, for the high frequency support mode B in the third normal game state, a termination reference number (upper limit: 40 times) is set. If the number of games played during the third normal game state reaches the upper limit, the game will transition to the first normal game state.

Here, there is concern that a long stay in the first normal gaming state will lead to monotony in the game, which will reduce the player's motivation to play. In this regard, in this embodiment, if a special miss occurs during the first normal gaming state, the game will transition to the fourth normal gaming state, which is a low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode A.

The probability of winning during the fourth normal game state is the same as that during the first normal game state, but the electric device 93 opens more frequently, resulting in more frequent winnings at the second operating port 92. As a result, during the fourth normal game state, the loss of balls is mitigated compared to the first normal game state, making it possible to play while minimizing investment (loss of balls) (see FIG. 48). Also, in the fourth normal game state, as in the first normal game state, the variable display time for each game is significantly shortened as the number of reserved balls increases. Therefore, by transitioning to the fourth normal game state, the number of winnings at the second operating port 92 increases, resulting in faster game progress.

If a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the game state transitions to the fourth normal game state without passing through the special game state. This makes it possible to minimize the time required from when a special miss occurs until the player can enjoy the benefits of high-frequency support mode A. Realizing a configuration in this way that allows the player to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode quickly is preferable in terms of suppressing the sluggishness of state transitions and emphasizing the lightness of gameplay. Also, diversifying transition patterns by configuring a transition to the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) via two different routes, one via a special game state and one not via a special game state, is also preferable in terms of diversifying gameplay.

Here, in the first normal game state, the probability of winning a jackpot is low and the base is also low. For this reason, there is a possibility that excessive investment will be required to proceed with the game. This not only causes a negative impression of the gaming machine, but can also cause the soundness of the game to decrease. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, a ceiling (upper limit to the number of times the game can be played) is set in the first normal game state, and when this ceiling is reached, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal game state, the probability of winning a jackpot itself is the same as in the first normal game state, but the electric role 93 is frequently opened, so that the second operating port 92 is frequently entered. This allows the game to proceed while suppressing the loss of balls (see FIG. 48).

The first embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When a lottery based on balls entering the operating ports 91 and 92 results in a big win, the support mode is changed via the special game state, and when a special miss is obtained, the support mode is changed without going through the special game state. With this configuration, the flow of the game when changing the support mode to a higher level can be diversified, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the support mode is switched to a higher level, the frequency with which the electric role 93 is opened differs depending on whether the trigger is a big win result or a special miss result. By providing game assistance by the high-frequency support mode A while ensuring the advantage of support by the high-frequency support mode B, the diversification of the game can be preferably realized. In particular, for the high-frequency support mode B on the unfavorable side, the support mode is quickly switched without going through the special game state. This configuration is preferable for improving the satisfaction of the player.

If a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state without passing through the special game state. At this time, the lottery mode remains the low probability mode, but the support mode is changed from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A. This makes it possible to aim for a big win result while keeping investments down, and a certain kind of player rescue function is exercised. Since this type of rescue function is exercised without passing through the special game state as described above, the time required for the function to be exercised can be made as short as possible, making it less likely that the player will get the impression that the game is being unnecessarily delayed.

As shown in this embodiment, when the low-frequency support mode changes to high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support lottery based on passing through the through gate 84 is changed, and when the low-frequency support mode changes to high-frequency support mode A, the winning probability is not changed and the time required from winning to the electric role 93 opening is shortened. In this way, by using different parameters to differentiate between high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B, the two high-frequency support modes can coexist favorably.

Compared to high frequency support mode A, high frequency support mode B has a higher ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired, i.e., the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the number of game balls fired (hereinafter referred to as the base), making it possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the loss of balls held. In other words, if a jackpot result occurs and the game transitions to high frequency support mode B via a special game state, there is a chance to win a large number of balls. In contrast, in high frequency support mode A, the above base is favored more than in the low frequency support mode, but the degree of favorability is kept lower than in high frequency support mode B, which prevents the rescue function from becoming excessive. With this configuration, the game can be made more interesting by using multiple support modes in combination.

By setting an upper limit (a threshold number of times to end) on the number of times play is performed in high-frequency support mode A, it becomes possible for high-frequency support mode A to return to low-frequency support mode, and it is possible to effectively prevent a decrease in tension in play after switching to high-frequency support mode A.

In the third normal game state to which the game is transferred in the event of a normal big win, the reference number of times for the high-frequency support mode B is 40 times, and in the fourth normal game state to which the game is transferred in the event of a special miss, the reference number of times for the high-frequency support mode A is set to be equal to or less than the reference number of times for the high-frequency support mode B (specifically, 20 times or 40 times). This is advantageous in increasing the frequency of transition to the fourth normal game state and increasing the frequency of transitions between game states. In addition, by making part of the reference number of times for the end set in the fourth normal game state to which the game is transferred in the event of a special miss the same number as the reference number of times for the end of the high-frequency support mode B, it is possible to make it appear as if there are multiple transition routes to one game state (third normal game state, fourth normal game state). This is preferable in terms of realizing diversification of the game while avoiding it becoming a factor that causes confusion for the player.

In addition, a reference number of times to end the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state is set, respectively. By providing transition routes to limited advantageous states with upper limits on the number of times to play, via/not via the special game state, it is possible to contribute to diversifying the game. In this configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by configuring the base in high frequency support mode A so that the difference between the base in high frequency support mode B is smaller than the difference between the base in the low frequency support mode.

According to this embodiment, if a special miss occurs in the first normal game state, or if the number of play times during the first normal game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In this way, by setting the trigger for transition to the fourth normal game state as a judgment result that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state or reaching the ceiling, and by rescuing the player through the fourth normal game state, it is possible to contribute to suppressing excessive investment. In particular, by setting the termination reference number of times set in response to reaching the ceiling as a relatively large number and the termination reference number of times set in response to a special miss result as a relatively small number, it is possible to preferably realize diversification of games and strengthening of the rescue function.

<Modification 1>
The support mode of high frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling may be favored over the support mode of high frequency support mode B triggered by a jackpot so as to be more advantageous to the player, i.e., so as to increase the frequency of winning into the second operating port 92.

<Modification 2>
The base (benefit) of the high-frequency support mode A is set to be closer to the latter of the base (benefit) of the low-frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of the high-frequency support mode B, but this may be changed and set to be closer to the former. Also, the base (benefit) of the high-frequency support mode A may be set to be intermediate between the base (benefit) of the low-frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of the high-frequency support mode B.

<Modification 3>
The variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state may be different from the variable display time set when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state. For example, a difference may be provided so that the variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is longer than the variable display time set when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, or a difference may be provided so that the variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is shorter than the variable display time set when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state.

<Modification 4>
A difference may be provided between the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss and the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. For example, a difference may be provided so that the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss has a higher winning frequency in the second operation port 92 than the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, or a difference may be provided so that the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss has a lower winning frequency in the second operation port 92 than the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 5>
The termination reference number set in the case of a special miss may be greater than the termination reference number set in the case of reaching the ceiling, or the termination reference numbers may be the same.

<Modification 6>
The game count counter may be configured to be reset (cleared to 0) when the high frequency support mode A, which is entered upon reaching the ceiling, ends.

<Modification 7>
It is also possible to configure the continuation counter to be reset (overwritten) when a special miss occurs again during the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss. However, it is assumed that successive special misses will cause the number of times that the high-frequency support mode A can actually continue to be less than the number of times that it could have continued, which will reduce the satisfaction of the player. In consideration of such circumstances, it is preferable to fix the value set in the continuation counter to "40" when a special miss occurs during the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss. Specifically, it is preferable to unify the type of special miss to one, and to set the continuation counter to "40" when the special miss occurs.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the value of the game counter is reset (cleared to 0) in the transition process at the end of the special game state, but as long as the value of the game counter is reset in response to a jackpot result, the specific timing of the reset is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to reset the value of the game counter when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends, or to reset the value of the game counter at the start of the special game state or during a round of play.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, when the value of the game counter reaches the upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A, the value of the continuation counter is overwritten with a value triggered by reaching the ceiling (specifically, "400"). When the ceiling is reached, the fourth normal game state triggered by the ceiling is quickly handed over, that is, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is seamlessly realized without going through other normal game states. In other words, the fourth normal game state related to the ceiling reach is prioritized over the fourth normal game state related to the special miss. In this embodiment, the configuration related to the transition of the game state when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49(a), in the high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, the background color of the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 is blue, and in the high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the background color of the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 is green. In other words, the background color of the display screen 95a can clearly indicate the trigger for transition to the high-frequency support mode A. In the following description, the high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, is appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A1", and the high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2". Incidentally, the support modes of the high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 are the same, and there is no difference between the two in terms of the base (the ratio of the number of paid-out game balls to the number of launched game balls), which is the same as in the first embodiment.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the flow of notification of the start of high-frequency support mode A, with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 49(b) and (c).

In a game round in which a special miss occurs and the game transitions to high frequency support mode A1, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss in that game round is displayed as stopped (confirmed) on the display screen 95a, as shown in FIG. 49(b). Specifically, after a reach display, a combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is displayed as stopped (confirmed) on one of the active lines. Then, in conjunction with the start of the next game round, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to blue, and the remaining number of games in high frequency support mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

In contrast, in a game round that transitions to high frequency support mode A2 upon reaching the ceiling, as shown in FIG. 49(c), a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling in that game round may be displayed as a stopped symbol (determined symbol) on the display screen 95a. Specifically, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol (determined symbol) on one of the pay lines via a reach display. In contrast, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed as a stopped symbol (determined symbol) without a reach display. At this time, the background color of the display screen 95a is also maintained as blue.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 50, we will explain the support mode switching process that constitutes the game play control process executed as part of the normal processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S2001 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not a count limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the determination in step S2002 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S2002 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, an update process of the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is performed. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2004, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the determination in step S2004 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S2004 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2005, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are erased, and the switching process is terminated. By erasing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2001, if a negative judgment is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, it is judged whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or not. If a positive judgment is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the continuation counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2008, it is judged whether the value of the continuation counter is "0". If a positive judgment is made in step S2008, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number limit flag are erased in the above step S2005, and this switching process is terminated. In other words, if the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode is switched to low-frequency support mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009, where it is judged whether the value of the number of plays counter has reached the upper limit (whether the ceiling has been reached). If a negative judgment is made in step S2009, the switching process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2010, where a preparation flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404, and the switching process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2006, if a negative judgment is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is judged whether or not the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If it corresponds to a special miss, a positive judgment is made in step S2011 and the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, a high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. In the following step S2013, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S2014, a setting process for the continuation count counter is executed, and the switching process is terminated.

In the process of setting the continuation counter, if the current game result is special miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that high-frequency support mode A1 will continue until 20 games have been played during that high-frequency support mode A1. On the other hand, if the current game result is special miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that high-frequency support mode A1 will continue until 40 games have been played during that high-frequency support mode A1.

Returning to the explanation of step S2011, if a negative judgment is made in step S2011, i.e., if the game does not correspond to a special miss, the game proceeds to step S2015. In step S2015, a judgment is made as to whether or not the above-mentioned preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a positive judgment is made in step S2015, the preparation flag is erased in step S2016, and the processes of steps S2012 to S2014 are executed. Note that in the setting process of the continuation counter in this step S2014, the continuation counter is set to "400". This means that the high frequency support mode A2 will continue until the number of games played during the high frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

Incidentally, if the special game state is entered while the preparation flag is still stored, the preparation flag will be cleared when the special game state ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S2015, if a negative judgment is made in step S2015, i.e., if the preparation flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2017. In step S2017, it is judged whether the value of the number of plays counter has reached the upper limit (whether the ceiling has been reached). If a negative judgment is made in step S2017, the switching process ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S2017, the processes of steps S2012 to S2014 are executed, and then the switching process ends. Note that in the setting process of the continuation counter in this step S2014, the continuation counter is set to "400". As a result, the high frequency support mode A2 will continue until the number of plays executed during the high frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

According to the above detailed configuration, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 after one game in the first normal game state. In other words, the game will return to the fourth normal game state after one game in the first normal game state. Here, there is a concern that if the one game is prolonged even though the return to the fourth normal game state is confirmed, this may give the player the impression that the transition to an advantageous state is being unnecessarily delayed. In this embodiment, one of the features is that, taking such circumstances into consideration, a device is devised to realize a quick return to the fourth normal game state. The device will be described below with reference to Figures 51 to 54. First, the variable display time setting process (step S714 in Figure 26) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 51 to 52.

(Setting process for variable display time)
In the process of setting the variable display time, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the current game state is either the first normal game state or the fourth normal game state. If a positive determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, where the process for setting the first and fourth normal game states is executed, and then the process for setting the variable display time is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether the current game state is the second normal game state. If a positive determination is made in step S2103, the process for setting the second normal game state is executed in step S2104, and then the process for setting the variable display time is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if the current game state is the third normal game state, the process for setting the third normal game state is executed in step S2105, and then the process for setting the variable display time is terminated. Here, the process for setting the first and fourth normal game states will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

(Setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states)
In the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a jackpot. If the determination in step S2201 is affirmative, the setting process for the jackpot is executed in step S2202, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. In the process of step S2202, the variable display time table for the jackpot (see FIG. 28) stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine the variable display time for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is judged whether or not the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive judgment is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, where the setting process for the special miss is executed, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. In the process of step S2204, the variable display time table for special misses (see FIG. 27) stored in the variable display time table memory area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine the variable display time for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is judged whether or not the current game round is the game round in which the ceiling will be reached. If a positive judgment is made in step S2205, the setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed in step S2206, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2005, if a negative judgment is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is judged whether or not a preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a positive judgment is made in step S2207, a setting process for continuous transition is executed in step S2208, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S2207, a setting process for complete failure is executed in step S2209, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated.

Here, for both step S2206 and step S2208, the variable display time table corresponding to the normal deviation is referenced, but the variable display time table is provided separately depending on whether or not the preparation flag is set. Below, a supplementary explanation of these variable display time tables will be provided with reference to Figures 53 and 54.

If the ceiling is reached in a situation where the preparation flag is not stored during the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, the variable display time "20 to 30 sec" corresponding to the reach display is set as the variable display time of the operation port display section. In other words, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the reach display is followed by a symbol combination indicating the ceiling has been reached (see FIG. 49(c)), which is displayed as a stopped display (confirmed display) on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.

On the other hand, if the ceiling is reached in a situation where the preparation flag is not stored during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A1, the variable display time of the operation port display unit is set to the same variable display time as in the case of a complete miss (see FIG. 27). Then, in this game round, symbols other than the symbol corresponding to reaching the ceiling, more specifically, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss, are displayed in a stopped state. In other words, the symbols displayed in a stopped state do not include the "CHANCE" symbol. This makes it difficult to tell from the symbol combination or the variable display time of the symbols (variable display mode) that the ceiling has been reached during the fourth normal game state.

When the game transitions to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode while the preparation flag is stored, and the game result is neither a big win nor a special miss (normal miss), the variable display time of the operation port display is set to "3 sec". This variable display time is the same as the shortest variable display time that can be set for a game in which the game result is a complete miss in the first normal game state (see FIG. 27). In other words, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state and the preparation flag is stored, the game will return to the fourth normal game state again via the first normal game state after the fourth normal game state ends, but the time spent in this first normal game state is suppressed so as not to be prolonged.

Note that during the fourth normal game state, a game round may be repeated with the preparation flag stored. In such a case, the variable display time set will be the same as the variable display time set in a game round in which the preparation flag is not stored (see Figures 27 and 53).

(Continuous transition flow)
Next, referring to the timing chart of Figure 55, the behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A1 will be described.

At time tb1 after the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, the 299th game round after the end of the special game state has begun. In the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue.

At the next timing tb2, the 300th play after the special play state has ended has started, and at timing tb3, the symbol combination corresponding to the 300th play is displayed as confirmed. Since the fourth normal play state is currently in, the symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss (normal miss) is displayed as stopped (confirmed) rather than the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. In the example shown in FIG. 55, the play that started at timing tb2 has not yet reached the end reference number (upper limit) for the fourth normal play state, so the fourth normal play state continues and the preparation flag is stored.

The game play started at the timing of tb4 does not reach the end reference number (upper limit), so the blue background described above is maintained. However, after the fourth normal game state ends, a message suggesting a return to the fourth normal game state (the word "STANDBY") is displayed at the top of the display screen 95a, and the counter showing the remaining number of times to continue is hidden.

At the timing of tb5, the final game round in which the reference number of times to end the fourth normal game state is reached is started. In the example shown in FIG. 55, the game round corresponds to a complete miss (normal miss), and at the timing of tb6 when the final display of the picture and the design is completed, the fourth normal game state is shifted to the first normal game state, and a new game round is started. Although this game round corresponds to the first normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a remains blue, and the word "STANDBY" displayed at the top of the display screen 95a also remains displayed. At the timing of tb7 when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the display screen 95a is blacked out. Then, at the timing of tb8 when the final display is started, the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling is displayed (reduced display) in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, and the word "Entering the Super Chance Zone" is displayed in the center of the display screen 95a as a message indicating the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by the ceiling being reached.

At the timing tb9 when the fixed display time has elapsed, the game state transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A2. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to green.

According to the second embodiment described above in detail, even if the game proceeds without the transition trigger (jackpot result) to the special game state being established, the game may transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A due to a special miss result or reaching the ceiling. By entering the high frequency support mode A, the frequency of winning into the second operating port 92 increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game. However, when the special miss result and the reaching of the ceiling are used together as the transition trigger to the fourth normal game state as described above, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state and the reaching of the ceiling is invalidated, or the fourth normal game state is forcibly terminated due to the special miss result, it is concerned that some of the benefits that the player would have been able to enjoy will be lost, and the player's satisfaction will be greatly reduced. In this regard, in this embodiment, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by the reaching of the ceiling is delayed until the number of times the game has been played in the fourth normal game state reaches the end reference number. This can eliminate the above concerns and contribute to improving player satisfaction.

As described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state and a transition to the fourth normal game state occurs as a result of reaching the ceiling, the behavior (switching mode) of the electric device 93 is made uniform, thereby preventing the benefit of reaching the ceiling from being inferior to the previous behavior.

When the game has the above-mentioned delay function, it is expected that if the benefit of reaching the ceiling ends immediately after a large delay, this will cause the player to lose motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by making the termination reference number for the special miss result < the second termination reference number for reaching the ceiling, it is possible to suppress excessive delays and prevent the benefit after reaching the ceiling from being perceived as stale.

If the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the fourth normal game state is transitioned to the first normal game state and then returned to the fourth normal game state, which adds an accent to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In a configuration in which the game returns to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state, the following inconveniences may occur due to variations in the operation period of the game-run operation executed during the first normal game state. That is, if the operation period is relatively short, the time to notify the player of the transition to the fourth normal game state may be insufficient, and if the operation period is relatively long, the player may easily get the impression that the transition to the fourth normal game state is being unduly delayed. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, for game runs during the first normal game state in which the transition to the fourth normal game state is delayed, a predetermined operation period is set regardless of the number of reserved balls, and the operation period is made constant, thereby eliminating the above concerns.

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs while a transition to the fourth normal game state is pending due to reaching the ceiling, the transition to the fourth normal game state due to reaching the ceiling is invalidated. This type of configuration is preferable in terms of preventing excessive rescue functions for players.

When the upper limit number of times (ceiling reached) is reached during the first gaming state, a special effect (stop display of a combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is executed in that gaming round, and a prompt notification is given that the game will transition to the fourth normal gaming state. In contrast, when the upper limit number of times (ceiling reached) is reached during the fourth normal gaming state, the special effect (stop display of a combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is avoided in that gaming round. In this way, by deliberately not executing a special effect when the transition to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by a special miss result before the end of the fourth normal gaming state.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the game state transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state. In other words, the fourth normal game state is continuous with one game round corresponding to the first normal game state in between. This is not limited to this, and may be modified as follows. That is, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the game state may transition immediately to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 after the end of the fourth normal game state without passing through the first normal game state. In other words, the fourth normal game state may be configured to continue without interruption. Even in this case, the high frequency support mode A1 triggered by a special miss is not forcibly terminated midway (the high frequency support mode A1 can be completed), so the satisfaction level of the player does not decrease.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the background color of the display screen 95a is different between the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 and the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the background color the same in both fourth normal gaming states.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the display of a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal game state in the next game round is started, but instead of this, it is also possible to configure the display of the message to start in the game round in which the ceiling is reached. Also, instead of or in addition to the configuration of displaying a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal game state from the game round in which the ceiling is reached or the next game round, it is also possible to configure the display of the message not to suggest the continuation of the fourth normal game state. In other words, it is also possible to not indicate whether or not the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by the ceiling is triggered until the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss is ended.

<Modification 4>
When the state transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state while the electric device 93 is in the open state, the electric device 93 may be configured to be switched to the closed state after the initially set opening time of the electric device 93 has elapsed, or the electric device 93 may be configured to be quickly switched to the closed state to immediately stop the opening.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment, when the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 is shifted to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state, the time for displaying the pattern of the operation port display unit and the pattern of the pattern display device 95 in the first normal game state is set to a time shorter than the time for displaying the pattern of the through gate display unit DS set during the low frequency support mode (10 to 20 sec), but this is not limited to this. When the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 is shifted to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state, the time for displaying the pattern of the operation port display unit and the pattern of the pattern display device 95 in the first normal game state can be set to a time longer than the time for displaying the pattern of the through gate display unit DS set during the low frequency support mode (10 to 20 sec).

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment, when the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 is shifted to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state, the variable display time of the picture of the operation port display unit and the pattern of the pattern display device 95 in the first normal game state is set to "3 sec", which is the variable display time corresponding to a complete miss, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 is shifted to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state, the variable display time of the picture of the operation port display unit and the pattern of the pattern display device 95 in the first normal game state can be set to "30 to 40 sec", which is the variable display time corresponding to a reach display.

<Modification 7>
In the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, when the number of times the game is executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the end reference number, the game is temporarily shifted to the first normal game state, and then returned to the fourth normal game state. In this case, the number of times the game is executed during the first normal game state is set to one, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the number of times the game is executed during the first game state is set to be at least equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of reserved times that can be stored (preferably the upper limit of the number of reserved times related to the second actuation port 92).

As shown in this modified example, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the fourth normal game state is switched to the first normal game state and then the fourth normal game state is returned to, thereby adding an accent to the rhythm of the game and contributing to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, in a configuration in which the first normal game state is interposed, the repetition of game rounds in the first normal game state is likely to give the player the impression that the enjoyment of benefits is being unduly delayed. In particular, it is assumed that such an impression will be strengthened by the fact that the number of special information stored becomes 0 due to the intervention of the first normal game state, and the continuous progress of game rounds is interrupted. In this regard, by limiting the number of games executed in the intervening first normal game state to be less than the upper limit of the storage of special information, the interruption of the continuous game rounds when returning to the fourth normal game state can be avoided, and the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably eliminated.

<Modification 8>
A special effect execution means may be provided which is capable of executing a special effect indicating a transition to a fourth normal game state when the number of game turns executed after the special game state has ended reaches an upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 turns) without resulting in a jackpot result, and if the upper limit is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of game turns executed during the fourth normal game state is more than a predetermined number, a special effect is executed in the game turn in which the upper limit is reached, whereas if the upper limit is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of game turns executed during the fourth normal game state is less than the predetermined number, the special effect is executed in a game turn executed after the game turn in which the upper limit is reached.

If the upper limit of number of times (reaching the ceiling) is reached during the fourth normal game state to which a transition is made due to a special miss result, the player's impression may differ depending on the timing. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, the player may be left with the impression that the special miss result was a waste of time. Therefore, as shown in this modified example, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the above concerns can be alleviated by varying the timing of the occurrence of the special effect, i.e., the timing of the notification that the ceiling has been reached, depending on the number of times play has been performed during the fourth normal game state (the number of times play has been performed up to that point).

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the gameplay using the special miss mentioned above is different from the first and second embodiments. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the differences in the basic configuration of the game board unit will be described with reference to Figure 56. Figure 56 is a front view of the game board unit.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge. The game board 80aA will be described in detail below.

The game board 80aA has a number of openings, large and small, that run through it in the thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, etc. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83A, they are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and based on the detection result, a bonus such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is awarded to the player. In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 86.

The game board 80aA is also provided with numerous game nails 87 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. The game nails 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 and the like will win with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A, and in particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric device 93A as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

A center frame 96A is provided on the game board 80aA so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the left side, which is similar to the first embodiment.

However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, the second actuation port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed so that a game ball launched to the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable winning device 83A or the through gate 84A, and a game ball launched to the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the game ball launched to the left route so that it cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route depending on the game status, it is possible to advance the game in an advantageous manner. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony of the game is prevented.

(Reserved ball storage area)
In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information based on winning in the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that in the first embodiment. Below, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of Figure 57.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserved area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserved area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the second actuation port 92A.

The reserve area Ra for the first actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area. The reserve area Rb for the second actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (reserved information) is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area.

In this embodiment, when reserved information is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When reserved information is not stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port and reserved information is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the configuration was such that a special loss could occur in either the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, but in this embodiment, the configuration is such that a special loss could occur only in one of the lotteries based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, which is different from the first embodiment. Below, the win/loss table for the actuation port in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 58 and 59.

(Actual/invalid table for operating port)
As shown in Figure 58, the hit/miss table for the first operating port is set up as a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for low probability) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for high probability).

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 58(a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", a total of six. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 58(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597", a total of 30. In other words, out of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to a jackpot result. And all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a losing result (normal losing result). In other words, in a lottery based on winning the first operating port 91A, it is configured so that it does not result in a "special losing" as shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59, the hit/miss table for the second operating port is set to a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for low probability) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for high probability).

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 59(a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", a total of six. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 59(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597", a total of 30. In other words, out of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the jackpot result.

In addition, in a situation where the win/lose table for the low probability mode and the win/lose table for the high probability mode are referenced when drawing a lottery based on a winning entry into the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a special miss (i.e., special miss information) are all "2", "4", "6", "12", "14", ... "596", a total of 150. In other words, of the values of the win random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14", ... "596" correspond to special miss results. And all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special miss correspond to miss results (normal miss results).

(Game Flow)
Here, the game flow will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state.

The first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, is composed of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is the stage in which the player stays when a game round based on a winning entry into the first actuation port 91A is executed, and the special stage is the stage in which the player stays when a game round based on a winning entry into the second actuation port 92A is executed.

The special stage is a stage in which the player temporarily stays when transitioning from another normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, specifically the third normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, or the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A, to the first normal game state, and the upper limit number of times the game can be played matches the upper limit number of reserved information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second operating port. In other words, immediately after transitioning from the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the player will transition to the special stage on the condition that reserved information related to the second operating port 92A is stored. If there is no jackpot or special miss in this special stage, the player will transition from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a game ball is shot to the right route and a support win occurs, it is substantially prevented from winning the second actuation port 92A. Since a game ball shot to the right route cannot win the first actuation port 91A, it is difficult to participate in a lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, a game ball shot to the left route is prevented from winning the second actuation port 92A, but may win the first actuation port 91A. For the above reasons, in the first normal game state, it is possible to progress in the game so that it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the left route than the right route. If a game ball is shot to the right route during the first game state, a warning is issued to encourage the player to return the shot destination to the left route.

If a 6R jackpot is obtained in a lottery during the first normal game state, the game state transitions to the second normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B, via the special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can play the game while suppressing investment (loss of balls) by shooting the game ball to the right route. During the second normal game state, the game ball shot to the right route enters the second actuation port 92A, and the game progresses mainly around the game round related to the second actuation port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the entry into the second actuation port 92A, there is about a 1/4 probability of a special miss, but the special miss during the second normal game state is invalid and treated as a normal miss. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the second normal game state, the special miss does not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

If a 6R normal jackpot is obtained in a lottery during the first normal game state or the second normal game state, the game transitions through a special game state to a third normal game state that corresponds to a low probability mode and high frequency support mode B. The third normal game state corresponds to high frequency support mode B, and the player can play the game while minimizing investment (loss of balls) by firing the game ball to the right route.

During the third normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route enters the second actuation port 92A, and the game progresses mainly with the game round related to the second actuation port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the entry into the second actuation port 92A, there is approximately a 1/4 probability of a special miss, but a special miss during the third normal game state is invalid and treated as a normal miss. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the third normal game state, the special miss will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which is a low probability mode and corresponds to the high frequency support mode A.

If the game progresses without hitting a jackpot during the third normal game state, and the number of times the game has been played (specifically, the number of times the game has been played related to the second actuation port 92A) reaches the reference number of times to end the game (20 times), the game will transition to the first normal game state. More specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is "0", the game will transition to the main stage, and if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is other than "0", the game will transition to the special stage.

In the special stage, a lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A is executed for the reserved number of balls. If the lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A results in a special miss, the game moves to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. During the fourth normal game state, the player can play the game while suppressing investment (loss of balls) by shooting the game ball to the right route. During the fourth normal game state, the game ball shot to the right route wins the second actuation port 92A, and the game progresses mainly with the game round related to the second actuation port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A, there is about a 1/4 probability of a special miss, but the special miss during the fourth normal game state is invalid and treated as a normal miss.

If the game progresses without hitting a jackpot during the fourth normal game state, and the number of times the game has been played (specifically, the number of times the game has been played related to the second actuation port 92A) reaches the reference number of times to end the game (20 times), the game will transition to the first normal game state. More specifically, if the number of reserved times related to the second actuation port 92A is "0", the game will transition to the main stage, and if the number of reserved times related to the second actuation port 92A is other than "0", the game will transition to the special stage. In this way, if the fourth normal game state and the special stage can be looped, the player can play advantageously.

When transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the degree of advantage will change significantly depending on the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A. In this embodiment, the time period for which the image changes in the second actuation port display section D2 is displayed during the final play round in the third or fourth normal game state is longer than during other play rounds in the third or fourth normal game state, thereby realizing a configuration that makes it easier to accumulate reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A up to the upper limit during the final play round.

(Fluctuation display time table for operating ports)
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the variable display time table for the second operating port referred to in the 20th game in the third normal game state is configured to set the variable display time to "40 sec" regardless of the number of reserved balls.
The variable display time table for the second operating port referred to in each of the 1st to 19th play times in the third normal play state is configured so that the variable display time set is shorter than that in the 20th play time in any case. For example, as shown in FIG. 61(b), in the case of a reach display non-compatible miss (special miss or normal miss), "12 to 14 sec" or "1 to 2 sec" is set according to the number of reserved balls, and in the case of a reach display compatible miss (special miss or normal miss), "20 to 30 sec" is set. On the other hand, in the case of a big win, as shown in FIG. 61(c), "20 to 30 sec" is set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

In this way, by configuring the variable display time to be extended in the 20th and final game round compared to the 1st to 19th game rounds, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for transition (demotion) from the third normal game state to the first normal game state without the reserved number related to the second operating port 92A reaching the memory upper limit.

The variable display time table for the second operating port referenced during the first normal game state is broadly divided into a variable display time table referenced in the case of a special miss or normal miss, and a variable display time table referenced in the case of a jackpot. In the variable display time table for special misses and normal misses referenced during the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "10 sec" when the reserved number is "0", and is set to "0.5 sec" when the reserved number is "1" to "4". In the variable display time table for jackpots referenced during the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "20 to 30 sec" for any game play, regardless of the reserved number and game result.

Next, referring to FIG. 62, the flow of effects when transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 62 illustrates an example in which the end reference number of times is reached without a jackpot during the third normal gaming state, and the remaining reserve related to the second actuation port 92A includes a special miss.

In the third normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 turns blue, and the number of remaining games for which the high frequency support mode will continue is displayed in the upper corner of the display screen 95a. At the time tc1 when the 19th game round related to the second operating port 92A starts, the number of reserved balls decreases from "4" to "3", and at the time tc2 when the 20th game round (final game round) starts, the number of reserved balls decreases from "3" to "2".

When the final play begins, a video of a loop branching effect is displayed on the display screen 95a. At the beginning of this video, "Mission: Catch a Fairy" is displayed, and then a fairy character and a girl character are displayed on the display screen. As described above, the variable display time for the final play is longer than the variable display times for the first through 19th play. This makes it easier for a winning entry into the second actuation port 92A to occur during the final play. In the example of FIG. 62, winning entries into the second actuation port 92A occur consecutively at timings tc3 and tc4, and the number of reserved entries related to the second actuation port 92A reaches the upper limit of memory before the end of the final play.

The loop branching effect in this embodiment is a series of effects that are executed across the final play in the third normal play state and the play in the special stage of the first normal play state, and if the final play corresponds to a jackpot, and if the play in the special stage corresponds to a special miss or a jackpot, an effect is executed in which the fairy is successfully captured, and if the final play corresponds to a special miss or a normal miss and all play in the special stage correspond to normal misses, an effect is executed in which the fairy is unsuccessfully captured.

In the example shown in FIG. 62, in the final play in the third normal game state, at timing tc5 when the image on the second operating port display section D2 is confirmed, an effect is executed in which the fairy is successfully captured, and thereafter, the word "STANDBY" is displayed on the display screen 95a as a message indicating a transition to a normal game state (fourth normal game state) compatible with the high frequency support mode until the special stage is completed. During this time, the game state transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state.

If the electric device 93A is in the open state when the game changes from the third normal game state to the first normal game state, the electric device 93A is forcibly switched to the closed state, and a winning entry into the second operating port 92A is prevented from occurring after the game changes to the first normal game state.

At the timing of tc7, the game round corresponding to the special miss starts, and at the timing of tc8, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss is displayed as confirmed. Then, at the timing of tc9, the game transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a turns blue, and the number of loops in the high frequency support mode and the number of remaining game rounds are displayed at the top of the display screen 95a.

After that, if the final play in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A is reached without a jackpot, the game will transition to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. More specifically, the game will transition to the special stage on the condition that a hold related to the second operating port 92A is stored. Even when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the above-mentioned loop branching effect (more specifically, the video in which part of the chase between the fairy and the girl is omitted) will be executed across the final play in the fourth normal game state and each play executed in the special stage of the first normal game state.

According to the third embodiment described above, if a normal jackpot result is obtained in the first normal game state, the game state transitions through the special game state to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. In the third normal game state, the electric device 93A frequently switches to the open state, and the number of opportunities for winning in the second operating port 92A increases, thereby suppressing the loss of balls. A limit is set for the number of times in the third normal game state, and when the number of times the game is performed in the third normal game state reaches the first end reference number (20 times), the game state transitions to the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. This makes it difficult to win in the second operating port 92A.

Here, the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second actuation port 92A is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second actuation port, and after the transition from the third normal game state to the first normal game state, the game round is executed based on the reserved information stored therein. The remaining game rounds related to the second actuation port 92A may result in a special miss. If the remaining game rounds result in a special miss, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A without passing through the special game state, and the high frequency switching mode is looped. This loop makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing the loss of balls. By realizing diversification of the game in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

As described above, when the third or fourth normal game state is transitioned to the first normal game state, a game round related to the second actuation port 92A is executed with the number of reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb as the upper limit. In the lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A, the probability of a special miss result (1/4) is higher than the probability of a jackpot result (1/100), making it possible to aim for a jackpot by looping the high frequency support mode. This configuration contributes to increasing the interest of the game without unnecessarily increasing the probability of a jackpot result.

If a special miss occurs during the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the result is invalidated, whereas if a special miss occurs in the remaining play times related to the second actuation port 92A when the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state transition to the first normal game state, the special miss results in a transition to the fourth normal game state or a loop of the fourth normal game state. With this configuration, the presence or absence of the loop depends on the upper limit of the number of reserved information stored related to the second actuation port 92A. Therefore, when adjusting the degree of advantage by increasing or decreasing the reference number of times to end the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the effect on the loop probability can be avoided, and the degree of freedom in setting the reference number of times to end can be suitably improved.

The opening and closing manner of the electric role 93A in high frequency support mode A is closer to the opening and closing manner of the electric role 93A in high frequency support mode B than to the opening and closing manner of the electric role 93A in low frequency support mode. This configuration is preferable in encouraging the player to recognize that the game states before and after the first normal game state are the same when the third normal game state is changed to the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In particular, the reference number of times for ending the fourth normal game state (20 times) is the same as the reference number of times for ending the third normal game state (20 times). This configuration can favorably encourage the above recognition.

Immediately after transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the remaining reserved game rounds related to the second operating port 92A are executed. If a special miss occurs in these game rounds, transition will occur from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. As shown in this embodiment, in the third and fourth normal game states, it is possible to increase attention to whether or not the above-mentioned remaining reserved game rounds will result in a special miss, and a continuation presentation is performed based on the result.

The above-mentioned advance determination (pre-determination) is executed in the final game round in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state when transitioning from the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. In this way, if the above-mentioned determination is performed in the final game round in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the continuation effect will be executed when the number of reserved information stored in the second operating port reserved area Rb has reached the storage upper limit, and the function of suggesting the continuation of the above-mentioned loop can be optimally exerted by the continuation effect.

In addition, by configuring the continuation performance to start before the above-mentioned advance specification in the final play round in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the constraints on the execution period of the continuation performance can be relaxed, and the continuation performance can be effectively prevented from becoming stale.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, when a special miss occurs in some game states (for example, the second normal game state, etc.), the special miss is invalidated and treated as a normal miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the game so that the lottery for the special miss is not performed by referring to a winning/losing table that does not include special misses in the game results.

<Modification 2>
In the above third embodiment, the reference number of times for ending the third game state (20 times) is the same as the reference number of times for ending the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (20 times), but this is not limited to this, and the reference number of times for ending the third game state and the reference number of times for ending the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss may be configured to be different.

For example, a difference may be set so that the standard number of times to end the third game state (40 times) is greater than the standard number of times to end the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (20 times), or a difference may be set so that the standard number of times to end the third game state (20 times) is less than the standard number of times to end the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (40 times).

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, the variable display time of the game number related to the second actuation port 92A in the first normal game state is set to "0.5 sec" regardless of the reserved number and the game result, but this is not limited to this. The variable display time of the game number related to the second actuation port 92A in the first normal game state may also be set according to the reserved number and the game result, similar to the variable display time of the game number related to the first actuation port 91A.

<Modification 4>
In the above third embodiment, the time for displaying the variation of the final game in the third normal game state is extended to prevent the reserved number related to the second actuation port 92A from falling below the upper limit when transitioning to the first normal game state, but instead of or in addition to this, the following configuration is also possible. That is, when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the time for displaying the variation of the final game in the fourth normal game state is extended to prevent the reserved number related to the second actuation port 92A from falling below the upper limit when transitioning to the first normal game state.

<Modification 5>
In the third embodiment, the loop branching effect is configured to be executed across the third normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode B and the first normal game state, but it is also possible to configure the loop branching effect to be executed across the third normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode B, the first normal game state, and the third normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A. By gaining the effect execution time in this way, it is possible to enhance the loop branching effect while quickly transitioning to the third normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the number of games played at the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the ceiling is pseudo-variable. The following describes the pseudo-variable function of the present embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the allocation table for special misses in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

(Special miss sorting table)
In the distribution table for special losses in this embodiment, the distribution destinations of game results are set to special loss result A, special loss result B, and special loss result C. Specifically, of the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 23" correspond to the special loss result A, "24 to 28" correspond to the special loss result B, and "29" corresponds to the special loss result C.

None of the special miss results A through C trigger a change to the lottery mode, but rather function as a change to the support mode.

Specifically, the special failure result A is a trigger for switching the support mode to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game in which the special failure result A occurred, i.e., a trigger for transitioning to the fourth normal game state. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of games played during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the termination reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition is made to the special game state), and the mode switches to the low-frequency support mode (transitions to the first normal game state). In this embodiment, the termination reference number is set to "20 times."

The special failure result B also triggers the support mode to switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the play that resulted in the special failure result B, i.e., the transition to the fourth normal play state. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of plays executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the end reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition is made to the special play state), and the mode switches to the low-frequency support mode (transition to the first normal play state). In this embodiment, the end reference number is set to "40 times."

The special failure result C also triggers the support mode to switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the play that resulted in the special failure result C, i.e., the transition to the fourth normal play state. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of plays executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the end reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition is made to the special play state), and switches to the low-frequency support mode (transition to the first normal play state). In this embodiment, the end reference number is set to "260 times."

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the ceiling is 300 times, and the upper limit of the number of times of play in the third normal game state is 40 times. In other words, the end reference number set when special failure result A occurs and the end reference number set when special failure result B occurs are both less than the maximum number of times of play that can be performed in the first normal game state until the ceiling is reached, whereas the end reference number set when special failure result C occurs is the same as the maximum number of times of play that can be performed in the first normal game state until the ceiling is reached.

The reference number of times to end the special miss result C can be set to be greater than the maximum number of times that can be played in the first normal game state before the ceiling is reached.

In other words, in this embodiment, if special failure result C occurs during the first normal game state, support is confirmed in high frequency support mode A until the ceiling is reached, and if special failure result A or special failure result B occurs and the number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached is less than the termination reference number of times for special failure results A and B, support is confirmed in high frequency support mode A until the ceiling is reached.

In this embodiment, when a special failure occurs, the behavior of the symbol display device 95 and the like is different depending on whether or not the end reference number of times exceeds the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached. Specifically, as in the first embodiment, when a special failure occurs, the player is notified (indicated) by the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure being stopped and displayed, but when the end reference number of times exceeds the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, no notification is made. Below, the specific configuration for achieving such behavior, that is, the first fluctuation start processing executed as part of the periodic processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, is described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 64.

(First fluctuation start processing)
In the first fluctuation start process, first, in step S2301, the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, a type command is also transmitted together. In step S2301, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and various information related to the game result such as information on the result of a guaranteed jackpot, information on the result of a normal jackpot, information on a special miss, information on a normal miss, and information on the ceiling reach are identified from the identified information in step S2301. Then, in step S2301, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won, information on the type of special miss if a special miss, information on the type of special miss if a special miss, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won and is not a special miss, information on whether or not a reach has occurred, information on the ceiling reach, information on the fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped from the above-identified information, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 442.

In the next step S2302, various counters for determining the number of plays are updated. Specifically, the remaining number counter for determining the number of plays remaining until the ceiling is reached, which is provided in the various counter area 465 of the RAM 444, is updated (subtracted by "1"). This remaining number counter is configured to be set to "300" when the special play state ends.

In the next step S2303, it is determined whether the result of the current game is a jackpot result based on the information obtained in step S2301. If the result of the current game is a jackpot result (a 6R special jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result), the next step S2304 executes a jackpot presentation setting process. The jackpot presentation setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the jackpot symbol combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the symbol combination is stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result in which the same symbol combination is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following symbol combinations are defined as symbol combinations that correspond to a jackpot: "1", "1", "1" symbol combination, "2", "2", "2" symbol combination, "3", "3", "3" symbol combination, "4", "4", "4" symbol combination, "5", "5", "5" symbol combination, "6", "6", "6", "6" symbol combination, "7", "7", "7", "8", "8", "8", "8" symbol combination, "9", "9", "9" symbol combination, and "9" symbol combination.

As already explained, in the event of a jackpot result, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for a jackpot, the variable display pattern tables for reach display stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 are obtained, and the presentation pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S2303 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, it is determined whether or not the result of the game that is about to start this time is a special miss result, based on the information obtained in step S2301. If the result of the current game is a special miss result, a positive determination is made in step S2305, and the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, a number of times comparison process is executed.

In the number comparison process, the remaining number counter described above is referenced to determine whether the end reference number set for the current special miss is less than the remaining number of plays until the ceiling is reached. If the end reference number set for the current special miss is less than the remaining number of plays until the ceiling is reached, a positive determination is made in step S2307 and the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, the first special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special misses, is executed.

The first special effect setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the special miss symbol combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the special miss symbol.

In the stop result determination process constituting the first special effect setting process, a stop result in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss.

In the variable display mode determination process constituting the first special effect setting process, the variable display mode is determined so that the player is notified of the special miss via a reach display. Specifically, the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 are obtained, and the normal reach display or super reach display display pattern corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the first special effect set by the first special effect setting process, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 65 (a).

In a game round corresponding to the first special effect, the display screen 95a switches to a reach display when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of all the symbol rows that are frozen on the display screen 95a. At a predetermined time after the switch to the reach display, the display screen 95a displays a frozen symbol combination (a combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols) that corresponds to a special miss. After that, the display screen 95a displays a message indicating a switch to high frequency support mode A (for example, "Chance time has started"), and the background color of the display screen 95a changes to blue.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, if a negative judgment is made in step S2307, i.e., if the termination reference number set for this special miss matches the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached or is greater than the remaining number, the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, a second special effect setting process, which is an effect setting process for special misses, is executed.

The second special effect setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the special miss symbol combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the special miss symbol.

In the stop result determination process constituting the second special effect setting process, a stop result in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss is established on one of the active lines L1-L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM443 store each of the active lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area. The symbol combination determined in this stop result determination process includes the "CHANCE" symbol. In other words, in the second special effect, the "CHANCE" symbol will be stopped and displayed on one of the active lines.

In the variable display mode determination process constituting the second special effect setting process, the variable display mode is determined so that the player is notified of the special miss via a reach display. Specifically, a variable display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is obtained, and a normal reach display or super reach display effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the second special effect set by the second special effect setting process, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 65 (b).

In a game corresponding to the second special effect, the display screen 95a switches to a reach display when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of all the symbol rows that are frozen on the display screen 95a. At a predetermined time after the switch to the reach display, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is frozen on the display screen 95a. After that, a message indicating a switch to high frequency support mode A (for example, "Rescue activated") is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed to green.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, if a negative judgment is made in step S2305, i.e., if the current game round does not correspond to a special miss result, the process proceeds to step S2310. In step S2310, it is determined whether the ceiling will be reached in the current game round. If the ceiling will be reached, a positive judgment is made in step S2310 and the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. Details of this effect setting process for reaching the ceiling will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2310, then in step S2312, a presentation setting process for a complete miss is executed. In the presentation setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, then a presentation setting process for a reach occurrence is executed, and if a reach will not occur, then a presentation setting process for a reach not occurring is executed.

The effect setting process for a reach occurrence is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed when the reach is completely missed and the effective line on which the symbol combination is to be displayed, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol when the reach is completely missed.

In the stop result determination process for reach-compatible complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they are not any of the symbol combinations that correspond to a big win result, the symbol combinations that correspond to a special miss result, or the symbol combinations that correspond to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The process of determining the variable display mode for reach-compatible complete misses acquires the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The effect setting process for when a reach does not occur is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed as a reach-not-corresponding complete miss and the effective line on which the symbol combination will be displayed as a reach-not-corresponding complete miss, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol for the reach-not-corresponding complete miss.

In the stop result determination process for reach-free complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they are not any of the symbol combinations that correspond to a jackpot result, the symbol combinations that correspond to a special miss result, or the symbol combinations that correspond to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process of determining the variable display mode for a complete miss that does not correspond to a reach, the variable display pattern table for a miss that does not correspond to a reach stored in various table areas of the ROM 443 is obtained, and a presentation pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

After executing any one of steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312, the process proceeds to step S2313. In step S2313, a process is executed to output commands including information on the stop result and presentation pattern determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands, respectively. Based on the received stop result commands and pattern commands, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round.

After executing the process of step S1909, in the following step S1910, a process to start the presentation for the game round is executed, and then this process for starting the fluctuation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the presentation pattern determined in the above steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312, and the presentation for the game round is started.

Here, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling in step S2311 will be described. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is composed of a normal setting process that is executed when the current gaming state is the first normal gaming state, and a special setting process that is executed when the current gaming state is a normal gaming state other than the first normal gaming state (e.g., the fourth normal gaming state).

The normal setting process constituting step S2311 is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the symbol combination is stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol to be stopped and displayed.

In the stop result determination process in the normal setting process, a stop result in which a combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area. In this embodiment, a symbol combination including a "CHANCE" symbol is specified as a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling.

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process, the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 are obtained, and the presentation pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the effects that are executed in a game in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 65 (b).

In a game in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a transition to reach display occurs a predetermined time after the display of all the symbol rows that are statically displayed on the display screen 95a has started. At a predetermined time after the transition to reach display, a symbol combination that includes the "CHANCE" symbol is statically displayed on the display screen 95a. After that, a message indicating a switch to high frequency support mode A (for example, "Rescue activated") is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed to green.

In other words, the presentation when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is the same as the second special presentation set in step S2309 above, and is configured so that the presentation mode and the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed are the same as when the end reference number of times set in response to a special miss matches or exceeds the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling. In other words, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the second special presentation is executed in both cases when the end reference number of times set in response to a special miss matches or exceeds the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling, and the player is configured to be unable to distinguish whether the presentation (presentation mode and symbol combination that is stopped and displayed) was triggered by a special miss or by reaching the ceiling.

The special setting process constituting step S2311 is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the symbol combination is stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbols.

In this stop result determination process, a stop result that results in a combination of symbols that normally corresponds to a miss is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process, a variable display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is obtained, and a non-reach compatible presentation pattern is determined that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In other words, if the ceiling is reached during a normal game state other than the first normal game state (specifically, the fourth normal game state), the same presentation as in the case of a non-reach compatible complete miss is executed. This makes it difficult to identify that the ceiling has been reached from the presentation content, etc. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, or if there is a complete miss (not corresponding to a jackpot, special miss, or reaching the ceiling), a presentation corresponding to a complete miss is executed in either case, and it is configured so that the player cannot identify from the presentation (presentation mode or the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed) whether the trigger was a ceiling being reached or a complete miss.

Next, the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached after the end of the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, and FIG. 66(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss.

In the example shown in FIG. 66(a), a special miss occurs at timing td1 during the first normal gaming state. This special miss is special miss result A, and the termination reference number is set to "20". The remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is greater than the currently set termination reference number. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 66(a), the ceiling will not be reached during the fourth normal gaming state to which the transition is made as a result of the special miss.

When a special miss occurs in a game, the first special effect (see FIG. 65(a)) is executed, and it is clearly indicated that the special miss will trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A. Then, with the transition to the fourth normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 is changed from white to blue. Also, a countdown display of the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state begins in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, and the remaining number of games is clearly indicated.

At the timing td2 when the number of times played during this fourth normal game state reaches the end reference number, the fourth normal game state transitions to the first normal game state. In conjunction with this, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to white.

After that, the game continues without a jackpot, and at td3, the number of plays played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), triggering a transition from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In the final play where the ceiling is reached, the second special effect described above (see FIG. 65(b)) is executed, and the player is notified that the ceiling has been reached. The background color of the display screen 95a changes to green in conjunction with the transition to the fourth normal game state at td3.

In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 66(b), a special miss occurs at timing te1 during the first normal game state. This special miss is special miss result B, and the termination reference number is set to "40". The remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is greater than the currently set termination reference number. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 66(b), the ceiling can be reached during the fourth normal game state to which the transition is made upon the special miss. At timing te1, the second special effect is executed, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from white to green. However, the remaining number of games is not counted down on this display screen 95a, and the remaining number of games is not displayed.

At the timing of te2 during the fourth normal game state, the number of times the game has been played after the special game state has ended has reached the upper limit (ceiling). In this game, a normal miss (complete miss) effect that does not correspond to a reach is executed, and a symbol combination that corresponds to a normal miss (complete miss) is displayed frozen.

At the timing te3 thereafter, the number of times that have been played during this fourth normal game state has reached the end reference number, and the game state has transitioned from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. In the first game round after transition to the first normal game state, a normal miss (complete miss) effect that does not correspond to a reach is executed, and a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is stopped and displayed, and at the timing te4 when that game round ends, the game state has quickly returned to the fourth normal game state. In this way, the background color on the display screen 95a remains green during the successive transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state.

According to the fourth embodiment described above in detail, when the number of times the game is executed (the number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game state transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In the high frequency support mode A, the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed by the frequent winning of the second operating port 92. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, even if a special miss occurs, the game state may transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In this case, a special performance is executed. If a special miss occurs and the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state to which the game state transitions due to the special miss result is triggered, the same performance as the special performance executed when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the ceiling is variable. And, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the performance for reaching the ceiling is not executed and the reaching of the ceiling is not indicated, so that the above-mentioned mimetic effect can be more suitably exerted. In addition, when a special miss occurs and the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, if the set end reference number of times is less than the number of times the game is played until the ceiling is reached, a different effect from the above will be executed. This is preferable in terms of achieving the mimicry effect described above.

When the mode changes from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, the above-mentioned mimicry effect can be more effectively achieved by continuing to display a series of modes suggesting the mode at least from the previous high-frequency support mode A to the low-frequency support mode.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, when the termination reference number set in the case of a special miss matches the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached or is greater than the remaining number of times, the same effect (second special effect) as that in the case of the ceiling being reached during the first normal game state is executed, but this is not limited to this. Only when the termination reference number set in the case of a special miss is greater than the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached, the same effect (second special effect) as that in the case of the ceiling being reached during the first normal game state may be executed.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, when the end reference number set in the case of a special miss matches the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached or is greater than the remaining number of times, the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is executed, but it is not necessary to completely commonize both effects. When the end reference number set in the case of a special miss matches the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached or is greater than the remaining number of times, it is sufficient to execute an effect that is recognized by the player as being the same as the effect executed in the case of a special miss during the first normal game state and the effect executed in the case of the ceiling being reached during the first normal game state.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the fact is not indicated, but it is also possible to indicate that the ceiling has been reached. For example, the fact that the ceiling has been reached may be indicated by displaying a message on the display screen 95a or by changing the background music output from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, the game returns to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state, but it is also possible to set the variable display time of the image on the operation port display unit in this first normal game state to a variable display time corresponding to a reach display. In this way, securing the variable display time of a game round in the first normal game state is preferable for executing the continuation presentation (promotion presentation) of the fourth normal game state in that game round.

<Modification 5>
In the fourth embodiment, the game counter is reset (cleared to 0) when the special game state ends, but this is not limited to this. For example, the game counter may be reset when the game state is changed to the special game state, or the game counter may be reset during the special game state. Also, the game counter may be reset when the high frequency support mode ends.

<Modification 6>
The termination reference number of times (20 times) set in the case of the special failure result A is set to be less than the number of games executed from the end of the high-frequency support mode B until the ceiling is reached, and the termination reference number of times (260 times) set in the case of the special failure result C is set to be more than the number of games executed from the end of the high-frequency support mode B until the ceiling is reached. In other words, when the special failure result A occurs, whether or not the high-frequency support mode A can be continued until the ceiling is reached depends on the timing, while when the special failure result C occurs, the high-frequency support mode A can be continued until the ceiling is reached. This may be changed so that the termination reference number of times (20 times) set in the case of the special failure result A is less than the number of games (300 times) at which the ceiling is reached, and the termination reference number of times (for example, 310 times) set in the case of the special failure result C is set to be more than the number of games (300 times) at which the ceiling is reached.

Fifth embodiment
In the first embodiment, when the number of times of play performed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state is shifted to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, so that excessive investment by the player is suppressed. In such a configuration, even if the player is rescued by the transition to the fourth normal game state, the impression that the game is prolonged may be strong because it takes time before the player can enjoy the benefit of the rescue (such as balls coming out from a jackpot). In the fourth normal game state, the number of balls that are held increases due to the frequent winning of the second actuation port 92, but the variable display time is easily shortened because the fourth normal game state corresponds to the low probability mode, and the probability of winning a jackpot based on the winning of the actuation ports 91 and 92 is not changed, so it is assumed that it will be difficult to completely eliminate the above-mentioned concerns.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the number of times of play executed after the end of a special game state (in this embodiment, a jackpot game state or a V jackpot game state described later) reaches an upper limit (ceiling), the game is transitioned to a limited number of chance zones (a special game state described later) in which the probability of hitting a jackpot is substantially increased, and this is one of the features that resolves the above-mentioned concerns. Below, the specific configuration for achieving this function will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) is an asymmetrical gauge, and the arrangement of the various game parts provided in the play area PE is changed. Below, the game board unit 80B in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB has a plurality of openings of various sizes that penetrate in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 80aB. A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83B, a through gate 84A, etc. are arranged in each opening. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83B, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player based on the detection result.

In addition, numerous game nails 87 are planted on the game board 80aB to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are arranged. The flow path of the game balls is differentiated by these game nails 87 and various components such as windmills, and is adjusted so that winning in the general winning hole 81 mentioned above occurs with a moderate probability. In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aB, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry parts are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 86.

The operating port unit 82A has a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. The latter of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric device 93A as an opening and closing type ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an opening and closing member (opening and closing means). When the support mode of the electric device 93A is the low frequency support mode, it is practically impossible to win at the second operating port 92A, and by switching to the high frequency support mode, winning at the second operating port 92A is permitted.

A center frame 96A is provided on the game board 80aB so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aB, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the left side, which is similar to the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, the second actuation port 92A, the variable winning device 83B, and the through gate 84A is changed so that a game ball launched to the left route can win a prize in the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A, but cannot win a prize in the variable winning device 83B or the through gate 84A, and a game ball launched to the right route can win a prize in the second actuation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83B, but cannot win a prize in the first actuation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the game ball launched to the left route so that it cannot win a prize in the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route depending on the game status, it is possible to advance the game in an advantageous manner. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony of the game is prevented.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B differs from that of the variable prize-winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. Below, a supplementary explanation of the specific configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B will be provided with reference to Figure 68. Figure 68 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable prize-winning device 83B.

(Variable winning device 83B)
Inside the variable winning device 83B, a ball passage 332B is formed through which the game balls that flow into the entrance (large winning port 331B) of the variable winning device 83B pass. The ball passage 332B branches into a first branch passage 334B and a second branch passage 335B at an intermediate position, and a flow path switching member 336B that can switch the flow destination of the game ball to the first branch passage 334B side or the second branch passage 335B side is arranged at this branching portion. The drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 336B is configured to wait at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 332B when a drive signal is not input from the main control device 162 (de-energized state), and to wait at a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided when a drive signal is input (energized state).

When the flow path switching member 336B is in the protruding position, the inlet of the first branch passage 334B is blocked by the flow path switching member 336B. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 334B, and instead flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 336B and the drive unit is energized, the flow path switching member 336B moves to a retracted position that avoids protruding into the ball passage 332B, and the entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 335B, and these game balls flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the results of a lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A.

An upstream detection sensor 391d is provided in the ball passage 332B upstream of the branching portion, and downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are provided in the downstream of the branching portion, specifically the first branch passage 334B and the second branch passage 335B. The upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to the main control device 162, which determines whether or not a win has been made in the variable winning device 83B based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 391d, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls if a win has occurred. In addition, the remaining game balls are monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, when it is determined that a ball has entered the first branch passage 334B based on detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B, the support mode after the end of the special game state (more specifically, the V jackpot game state described below) is switched to the high frequency support mode (more specifically, high frequency support mode B). In this embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "favorable ball entry section" or "V", and entry into the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as a "V entry".

(Reserved ball storage area)
Next, in this embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information based on winning into the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of Figure 69.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserved area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserved area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the second actuation port 92A.

The reserve area Ra for the first actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area. The reserve area Rb for the second actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (reserved information) is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area.

In this embodiment, when reserved information is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When reserved information is not stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port and reserved information is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment, a low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high are provided as lottery modes for performing a lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92. In other words, the hit/miss table for the actuation port to be referenced is switched depending on the lottery mode. In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the hit/miss lottery for the actuation port is performed by referring to the same hit/miss table in any game state. The present embodiment also differs from the first embodiment in that a different hit/miss table is referenced depending on the winning destination of the game ball. Below, the hit/miss table for the actuation port in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

(Actual/invalid table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 70(a), in the win/lose table that is referenced in the lottery based on winning the first operating port 91A, the random number values that result in a jackpot win (i.e., winning information) are "7", "307", and "507", a total of three. In other words, of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to a jackpot. And, all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a miss (normal miss). This makes the probability of a jackpot 1/200.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), in the winning/losing table that is referenced in the lottery based on the winning of the second actuation port 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot win (i.e., winning information) are "7", "307", and "507", a total of three. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to a jackpot. In addition, in this winning/losing table, a total of 60 values correspond to special wins: "5", "15", "25", "35", "45", ... "575", "585", and "595". And all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special win correspond to a miss (normal miss). As a result, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200 and the probability of a special win is 1/10.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning at the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A do not include the special loss shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a special loss can occur in a lottery based on winning at the first actuation port 91A, or it may be configured so that a special loss can occur in a lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A, or it may be configured so that a special loss can occur in both a lottery based on winning at the first actuation port 91A and a lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A.

Next, referring to Figure 71, we will explain the allocation table for each operating port 91A, 92A.

(Distribution table for operating ports)
In the distribution table for the first operating port 91A, of the values of the type counter C2 from "0" to "29", a total of 27 from "0" to "26" correspond to a 6R jackpot, and a total of three from "27" to "29" correspond to a 10R jackpot. In other words, when a jackpot is won, about 90% of the time it will be a 6R jackpot, and the remaining 10% will be a 10R jackpot.

In contrast, in the distribution table for the second operating port 92A, out of the values of the type counter C2 from "0" to "29", a total of 15 values from "0" to "14" correspond to a 6R jackpot, and a total of 15 values from "15" to "29" correspond to a 10R jackpot. In other words, when a jackpot is won, the probability of a 6R jackpot and a 10R jackpot are both 50%.

There is a difference in the number of rounds during the open/close execution mode between the 6R jackpot and the 10R jackpot. The number of rounds for the former is "6", while the number of rounds for the latter is "10". In other words, if you win the 10R jackpot, it's a chance to increase your balls all at once.

In addition, in the case of a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, the game state transitions to a game state (first special game state or second special game state) in which the support mode by the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B. This game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B continues until the number of games executed after the jackpot game state ends, more specifically the number of games related to the second operating port 92A, reaches the termination reference number, and when the termination reference number is reached, support by high-frequency support mode B ends. In the case of a 6R jackpot, the termination reference number is set to "6 times," and in the case of a 10R jackpot, the termination reference number is set to "100 times."

If the special win is determined by the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the game state transitions to the special win game state, the variable winning device 83B is opened for a predetermined time, and the flow path switching member 336B of the variable winning device 83B moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. This allows winning into the favorable winning section 334B (V winning). When this winning into the favorable winning section 334B (V winning) occurs, a 5RV jackpot is generated, and the game state transitions to the V jackpot game state after the special win game state ends (see Figure 72 (a)).

After the V jackpot game state ends, the game state will transition to a game state corresponding to high frequency support mode B. This game state corresponding to high frequency support mode B will continue until the number of games played after the V jackpot game state ends, more specifically the number of games played related to second operating port 92A, reaches the termination reference number, and support by high frequency support mode B will end when the termination reference number is reached. In the case of a 5RV jackpot, the termination reference number is set to "6 times."

In this embodiment, during a game state corresponding to high frequency support mode B (first special game state or second special game state), the game progresses with the main game rounds being based on winning the second actuation port 92A, and even after the end reference number of times is reached and the game state transitions to a game state corresponding to low frequency support mode, the game rounds related to the second actuation port 92A will be executed for the remaining reserved number of times related to the second actuation port 92A.

In this embodiment, among the game states in which a game round is executed based on winning at the operating port, the game states corresponding to the low frequency support mode and excluding the special game states described below are referred to as "normal game states." In addition, the special win game state, V jackpot game state, and jackpot game state are referred to as "special game states."

In other words, if a 5RV or 6R jackpot occurs, the probability of winning will be raised to a high probability state for a total of 10 times, which is the standard number of times to end (6 times) plus the upper limit of the reserved number stored in memory for the second operating port 92A (4 times). The probability of winning a jackpot or special win during this time is approximately 65%. Also, if a 10R jackpot occurs, the probability of winning will be raised to a high probability state for a total of 10 times, which is the standard number of times to end (100 times) plus the upper limit of the reserved number stored in memory for the second operating port 92A (4 times). The probability of winning a jackpot or special win during this time is almost 100% (see Figure 72 (b)).

In this embodiment, when the number of games executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state transitions to a game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A (third special game state), which is similar to the first embodiment. This game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A continues until the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, more specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A, reaches the termination reference number (time-saving number: 1 in this embodiment), and when the termination reference number is reached, the game state transitions to a game state corresponding to low frequency support mode (normal game state).

In the normal game state that corresponds to high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the state will be in a high probability state (chance zone) with an increased probability of winning for a total of five times, which is the end reference number of times (1 time) plus the upper limit of the reserved number stored in the memory for the second operating port 92A (4 times). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or special prize is approximately 40%, and the probability of winning is temporarily increased by reaching the ceiling.

In this embodiment, the number of plays required to reach the ceiling is set to "200 plays." If the game state transitions to a high frequency support mode A-compatible game state due to reaching the ceiling, the ceiling is reset when the game state ends (the game count counter is cleared to 0). In other words, the game is configured to transition to the chance zone at a cycle of 200 plays.

The high-frequency support mode in this embodiment is also broadly divided into high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, and high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot or V win, and a difference is provided so that high-frequency support mode B provides more support from the electric device 93A than high-frequency support mode A. However, for high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the standard number of times to end is one, and when the number of reserved balls related to the second operating port 92A reaches the upper limit, it becomes unnecessary to launch any more game balls. This prevents investment from becoming too large in a situation where the rescue function due to reaching the ceiling is being exercised.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 73 and 74, we will explain the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing, normal processing) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Timer interrupt processing)
As shown in Fig. 73, the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment is the timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 20) shown in the first embodiment with the addition of a V winning processing in step S2406. The details will be described later, but this V winning processing monitors the presence or absence of a winning (V winning) in the advantageous winning portion 334B of the variable winning device 83B.

(Normal processing)
As shown in Fig. 74, in normal processing, first, an external signal output process is executed in step S2501. In the following step S2502, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated, and in step S2503, a game number control process is executed. A part of the game number control process in step S2503 (support mode switching process) has been changed from the first embodiment. The details of the support mode switching process in this embodiment will be described later.

After that, in step S2504, a transition process to the special win game state is executed, in step S2505, a V allocation setting process is executed, and in step S2506, a transition process to the big win game state is executed. Details of each process of steps S2504 to S2506 will be described later.

Then, in step S2507, a through gate control process is executed, and in step S2508, an electric support process is executed. Then, in step S2509, a game ball launch control process is executed. Each process of steps S2507 to S2509 is the same as in the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In step S2510, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, i.e., whether one period (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, during the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S2511 to S2512).

Now, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 75, we will explain the support mode switching process that is executed as part of the game play control process in step S2503.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or B. If a positive determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round related to the second operating port 92A. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the support mode switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2604, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the determination in step S2604 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S2604 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2605, where the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag or high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 is erased, and the switching process ends. By erasing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode of the electric role object 93A is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2601, if a negative judgment is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, it is judged whether or not the value of the number of plays counter stored in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 has reached the upper limit (corresponding to 200 plays). If a negative judgment is made in step S2606, the switching process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2606, the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, the continuation counter is set to "1". Then, in the following step S2608, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and this switching process is terminated. In other words, when the ceiling is reached, the support mode is quickly switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A without going through the special game state.

Next, the process of transitioning to the special winning game state in step S2504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 76 and 77.

(Transition process to special winning game state)
76, in the process of transitioning to the special win game state, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and is stored when the jackpot game starts and is erased when the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that a jackpot game is not being played (the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2702, where it is determined whether or not a special jackpot game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. The special jackpot game flag is a flag that indicates that a special jackpot game is being played.

If it is determined that a special win game is not being played (the special win game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2703, where it is determined whether or not a special win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. In other words, it is determined whether or not a special win has been won. The special win flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage area 435 when a special win is determined in the win/lose lottery in the game number control process described above.

If it is determined that the special win flag is stored, in step S2704, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the game round. If it is not time to end the game round, the process of transitioning to the special win game state is terminated. In addition, if a positive judgment is made in the above step S2701 (determining that a jackpot game is being played) or a negative judgment is made in step S2703 (determining that the special win flag is not stored), the process of transitioning to the special win game state is also terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game has ended, the special winning game start process is executed in step S2705. In this start process, a special winning game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435, and it is checked whether the variable winning device 83B is closed before the special winning game starts. In this start process, an opening period setting process is executed to wait without starting to open the variable winning device 83B when the special winning game starts. In the opening period setting process, a value corresponding to the opening period is set in the opening timer counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404. This set value (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at 2 msec intervals.

In the next step S2706, a process is executed to set the round counter RC1 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 to "1" to set the number of rounds to be played in the special winning game.

In the next step S2707, an opening command is set. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output process in the normal processing (Figure 74). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

In the following step S2708, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the process of transitioning to the special win game state is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special win signal provided on the external output terminal board 213 is set to the special win signal output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the special win signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a special win signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device can determine that a special win has occurred on the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S2702 (it is judged that the special winning game is being played), the process proceeds to step S2709, where it is judged whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the special winning game state is terminated.

If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2710, and the special winning opening/closing process is executed to open and close the large winning opening 331B of the variable winning device 83B. The special winning opening/closing process will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 77.

(Special opening and closing process)
In the special winning opening/closing process, first in step S2801, it is determined whether the large winning opening 331B of the variable winning device 83B is open or not. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving state of the drive unit (variable winning drive unit) for the shutter 333B of the variable winning device 83B. If the large winning opening 331B is not open, in step S2802 it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S2803 it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter TC1 of the RAM 404 is "0".

If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" or the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", the opening/closing process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S2804, where the drive unit for the shutter 333B is driven to open the variable winning device 83B.

In the next step S2805, the first timer counter TC1 is set to "5000" (corresponding to 10 seconds) as the opening time of the variable winning device 83B. Then, in step S2806, the upper limit number of winnings for the variable winning device 83B in the special winning game is set. Specifically, the first winning counter PC1 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "10".

Then, in step S2807, an opening command is set and the special opening/closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output process in the normal process (Figure 74).

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if it is determined in step S2801 that the large winning port 331B is open, the process proceeds to step S2808, where it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S2809 whether a winning has occurred in the variable winning device 83B. If a winning has not occurred, the special winning opening and closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a win has occurred, a win command is set in step S2810. This win command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 74). In the following step S2811, the value of the first win counter PC1 is decremented by "1". Then, in step S2812, it is determined whether the value of the first win counter PC1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the special win opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2812 or in step S2808 above, this means that the conditions for closing the special prize opening 331B are met. In this case, in step S2813, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is put into a non-driven state to close the special prize opening 331B.

In the following step S2814, the value of the round counter RC1 is decremented by "1", and in step S2815, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending wait time is set for the ending of the special winning game, during which the game waits without starting the next round of play. Specifically, the ending wait time stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the ending timer counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404. The value of the ending timer counter is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Then, in step S2816, the ending command is set and the opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output process in the normal process (Figure 74).

Returning to the explanation of the transition process to the special win game state in FIG. 76, after executing the special win opening/closing process in step S2710, in step S2711, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". In addition, in step S2712, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the transition process to the special win game state is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the special win game end process is executed in step S2713, and then the transition process to the special win game state is terminated. Here, the special win game end process in step S2713 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 78.

(Ending process of special winning game)
In the process of ending the special winning game, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This V winning flag is stored in the V winning process in step S2406 in the timer interrupt process of FIG.

Here, we will explain the V winning process in step S2406 and the V allocation setting process in step S2505 in normal processing as a process related to V winning. First, we will explain the V allocation setting process in step S307 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 79.

(V allocation setting process)
In the V allocation setting process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a special winning game. If it is the start timing, in step S3002, "500" (corresponding to 1 sec) is set to the second timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404. The value (counter value) set in the second timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

In the next step S3003, the distribution number counter HC provided in the various counter area 434 is set to "1". The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution number counter HC is used by the MPU 402 to identify the number of operations of the flow path switching member 336B.

If the result of step S3001 is negative, or after step S3003 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member is grasped to determine whether or not the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position, which is the distribution side (V winning side) to the favorable ball entry section 334B. If the flow path switching member 336B is not in the retracted position, that is, if it is in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S3005 to determine whether or not the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the distribution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", the process proceeds to step S3006 to determine whether or not the value of the distribution number counter HC is "0".

If the result of step S3006 is negative, i.e., if the value of the distribution count counter HC is "1", then in step S3007, the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the retracted position (V winning side). In the following step S3008, the third timer counter TC3 is set to "4000" (equivalent to 8 seconds). After step S3008 is executed or if the result of step S3006 is positive, this distribution setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S3004, if a positive judgment is made in step S3004, i.e., if the flow path switching member 336B is located in the retracted position (V winning side), then in step S3009, it is judged whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". In other words, it is judged whether the period during which the flow path switching member 336B is kept waiting in the retracted position (V winning side) has elapsed. If a positive judgment is made in step S3009, then in step S3010, the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the protruding position, and then in step S3011, a process is executed to subtract "1" from the value of the distribution number counter HC. After execution of step S3011 or if a negative judgment is made in step S3009, this distribution setting process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the V winning process with reference to the flowchart in Figure 80.

(V prize processing)
In the V winning process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, and it is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 338B) based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 338B provided in the variable winning device 83B.

If it is determined that a V win has occurred, in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the V win is in its valid period. The valid period is a predetermined period, and for example, the period during which a special winning game is being played or the V side allocation period of the flow path switching member 336B is set as the valid period. If it is determined that the valid period is not in effect, the process proceeds to step S3104, an error command is set as the target for transmission to the notification/performance control device 140, and then the V win processing is terminated. The set error command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output processing of the normal processing (Figure 74), and the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29 so that a specified error notification is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the valid period is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3105, where a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S3106, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification/performance control device 140 that a V winning has occurred, and the set V winning command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output processing of the normal processing (Figure 74). When the notification/performance control device 140 receives a V winning command, it controls the display control device 410, etc., so that the pattern display device 95, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 notify the occurrence of a V winning, or a performance such as celebrating the V winning is executed.

After executing step S3106, if a positive judgment is made in step S3101 or a negative judgment is made in step S3102, the V winning process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special winning game termination process in FIG. 78, if it is determined in step S2901 that a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2902, where a V winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. The V winning flag is a flag that allows the MPU 402 to know that a V big winning game should be started.

In the next step S2903, a process is executed to erase the V winning flag, the special winning flag, and the special winning game flag stored in the various flag storage area 435. In the next step S2904, a V winning command is set, and then the process of ending this special winning game is terminated. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification/presentation control device 140 that a V jackpot game is about to start and the type of V jackpot game, and the set V winning command is transmitted to the notification/presentation control device 140 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 74). When the notification/presentation control device 140 receives a V winning command, it controls the display control device 410, etc., so that a presentation announcing that a V jackpot game is about to start is executed on the pattern display device 95, etc.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2901 (it is judged that the V winning flag is not stored), in step S2905, the special win flag and the special win game flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and then the end process of this special win game is terminated.

Next, the transition process to the big win game state in step S2506 in the normal process (FIG. 74) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 81. Note that among the various processes included in this transition process, the explanation of those similar to the processes included in the transition process to the special win game state described above will be appropriately simplified.

(Transition process to big win game state)
In the process of transitioning to the big win game state, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not a special win game is being played. If it is determined that a special win game is being played, the process of transitioning to the big win game state is terminated, whereas if it is determined that a special win game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S3202, where it is determined whether or not a big win game is being played.

If it is determined that a jackpot game is not being played, in step S3203, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In other words, it is determined whether or not a V jackpot game should be started. If it is determined that a V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3204, where it is determined whether or not various jackpot flags are stored in the various flag storage area 435. In other words, it is determined whether or not a normal jackpot game other than a V jackpot game should be started.

If it is determined that no jackpot flags are stored, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that any jackpot flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S3205, where it is determined whether or not it is time to end the game round. If it is determined that it is not time to end the game round, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3205 that the game has ended, or if it is determined in step S3203 that the V hit flag has been stored, the process proceeds to step S3206, where the start process for the big win game is executed. In this start process, the big win game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and the opening period setting process is executed.

In the next step S3207, a round setting process is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether a 6R jackpot flag, a 10R jackpot flag, or a 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. If it is determined that one of these flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S3208, where the round counter RC1 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set. Specifically, if a 6R jackpot flag is stored, the round counter RC1 is set to "6", if a 10R jackpot flag is stored, the round counter RC1 is set to "10", and if a 5RV jackpot flag is stored, the round counter RC1 is set to "5".

After execution of step S3207, an opening command is set in step S3208, and then an external signal setting process is executed in step S3209, after which the process of transitioning to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3202 that a jackpot game is being played, the process proceeds to step S3210, where it is determined whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3211, where a jackpot opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize winning device 83B. In the jackpot opening/closing process, if the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize winning device 83B is closed, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is driven to open the large prize opening 331B, provided that the round counter RC1 is "1" or greater. Also, if the large prize opening 331B is open, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is stopped and the large prize opening 331B is closed, provided that a predetermined time (30 sec) has elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening 331B or a predetermined number (10) of game balls have won.

After executing the jackpot opening/closing process in step S3211, in step S3212, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". In addition, in step S3213, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S3214, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game is executed, and then the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated. Here, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game in step S3214 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 82.

(Transition process at the end of a big win game)
In the transition process at the end of the big win game, first, in step S3301, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric role device 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode B.

In the next step S3302, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a 6R jackpot or a 5RV jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether a 6R jackpot flag or a 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303, where the continuation counter in the various counter area 434 is set to "6." This causes high frequency support mode B to continue until the number of games played after the end of the jackpot game (more specifically, the number of games played related to the second operating port 92A) reaches six.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S3302, i.e., if the current jackpot game was triggered by a 10R jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3304, where the continuation counter is set to "100." This causes high frequency support mode B to continue until the number of games played after the jackpot game (more specifically, the number of games played related to the second operating port 92A) reaches 100.

After executing the processes of steps S3303 and S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, the game play counter in the various counter area 434 is reset (cleared to 0). After that, the process proceeds to step S3306, where the various flags for the jackpot game state stored in the various flag storage area 435 are erased, and the transition process at the end of the jackpot is completed.

(Basic game flow)
Next, the basic game flow of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state.

As already explained, in the normal game state where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect a winning entry into the second actuation port 92A. For this reason, the player will shoot the game ball down the left route (so-called left hit) and play with the aim of winning the first actuation port 91A.

When a win occurs in the first operating port 91A, a lottery is held to determine whether the ball will win or lose based on the win. If the lottery results in a 6R or 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the variable winning device 83B opens and closes over multiple rounds. Since only game balls that flow down the right route can win in the variable winning device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41 to shoot the game ball down the right route (so-called right hit). After the jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to the chance zone (hereinafter referred to as the special game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The special game states include a first special game state in which the support mode of the electric role device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the reference number of game times for the second operating port 92A to end is "6", and a second special game state in which the support mode of the electric role device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the reference number of game times for the second operating port 92A to end is "100". After the jackpot game state triggered by a 6R jackpot ends, the game state transitions to the first special game state, and after the jackpot game state triggered by a 10R jackpot ends, the game state transitions to the second special game state.

In the first special game state, the support mode becomes high frequency support mode B, which makes it easier for a winning ball to occur in the second operating port 92A. Only game balls that flow down the right route can win in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, when transitioning to the first special game state, a notification is issued to encourage the player to continue hitting to the right even after the big win game has ended.

The first special game state and the second special game state will continue until the number of play times related to the second actuation port 92A reaches the above-mentioned termination reference number (6 times or 100 times). However, as already explained, the lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A is favored to have a higher probability of a special win than the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A, and the actual probability of winning, including the special win, will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

The special game state also includes a fourth special game state in which the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode while a game round related to the second actuation port 92A is executed by a hold related to the second actuation port 92A acquired during the first special game state or the second special game state. If none of the play rounds during the first special game state or the second special game state result in a jackpot or special win (if all of the play rounds result in a miss), the game state transitions to the fourth special game state.

In this embodiment, the second operating port 92A has a reservation function that stores an upper limit of four reserved numbers. Therefore, if four reserved information related to the second operating port 92A is stored at the end of the high-frequency support mode B, it is possible to receive a winning/losing lottery based on winning the second operating port 92A four times even after the end of the high-frequency support mode B. In other words, even if the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode and the normal game state is played internally, the special game state is extended (continued) by the number of reserved numbers related to the second operating port 92A at the end of the high-frequency support mode B. Incidentally, the probability (continuation rate) of a special win or a big win during four winning/losing lotteries related to the second operating port 92A is about 35%. The total continuation rate including the number of games played during the first special game state is about 65%, and the total continuation rate including the number of games played during the second special game state is almost 100%.

If all four play times during the fourth special game state are normal misses and all reserved balls related to the second operating port 92A are consumed, the game state will return to the normal game state. In other words, if the reserved balls related to the second operating port 92A are used up without a special win or big win occurring, the game state will be demoted from the special game state to the normal game state. In other words, the actual probability of winning will drop from 1/10 to 1/200. In this case, the player will return the game ball launch mode to left-handed shots and play again, aiming for a big win based on the ball landing in the first operating port 91A.

In contrast, if a special win occurs in any of the first, second, or fourth special game states, the game state transitions to a special win game state. In the special win game state, a special win game is played in which the variable winning device 83B is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning manner described above. Since only game balls that flow down the right route can win in the variable winning device 83B, when a special win occurs, the player plays by hitting to the right. Then, if a V win occurs in the special win game, after the special win game ends, the game state transitions to a V big win game state in which the variable winning device 83B is opened and closed for multiple rounds (5 rounds).

Incidentally, when a special win game is played in a high-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the variable winning device 83B and the period during which a V win is permitted are longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 sec), and as long as the game ball continues to be launched toward the right route, a V win can easily occur.

After the V jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to the first special game state. Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs in either the first, second or fourth special game state, the game transitions to the jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, if the jackpot game state is triggered by a 6R jackpot, the game transitions to the first special game state, and if the jackpot game state is triggered by a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to the second special game state. In this way, by repeatedly hitting jackpots and special wins during the special game state, the player has a chance to significantly increase the number of balls he or she has.

The special game states shown in this embodiment include a third special game state in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A and the reference number of game rounds for the second operating port 92A to end becomes "1". In the third special game state, the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode A, making it easier to win at the second operating port 92A. Only game balls that flow down the right route can win at the second operating port 92A. Therefore, when transitioning to the third special game state, a notification is issued encouraging a right shot.

When the V-jackpot game state or the jackpot game state ends, the game counter is reset, and the ceiling is set again. In the first normal game state, if the number of games played reaches the ceiling, the game transitions to the third special game state.

The third special game state will continue until the number of game plays related to the second actuation port 92A reaches the above-mentioned termination reference number (1 play). As already explained, the lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A is favored to have a higher probability of a special win than the lottery based on winning at the first actuation port 91A, and the actual probability of winning, including the special win, will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

If a special win occurs during the third special game state, the game state transitions to the special win game state, and if a V win occurs during this special win game state, the game state transitions to a V jackpot game state. After the V jackpot game state ends, the game state transitions to the first special game state. Also, if a jackpot occurs during the third special game state, the game state transitions to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, the game state transitions to the first special game state or the second special game state.

On the other hand, if none of the play times in the third special game state wins either the jackpot or the special win (all of the play times end in a miss), the game state transitions to the fourth special game state. As already explained, in this embodiment, the second operating port 92A has a reserve function that stores an upper limit of four reserved numbers. Therefore, if four reserved information related to the second operating port 92A is stored at the end of the high-frequency support mode A, it becomes possible to receive a winning/losing lottery based on winning the second operating port 92A four times even after the end of the high-frequency support mode A. In other words, even if the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode and the game is in a normal game state internally, the special game state is extended (continued) by the number of reserved numbers related to the second operating port 92A at the end of the high-frequency support mode A. Incidentally, the probability (continuation rate) of a special win or jackpot during four winning/losing lotteries related to the second operating port 92A is about 35%. The total continuation rate, including the number of plays performed during the third special game state, is approximately 40%.

If all four play times during the fourth special game state end in a miss and all reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A are consumed, the game will return to the normal game state. In other words, if the reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A are used up without a special win or big win occurring, the game will be demoted from the special game state to the normal game state. In this case, the player will return the game ball launch mode to left-handed shots and play again, aiming for a big win based on the ball landing in the first actuation port 91A.

In addition, when the game ball is launched to the right route, the first actuation port 91A is prevented from winning. However, immediately after the transition to the special game state, the reserved information related to the first actuation port 91A acquired during the normal game state may remain, and the reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A may not have been acquired. Although the reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A is consumed preferentially over the reserved information related to the first actuation port 91A, if the reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A has not been acquired, the game round related to the first actuation port 91A may be executed in the special game state. Although the degree of advantage is set for the lottery related to the second actuation port 92A so that it is more advantageous to the player than the lottery related to the first actuation port 91A, it is feared that the high frequency support mode will end without the game round related to the second actuation port 92A being executed or with the number of times it is executed being insufficient, which will be a great disadvantage to the player. In this regard, in this embodiment, as already explained, the reference number of times for terminating the high-frequency support mode is set for each actuation port, and even if a play round related to the first actuation port 91A is executed during the special game state, this prevents the high-frequency support mode from terminating before a play round related to the second actuation port 92A is executed.

In this embodiment, the chance zone (special game state) is configured to execute a special effect for the chance zone that is executed over multiple game rounds. Here, the configuration that is the premise for the special effect for the chance zone, specifically, the advance confirmation process executed as part of the winning process for the operation port (see step S2403 in FIG. 73) in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 84.

(Advance confirmation process)
In the advance confirmation process, first, in step S3401, the win/loss confirmation process is performed by referring to the win/loss determination table for the operation port and the value of the win random number counter C1 acquired in the above step S2403. Specifically, it is determined whether the reserved information acquired this time corresponds to a big win or a special win.

If it corresponds to a jackpot, a positive judgment is made in step S3402 and the process proceeds to step S3403, where information indicating a jackpot is stored in RAM 404 and the information indicating a jackpot is stored in a pending command to be sent to the notification/performance control device 140.

If it corresponds to a special win, a negative judgment is made in step S3402 and a positive judgment is made in step S3404, and the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, information indicating a special win is stored in RAM 404, and the information indicating a special win is stored in a pending command to be sent to the notification/performance control device 140.

If the result corresponds to a miss, a negative judgment is made in steps S3402 and S3404, and the pre-check process is terminated.

The MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 is able to know in advance whether a jackpot or special win will occur from the information contained in the hold command received from the main control device 162.

As already explained, in this embodiment, if the number of plays executed after the special game state (more specifically, the jackpot game state or the V jackpot game state) ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game will transition to the third special game state. This third special game state corresponds to high frequency support mode A, and by acquiring pending information related to the second operating port 92A during the third special game state, the special effects for the chance zone can be executed across the third special game state to the fourth special game state.

The special effects for the chance zone are composed of three parts: an opening part that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the second operating port 92A; a main part in which the effects are decided based on the results of all the game times executed in the third special game state and the fourth special game state to which it transitions immediately afterwards; and an ending part that functions as a transition to the special game state after the winning or losing result is revealed. The opening part starts when the game time in which the ceiling is reached ends, the main part starts when the first game time in the third special game state begins, and the ending part starts when that game time ends. The ending part then ends when the fourth special game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state.

In this embodiment, a method is devised to avoid the ending part becoming excessively long while ensuring sufficient execution time for the main part of the special effect for the chance zone. Specifically, for the game involving the second operating port 92A that is executed after the number of game plays executed after the special game state ends has reached the ceiling, the special variable display time table is referenced as a table for determining the variable display time. In more detail, the variable display time table for determining the variable display time for the game involving the second operating port 92A that is executed immediately after the ceiling is reached is provided separately from the variable display time table that is referenced when determining the variable display time in other cases.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 85, the variable display time is set to "60 sec" in the game involving the second actuation port 92A that is executed immediately after the ceiling is reached (e.g., the 201st game). The variable display time is set to "0.5 sec" in the four game times (same number as the reserved upper limit for the second actuation port 92A) that are executed thereafter (e.g., the 202nd to 205th game). In other words, the variable display time in the game involving the second actuation port 92A that is executed immediately after the ceiling is reached is longer than the sum of the variable display times in the four game times that are executed thereafter. This is a device to ensure the playback time of the video, reduce the amount of data for the special effects for the chance zone, and avoid a lack of reserved balls for the second actuation port 92A, while suppressing the dragging of the ending part.

Next, referring to Figure 86, we will provide additional information about the flow of play when entering the chance zone. Figure 86 is a timing chart showing the flow of play when entering the chance zone, and illustrates an example of a special win in the chance zone.

(Flow of play when entering the Chance Zone)
At the timing of tf1 during the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the 199th game round is started after the special game state ends, and at the timing of tf2, the 200th game round is started after the special game state ends, i.e., the ceiling is reached. Both of these game rounds correspond to miss results. In the game round where the ceiling is reached, the symbol combination ("1", "3", "4") corresponding to the ceiling is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a (on the pay line) of the symbol display device 95, and the player is informed that the ceiling will be reached and the chance zone will be entered.

At the timing of tf3 when the game rounds that reach the ceiling are over, the support mode switches to the high frequency support mode A, and the opening part of the special effect for the chance zone corresponding to the chance zone (third special game state) starts on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Specifically, at the timing of tf3, the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is "0", and the game in the chance zone is in a waiting state until a winning ball is entered into the second actuation port 92A. In the opening part, the display screen 95a displays "If you can catch the fairy, you will get a BONUS" as a message indicating the start of the chance zone, and the background music switches to that corresponding to the chance zone. Then, at the timing of tf3, a message (right hit notification) that encourages the player to launch the game ball toward the right route starts.

After that, at the timing tf4 when winning occurs in the second operating port 92A, the special effect for the chance zone shifts from the opening part to the main part. As a result, a fairy character and a girl character chasing the fairy character are displayed on the display screen 95a. In this embodiment, after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed since the shift to the main part, the final display (result display) in the main part is decided. In other words, it is decided at a predetermined timing during the main part whether to display a result indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured, or a result indicating that the fairy has not been captured.

In the example shown in Figure 86, the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A reaches its upper limit at tf5 during the main part, more specifically, at a timing before the above-mentioned specified timing, and the fourth of these reserved balls corresponds to a special win. Therefore, at the end of the main part, a result display is executed indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured, and the player is clearly informed that they have won. The right-hit notification described above ends at tf5, when the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A reaches its upper limit.

After that, at the timing of tf6 when the game in the third special game state ends, the support mode switches from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the special performance for the chance zone transitions to the ending part. Note that if the electric role device 93A is in the open state at the timing of tf6, it will be forcibly switched to the closed state, preventing further winnings in the second operating port 92A.

After the transition from the third special game state to the fourth special game state, the remaining reserve related to the second operating port 92A is promptly consumed at the timings of tf6, tf7, tf8, and tf9. In the example shown in FIG. 86, the last game round related to the second operating port 92A corresponds to a special win, and the transition to the special win game state occurs at the timing of tf10 when that game round ends. At this timing of tf10, the special performance for the chance zone (more specifically, the ending part) ends, and the performance for the special win game state is executed.

According to the fifth embodiment described above, if the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a winning result, the game state transitions to the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In the high frequency support mode A, winning is possible in the second operating port 92A, and the judgment (lottery) based on the winning of the second operating port 92A can result in not only a jackpot result but also a special winning result. Therefore, the degree of advantage (probability of winning) in the judgment is greatly increased. In other words, the reaching of the ceiling transitions to a chance zone with a higher advantage than the previous game state. In this way, if the configuration is such that the transition to the chance zone is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the player's desire to play can be favorably stimulated. This is preferable in terms of suppressing monotony of the game and increasing attention to the game.

When the ceiling is reached, a winning entry into the second operating port 92A not only prevents the loss of balls, but also increases the probability of transitioning to a special game state (jackpot game state or special win game state). With this configuration, the benefits of the high frequency support mode A can be optimally utilized even if the stay period in the mode is shortened, and the dragging of play after the ceiling is optimally prevented.

The number of plays required to reach the ceiling is reset when high frequency support mode A ends, triggered by reaching the ceiling. This type of configuration is preferable for realizing a configuration in which the ceiling is shallow and the benefit of the ceiling is small, and a weak ceiling function is exerted in a short cycle. In other words, it is preferable for preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

The number of plays related to the end reference number is counted when a play related to the second operating port 92A is executed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the benefit of reaching the ceiling from being fully enjoyed.

The probability of a special winning result in the lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A is 1/10, and is set to be equal to the sum of the maximum number of reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb and the above-mentioned termination reference number, and the reciprocal of the above probability. By setting the maximum number of reserved information and the termination reference number in this way, the effect of generating the chance zones in a short cycle and preventing the game from becoming monotonous can be more effectively exerted.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the reference number of times to end the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is set to be smaller than the reference number of times to end the first special game state, which is triggered by a special win (six times), but the present invention is not limited to this. The reference number of times to end the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, may be set to be larger than the reference number of times to end the first special game state, which is triggered by a special win, or the reference number of times to end the first special game state, which is triggered by a special win, may be set to be the same as the reference number of times to end the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the reference number of times to end the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is set to be smaller than the reference number of times to end the first special game state, which is triggered by a jackpot (6 times), and the reference number of times to end the second special game state, which is triggered by a jackpot (100 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The reference number of times to end the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, may be set to be larger than the reference number of times to end the first special game state, which is triggered by a jackpot, and the reference number of times to end the second special game state. Alternatively, the reference number of times to end the first special game state, which is triggered by a jackpot, and the reference number of times to end the second special game state may be set to be equal to the reference number of times to end the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 3>
In the above fifth embodiment, when a special win occurs, the variable winning device 83B is opened in a high frequency winning mode, which essentially guarantees a V win. However, it is also possible to provide a first special win in which the variable winning device 83B is opened in a high frequency winning mode, which essentially guarantees a V win, and a second special win in which the variable winning device 83B is opened in a low frequency winning mode, which essentially makes a V win impossible.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port is 1/200, and the number of games until the ceiling is reached is 200. In other words, the number of games until the ceiling is reached is configured to match the reciprocal of the winning probability. It is also possible to change this and set the number of games until the ceiling is reached to an integer smaller than the reciprocal of the winning probability (for example, 50, 100, or 150).

<Modification 5>
In the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the game progresses based on the winning of the first actuation port 91A. In this case, the probability of a big win is 1/200, and the number of games that will reach the ceiling is set to be equal to the reciprocal of the probability. It is also possible to change this and set the number of games that will reach the ceiling to be a number less than the reciprocal of the probability. In this way, by setting the number of games that will reach the ceiling, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing monotony of the game can be more suitably exerted.

Sixth embodiment
In the fifth embodiment, the probability of winning a big win or a special win during the special game state (chance zone) to which the player moves when the ceiling is reached is set to about 40%, and even if the player moves to the chance zone when the ceiling is reached, the chance zone may end in about half of the cases without winning either a big win or a special win. In other words, the ceiling is set low to increase the frequency of moving to the chance zone when the ceiling is reached, while the advantage in the chance zone is suppressed from becoming excessively high, thereby suppressing monotony of the game. This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that the ceiling is set high while the benefit when the ceiling is reached is strengthened to enhance the rescue function of the player. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. First, the hit/miss table for the operating port is described with reference to FIG. 87.

(Actual/invalid table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 87(a), in the win/lose table that is referenced in the lottery based on winning the first operating port 91A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "307", and "507", a total of three. In other words, of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to a jackpot. And, all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a miss (normal miss). This makes the probability of a jackpot 1/200.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), in the winning/losing table that is referenced in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "307", and "507", a total of three. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to a jackpot. In addition, in this winning/losing table, a total of 120 values correspond to special wins: "3", "5", "13", "15", "23", "25", ... "583", "585", "593", and "595". And all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special win correspond to a miss (normal miss). As a result, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200 and the probability of a special win is 1/5.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning at the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A do not include the special loss shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a special loss can occur in a lottery based on winning at the first actuation port 91A, or it may be configured so that a special loss can occur in a lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A, or it may be configured so that a special loss can occur in both a lottery based on winning at the first actuation port 91A and a lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A.

In the case of a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, after the special game state (jackpot game state) ends, the game state transitions to a game state (first special game state or second special game state) in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high frequency support mode B, which is the same as in the fifth embodiment. However, as shown in FIG. 88, in the case of a 6R jackpot, the above-mentioned termination reference number of times is set to "1 time," and in the case of a 10R jackpot, the termination reference number of times is set to "3 times."

In addition, in the case of a special win → special win game state → V win → 5RV jackpot, after the special game state (jackpot game state) ends, the game state transitions to a game state (first special game state) in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high frequency support mode B, which is the same as in the fifth embodiment. However, in the case of a 5RV jackpot, the above-mentioned termination reference number is set to "1 time."

In other words, in the case of a 5RV or 6R jackpot, the probability of winning will be raised for a total of five times, which is the standard number of times to end (1 time) plus the upper limit of the reserved number stored in memory for the second operating port 92A (4 times). The probability of winning a jackpot or special win during this time is approximately 67%. In addition, in the case of a 10R jackpot, the probability of winning will be raised for a total of seven times, which is the standard number of times to end (3 times) plus the upper limit of the reserved number stored in memory for the second operating port 92A (4 times). The probability of winning a jackpot or special win during this time is approximately 80%.

In this embodiment, too, when the number of games executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state transitions to a game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A (third special game state), which is similar to the first embodiment. This game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A continues until the number of games executed after the end of the open/close execution mode, more specifically the number of games related to the second operating port 92A, reaches the termination reference number (time-saving number: 100 in this embodiment), and when the termination reference number is reached, the game state transitions to a game state corresponding to low frequency support mode (normal game state).

In the normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the winning probability is raised for a total of 104 times, which is the standard number of times to end (100 times) + the upper limit of the reserved number stored for the second operating port 92A (4 times), resulting in a high probability state (chance zone). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or special win is almost 100%, and the winning probability is raised by reaching the ceiling, making the jackpot or special win during the chance zone highly likely.

In this embodiment, the number of plays required to reach the ceiling is set to 600, and if the game state transitions to a high frequency support mode A state due to reaching the ceiling, the ceiling is reset when the game state ends (the game count counter is cleared to 0). In other words, the game is configured to transition to the chance zone at a cycle of 600 plays.

(Basic game flow)
Next, the basic game flow of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state.

In the normal game state where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect a winning entry into the second operating port 92A. For this reason, the player will shoot the game ball down the left route (a so-called left hit) and play with the aim of winning the first operating port 91A.

When a win occurs in the first operating port 91A, a lottery is held to determine whether the ball will win or lose based on the win. If the lottery results in a 6R or 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the variable winning device 83B opens and closes over multiple rounds. Since only game balls that flow down the right route can win in the variable winning device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41 to shoot the game ball down the right route (so-called right hit). After the jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to the chance zone (special game state) described above, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The special game states include a first special game state in which the support mode of the electric role 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the reference number of game times related to the second operating port 92A is "1", a second special game state in which the support mode of the electric role 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the reference number of game times related to the second operating port 92A is "3", a third special game state in which the support mode of the electric role 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A and the reference number of game times related to the second operating port 92A is "100", and a fourth special game state in which a game time related to the second operating port 92A is executed by a reservation related to the second operating port 92A acquired during the first special game state to the third special game state.

After the jackpot game state triggered by a 6R jackpot ends, the first special game state is entered, and after the jackpot game state triggered by a 10R jackpot ends, the second special game state is entered, and after a V win occurs during the special jackpot game state triggered by a special jackpot and the 5RV jackpot game state ends, the first special game state is entered, and if the number of games played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: 600 games), the third special game state is entered, and if the number of games played in the first to third special game states without winning either a jackpot or a special jackpot (all games end in misses) reaches the above-mentioned end reference number, the fourth special game state is entered.

The first to third special game states will continue until the number of play times related to the second actuation port 92A reaches the above-mentioned termination reference number (1 time, 3 times, 100 times), but the lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A is favored to have a higher probability of a special win than the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A, and the actual probability of winning, including the special win, will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/5.

By the way, the probability (continuation rate) of winning or winning a special prize during the four winning/losing lotteries related to the second operating port 92A is approximately 60%. The total continuation rate including the number of times played during the first special game state is approximately 67%, the total continuation rate including the number of times played during the second special game state is approximately 80%, and the total continuation rate including the number of times played during the third special game state is nearly 100%.

According to the sixth embodiment described above in detail, if the number of times the game is executed (the number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a winning result, the state transitions to the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. Here, even if the high frequency support mode A is entered, if the probability of a winning result remains low, the following inconveniences may occur. That is, it is assumed that the period until the player can obtain a sufficient benefit (transition to the special game state) expected by the player despite the ceiling being reached is extended, or the chance zone including the high frequency support mode A ends before the sufficient benefit is obtained (a rush occurs). This is not desirable because it is a factor that greatly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the low frequency support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, making it possible to win at the second operating port 92A, and the judgment (lottery) based on the winning at the second operating port 92A can result in not only a jackpot result but also a special winning result. In other words, the probability of winning (probability of transition to the special game state) is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling. Furthermore, the sum (e.g., 104 times) of the upper limit of the number of reserved information that can be stored in the second operating port reserved area Rb (e.g., 4) and the reference number of times to end the game (e.g., 100 times) is set to be equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a winning result, so that a configuration in which the transition to the special game state is highly likely or substantially certain when the ceiling is reached can be suitably realized. This makes it possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

For example, if there is a limit to the number of plays that can be played in high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, there is a greater concern about the above-mentioned rushing. In this regard, the above-mentioned configuration can mitigate the impact of the limit on the number of plays when the ceiling is reached. In other words, even if high-frequency support mode A with a limit on the number of plays is adopted when the ceiling is reached, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

When switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning can be significantly increased. This is preferable in terms of shortening the duration of stay in high-frequency support mode A and suppressing the delay in the period until the above-mentioned sufficient benefit is granted, in order to exert the rescue function when the ceiling is reached as described above.

If a jackpot result is obtained in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the game will transition through a special game state and then to the first special game state or the second special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode B. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, the standard number of times to end the high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is greater than the standard number of times to end the high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special win result, and transitioning to the special game state when the ceiling is reached is favored. With this configuration, the effect of the rescue function described above can be optimally exerted.

In a configuration in which high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling and high-frequency support mode B triggered by a winning result are both executed based on winning the second operating port 92A, the bonus is the same if a winning result is obtained during the high-frequency support mode. In order to improve the satisfaction of the player, it is preferable to increase the bonus when a winning result is obtained, but there is a concern that the relief function due to reaching the ceiling will be overly powerful if the benefit expected when the ceiling is reached is also increased as a result. In particular, it is expected that the above concern will be greater in a configuration in which the transition to a special game state is highly likely or substantially certain when the ceiling is reached, as described above. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is made greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot result (1/200), the above concern can be eliminated by reducing the opportunities for the ceiling to be reached while increasing the benefit expected from reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 1>
According to the sixth embodiment, the end reference number of times is set so that the probability of a jackpot or special win during the third special game state, which is entered when the ceiling is reached, is approximately 100%, but this is not limiting. The end reference number of times may be set so that the probability of a jackpot or special win during the third special game state, which is entered when the ceiling is reached, is 95% or more (preferably 99% or more).

<Modification 2>
In order to realize a configuration in which the next big win is highly likely when the ceiling is reached, the following configuration is also possible: That is, the game number counter may be reset when the ceiling is reached, and the number of games that result in the ceiling being reached may be the same as the reference number of times to end the third special game state to which the game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling, or the reference number of times to end the third special game state to which the game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is greater than the number of games that result in the ceiling being reached.

<Modification 3>
When a special winning result occurs in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A to which the game is shifted upon reaching the ceiling, the time for which the image variation display section D2 displays may be configured to be shorter than when a special winning result occurs under other circumstances. By shortening the time required for the transition to the special game state by shortening the time for which the image variation display section D2 displays when a special winning result occurs during the fourth special game state, the player can quickly enjoy the benefits he or she expects.

<Modification 4>
The special game state (third special game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, may be configured so that the support by the electric device 93A is stronger (for example, the period in which the device is in the open state is longer) than the special game state (first special game state or second special game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot result or a special win result. With such a configuration, in the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, the frequency of winning in the second operating port 92A increases, and the number of reserved information stored in the second operating port reserved area Rb increases. Therefore, the display time of the image variation of the operating port display unit D2 in the game round after reaching the ceiling (the operation period of the game round operation) is shortened, and the period from reaching the ceiling to enjoying the above-mentioned benefits can be suitably suppressed from being extended.

Seventh embodiment
One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to suppress monotony of the game when a 6R normal jackpot occurs and the game transitions to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA has a number of openings, large and small, that run through it in the thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, etc. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83A, they are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and based on the detection result, a bonus such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is awarded to the player. In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 86.

The game board 80aA is also provided with numerous game nails 87 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. The game nails 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 and the like will win with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A, and in particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric device 93A as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

A center frame 96A is provided on the game board 80aA so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the left side, which is similar to the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, the second actuation port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A is changed so that the game ball launched to the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A, and the game ball launched to the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the game ball launched to the left route so that it cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route depending on the game status, it is possible to advance the game in an advantageous manner. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony of the game is prevented.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in this embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information based on winning into the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of Figure 91.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserved area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserved area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the second actuation port 92A.

The reserve area Ra for the first actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area. The reserve area Rb for the second actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (reserved information) is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area.

In this embodiment, when reserved information is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When reserved information is not stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port and reserved information is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the configuration was such that a special loss could occur in either the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, but in this embodiment, the configuration is such that a special loss could occur only in one of the lotteries based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, which is different from the first embodiment. Below, the win/loss table for the actuation port in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 92 and 93.

(Actual/invalid table for operating port)
As shown in Figure 92, the hit/miss table for the first operating port includes a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for low probability) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for high probability).

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (Fig. 92(a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", a total of six. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Fig. 92(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597", a total of 30. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599," "7," "37," "57," "77," "97," "107," ... "597" correspond to a jackpot result. And all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a losing result (more specifically, a normal losing result). In other words, in a lottery based on winning the first operating port 91A, it is configured so that it does not result in a "special losing" as shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 93, the hit/miss table for the second operating port includes a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for low probability) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for high probability).

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (Fig. 93(a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", a total of six. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Fig. 93(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597", a total of 30. That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597" correspond to the big win result. In addition, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode and the winning/losing table for the high probability mode are referenced in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are all "5", "15", "25", "35", ... "585", "595", a total of 60. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "5", "15", "25", "35", ... "585", "595" correspond to the special loss result. And all random number values that do not correspond to either the big win or the special loss correspond to a loss result (specifically, a normal loss result).

In this way, in this embodiment, a lottery based on a win at the first operating port 91A does not result in a special loss, and the winning destination corresponding to a special loss is limited to the second operating port 92A to which the electric device 93A is attached.

As for the allocation table, an allocation table for the first actuation port (see FIG. 94(a)) and an allocation table for the second actuation port (see FIG. 94(b)) are provided. In the allocation table for the first actuation port, of the value of the type counter C2 of "0-29", "0-14" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot A, and "15-29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot. In the allocation table for the second actuation port, of the value of the type counter C2 of "0-29", "0-14" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot B, and "15-29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot.

Here, various types of jackpots will be compared with reference to the schematic diagram in FIG. 95. When a 6R special jackpot occurs, after the special gaming state ends, the game transitions to a second normal gaming state in which the lottery mode corresponds to a high probability mode and the support mode corresponds to high frequency support mode B. This second normal gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs.

When a 6R normal jackpot A or 6R normal jackpot B occurs, the game state transitions to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As already explained, after the transition to the third normal game state, if the number of games played during the third normal game state reaches the end reference number, the game state transitions to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, the third normal game state has a number of game plays limit. In this embodiment, the count of the number of games played during the third normal game state is limited to the number of games played based on a winning entry into the second operating port 92A.

When a 6R normal jackpot A occurs, the above-mentioned termination reference number is set to "10 times", and when a 6R normal jackpot B occurs, the above-mentioned termination reference number is set to "20 times". As already explained, the storage limit for the reserved number related to the second actuation port 92A is "4". In other words, when a 6R normal jackpot A occurs, the second actuation port 92A is played a maximum of 14 times, which is the termination reference number of "10 times" + the reserved upper limit of "4 times", and when a 6R normal jackpot B occurs, the second actuation port 92A is played a maximum of 24 times, which is the termination reference number of "20 times" + the reserved upper limit of "4 times".

One of the features of this embodiment is that if a special miss occurs during a high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times, the high-frequency support mode termination reference number is overwritten (reset), and the high-frequency support mode is essentially extended. Below, with reference to Figure 96, the process for achieving this function, specifically the support mode switching process, will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B. If a positive determination is made in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether a number limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S3502, the switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3502, the process proceeds to step S3503.

In step S3503, it is determined whether the lottery result for the current game is a special miss. If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the process proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3507, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S3507, the switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3507, the process proceeds to step S3508, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are erased, and the switching process is terminated. By erasing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3503, if a positive judgment is made in step S3503, a high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. At this time, if a high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the high-frequency support mode B flag is erased. Note that the number-of-times limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is retained as is. As a result, the support mode provided by the electric role 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A.

In the next step S3505, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is overwritten (reset), and the switching process ends. Specifically, the continuation count counter is set to "20." This effectively extends the high frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3501, if a negative judgment is made in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3509. In step S3509, it is determined whether or not the lottery result for the current game is a special miss. If a negative judgment is made in step S3509, the process for switching is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S3509, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, a high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This switches the support mode of the electric role 93A to the high-frequency support mode A. In the next step S3511, a count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S3512, the continuous count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set, and the process for switching is terminated. Specifically, the continuous count counter is set to "20". This allows high-frequency support mode A to continue until 20 play times related to the second operating port 92A have been performed.

(Game Flow)
Here, the game flow will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state.

The first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, is composed of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is the stage in which the player stays when a game round based on a winning entry into the first actuation port 91A is executed, and the special stage is the stage in which the player stays when a game round based on a winning entry into the second actuation port 92A is executed.

More specifically, the special stage is a stage in which the player temporarily stays when transitioning from the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B and the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A to the first normal game state, and the upper limit of the number of times the game can be played corresponds to the upper limit of the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second actuation port. In other words, immediately after transitioning from the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the player transitions to the special stage on the condition that reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A is stored. Then, if there is no jackpot or special miss in this special stage, i.e., if all reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A ends up as normal misses, the player transitions from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a game ball is shot to the right route and a support win occurs, it is substantially prevented from winning the second actuation port 92A. Since a game ball shot to the right route cannot win the first actuation port 91A, it is difficult to participate in a lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, a game ball shot to the left route is prevented from winning the second actuation port 92A, but may win the first actuation port 91A. For the above reasons, the game can be played in such a way that it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the left route than the right route. If a game ball is shot to the right route during the first game state, a warning is issued to encourage the player to return the shot destination to the left route.

If a 6R jackpot is obtained in a lottery during the first normal game state, the game will transition to the second normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B, via the special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can play the game while suppressing investment (loss of balls) by shooting the game ball to the right route. During the second normal game state, the game ball shot to the right route enters the second actuation port 92A, and the game progresses mainly around the game round related to the second actuation port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the entry into the second actuation port 92A, there is a probability of about 1/10 that a special miss will occur, but the special miss during the second normal game state will be invalid and treated as a normal miss. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the second normal game state, the special miss will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

If a 6R normal jackpot is obtained in a lottery during the first normal game state or the second normal game state, the game transitions through a special game state to a third normal game state that corresponds to a low probability mode and high frequency support mode B. The third normal game state corresponds to high frequency support mode B, and the player can play the game while minimizing investment (loss of balls) by firing the game ball to the right route.

During the third normal game state, a game ball launched to the right route enters the second actuation port 92A, and the game progresses mainly during the game times related to the second actuation port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the entry into the second actuation port 92A, there is a probability of approximately 1/10 resulting in a special miss. If a special miss occurs during the third normal game state, the support mode switches from high frequency support mode B to high frequency support mode A, and the termination reference number is set to "20". In other words, the game transitions from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state.

If a 6R special jackpot occurs during the fourth normal game state, the game transitions through a special game state and then to a second normal game state that supports high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. On the other hand, if a special miss occurs during the fourth normal game state, the termination reference number is reset to "20" times, and the fourth normal game state is extended. In this way, if the fourth normal game state can be looped, the player can play while minimizing the loss of balls (investment).

If the game progresses without resulting in either a jackpot or a special miss during the fourth normal game state, and the number of times the game has been played (specifically, the number of times the game has been played related to the second actuation port 92A) reaches the reference number of times to end (20 times), the game will transition to the first normal game state. More specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is "0", the game will transition to the main stage, and if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is other than "0", the game will transition to the special stage.

In the special stage, a lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A will be held for the reserved number of times. If the lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A results in a special miss, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

According to the seventh embodiment described above, if a normal big win is obtained in the first normal game state, the game state transitions to the third normal game state via the special game state. The third normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the loss of balls is suppressed by increasing the number of winnings into the second operating port 92A. A number of times is limited in the third normal game state, and when the number of times the game is performed in the third normal game state reaches the end reference number (first end reference number), the game state transitions to the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. This makes it difficult to get a ball into the second operating port 92A. Here, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, a special miss result may occur. If a special miss result occurs in the third normal game state, the game state transitions to the fourth normal game state without passing through the special game state. The fourth normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode A, and like the third normal game state, the game rounds related to the second actuation port 92A are executed, and this state continues until the number of executed game rounds reaches the end reference number (second end reference number). Here, when the third normal game state is shifted to the fourth normal game state, the progress of the game rounds related to the second actuation port 92A continues. This makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing the loss of balls. By realizing diversification of games in this way, it can contribute to increasing the attention to the games.

If a special miss occurs during the fourth normal game state, the end reference number (second end reference number) is reset. In other words, the fourth normal game state is looped. In this loop, the game progresses smoothly even if the loop is repeated because the special game state is not passed through.

The second end reference number is set to be the same as the first end reference number. Therefore, when the third normal game state changes to the fourth normal game state, it is possible to avoid the player suffering a substantial loss depending on the timing of the special miss result (the game number at which this result is determined). This is preferable in that the loop function described above can diversify the game and effectively exert the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In the fourth normal game state, the probability of a special miss result (1/10) is set higher than the probability of a jackpot result (1/100). This configuration makes it possible to prevent problems such as frequent jackpots preventing the loop function described above from functioning properly.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment, when a special miss occurs during the high-frequency support mode B with a limited number of times, the mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode A and the end reference number is reset, but this is not limited to this. During the high-frequency support mode B, the special miss may not be drawn, or the special miss may be invalidated (treated in the same way as a normal miss). In other words, when a special miss occurs during the high-frequency support mode A, the high-frequency support mode A is maintained and the end reference number is overwritten (reset), whereas when a special miss occurs during the high-frequency support mode B, the high-frequency support mode B is maintained and the end reference number is not overwritten (reset). In this configuration, when the third normal game state is entered, the fourth normal game state is entered when a special miss occurs in the game number related to the remaining reservation of the second operating port 92A executed after the third normal game state is ended.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, the reference number of times to be ended when a special miss occurs (20 times) is set higher than the reference number of times to be ended when a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs (10 times), but this is not limited to this. For example, the reference number of times to be ended when a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs and the reference number of times to be ended when a special miss occurs may be the same number. In addition, the reference number of times to be ended when a special miss occurs may be set lower than the reference number of times to be ended when a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs.

<Modification 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the reference number of times to end the game (20 times) when the 6R normal big win B (in a consecutive win) is set to be the same as the reference number of times to end the game (20 times) when the special miss occurs, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reference number of times to end the game when the special miss occurs may be greater than the reference number of times to end the game when the 6R normal big win B is set.

<Modification 4>
In the seventh embodiment, the termination reference number of times set in the case of a special miss is a uniform number (20 times), but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the termination reference number of times to be different depending on the type of special miss. For example, as the special miss, a first special miss in which the termination reference number is set to a first termination reference number (e.g., "20 times") and a second special miss in which the termination reference number is set to a second termination reference number (e.g., "40 times") may be provided.

<Modification 5>
In the seventh embodiment, the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A is configured not to result in a special loss, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A may also be configured to result in a special loss.

<Modification 6>
In the case where a normal jackpot result is obtained in the game round related to the second actuation port 92A, the termination reference number may be set to be greater than in the case where a normal jackpot result is obtained in the game round related to the first actuation port 91A or in the case where a special miss result is obtained in the game round related to the second actuation port 92A. With this configuration, in the case where a normal jackpot result is obtained during the above-mentioned loop, the player's advantage increases, and an accent can be added to the game during the loop.

Eighth embodiment
In this embodiment, one of the features is that the game transitions to a normal game state (a fifth normal game state described later) that corresponds to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode when some of the probability jackpots are triggered, and when the number of times of play executed in this normal game state reaches an upper limit (ceiling), the support mode by the electric role is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA has a number of openings, large and small, that run through it in the thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, etc. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83A, they are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and based on the detection result, a bonus such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is awarded to the player. In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 86.

The game board 80aA is also provided with numerous game nails 87 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. The game nails 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 and the like will win with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A, and in particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric device 93A as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

A center frame 96A is provided on the game board 80aA so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the left side, which is similar to the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, the second actuation port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A is changed so that the game ball launched to the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A, and the game ball launched to the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the game ball launched to the left route so that it cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route depending on the game status, it is possible to advance the game in an advantageous manner. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony of the game is prevented.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in this embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information based on winning into the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of Figure 99.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserved area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserved area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the second actuation port 92A.

The reserve area Ra for the first actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area. The reserve area Rb for the second actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (reserved information) is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area.

In this embodiment, when reserved information is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When reserved information is not stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port and reserved information is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a special loss can occur by a lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91 and 92. In this embodiment, however, the special loss is omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on winning the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92, which is a difference from the first embodiment. Below, the win/loss table for the actuation ports in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100.

(Actual/invalid table for operating port)
As shown in Figure 100, there are provided a hit/miss table for the operating port, a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for low probability) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for high probability).

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (Fig. 100(a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the actuation ports 91A and 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", a total of six. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Fig. 100(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597", a total of 30. In other words, out of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to a jackpot result. And all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a losing result (more specifically, a normal losing result). In other words, in a lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91A, 92A, it is configured so that it does not result in a "special losing" as shown in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the actuation ports is divided into a distribution table for the first actuation port and a distribution table for the second actuation port. Here, the contents of the distribution table are explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 101.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), in the allocation table for the first operating port, the allocation destinations for game results are set as a 6R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result), a 6R special jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result), and a 2R special jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, "10 to 19" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to a 2R special jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), in the allocation table for the second operating port, the allocation destination of the game result is set to a 6R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result) and a 6R special jackpot result (high probability special game result). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result.

Here, we will provide additional explanations about each jackpot, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 102.

If a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, the game state transitions to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, after the transition to the third normal game state, if the number of games played during the third normal game state reaches the end reference number (more specifically, "40 times"), the game state transitions to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, a limit is placed on the number of times that the third normal game state can be played. In this embodiment, the count of the number of games played during the third normal game state is limited to the number of games played based on a winning entry into the second operating port 92A.

When a 6R regular jackpot occurs, the above-mentioned ceiling (upper limit) is set to "300 times" when the special game state ends. When the number of times played after the special game state ends reaches the ceiling, the support mode of the electric device 93A switches to high-frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing investment (reduction of balls).

When a 6R special jackpot occurs, the game transitions to a second normal game state that corresponds to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, the second normal game state will continue until the next jackpot occurs.

If a 6R special jackpot occurs, the above-mentioned ceiling (upper limit) is set to "100 times" when the special game state ends. However, even if the number of times the game has been played after the special game state ends reaches the ceiling, the support mode by the electric device 93A remains in high frequency support mode B, i.e., the second normal game state.

In contrast, if a 2R jackpot occurs, the game will transition to the fifth normal game state, which is compatible with a high probability mode and low frequency support mode, after the special game state ends. In addition, if a 2R jackpot occurs, the ceiling (upper limit) mentioned above is set to "100 times" when the special game state ends. If the number of times the game has been played after the special game state ends reaches this ceiling, the support mode by the electric device 93A will switch to high frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing investment (loss of balls).

When a 2R jackpot is reached, the hurdle to the next jackpot is lowered by switching to a high probability mode, but if the number of times played in this game state (fifth normal game state) increases too much, the investment increases and the player's motivation to play may decrease. In this regard, in the fifth normal game state, the ceiling is reached early and additional investment is suppressed, thereby suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience. In addition, by switching to high frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling, the game progresses mainly with the number of times played related to the second operating port 92A, and if a jackpot is reached in the number of times played related to the second operating port 92A, a configuration that does not result in a 2R jackpot (a configuration in which a certain amount of balls can be expected to be put out) can be used to suitably suppress a decrease in the satisfaction of the player. Below, with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 103 and 104, the process for performing such a function, specifically the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode and the support mode switching process will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
As shown in FIG. 103, in the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether the current opening and closing execution mode (special game state) is triggered by a 6R certainty big win. If the positive determination is made in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602, and the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag thus set, in the subsequent electric role support process, the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode B is referred to in the support lottery, and the variable display time table for the high-frequency support mode B is referred to as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS.

In the next step S3603, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag thus set, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced in the win/lose lottery for the subsequent game round.

After that, in step S3604, the number of plays that is the criterion for determining the ceiling is set to "100 times". Then, in step S3605, the number of plays counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is reset (cleared to 0), and in step S3606, the various flags for the opening and closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is stopped.

The value of the continuation counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played, and high-frequency support mode B ends when the value of the continuation counter reaches "0." In other words, the value of the continuation counter determines the upper limit (the above-mentioned termination reference number) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

Returning to the explanation of step S3601, if a negative judgment is made in step S3601, i.e., if the current jackpot is not a 6R variable jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a 2R variable jackpot. If a positive judgment is made in step S3607, the processes of steps S3603 to S3606 described above are executed, and then this transition process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3607, i.e., if the current jackpot is a 6R normal jackpot, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 in step S3608, and a high frequency support mode B flag is set in step S3609. After that, the continuation count counter is set to "40" in step S3610, and the number of plays that will be the criterion for determining the ceiling is set to "300 times" in the following step S3611.

Then, in step S3605, the number of plays counter is reset, and in step S3606, the various flags for the opening and closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is stopped.

Next, referring to Figure 104, we will explain the support mode switching process.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first in step S3701, it is determined whether the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B. If a positive determination is made in step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether a number limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3704, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the determination in step S3704 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S3704 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3705, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are erased, and the switching process ends. By erasing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3701, if a negative judgment is made in step S3701, i.e., if the game is in low frequency support mode, the program proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, the program judges whether the value of the number of plays counter in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 has reached its upper limit, i.e., the value set in step S3604 or step S3611. If a negative judgment is made in step S3706, the program ends this switching process. If a positive judgment is made in step S3706, the program proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3707, a high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode A flag thus set, in the subsequent electric role support processing, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A is referenced in the support lottery, and the variable display time table for high-frequency support mode A is referenced as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS. In addition, the opening time when the support is selected and the electric role 93A is switched to the open state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode A.

In the next step S3708, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in step S3709, the continuation count counter is set to "400", and the switching process ends. This causes the transition to continue to high frequency support mode A until the number of plays reaches "400" or until a jackpot is hit.

The eighth embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In this way, the rhythm of the game is forcibly changed, and the monotony of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, the upper limit number of times that the ceiling is reached is configured to be smaller (shortened) in the case of a guaranteed jackpot result (more specifically, a jackpot result corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) than in the case of a normal jackpot result. Here, in the high probability mode, the transition to the special game state occurs earlier than in the low probability mode, so by setting the upper limit number to be small, the effect of the above-mentioned ceiling function can be suitably exerted. This can suitably contribute to increasing attention to the game.

In addition, in a normal game state that supports a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, even though the mode is set to a high probability mode, the game progresses without resulting in a jackpot, which results in a large investment contrary to the player's expectations. This is expected to be a factor that significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, in a normal game state that supports a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, the above-mentioned upper limit number of times is lowered and the game is switched to the high frequency switching mode at an early timing to suppress investment, thereby making it possible to optimally exert the effect of diversifying the game (the effect of increasing attention to the game).

If the above-mentioned ceiling-reaching rescue function is overly effective, the technical significance (diversification of play) of providing a normal game state that supports a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode may be diminished. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the upper limit number of times in each game state so that it is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot result, it is possible to favorably coexist the diversification of play and the above-mentioned rescue function.

By increasing the number of reserved information stored, the time for displaying the change in the image on the operation port display unit (the operation period for the game operation) becomes shorter. This is preferable for smooth game progress. However, assuming such a configuration, the following inconveniences may occur when the configuration related to the rescue function is applied. That is, when the ceiling is reached in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and the game state transitions to a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode A, the game times in the normal game state may progress too quickly, and the benefit of reaching the ceiling may end before the benefit is fully felt. This is a concern as a factor that significantly reduces the player's attention to the rescue function. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, setting the end reference number to be greater than the upper limit number can contribute to eliminating the above concerns.

The lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A is favored over the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A to give the player an advantage. When the ceiling is reached in a normal game state that supports high probability mode and low frequency support mode, not only is investment suppressed, but the lottery is also favored, which provides a doubly effective rescue function for the player, and if a player gets stuck in a normal game state that supports high probability mode and low frequency support mode, expectations of reaching the ceiling increase. This contributes to further increasing attention to the game.

In the lottery based on winning the first operating port 91A, the lottery result includes a lottery result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, and in the lottery based on winning the second operating port 92A, the lottery result does not include a lottery result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which the benefit of the ceiling is essentially lost (wasted draw) when the lottery result triggers a transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode again while the ceiling is reached and the rescue function is being exercised during the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode.

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, the ceiling (upper limit) is different depending on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, chance jackpot), but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the ceiling (upper limit) the same regardless of the type of jackpot.

<Modification 2>
As 2R special jackpots (so-called potential jackpots), it is also possible to provide 2R special jackpot A and 2R special jackpot B, and to configure the ceiling (upper limit) for the 2R special jackpot A to be different from the ceiling (upper limit) for the 2R special jackpot B.

<Modification 3>
In the eighth embodiment, the ceiling (upper limit) is set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, guaranteed jackpot), but this may be modified as follows. That is, the ceiling (upper limit) may be set according to the operation port that triggered the jackpot. For example, if the jackpot is based on winning the first operation port 91A, the first ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit), and if the jackpot is based on winning the second operation port 92A, the second ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit). In this case, if the first ceiling is set lower than the second ceiling, it is possible to prevent the player's investment from becoming excessively large, and if the second ceiling is set lower than the first ceiling, it is possible to suitably enhance the sharpness of the game.

<Modification 4>
In the eighth embodiment, the ceiling (upper limit) is set lower in the case of a special jackpot (specifically, a 2R special jackpot) than in the case of a normal jackpot (specifically, a 6R normal jackpot), but this is not limited to this. The ceiling (upper limit) may be set higher in the case of a 2R special jackpot than in the case of a 6R normal jackpot.

<Modification 5>
In a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode A, which is switched to when the ceiling is reached in a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode, a first termination reference number is set as the termination reference number, and in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode A, which is switched to when the ceiling is reached in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode, a second termination reference number is set as the termination reference number, and it is also possible to specify the second termination reference number to be smaller than the first termination reference number. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the rescue function from becoming a factor that encourages gambling.

<Modification 6>
As in the first embodiment described above, the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A may be arranged together on a predetermined flow path in the play area PE, and when reserved information is stored in both the holding area Ra for the first actuation port and the holding area Rb for the second actuation port, the reserved information stored in the holding area Rb for the second actuation port may be given priority as the target for executing a play round.

According to the configuration shown in this modified example, even if the ceiling is reached in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode and the game transitions to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, there is no need to change the destination of the game balls to enjoy the benefits of the rescue function. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the rescue function is suddenly activated without going through a special game state, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being wasted and to appropriately improve satisfaction with the rescue function.

Ninth embodiment
In the first embodiment, when the game state is changed to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode, the game state is maintained in the high probability mode until the next big win (so-called variable probability machine). In contrast, in the present embodiment, the game state is different from the first embodiment in that the number of times the high probability mode is maintained after the game state is changed to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode is set to an upper limit (so-called ST machine).

When the lottery mode switches to the high probability mode, it is assumed that the player will play in the hope of hitting the jackpot early. If the game continues without hitting the jackpot despite the high expectation of hitting the jackpot in this way, it may give the player the impression that their investment is increasing in vain, and there is a concern that the player's motivation to play will decrease as the game progresses and the player approaches the upper limit. It is assumed that such an occurrence will be more prominent in gaming machines with a lower probability of hitting the jackpot in the high probability mode. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to take such circumstances into consideration. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The configuration of the game board unit in this embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the holding function (holding ball storage area) related to the actuation port is the same as that of the eighth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. The configuration is also the same as that of the eighth embodiment in that a play time related to the second actuation port 92 is executed with priority over a play time related to the first actuation port 91.

(Actual/invalid table for operating port)
As shown in Figure 100, there are provided a hit/miss table for the operating port, a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for low probability) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for high probability).

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (Fig. 105(a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the actuation ports 91 and 92, the random number values for the jackpot (i.e., winning information) are two, "7" and "307". In other words, "7" and "307" of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599" correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Fig. 105(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values for the jackpot (i.e., winning information) are six, "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599" correspond to the jackpot result. All random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a miss (specifically, a normal miss). In other words, in a lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91 and 92, the "special miss" shown in the first embodiment does not occur.

(Distribution table for operating ports)
106(a), in the distribution table for the actuation ports 91 and 92, 10R certain probability jackpot A (special game result corresponding to high probability) and 10R certain probability jackpot B (special game result corresponding to high probability) are set as distribution destinations of game results. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 10R certain probability jackpot A, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 10R certain probability jackpot B.

If a 10R special jackpot A is obtained, the game will transition to the fifth normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, after the special game state ends. This high probability mode will end when the number of game plays executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (high probability upper limit: 100 plays), and the game will switch to the low probability mode.

When a 10R special jackpot B is reached, the game transitions to a second normal game state that is compatible with the high probability mode and high frequency support mode after the special game state ends. This high probability mode ends when the number of times the game has been played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (high probability upper limit: 100 times), and the game switches to the low probability mode. The high frequency support mode ends when the number of times the game has been played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (high support upper limit: 50 times). In this embodiment, when the high support upper limit is reached, the above-mentioned ceiling is reached, and the game switches from high frequency support mode B to high frequency support mode A. There is also an upper limit (50 times in this embodiment) on the number of times this high frequency support mode A can continue, and the game switches to the low frequency support mode when the high probability mode ends.

In the first embodiment described above, a difference was provided so that the base (the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot) was higher in high frequency support mode B than in high frequency support mode A, but in this embodiment, a difference is provided so that the base is higher in high frequency support mode A than in high frequency support mode B. Below, with reference to Figure 107, the specific configuration for generating such a difference will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/2, and when the support is won, the number of times the electric role 93 is switched to the open state is set to "1 time" and the opening time is set to "0.1 sec." The variable display time of the image (normal image) on the through gate display unit DS is set to "10 to 20 sec," and the fixed display time of the image is set to "0.5 sec."

In high frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/1.1, and when the support is won, the number of times the electric role 93 is switched to the open state is set to "1 time" and the opening time is set to "2 seconds". The variable display time of the picture (normal picture) on the through gate display unit DS is set to "0.5 seconds" and the fixed display time of the picture is set to "0.5 seconds".

In high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/2, and when the support is won, the number of times the electric role 93 is switched to the open state is set to "2 times", the opening time is set to "3 seconds", and the interval time when switching to the open state is set to "0.2 seconds". The variable display time of the picture (normal picture) on the through gate display unit DS is set to "0.5 seconds", and the fixed display time of the picture is set to "0.5 seconds".

In general, the bases mentioned above increase in the order of low-frequency support mode < high-frequency support mode B < high-frequency support mode A, and in high-frequency support mode B it is possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls compared to the low-frequency support mode, and in high-frequency support mode A it is possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls even more than in high-frequency support mode B.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 108, we will explain the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed as part of the game state transition process of the normal process (see step S404 in FIG. 23), focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode (special game state), first, in step S3801, it is determined whether the current opening and closing execution mode corresponds to a 10R certainty jackpot. If the determination is affirmative in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This switches the support mode by the electric role 93A to the high frequency support mode B.

In the next step S3803, the high support continuation counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "50". The high support continuation counter is a counter for determining the number of continuations of the game corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and is decremented by "1" each time a game is played during the high frequency support mode.

After executing the setting process of step S3803, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3804. In step S3804, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This switches the lottery mode for the lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91, 92 to the high probability mode.

In the next step S3805, the high probability continuation counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "100". The high probability continuation counter is a counter for determining the number of continuations of the game corresponding to the high probability mode, and is decremented by "1" each time a game is played during the high probability mode.

In step S3806, the game play counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is reset (cleared to 0). Then, in step S3807, the various flags for the special game state stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and this transition process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 109, the process for switching between the lottery mode and the support mode (corresponding to the process for switching between the support mode in FIG. 39) that is executed as part of the game play control process of the normal process (step S403 in FIG. 23) will be described.

(Switching process between lottery mode and support mode)
In the process for switching between the lottery mode and the support mode, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the determination in step S3901 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3902. In step S3902, an update process of the high probability continuation counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is executed. Specifically, the value of the high probability continuation counter is decremented by "1".

In the following step S3903, it is determined whether the value of the high probability continuation counter is "0". If a positive determination is made in step S3903, the process proceeds to step S3904, in which the high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. This causes the lottery mode for the lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91, 92 to switch from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

After executing the process of step S3904, or if a negative judgment is made in either step S3901 or S3903, the process proceeds to step S3905. In step S3905, it is judged whether the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B. If a positive judgment is made in step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3906. In step S3906, an update process of the high support continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is executed. Specifically, the value of the high support continuation count counter is decremented by "1".

In the next step S3907, it is determined whether the value of the high support continuation counter is "0". If a positive determination is made in step S3907, the process proceeds to step S3908, where the high frequency support mode flag A or the high frequency support mode B flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. This causes the support mode provided by the electric role 93 to switch from the high frequency support modes A and B to the low frequency support mode.

After executing the process of step S3908, or if a negative judgment is made in either step S3905 or S3907, the process proceeds to step S3909. In step S3909, it is judged whether or not the value of the play count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 has reached the upper limit ("50" in this embodiment). If a negative judgment is made in step S3909, the process for switching is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S3909, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This switches the support mode by the electric role 93 to the high frequency support mode A. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3911, where the high support continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "50" and the process for switching is terminated.

(Changes in balls held as the game progresses)
Next, referring to Fig. 110, a supplementary explanation will be given on the change in the number of balls held as the game progresses. Fig. 110(a) is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a 10R special jackpot A is obtained, and Fig. 110(b) is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a 10R special jackpot B is obtained.

In the example shown in FIG. 110(a), at timing tg1, a transition occurs to a special gaming state corresponding to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A. At timing tg2 when this special gaming state ends, the lottery mode switches to high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. From then on, the high probability mode is maintained until the number of times the game has been played reaches 100.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. At the timing tg3 when 50 games have been played after the special game state ends, the support mode switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode A. This accelerates the game progress and suppresses the loss of balls to almost zero. In other words, after the special game state ends, the state becomes favorable to the player, and if the game continues without hitting a jackpot, the state will be promoted to an even more favorable state for the player.

Then, at timing tg4 when the number of plays executed after the special play state ends reaches 100, the support mode switches to the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode switches to the low probability mode. This causes the jackpot probability to return from 1/100 to 1/300.

In the example shown in FIG. 110(b), at timing th1, a transition occurs to a special gaming state corresponding to a 10R guaranteed jackpot B. At timing th2 when this special gaming state ends, the lottery mode switches to high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. From then on, the high probability mode is maintained until the number of plays that have been played reaches 100.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode B. At timing th3 when 50 games have been played after the special game state ends, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode B to high-frequency support mode A. This further accelerates game progress and suppresses the loss of balls to almost zero. In other words, after the special game state ends, the state becomes favorable to the player, and if the game continues without hitting a jackpot, the state will be promoted to an even more favorable state for the player.

Then, at timing th4 when the number of plays executed after the special play state ends reaches 100, the support mode switches to the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode switches to the low-probability mode.

In this embodiment, after transitioning to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B, if the number of times play is performed reaches 50 without resulting in a jackpot, the support mode becomes high frequency support mode A. This increases the frequency of winning into the second operating port 92. Thereafter, if the number of times play is performed after the special game state ends reaches 100, the lottery mode becomes low probability mode and the support mode becomes low frequency support mode. With this configuration, it is possible to optimally prevent the game from becoming monotonous while ensuring the advantage of the player during the high probability mode.

In gaming machines (so-called ST machines) that have an upper limit on the number of play times in normal game mode that supports high probability mode, the likelihood of a jackpot result decreases as the number of play times approaches the upper limit, and the player's expectations can drop significantly. This is not desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the high frequency support mode A is entered when the ceiling is reached, which increases the frequency of winning at the second operating port 92 and reduces investment.

As in the first embodiment, the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92 are arranged together in a predetermined flow path in the play area PE, while the game times associated with the second actuation port 92 are executed in priority over the game times associated with the first actuation port 91. When the ceiling is reached, the game state shifts from the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, increasing the opportunities for the game times associated with the second actuation port 92 to be executed. As a result, the player's advantage increases significantly when the ceiling is reached, and the attention to the game after the ceiling is reached can be favorably increased.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode A, when game balls are continuously shot toward the actuation port 92, the average number of reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area (second actuation port reserved area Rb) changes to "3.5", and in the high frequency support mode B, when game balls are continuously shot toward the actuation port 92, the average number of reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area (second actuation port reserved area Rb) changes to "2.5". When the number of reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb is "3", the display time of the pattern variation in the actuation port display unit D2 is shorter than when the number is "2". With this configuration, it is possible to change the speed of the game progress by transitioning from the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached. This makes it possible to more appropriately suppress monotony of the game.

<Modification 1>
In the above ninth embodiment, the high frequency support mode A, which is switched to after the special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot A ends, is configured to end (switch to the low frequency support mode) in conjunction with the switching of the lottery mode to the low probability mode, but this is not limited to the above.

The high-frequency support mode A may be switched to the low-frequency support mode before switching from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In other words, the transition may be in the following order: special game state → normal game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode (fifth normal game state) → normal game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state) → normal game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode (fifth normal game state) → normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode (first normal game state).

Also, the configuration may be such that after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode A switches to the low frequency support mode. In other words, the configuration may be such that the transition is made in the following order: special gaming state → normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (fifth normal gaming state) → normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal gaming state) → normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A (fourth normal gaming state) → normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (first normal gaming state).

<Modification 2>
It is also possible to provide 10R probability variable jackpot A1 and 10R probability variable jackpot A2 as the 10R probability variable jackpot A shown in the ninth embodiment, and set the ceiling for the 10R probability variable jackpot A1 to 50 times, and for the 10R probability variable jackpot A2 to 20 times. With this configuration, when the 10R probability variable jackpot A is obtained, the timing of the promotion (the timing of the above tg3) can be changed depending on the type, and the diversification of the game can be suitably realized.

<Modification 3>
It is also possible to provide 10R probability variable jackpot B1 and 10R probability variable jackpot B2 as the 10R probability variable jackpot B shown in the ninth embodiment, set the ceiling to 50 times and the number of times the high frequency support mode B continues to 50 times when the 10R probability variable jackpot B1 occurs, and set the ceiling to 20 times and the number of times the high frequency support mode B continues to 20 times when the 10R probability variable jackpot B2 occurs. With this configuration, when the 10R probability variable jackpot B occurs, the timing of the promotion (the timing of the above th3) can be changed depending on the type, and diversification of the game can be suitably realized.

<Modification 4>
In the above ninth embodiment, the number of times (50 times) that the player can stay in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (fifth normal gaming state) after the special gaming state triggered by the 10R special jackpot A ends is the same as the number of times (50 times) that the player can stay in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal gaming state), but this is not limited to this.

It is also possible to configure the number of times that the player can stay in the normal game state (fifth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode after the special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot A ends to be greater than the number of times that the player can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

It is also possible to configure the number of times that the player can stay in the normal game state (fifth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode after the special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot A ends to be less than the number of times that the player can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

<Modification 5>
In the above ninth embodiment, the number of times (50 times) that the player can stay in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B (second normal gaming state) after the special gaming state triggered by the 10R special jackpot B ends is the same as the number of times (50 times) that the player can stay in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal gaming state), but this is not limited to this.

It is also possible to configure the number of times that the player can stay in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot B ends to be greater than the number of times that the player can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

It is also possible to configure the number of times that the player can stay in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot A ends to be less than the number of times that the player can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

<Modification 6>
In the above ninth embodiment, a difference was set so that the base is higher for high-frequency support mode A than for high-frequency support mode B, but this may be changed to set a difference so that the base is higher for high-frequency support mode B than for high-frequency support mode A.

<Modification 7>
When transitioning from high-frequency support mode A or B to high-frequency support mode A, it is optional whether or not to go through the low-frequency support mode (a game round corresponding to the low-frequency support mode).

<Modification 8>
In the ninth embodiment, when the 10R probability jackpot result A is reached, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A when 50 games have been played in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and when the number of games played after the special game state ends reaches 100, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In other words, the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode and the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A are set to be the same. This may be modified so that the number of times the game remains in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode is greater than the number of times the game remains in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, or the number of times the game remains in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode is less than the number of times the game remains in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

In addition, in the case of a 10R special jackpot result B, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A when 50 game rounds have been played in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B, and transitions to a normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches 100. In other words, the game is stipulated so that the number of game rounds staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is the same as the number of game rounds staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. This may be changed so that the number of times the game remains in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is greater than the number of times the game remains in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, or the number of times the game remains in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is less than the number of times the game remains in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

<Modification 9>
In the ninth embodiment, when the number of games played after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability jackpot result reaches 100, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the high frequency support mode A to continue even after the transition to the low probability mode. According to the configuration shown in this modified example, after the special game state ends, the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B is transitioned to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A, the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A is transitioned in this order. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a rapid decrease in attention to the game when transitioning from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

Tenth embodiment
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss result, the value of the continuation number counter that specifies the remaining number of times of play in the fourth normal game state is set (overwritten) to "400", and the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result is quickly transitioned to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling without passing through the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, without triggering other game states such as the first normal game state, i.e., the fourth normal game state is quickly extended.

One of the features of this embodiment is that the behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss result, is devised. Below, with reference to Figure 111, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 111(a), in the high-frequency support mode A to which the mode is switched upon a special miss, the background color of the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 is blue, and in the high-frequency support mode A to which the mode is switched upon reaching the ceiling, the background color of the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 is green. Therefore, by checking the background color of the display screen 95a, the player can easily identify whether the current high-frequency support mode A is triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling. In the following description, the high-frequency support mode A to which the mode is switched upon a special miss is appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A1" and the high-frequency support mode A to which the mode is switched upon reaching the ceiling is appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2". Incidentally, the support modes of the high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 are the same, and the base (the ratio of the number of paid-out game balls to the number of shot game balls) is configured to have no difference between the two, which is the same as the first embodiment.

Next, we will provide additional information about the flow of notification of the start of high-frequency support mode A, with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 111(b) and (c).

In a game round in which a special miss occurs and the game transitions to high frequency support mode A1, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss in that game round is displayed as stopped (confirmed) on the display screen 95a, as shown in FIG. 111(b). Specifically, after a reach display, a combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is displayed as stopped (confirmed) on one of the active lines. Then, in conjunction with the start of the next game round, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to blue, and the remaining number of games in high frequency support mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

In contrast, in a game round that transitions to high frequency support mode A2 upon reaching the ceiling, as shown in FIG. 111(c), a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling in that game round may be displayed as a stopped (confirmed) symbol on the display screen 95a. Specifically, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) symbol on any of the active lines via a reach display. In contrast, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) symbol without a reach display. At this time, the background color of the display screen 95a is also maintained as blue.

In addition, in a game in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a variable display time (more specifically, 20 to 30 seconds) corresponding to a reach display is set, similar to a game in which the ceiling is reached during a jackpot result. In contrast, in a game in which the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, a variable display time that does not correspond to a reach display is set by referring to the variable display time table shown in FIG. 27(a2).

Here, referring to the timing chart in Figure 112, we will provide additional explanation on the flow of play when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result.

At time ti1, the game round corresponding to the normal miss result starts, and at time ti2, the game round corresponding to the special miss result starts. At time ti3, when the game round corresponding to the special miss result ends, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A1. Accordingly, the continuation counter is set to "40".

After that, the value of the continuation counter is decremented by "1" each time a game round is played, and the value of the game counter is incremented by "1" each time (see timing ti4, for example). At timing ti5 during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the special miss result, the game round in which the ceiling is reached has begun. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 112, the ceiling is reached while the fourth normal game state corresponding to the special miss result is continuing, that is, before the value of the continuation counter becomes "0". This game round corresponds to a normal miss result that does not support reach display, and the reserved number related to the operation port 91, 92 also fluctuates near the upper limit due to the benefit of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the time for displaying the changing pattern on the operation port display unit and the time for displaying the changing pattern on the pattern display unit are about 3 to 5 seconds due to the effect of the time-saving function, and the game round in which the ceiling is reached is also progressing quickly.

In the game round where the ceiling is reached, the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed frozen on the display screen 95a at the timing of the confirmation display, thereby clearly informing the player that the ceiling has been reached. Then, at the timing ti6 when the game round ends, the value of the continuation counter is overwritten to "400", and the game transitions from the fourth normal game state corresponding to the special miss result to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the ceiling being reached without passing through any other game state. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from blue to green.

Here, during high frequency support mode A, the electric role 93 frequently switches to the open state. At the timing ti6 when the game round in which the ceiling was reached ends, the electric role 93 is in the open state, but the electric role 93 remains in the open state until the opening time set at the time of switching to the open state has elapsed, and the opening time is not forcibly shortened. In other words, even if the trigger for the fourth normal game state switches from a special miss result to reaching the ceiling as described above, the behavior of the electric role 93 is not disturbed. The winning support in this fourth normal game state ends when the value of the continuation counter becomes "0" or if a jackpot result occurs before that.

<Modification 1>
In the tenth embodiment, the configuration in which the reaching of the ceiling is indicated by displaying a symbol combination (a symbol combination including a "CHANCE" symbol) indicating the reaching of the ceiling in the game round in which the ceiling is reached when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result, and the configuration in which the reaching of the ceiling is indicated by changing the background color of the display screen 95a from the game round next to the time when the ceiling is reached are used together, but the present invention is not limited to this. The specific configuration in which the reaching of the ceiling is indicated is arbitrary, and one of the above two configurations can be omitted. In other words, the function of indicating the reaching of the ceiling by the symbol combination in the game round in which the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state can be omitted. In addition, the background color of the display screen 95a can be unified between the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result and the fourth normal game state triggered by the reaching of the ceiling.

<Modification 2>
In the above tenth embodiment, the termination reference number of times ("20" times or "40" times) set when transitioning to the fourth normal game state is triggered by a special miss result is less than the termination reference number of times ("400" times) set when transitioning to the fourth normal game state is triggered by reaching the ceiling, but this is not limited to this. The termination reference number of times set when transitioning to the fourth normal game state is triggered by reaching the ceiling may be greater than the termination reference number of times set when transitioning to the fourth normal game state is triggered by reaching the ceiling, or the termination reference number of times set when transitioning to the fourth normal game state is triggered by a special miss result may be the same as the termination reference number of times set when transitioning to the fourth normal game state is triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 3>
If the electric device 93 is in the open state when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result, it is also possible to configure the electric device 93 to be forcibly switched to the closed state.

Eleventh embodiment
If a special failure occurs during the high frequency support mode, the special failure is invalidated, and the player is unable to enjoy the benefit, which gives the player the impression that the special failure was a waste of money. This is undesirable because it reduces the player's motivation to play. In particular, if such an event occurs just before the end of the high frequency support mode and is noticed by the player, the above concerns become greater. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to take such circumstances into consideration. Below, the design will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The images displayed (confirmed) on the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display section D) are set to be individual for each lottery result based on winning at the operating ports 91 and 92. That is, if the lottery result based on winning the actuation ports 91, 92 is a 6R normal jackpot result, the actuation port display section D1, D2 displays a picture corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result, if the lottery result based on winning the actuation ports 91, 92 is a 6R guaranteed jackpot result, the actuation port display section D1, D2 displays a picture corresponding to the 6R guaranteed jackpot result, if the lottery result based on winning the actuation ports 91, 92 is a special miss result A, the actuation port display section D1, D2 displays a picture corresponding to the special miss result A, if the lottery result based on winning the actuation ports 91, 92 is a special miss result B, the actuation port display section D1, D2 displays a picture corresponding to the special miss result B, if the lottery result based on winning the actuation ports 91, 92 is a regular miss result, the actuation port display section D1, D2 displays a picture corresponding to the regular miss result (see FIG. 113(a)).

As described above in detail, the symbol combinations displayed in the actuation port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 do not differ depending on the game state. In contrast, the symbol combinations displayed in the actuation port display section 95 (display screen 95a) that correspond to special miss results differ depending on the game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 113(b) and (c), when a special miss occurs during a normal game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) displays a pattern combination of "3," "1," and "4," which are pattern combinations corresponding to the special miss, while when a special miss occurs during a normal game state (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) displays a pattern combination other than the above-mentioned pattern combination, specifically a pattern combination corresponding to a normal miss.

Next, we will provide additional explanation on the variable display time table for the operating port in this embodiment with reference to Figures 114 and 115. Figure 114 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to a normal miss result, and Figure 115 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to a special miss result.

The variable display time table corresponding to the normal miss result is the same as that of the first embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 114 (a1) illustrates the variable display time in the case of a complete miss in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, 14 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, 9 sec", and when the number of reserved information stored is "3" to "8", the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, 5 sec". In addition, in the first normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the operation port display section D1, D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

In FIG. 114 (a2), the variable display time in the case of a complete miss in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A is illustrated. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, 14 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, 9 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "3" to "8", the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, 5 sec". In addition, in the fourth normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display section D1, D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec". In other words, the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal game state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the first normal game state.

Figure 114 (a3) shows an example of the variable display time in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B when there is a complete miss. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0", the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds", and when the number of reserved information stored is "1" to "8", the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds". In the second normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 114 (a4) shows an example of the variable display time in the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B when there is a complete miss. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 seconds", and when the number of reserved information stored is "1" to "8", the variable display time is set to one of "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting mode of the variable display time in the third normal game state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the second normal game state. In addition, in the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Incidentally, for any of the first through fourth normal game states, in a game round in which a reach display corresponding to a miss result (miss reach) occurs, the variable display time is set to anywhere from "20 to 30 seconds" regardless of the number of reserved information stored. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result (see FIG. 28), and in the case of a jackpot result, a relatively long time within that range is likely to be set, and in the case of a miss result, a relatively short time within that range is likely to be set. In other words, a difference is provided so that a reach display with a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a reach display with a short variable display time.

In this embodiment, too, in a game where the ceiling is reached, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 seconds) corresponding to the reach display will be set.

Next, the variable display time table corresponding to the special miss result will be explained. Figure 115 (a1) shows an example of the variable display time when there is a special miss in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. When there is a special miss in the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "20 to 30 seconds" regardless of the number of pending information stored. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result.

In FIG. 115(a2), the variable display time in the case of a special miss in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A is illustrated. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, 14 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, 9 sec", and when the number of reserved information stored is "3" to "8", the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, 5 sec". In other words, the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal game state is the same as that in the case of a normal miss (see FIG. 114(a2)). In addition, in the fourth normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display unit D1, D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

Figure 115 (a3) shows an example of the variable display time in the case of a special miss in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 sec", and when the number of reserved information stored is "1" to "8", the variable display time is set to one of "1 or 2 sec". In other words, the setting mode of the variable display time in the second normal game state is the same as that in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114 (a3)). In addition, in the second normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display parts D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

Figure 115 (a4) shows an example of the variable display time in the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B when there is a special miss. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 sec", and when the number of reserved information stored is "1" to "8", the variable display time is set to one of "1 or 2 sec". In other words, the setting mode of the variable display time in the third normal game state is the same as that in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114 (a4)). Note that in the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

In addition, in a game in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a variable display time (more specifically, 20 to 30 seconds) corresponding to a reach display is set, similar to a game in which the ceiling is reached during a jackpot result. In contrast, in a game in which the ceiling is reached during the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, a variable display time that does not correspond to a reach display is set by referring to the variable display time table shown in FIG. 114 (a2) and FIG. 115 (a2).

Next, we will explain how the patterns change during each game round by referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 116.

As shown in FIG. 116(a), in a game round that results in a normal miss result (complete miss result) that does not support the reach display, the variable display of each pattern row that is stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins in conjunction with the start of the game round. After that, without transitioning to the reach display, the upper pattern row → lower pattern row → middle pattern row are stopped in this order, and the pattern combination that corresponds to the normal miss result that does not support the reach display is displayed as a fixed combination (determined display). This variable display mode is the same in the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), in a normal game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency support mode, in a game round that results in a special miss, the variable display of each pattern row that is frozen and displayed on the pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins in conjunction with the start of the game round. After that, the upper pattern row is stopped, followed by the lower pattern row, and the display transitions to a reach display. After the transition to a reach display, the middle pattern row is stopped so that the pattern combination corresponding to the special miss (a pattern combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is frozen and displayed (determined display). This pattern combination clearly informs the player that a special miss has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 116(c), in a normal game state (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) compatible with the high frequency support mode, in a game round that results in a special miss, the variable display of each pattern row that is stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins in conjunction with the start of the game round. After that, without transitioning to a reach display, the upper pattern row → lower pattern row → middle pattern row are stopped in this order, and a pattern combination that corresponds to a normal miss result that does not support a reach display is displayed as a stop (confirmed display). In other words, it is difficult to determine from the pattern combination whether or not the current game round will result in a special miss.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, even if the game proceeds without a jackpot result, the game can transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A by a special failure result or reaching the ceiling. By transitioning to the fourth normal game state, the frequency of winning into the second operating port 92A increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game. However, if a special failure result occurs in a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode such as the fourth normal game state, the special failure result is invalid and is treated the same as a normal failure result. Although this is preferable in terms of suppressing the increase in gambling, there is a concern that if the player realizes that the special failure result has occurred, the player will be given the impression that he or she has wasted his or her luck. This can be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when a special failure occurs during the first normal game state, a symbol combination indicating the special failure is displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, while when a special failure occurs during the fourth normal game state (similar to the second normal game state and the third normal game state), a symbol combination similar to that of a normal failure is displayed. With this configuration, even if a special failure occurs during the fourth normal game state (similar to the second normal game state and the third normal game state), it can be made less noticeable. This can suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences and contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

In addition, if a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the variable display time becomes a variable display time corresponding to the reach display, and if a special miss occurs during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode such as the fourth normal technique state, the variable display time becomes a variable display time not corresponding to the reach display. In this way, even if a special miss occurs during a high-frequency support mode, the above effect can be more preferably exerted by progressing the game round in a less noticeable manner. In particular, if a special miss occurs during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode such as the fourth normal technique state, the same variable display time table as that for a normal miss (not corresponding to the reach display) during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode such as the fourth normal technique state is referenced, and the variable display time is set in a common manner. This allows the game round with the special miss to be confused with the game round with the normal miss, and the above effect can be preferably enhanced.

<Modification 1>
In the eleventh embodiment, the symbol combination to be displayed (determined) on the symbol display device 95 when the special failure result A is obtained and the symbol combination to be displayed (determined) on the symbol display device 95 when the special failure result B is obtained are unified, but this is not limited to this. The symbol combination to be displayed (determined) on the symbol display device 95 when the special failure result A is obtained (the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result A) may be different from the symbol combination to be displayed (determined) on the symbol display device 95 when the special failure result B is obtained (the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result B).

In addition, when a pattern combination for special failure result A and a pattern combination for special failure result B are provided separately, and the type of special failure result can be identified from the pattern combination, a pattern combination other than the pattern combination corresponding to special failure result B (a pattern combination corresponding to a normal failure result) is displayed in a frozen state when a relatively favorable special failure result B is obtained, thereby concealing the fact that it is a special failure result B, while a pattern combination corresponding to special failure result A is displayed in a frozen state when a relatively unfavorable special failure result A is obtained, thereby clearly indicating that it is a special failure result A. In addition, a pattern combination corresponding to special failure result B is displayed in a frozen state when a relatively favorable special failure result B is obtained, thereby clearly indicating that it is a special failure result B, while a pattern combination other than the pattern combination corresponding to special failure result A (a pattern combination corresponding to a normal failure result) is displayed in a frozen state when a relatively unfavorable special failure result A is obtained, thereby concealing that it is a special failure result A.

<Modification 2>
In the eleventh embodiment, when a special failure occurs during a normal game state (the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal failure result is displayed on the symbol display device 95, but this is not limited to this. When a special failure occurs during a normal game state (the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal failure result is displayed on the symbol display device 95, whereas when a special failure occurs during a normal game state (the fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B, which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A to which the transition is made due to the special failure result, the symbol display device 95 can be configured to display a combination of the "3", "1", and "4" symbols corresponding to the special failure result.

<Modification 3>
If the special failure result is not disclosed every time, the discrepancy between the probability of the special failure result as understood by the player and the probability of the special failure result actually occurring will become large. This is a concern as a factor that gives the player a negative impression such as "not compatible with the gaming machine" or "bad flow". In consideration of such a phenomenon, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the symbol display device 95 displays or does not display the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result depending on the remaining number of times of the fourth normal game state, specifically, a configuration in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result is displayed or not when the remaining number of times of play is a predetermined number or more, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result is not displayed or not when the remaining number of times of play is less than the predetermined number.

<Modification 4>
It is also possible to configure the system to determine whether the reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 corresponds to a special miss result before the reserved information is subjected to a win/loss judgment, and to execute a notice performance (so-called pre-reading performance) according to the result of the pre-determination. In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of the notice performance during a normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is likely to give the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is desirable to restrict at least one of the above-mentioned pre-determination and notice performance in a normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, and to refrain from the notice performance.

Twelfth embodiment
In a configuration in which an upper limit (a reference number of times to end) is set for the fourth normal game state, which is entered when the ceiling is reached as shown in the first embodiment, there is a possibility that the fourth normal game state will end without a jackpot result during the fourth normal game state. In a configuration in which the value of the game count counter that determines the ceiling function is reset (cleared to 0) only when a jackpot is reached, that is, in a configuration in which the ceiling is not reset when the above event (hereinafter also referred to as a run-through) occurs, the ceiling is not reset until the next jackpot occurs, so there is a possibility that investment will increase significantly after the run-through. Here, the gaming machine is connected to a data display device provided in the gaming hall, and the number of games played after the jackpot is generally displayed on the data display device, and the manager of the gaming hall can refer to this data display device to determine whether the ceiling has not been reached. However, in the gaming hall, the power of the gaming machine and the data display device is turned off after the business hours are over, and the power is turned on in the morning of the business day. Such a power operation (OFF→ON) resets (clears) the number of games played, making it difficult to determine whether the ceiling has been reached after the power operation. It is assumed that the difficulty in grasping the state of the gaming machine in this way will be a factor in reducing the convenience of the manager. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to take such circumstances into consideration. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the support mode switching process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 117.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S9001, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If a positive determination is made in step S9001, the process proceeds to step S9002. In step S9002, it is determined whether or not a count limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S9002, the switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S9002, the process proceeds to step S9003. In step S9003, an update process of the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is performed. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9004, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S9004, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S9004 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S9005, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are erased, and the switching process is terminated. By erasing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S9001, if a negative judgment is made in step S9001, the process proceeds to step S9006. In step S9006, it is judged whether or not the current support mode is high frequency support mode A. If a positive judgment is made in step S9006, the process proceeds to step S9007. In step S9007, it is judged whether or not the value of the number of games counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative judgment is made in step S9007, the process proceeds to step S9008. In step S9008, an update process of the continuation counter is performed. Specifically, the value of the continuation counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9009, it is judged whether or not the value of the continuation counter is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S1609, the switching process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S9009, the process proceeds to step S9015. In step S9015, it is judged whether the current high-frequency support mode A was high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. If a negative judgment is made in step S9015, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number limit flag are cleared in step S9005, and this switching process is terminated. In other words, when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode switches to the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S9015, the process proceeds to step S9016. In step S9016, a special notification preparation flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. After that, in step S9005, the high frequency support mode flag (high frequency support mode A flag) and the number limit flag are erased, and this switching process is terminated. In other words, when the number of games played during high frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode switches to the low frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S9006, if a negative judgment is made in step S9006, that is, if the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S9010. In step S9010, it is determined whether the value of the play count counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative judgment is made in step S9010, the process proceeds to step S9011. In step S9011, it is determined whether the current play count corresponds to a special miss. If it does not correspond to a special miss, a negative judgment is made in step S9011, and this switching process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S9011 (if it corresponds to a special miss) or if a positive judgment is made in step S9010 (if the ceiling has been reached), the process proceeds to step S9012. In step S9012, a high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the following step S9013, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Then, proceed to step S9014, execute the continuation counter setting process, and end this switching process.

In the setting process of the continuation counter, if the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (if the ceiling is reached) in the current play, the continuation counter is set to "400". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is reached during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of play times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 400. If the current play result is special miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is reached during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of play times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 20. If the current play result is special miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is reached during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of play times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 40.

Returning to the explanation of step S9007, if the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (if the ceiling is reached) during high-frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter is set (overwritten) to "400" in step S9014, and this switching process is terminated. This means that high-frequency support mode A is extended so that it continues until the number of plays executed during that high-frequency support mode A reaches 400. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss, the number of plays for which high-frequency support mode A will continue is reset (overwritten), and the upper limit of the fourth normal game state is raised without going through another normal game state, etc.

Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 118. As described in the first embodiment, the main processing is started when the power is turned on, and after the main processing is executed, the process transitions to the normal processing (see FIG. 23).

(Main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S9101, start-up processing is executed in response to power-on. Specifically, the process waits for about 500 msec, for example, to wait for the slave control board (the dispensing control device 242, etc.) to become operable.

In the next step S9102, it is determined whether or not 1 second, which is the permission/prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process of step S9101. If 1 second has not elapsed, the process of step S9102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of times step S9102 is executed. For example, if the time required from a negative determination in step S9102 to executing the process of step S9102 again is 0.1 msec, it is determined that 1 second has elapsed since the start-up process of step S9101 when the count value reaches 10,000. Note that the specific configuration for measuring the time is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S9102 that 1 second has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S9103.

In step S9103, access to RAM 404 is permitted. Then, in step S9104, it is determined whether or not reset switch 166 provided on power supply/launch control device 243 is ON, and in the following step S9105, it is determined whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the power outage flag storage area of RAM 404. In addition, in step S9106, a RAM judgment value is calculated, and in the following step S9107, it is determined whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data by whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 404 is saved correctly.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166. If the reset switch 166 is pressed (ON), the process proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. If the power interruption occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality is confirmed in the stored data by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. In step S9108, the used area of the RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S9109, the initialization process of the RAM 404 is performed. In the process of step S9108, the values of the play count counter and the continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 are reset (cleared to 0). If a special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area, the special notification preparation flag is erased.

On the other hand, if the reset switch 166 has not been pressed, the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area is cleared in step S9115, provided that the power outage flag is stored and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal.

After executing the processing of step S9115 or step S9109, the process proceeds to step S9110. In step S9110, it is determined whether or not a special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the special notification preparation flag is not stored, in step S9111, an initial command setting process is executed to output an initial command to the dispensing control device 242. Then, in step S9112, interrupt permission is set and normal processing is transitioned to. By inputting the initial command from the main control device 162, the MPU of the dispensing control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is proceeding normally.

If a positive judgment is made in step S9110, the process proceeds to step S9113. In step S9113, special notification start processing is executed. In the following step S2514, the special notification preparation flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. After that, the processes of steps S2511 and S2512 are executed to move to normal processing. In the special notification start processing of step S9113, a special notification start command is set. This special notification start command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 (see FIG. 23) of normal processing. The notification/performance control device 140 starts a special notification based on receiving this special notification start command.

Here, the special notification process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 119(a). The special notification process is executed as part of regular processing in the MPU 442.

(Special notification processing)
In the special notification process, first, in step S9201, it is determined whether or not a special notification is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S9201, it is determined in step S9202 whether or not the special notification start command has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S9202, the special notification process is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S9202, the process proceeds to step S9203, where the special notification start process is executed, and then the special notification process is terminated. In the special notification start process in step S9203, as shown in FIG. 119(b)→FIG. 119(c), the annular illumination unit 26 of the front door frame 14 is fully lit. The hall manager of the game hall can easily identify whether or not the game machine is in a state after flying through the ceiling based on the presence or absence of illumination of the annular illumination unit 26.

Returning to the explanation of step S9201, if a positive judgment is made in step S9201, i.e., if a special alert is being executed, processing for canceling the special alert is executed in steps S9204 to S9206. First, the special alert control processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as part of the normal processing (see FIG. 23) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120.

(Special notification control process)
In the special notification control process, first, in step S9301, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 166 is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S9301, the special notification control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S9301, the special notification cancel process is executed in step S9302. In the special notification cancel process, a special notification cancel command is set. This special notification cancel command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 (see FIG. 23) of the normal process. In the following step S9302, the number of games played counter in the various counter area 434 is reset (cleared to 0), and the special notification control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special alarm processing in FIG. 119(a), in step S9204, it is determined whether or not a special alarm cancellation command has been received from the main control device 162. If a positive determination is made in step S9204, the special alarm cancellation processing is executed in step S9205. In the special alarm cancellation processing, the annular illumination unit 26 described above is turned off, as shown in FIG. 119(c)→FIG. 119(b).

If a negative judgment is made in step S9204, the process proceeds to step S9206 to judge whether the effect button 35 provided on the front door frame 14 has been operated (whether it has been turned ON). If a negative judgment is made in step S9206, the special notification process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S9206, the special notification cancellation process is executed in step S9205, and then the special notification process is terminated.

As described above in detail, when the reset switch 166 is operated (turned ON) while a special notification is being executed, the number of plays counter is reset (cleared to 0) and the special notification is cancelled. In contrast, when the effect button 35 is operated (turned ON) while a special notification is being executed, the number of plays counter is not reset (cleared to 0) and the special notification is simply cancelled.

When a game is played without the special notification being released, the light-emitting effects in the circular illumination section 26 are given priority as the game progresses. However, when the game stops, the light-emitting state in the circular illumination section 26 returns to the state corresponding to the special notification (all lights on). When an operation-responsive effect is executed while the game is in progress, the effect button 35 may be operated by the player, but even if the effect button 35 is operated under the circumstances where the light-emitting effects associated with the game progress are given priority, the special notification is not released and the temporarily suspended state is maintained.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of times of play) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game state transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A). In the fourth normal game state, the frequent winning of the operation ports 91 and 92 suppresses the investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, the fourth normal game state transitioned to by reaching the ceiling has a termination reference number (400 times), and even if the ceiling is reached, the fourth normal game state may end without a jackpot result during the fourth normal game state (run through the ceiling). This is preferable in terms of avoiding the benefit of reaching the ceiling becoming excessive and becoming a factor that excessively stimulates gambling. However, after running through the ceiling, the number of times the game is executed stored by the number of times of play counter is not reset, and it is not possible to reach the ceiling again. Here, if the power switch is turned from OFF to ON without operating the reset switch 166 while in the state after running through the ceiling, a special notification is executed. This allows the arcade manager to know whether or not the game is in a state where the player has run through the ceiling. Supporting the player in understanding the state of the game after running through the ceiling by turning on the power in this way is preferable for improving the convenience of the manager.

When either the effect button 35 or the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the special notification is cancelled. In contrast, when the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the number of times the game has been played stored by the game play counter is reset. With this configuration, the manager of the amusement hall can easily select how to deal with the gaming machine on which the special notification is being executed, depending on the business style of the amusement hall, etc. In other words, the manager can select whether to cancel only the above-mentioned special notification and leave the machine in the ceiling run-through state, or to reset the ceiling. With this configuration, the above-mentioned effect can be exhibited even more effectively.

The effect button 35, which serves as the "first operating means," is located on the front side of the gaming machine, and the reset switch 166, which serves as the "second operating means," is located on the rear side of the gaming machine. This arrangement improves convenience for the manager while ideally avoiding the inconvenience of players resetting the number of executions.

<Modification 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the operation means for canceling the special notification (the effect button 35) is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine (more specifically, the front door frame 14), and the operation means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling (the reset switch 166) is disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine (more specifically, the main control device 162), but this is not limited to this. Both the operation means for canceling the special notification and the operation means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling may be disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine.

In addition, it is sufficient for the operating means for canceling the special alarm and resetting the ceiling to be located in a position where the player cannot operate it, for example, in a position where it can be accessed from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door frame 14 or inner frame 13, and it does not necessarily have to be located in the main control device 162.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the effect button 35 is configured to function both as an operation means for the operation-responsive effect and as an operation means for canceling the special notification, but this is not limited to this. An operation means for canceling the special notification may be provided separately from the effect button 35.

<Modification 3>
When a game is played under a condition in which the special notification is not cancelled and continues, it is also possible to configure the annular illumination section 26 to be restricted so that the light emission effects accompanying the progress of the game are not executed.

<Modification 4>
As special alerts, a first special alert using the circular illumination unit 26 and a second special alert using the pattern display device 95 (for example, a counter display showing the remaining number of plays until the ceiling is reached, where the counter is fixed to a specific value such as "9999" or "0000" when the ceiling is reached) can be executed in parallel, and it is also possible to configure the first special alert to be canceled while the second special alert continues if the performance button 35 or reset switch 166 is operated while the special alert is being executed.

<Modification 5>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the effect button 35 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the special notification is cancelled, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the special notification mode to be switched from a mode with relatively high discrimination (a mode that is easy to notice) to a mode with relatively low discrimination (a mode that is hard to notice) by operating the effect button 35. In such a configuration, the device that executes the special notification may be changed from the circular illumination unit 26 to another device (for example, the pattern display device 95 or a lamp unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine).

<Modification 6>
In the twelfth embodiment, the special notification is performed by fully lighting the annular illumination unit 26 of the front door frame 14, but the specific form of the special notification is arbitrary. It is sufficient that at least a gaming machine that is performing a special notification can be distinguished from a gaming machine that is not performing a special notification. For example, the special notification may be performed by making the annular illumination unit 26 emit light in a special manner. It is also possible to perform the special notification on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, or by a sound output from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 7>
In game halls, instead of turning on/off the power of each gaming machine individually, the power is turned on/off for each island equipment collectively, thereby shortening the work time. Therefore, if the power is turned off and then turned on (restarted) while a special notification is being executed, the following effects can be expected by configuring the system to cancel the special notification. In other words, if the operation of the effect button 35 or the reset switch 166 is not required to cancel the special notification, it becomes unnecessary to perform the cancel operation for each gaming machine individually, which contributes to improving work efficiency.

In addition, if a ball enters a ball entry section such as the operating port 91, 92 or a game round begins while a special notification is being issued, the special notification can be temporarily restricted or cancelled.

<Modification 8>
In the twelfth embodiment, the effect button 35 is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect button 35 can also be connected to the main control device 162.

Thirteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the behavior when the ceiling is reached and the big win occurs at the same time is characteristic. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA has a number of openings, large and small, that run through it in the thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, etc. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83A, they are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and based on the detection result, a bonus such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is awarded to the player. In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 86.

The game board 80aA is also provided with numerous game nails 87 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. The game nails 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 and the like will win with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A, and in particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric device 93A as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

A center frame 96A is provided on the game board 80aA so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the left side, which is similar to the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, the second actuation port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A is changed so that the game ball launched to the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A, and the game ball launched to the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the game ball launched to the left route so that it cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route depending on the game status, it is possible to advance the game in an advantageous manner. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony of the game is prevented.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in this embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information based on winning into the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of Figure 122.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserved area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserved area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the second actuation port 92A.

The reserve area Ra for the first actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area. The reserve area Rb for the second actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (reserved information) is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area.

In this embodiment, when reserved information is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When reserved information is not stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port and reserved information is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a special loss can occur by a lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91 and 92. However, in this embodiment, the special loss is omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on winning the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92, which is a difference from the first embodiment. Below, the win/loss table for the actuation ports in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123.

(Actual/invalid table for operating port)
As shown in Figure 123, a hit/miss table for the operating port is provided, which includes a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for low probability) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for high probability).

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (Fig. 123(a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the actuation ports 91A and 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", a total of six. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Fig. 123(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597", a total of 30. In other words, out of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to a jackpot result. And all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a losing result (more specifically, a normal losing result). In other words, in a lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91A, 92A, it is configured so that it does not result in a "special losing" as shown in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the actuation ports is divided into a distribution table for the first actuation port and a distribution table for the second actuation port. Here, the contents of the distribution table are explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 124.

As shown in FIG. 124(a), in the allocation table for the first operating port, the allocation destinations for game results are set as a 6R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result), a 6R special jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result), and a 2R special jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, "10 to 19" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to a 2R special jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 124(b), in the allocation table for the second operating port, the allocation destination of the game result is set to a 6R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result) and a 6R special jackpot result (high probability special game result). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result.

Here, we will provide additional explanations about each jackpot, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 125.

If a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, the game state transitions to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, after the transition to the third normal game state, if the number of games played during the third normal game state reaches the end reference number (more specifically, "40 times"), the game state transitions to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, a limit is placed on the number of times that the third normal game state can be played. In this embodiment, the count of the number of games played during the third normal game state is limited to the number of games played based on a winning entry into the second operating port 92A.

If a 6R jackpot is reached, the game will transition to a second normal game state, which corresponds to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode B, after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, the second normal game state will continue until the next jackpot is reached. In contrast, if a 2R jackpot is reached, the game will transition to a fifth normal game state, which corresponds to a high probability mode and low frequency support mode, after the special game state ends.

Now, with reference to Figure 126, we will provide additional explanation on the flow of play when the ceiling is reached and a jackpot occurs at the same time.

In the example shown in FIG. 126(a), the game progresses in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode without resulting in a jackpot, and the number of times played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling). In the game where the ceiling is reached (the 400th game), a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, and the game state transitions to the special game state without transitioning to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B.

In the example shown in FIG. 126(b), the game progresses in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode without resulting in a jackpot, and the number of times played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling). The game time when the ceiling is reached (the 400th game) results in a 6R guaranteed jackpot, and the game state transitions to the special game state without transitioning to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B.

In the example shown in FIG. 126(c), the game progresses in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode without resulting in a jackpot, and the number of times played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling). The game time when the ceiling is reached (the 400th game) results in a 2R special jackpot, and the game state transitions to the special game state without transitioning to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the fifth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode.

As described above, if the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R special jackpot result, or the 2R special jackpot result overlaps, the player will not be given the benefit of reaching the ceiling. In such a configuration, there is a concern that the satisfaction of the player will be greatly reduced because the benefit will be wiped out even though the ceiling has been reached. In this embodiment, a device has been devised that takes such circumstances into consideration. Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 127(a), the first fluctuation start process executed as part of the variable display control process (see FIG. 41) in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 will be described. The first fluctuation start process is a process for starting a performance for a game round based on receiving a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162, and sets the variable display mode of the pattern such as a reach display as a performance for a game round.

(First fluctuation start process)
In the first fluctuation start process, first, in step S9401, the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, a type command is also transmitted together. In step S9401, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and various information related to the game result such as information on the result of a guaranteed jackpot, information on the result of a normal jackpot, information on a special miss result, information on a normal miss result, and information on reaching the ceiling are identified from the command. Then, in step S9401, from the above-identified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won, information on the type of special miss if a special miss, information on the type of special miss if a special miss, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won and there is no special miss, information on whether or not a reach has occurred, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on the fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 442.

In the next step S9402, based on the information obtained in step S9401, it is determined whether the result of the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the current game result is a jackpot result (6R special jackpot result or 6R normal jackpot result), it is determined in the next step S9411 whether the current game round is the one in which the ceiling will be reached. If a negative determination is made in step S9411, the next step S9403 executes a jackpot presentation setting process. The jackpot presentation setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the jackpot symbol combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the symbol combination is stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result in which the same symbol combination is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following symbol combinations are defined as symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot: "1", "1", "1" symbol, "2", "2", "2" symbol, "3", "3", "3" symbol, "4", "4", "4" symbol, "5", "5", "5", "6", "6", "6", "6", "7", "7", "7", "8", "8", "8", "9", "9", and "9" symbol combinations (see FIG. 45(a) for example).

As already explained, in the event of a jackpot result, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for a jackpot, the variable display pattern tables for reach display stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 are obtained, and the presentation pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a positive judgment is made in step S9411, i.e., if the current play round is the play round in which the ceiling is reached and corresponds to a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S9412. In step S9412, a process for setting the effects when there are overlaps is executed. Details of this process for setting the effects when there are overlaps will be described later.

If it is determined in step S9402 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S9404. In step S9404, it is determined whether the ceiling will be reached in the current game round. If the ceiling will be reached, a positive determination is made in step S9404 and the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, a performance setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The performance setting process for reaching the ceiling is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed as a stop for reaching the ceiling and the effective line on which the symbol combination is displayed as a stop, and a variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbols to be displayed as a stop.

In the process of determining the stop result for reaching the ceiling, a stop result in which a combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination that corresponds to reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45(b)).

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for reaching the ceiling, the variable display pattern tables for reach display stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 are obtained, and the presentation pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative judgment is made in step S9404, the process proceeds to step S9406. In step S9406, it is judged whether or not the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive judgment is made in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, a special miss presentation setting process is executed. The special miss presentation setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the special miss pattern combination to be stopped and the effective line on which the special miss pattern combination is stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the special miss pattern.

In the process of determining the stop result for a special miss, the stop result in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss, just as when the ceiling is reached (see FIG. 45(b)).

If a special miss occurs, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for a special miss, the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 are obtained, and the presentation pattern of a normal reach display or a super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative judgment is made in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9408, and the effect setting process for a complete miss is executed. In the effect setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the effect setting process for a reach occurrence is executed, and if a reach does not occur, the effect setting process for a reach not occurring is executed.

The effect setting process for a reach occurrence is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed when the reach is completely missed and the effective line on which the symbol combination is to be displayed, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol when the reach is completely missed.

In the stop result determination process for reach-compatible complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they are not any of the symbol combinations that correspond to a big win result, the symbol combinations that correspond to a special miss result, or the symbol combinations that correspond to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The process of determining the variable display mode for reach-compatible complete misses acquires the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The effect setting process for when a reach does not occur is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed as a reach-not-corresponding complete miss and the effective line on which the symbol combination will be displayed as a reach-not-corresponding complete miss, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol for the reach-not-corresponding complete miss.

In the stop result determination process for reach-free complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they are not any of the symbol combinations that correspond to a jackpot result, the symbol combinations that correspond to a special miss result, or the symbol combinations that correspond to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process of determining the variable display mode for a complete miss that does not correspond to a reach, the variable display pattern table for a miss that does not correspond to a reach stored in various table areas of the ROM 443 is obtained, and a presentation pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

After executing any one of steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412, the process proceeds to step S9409. In step S9409, a process is executed to output commands including information on the stop result and presentation pattern determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412 to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands, respectively. Based on the received stop result commands and pattern commands, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round.

After executing the process of step S9409, in the following step S9410, a process to start the presentation for the game round is executed, and then this process for starting the fluctuation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the presentation pattern determined in the above steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412, and the presentation for the game round is started.

Now, the overlap setting process in step S9412 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 127(b). In the overlap setting process, in step S9501, it is determined whether the current jackpot result is either a 2R special jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result. If a positive determination is made in step S9501, the normal setting process is executed in step S9502. The normal setting process is the same as the performance setting process for jackpots shown in step S9403 above.

That is, in the stop result determination process constituting the normal setting process, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Also, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

When the result is a 6R normal jackpot, the symbol combination that will be displayed (determined display) is set to any one of the following: "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination, "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination, "6" symbol, "6" symbol, "6" symbol combination, "8" symbol, "8" symbol, and "8" symbol combination.

When the result is a 2R special jackpot, any of the following symbol combinations are set as the stopped display (confirmed display): "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination, "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "9" symbol, "9" symbol, and "9" symbol combination.

When a jackpot result is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process that constitutes the normal setting process, a variable display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is obtained, and a normal reach display or super reach display presentation pattern that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative judgment is made in step S9501, i.e., if the current jackpot result is a 6R variable jackpot result, a special setting process is executed in step S9503. The special setting process is also composed of a stop result determination process and a variable display mode determination process, similar to the normal setting process in step S9502.

In the stop result determination process constituting the special setting process, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Also, information on the determined stop result is stored in a stop result address storage area. Then, a symbol combination of "7", "7", and "7" is set as the symbol combination to be stopped (determined) on the final stop line stored in the stop result address storage area.

When a jackpot result is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. The variable display mode determination process, which constitutes the special setting process, obtains variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern of a normal reach display or a super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In the following description, the pattern variable display mode determined in step S9503 above is referred to as the special variable display mode, and is distinguished from the pattern variable display mode (normal variable display mode) determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and step S9502 above.

(Comparison of variable display modes)
Here, referring to Fig. 128, the difference between the variable display mode (normal variable display mode) when the ceiling is reached and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R variable probability jackpot result overlap, and the variable display mode (special variable display mode) when the ceiling is reached and the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap will be explained. Fig. 128(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached and the 2R variable probability jackpot result overlap, and Fig. 128(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached and the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap.

In a game in which the ceiling is reached and a 2R special jackpot result overlaps, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the display of changing patterns on the operation port display and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) begin at timing tj1 when the game starts. At timing tj2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, the display transitions to a reach display, and at timing tj3, the display for the operation port displays a frozen pattern corresponding to the 2R special jackpot result, and the pattern combination corresponding to the 2R special jackpot result is frozen (confirmed) on the pattern display device 95. This clearly indicates to the player that a 2R special jackpot result has occurred. In this variable display mode, the game transitions to a special game state without clearly indicating that the ceiling has been reached.

The game flow when the ceiling is reached and a 6R normal jackpot result occurs at the same time is basically the same as in Figure 128(a), with the difference being that the symbol combination that is finally displayed (determined display) will be the symbol combination that corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, so a description of this will be omitted.

In a game in which the ceiling is reached and a 6R jackpot result overlaps, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the display of the changing patterns on the operation port display unit and the display of the changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) begin at the timing of tk1 when the game starts. At the timing of tk2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, the display has shifted to a reach display, and at the timing of tk3, the pattern combination corresponding to the ceiling is displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped display) on the pattern display device 95. This clearly indicates to the player that the ceiling has been reached. However, at the timing of tk3, the display of the changing patterns on the operation port display unit is still continuing. At the timing of tk4, when a time equal to the above-mentioned fixed display time has passed from the timing of tk3, the display of the changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 resumes. The period from tk1 to tk4 constitutes the first half of the special variable display mode, and considering that this first half indicates that the ceiling has been reached, this first half can also be said to be the "ceiling reached indication part."

At tk5 after the latter half of the special variable display mode is started at tk4, the image corresponding to the 6R jackpot result is displayed frozen on the operating port display, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R jackpot result is displayed frozen (confirmed) on the symbol display device 95. The latter half has a shorter execution time than the first half, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R jackpot result is displayed frozen (confirmed) without going through a reach display. The period from tk4 to tk5 constitutes the latter half of the special variable display mode, and considering that the latter half indicates that a 6R jackpot result has occurred, the latter half can also be said to be the "6R jackpot result display part."

The variable display time table is set so that the time for which the image changes in the display section for the operation port when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R special jackpot result is the same as the time for which the image changes in the display section for the operation port when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R special jackpot result is the same. As described above, by making the first half part that corresponds to the reach display relatively longer and the second half part that does not correspond to the reach display shorter, the discomfort caused by the two repeated variable displays when the special variable display mode is executed is reduced.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special play state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal play state corresponding to high frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal play state, the frequent winning of the actuation ports 91A and 92A reduces investments that accompany game progress. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the player's investments will have increased when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, if it becomes obvious that the player has reached the ceiling but is not able to enjoy the benefits, it is feared that this will lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play. This is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, if a jackpot result occurs in the game round where the ceiling is reached (if there is a duplication), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result is a 6R special jackpot result, a 2R special jackpot result, or a 6R normal jackpot result. Specifically, if a 6R special jackpot result (a jackpot result that triggers a transition to a long continuation high frequency support mode) occurs in the game round where the upper limit number of times is reached, an effect is executed that indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached, and if a 2R special jackpot result (a jackpot result that triggers a transition to a low frequency support mode) or a 6R normal jackpot result (a jackpot result that triggers a transition to a short continuation high frequency support mode) occurs in the game round where the upper limit number of times is reached, an effect is executed that does not indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached. With this configuration, when a 6R high probability jackpot result occurs and the special game state changes to high frequency support mode, the player can imagine that this is the benefit of reaching the ceiling, when a 2R high probability jackpot result occurs and the special game state changes to low frequency switching mode, the player can imagine that the benefit has not occurred in the first place by not indicating that the ceiling has been reached, and when a 6R high probability jackpot result occurs and the game transitions to a high frequency support mode that is much shorter than when the ceiling is reached, the player can imagine that the benefit has not occurred in the first place by not indicating that the ceiling has been reached. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction of the player and ideally increase the attention paid to the game.

<Modification 1>
In the above thirteenth embodiment, when the 6R normal jackpot result, which is the trigger for transition to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B, overlaps with the ceiling reaching, the normal setting process is executed, but this is not limited to this. When the 6R normal jackpot result overlaps with the ceiling reaching, it is also possible to configure the special setting process to be executed. In other words, in a game round in which the ceiling reaching and the 6R normal jackpot result overlap, it is also possible to configure the variable display of the pattern to be executed in a special variable display mode consisting of a first half part in which the pattern combination corresponding to the ceiling reaching is stopped (temporarily stopped) and a second half part in which the pattern combination corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result is stopped (determined) display.

<Modification 2>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the reference number of times to be set when the ceiling is reached is greater than the reference number of times to be set when the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained, but this is not limited to the above. The reference number of times to be set when the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained and the reference number of times to be set when the ceiling is reached may be the same, or the reference number of times to be set when the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained may be greater than the reference number of times to be set when the ceiling is reached. By combining these configurations with the configuration shown in the first modified example, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

<Modification 3>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the latter part (part showing the big win result) is shorter than the first part (part showing the ceiling reach) in the special variable display mode, but this is not limited to this. The first and second parts may be configured to have the same length, or the latter part may be configured to be longer than the first part.

In addition, in the latter half of the game, the symbol combination (the symbol combination of the "7" symbol, the "7" symbol, and the "7" symbol) corresponding to the 6R jackpot result is displayed as a fixed display (confirmed display) without going through a reach display, but in the latter half of the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R jackpot result may be displayed as a fixed display (confirmed display) via a reach display, just like in the first half of the game.

<Modification 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the variable display time table referred to when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R variable probability jackpot result overlap is the same as the variable display time table referred to when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlaps. In other words, the variable display time of the pattern on the operating port display unit (the variable display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95) is configured to be the same when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R variable probability jackpot result overlaps, and when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlaps. This may be changed as follows. That is, a variable display time table to be referred to when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R variable probability jackpot result overlaps, and a variable display time table to be referred to when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R variable probability jackpot result overlaps may be separately provided, and the variable display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port (the variable display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95) may be different between the case where the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R variable probability jackpot result overlaps and the case where the ceiling is reached and either the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlaps. For example, the variable display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port (the variable display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95) may be longer when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R variable probability jackpot result overlaps than when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R variable probability jackpot result overlaps. For example, in a configuration in which a reach display is executed in each of the first and second parts as shown in variant example 3 above, it is technically significant to configure the display time of the changing pattern in the operating port display section (the display time of the changing pattern in the pattern display device 95) to be longer when the ceiling is reached and a 6R special jackpot result overlaps than when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R special jackpot result overlaps.

<Modification 5>
In the above thirteenth embodiment, when the ceiling reach and the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap, the symbol combination indicating the ceiling reach and the symbol combination indicating the 6R variable probability jackpot result are displayed in a stopped state, so that the ceiling reach and the 6R variable probability jackpot result are clearly indicated, but at least the specific configuration for indicating the ceiling reach is arbitrary. For example, in a game in which the ceiling reach and the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap, it is also possible to display a video or still image (cut-in image of a character, etc.) to indicate the ceiling reach on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a), or to output sound effects or background music indicating the ceiling reach from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 6>
In the above thirteenth embodiment, when the ceiling reach and the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap, the ceiling reach is indicated in the first half part and the 6R variable probability jackpot result is indicated in the second half part. That is, the ceiling reach is indicated in the order of the 6R variable probability jackpot result, but this is not limited to this. When the ceiling reach and the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap, it is also possible to indicate the 6R variable probability jackpot result in the first half part and the ceiling reach in the second half part, that is, to indicate the 6R variable probability jackpot result in the order of the ceiling reach.

<Modification 7>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the second normal game state to which the game is transferred in the case of a 6R special jackpot result is configured to continue until the next jackpot result, but this is not limited to this. The second normal game state may also be limited in number of times, as in the third normal game state. For example, when the game state is transferred to the second normal game state in the case of a 6R special jackpot result, the game state may be transferred to the first normal game state when the number of times that have been played without a jackpot result after the special game state ends reaches a predetermined reference number of times. This predetermined reference number of times may be the same as the reference number of times that is set by reaching the ceiling, or may be greater than the reference number of times.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state, which is entered as a result of a special miss, is notified. In this embodiment, the configuration related to the notification of the remaining number of games is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the types of special misses in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129.

In this embodiment, the special failure results are special failure result A, special failure result B, and special failure result C. Although all of special failure results A to C trigger a transition to high frequency support mode A, there is a difference in the number of games that can be played during high frequency support mode A, i.e., the standard number of times to end.

Specifically, if special failure result A occurs, the termination reference number is set to "20 times", if special failure result B occurs, the termination reference number is set to "40 times", and if special failure result C occurs, the termination reference number is set to "100 times". In other words, the order of the termination reference number is favored in the order of special failure result A < special failure result B < special failure result C. In this configuration, if a special failure result occurs, the player will hope that it will be special failure result C.

(Game board unit 80C)
As shown in the schematic diagram of Fig. 130, a reserved display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aC of the symbol display device 95C. The reserved display area is composed of a reserved number display area Da in which unit reserved display areas of the same number as the maximum reserved number when game balls enter the operation ports 91 and 92 are arranged in the left and right direction and displayed as partitions, and an execution target display area Dc in which a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the game round being executed can be displayed.

In the center frame 96C of the game board unit 80C, in the lower part (lower frame part) of the display screen 95aC, more specifically, in a position close to the first unit reserved display area constituting the reserved number display area Da (a position directly below the execution target display area Dc), a number display unit 88C is provided which is a counter that displays the number of remaining plays until the end of high frequency support mode A. The number display unit 88C is a segment display connected to the notification/presentation control device 140, and is subject to display control by the notification/presentation control device 140. When transitioning to high frequency support mode A, the notification/presentation control device 140 displays the number of times corresponding to the end reference number of times on the number display unit 88C, and controls the display so that the number is subtracted by "1" each time a play round progresses. In other words, in the fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A, each time the reserved icon MP shifts from the reserved number display area Da (specifically, the first unit reserved number display area) to the execution target display area Dc, the remaining number of games displayed in the number display section 88C is subtracted by "1."

In this embodiment, the display of the remaining number of plays on the number of plays display unit 88C is configured not to be executed in game states other than the fourth normal game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of plays may be displayed on the number of plays display unit 88C even in other game states (game states in which a limit is placed on the number of plays) such as the third normal game state.

Next, the configuration related to the display of the changing patterns for each game round and an overview of the display will be described with reference to Figures 131 to 133. Figure 131 is a schematic diagram for explaining the overview of the display on the pattern display device 95C (display screen 95aC).

Three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are set as the pattern rows displayed on the pattern display device 95C. The pattern variable display area on the display screen 95a is broadly divided into a left variable display area DL, a center variable display area DM, and a right variable display area DR corresponding to each of these pattern rows, and the patterns of each pattern row are displayed as if scrolling in a predetermined direction (e.g., from top to bottom) with periodicity. In each variable display area DL, DM, and DR, three patterns are displayed statically for each pattern row, resulting in a total of nine patterns (3 x 3) being displayed statically in the variable display area.

As shown in (j) to (t) of Figure 132, the above-mentioned designs are composed of a total of 10 main designs, which are the numbers "1" to "9" and hearts, and secondary designs, which are pictorial designs imitating seashells.

As shown in Figure 133 (a schematic diagram showing each symbol row), the left and center symbol rows have 10 main symbols arranged in ascending order with sub-symbols in between. In contrast, the right symbol row has 10 main symbols arranged in descending order with sub-symbols in between. The "heart" symbol is placed between the "1" and "9" symbols.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 131, five effective lines, namely, the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, the left upward line L4, and the right upward line L5, are set on the display screen 95aC of the symbol display device 95C. Then, during each game, the variable display of the symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol row → the right symbol row → the middle symbol row, and when the variable display of all the symbol rows is finished (determined display), it is clearly indicated to the player whether the result is a jackpot result, a special miss result, or a normal miss result. Specifically, the "1" symbol to the "9" symbol are symbols for a jackpot, and when the same combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed (determined display) on any of the above-mentioned effective lines L1 to L5, it is clearly indicated that a jackpot result has occurred (see FIG. 134(a)). The "heart" symbols are symbols for special misses, and when a combination of these "heart" symbols is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) combination on any of the pay lines L1 to L5, it is clearly indicated that this is a special miss (see Figure 134 (b)).

In addition, according to the relationship between the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 133 and the pay line shown in FIG. 131, even if the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is displaced under the circumstances where the re-variation display described below is being executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result is prevented from passing over the pay line. This is preferable in terms of preventing the player from mistaking a special miss result for a big win result.

When the above-mentioned reach display is performed, first the display of the changing patterns is terminated in the left changing display area DL, and then in the state where the display of the changing patterns is terminated in the right changing display area DR, a reach line is formed by displaying a pattern with the same number attached to at least one of the active lines L1 to L5 as stopped, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the display of the changing patterns is performed in the middle changing display area DM, resulting in the reach display. Then, when the open/close execution mode occurs, the same pattern as the pattern forming the reach line is displayed as stopped on the reach line, and the display of the changing patterns in the middle pattern row is terminated.

In this embodiment, one of the features is that after the "heart" symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result is stopped and displayed after the reach display, the player is notified of the currently set reference number of times to end the game using the symbol combination. Specifically, the game turn performance executed by the symbol display device 95C in the game turn corresponding to the special failure result is composed of two parts: a first half part in which the variable display of symbols starts → reach display → a provisional stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result is executed, and a second half part in which the reference number of times to end the game is notified. In the game turn resulting in the special failure result, the outline of the performance is determined by the special failure setting process, which is part of the special failure performance setting process (see step S1907 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140. The special failure setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 136.

(Special setting process)
135(a), in the special miss setting process, first, in step S4001, a temporary stop line for temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result is determined. Specifically, a line for temporarily stopping the "heart" symbol combination among the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined.

In the next step S4002, the pattern of the changing symbols until the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result is temporarily stopped and displayed, i.e., the outline of the presentation in the first half part, is determined. Specifically, either the above-mentioned normal reach A to B or super reach A to C is determined as the pattern of the changing symbols in the first half part.

In the next step S4003, the pattern of the symbol change display after the provisional stop (pattern of the symbol change display in the latter part) and the final stop line for the "heart" symbol combination to be finally stopped (confirmed display) when transitioning to the confirmed display are determined. The symbol change display in the latter part is configured to display the change (hereinafter also referred to as re-change display) such that all symbol rows are synchronously scrolled while maintaining the "heart" symbol combination, and each time the "heart" symbol combination reaches the provisional stop line, the end reference number is incremented and displayed in the number display section 88C.

However, how long this rotation display continues varies depending on the type of special miss result, i.e., the set end reference number. Also, the final stop line where the "heart" symbol combination is displayed when the final display is confirmed does not necessarily match the provisional stop line, and there are cases where an effective line different from the provisional stop line is determined as the final stop line. Here, with reference to Figure 135 (b), a supplementary explanation is given on the relationship between the special miss result and the variable display pattern.

If the current game result is special miss result A, which has a termination reference number of 20, the number of spins in the latter part is set to be between 2 and 3. For example, if the number of spins = 2, the spinning display will end when the combination of "heart" symbols has made two spins. In other words, the provisional stop line and the final stop line will match. In contrast, if the number of spins = 2 spins + α, the spinning display will continue even after the combination of "heart" symbols has made two spins and reached the provisional stop line, and the spinning display will end before the combination of "heart" symbols reaches the provisional stop line again. In other words, the provisional stop line and the final stop line will not match.

If the current game result is special miss result B, which has a termination reference number of 40, the number of spins in the latter part is set to be 4 or more and less than 5. For example, if the number of spins = 4, the spinning display will end when the combination of "heart" symbols has made 4 spins. In other words, the provisional stop line and the final stop line will match. In contrast, if the number of spins = 4 spins + α, the spinning display will continue even after the combination of "heart" symbols has made 4 spins and reached the provisional stop line, and the spinning display will end before the combination of "heart" symbols reaches the provisional stop line again. In other words, the provisional stop line and the final stop line will not match.

If the current game result is special miss result C, which has a termination reference number of 100, the number of spins in the latter half is set to 10. In this case, the spinning display ends when the "heart" symbol combination has spun 10 times. In other words, the provisional stop line and the final stop line will match.

When determining step S4002, a difference is provided so that the higher the termination reference number set for a special miss result, the higher the probability that normal reaches A to B will be executed. In other words, a difference is provided so that if a special miss result is reached after a normal reach, there is an increased expectation that a higher termination reference number will be set than if a special miss result is reached after a super reach. This is a device to ensure smooth game progress by preventing the variable display time of game turns from becoming unnecessarily long, even when the number of spins in the latter half part is high.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 136, the processing for the progression of the second half part (hereinafter referred to as the special miss second half part processing) among the processing for the progression of the presentation of the game round related to the special miss result executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140 will be described. The special miss second half part processing is a processing that constitutes part of the first variable processing (see step S1805 in FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140, and is executed during the second half part.

(Second half part processing for special missing parts)
In the latter half part processing for special miss, first, it is judged whether the re-changing display of the symbol combination in the latter half part is in progress. If the re-changing display is not in progress, a negative judgment is made in step S4101 and the process proceeds to step S4102. In step S4102, it is judged whether it is the timing to light up the effective line (temporary stop line) in which the "heart" symbol combination is temporarily stopped. If a positive judgment is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4103, where the effective line light-up process is executed, and then the latter half part processing is terminated. In the effective line light-up process, a valid line light-up command is sent to the display control device 410, and sound effects for effective line light-up are output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the receipt of the effective line light-up command, the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 95C to light up the temporary stop line brightly. As a result, the line in which the symbol combination is temporarily stopped is clearly displayed to the player.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, it is judged whether or not it is the timing to start the re-change display. If a negative judgment is made in step S4104, the process for the latter half part ends as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S4104, the process proceeds to step S4105, where the re-change display start process is executed, and the process for the latter half part ends. In the re-change display start process, a re-change start command is sent to the display control device 410, and the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to one corresponding to the re-change. Based on receiving the re-change start command, the display control device 410 starts the re-change display of the pattern combination currently being displayed as a temporary stop.

Returning to the explanation of step S4101, if the re-changing display is in progress, a positive judgment is made in step S4101 and the process proceeds to step S4106. In step S4106, it is determined whether it is time to accelerate or decelerate the re-changing display of the pattern row while maintaining the synchronized state. If a positive judgment is made in step S4016, the process proceeds to step S4107, where the speed change process is executed, and then the latter half of the process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the scroll speed is changed so that as the "heart" pattern combination approaches the temporary stop line, the scroll speed decreases, and as it moves away from the temporary stop line, the scroll speed increases. A speed change table that specifies the relationship between the change speed and the scroll position of the patterns is stored in ROM 443, and in the processing of step S4107, the change speed is determined by referring to the speed change table. The display control device 410 changes the change display speed of the patterns so that it becomes the change speed determined by the notification/performance control device 140.

Returning to the explanation of step S4106, if a negative judgment is made in step S4106, the process proceeds to step S4108. In step S4108, it is judged whether or not the timing is such that the combination of "heart" symbols has reached the activated line (temporary stop line) that is being illuminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S4108, the process of the latter half part ends as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S4108, the process proceeds to step S4109, where a count-up process is executed. In this count-up process, the number displayed in the number of times display unit 88C is incremented by "10". In other words, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times to be played that is displayed in the number of times display unit 88C is incremented by "10" each time the combination of "heart" symbols has reached the activated line that is being illuminated.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 137, the special miss variation end process (hereinafter referred to as special miss variation end process) will be described as part of the process for progressing the presentation of a game round related to a special miss result executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140. The special miss variation end process is a process that constitutes part of the first variation end process (see step S1806 in FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140.

(Special deviation end processing)
In the special miss variation end process, first, a final display process is executed in step S4201. Specifically, a final display command is sent to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the final display (final stop display) is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on receiving the final display command, the display control device 410 causes the symbol combination of "heart" symbols to be displayed as a final stop on the final stop line determined in step S4003.

If the symbol combination of "heart" symbols is finally displayed on a valid line other than the illuminated valid line, i.e., if the provisional stop line and the final stop line do not match, a negative judgment is made in step S4202, and the special miss variation end process is terminated. If the symbol combination of "heart" symbols is finally displayed on a valid line that is illuminated, i.e., if the provisional stop line and the final stop line match, a positive judgment is made in step S4202, and the process proceeds to step S4202. In step S4202, a count-up process is executed. In this count-up process, the number displayed in the number display unit 88C is incremented by "10". In other words, in this embodiment, the remaining number of plays displayed in the number display unit 88C is incremented by "10" at the timing when the symbol combination of "heart" symbols is finally displayed on the illuminated valid line.

Next, the flow of the game presentation for a game that results in a special miss will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game presentation for a game that results in a special miss B during the first normal game state.

At the time ti1, which is the start of a game round, the display of changing patterns on the operating port display unit and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95C begin. This game round corresponds to special miss result B, and at the time ti2, which is a predetermined period of time after the time ti1, the "heart" pattern in the left pattern row and the "heart" pattern in the right pattern row are displayed as stopped (provisionally stopped) on the pay line L2, and the display transitions to a reach display.

At the timing of ti3 thereafter, a symbol combination of "heart" symbols is displayed (provisionally) as a symbol combination corresponding to special miss result B on the pay line L2. This clearly informs the player that a special miss result has occurred. However, in this embodiment, the symbol combination of "heart" symbols is displayed in the same manner regardless of whether special miss result A to C occurs. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine the set end reference number from the symbol combination displayed at this point. Note that the variable display of symbols in the operation port display section continues at the timing of ti3.

At time ti4 after the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as stopped on the pay line L2, the pay line L2 is illuminated and the number display section 88C (remaining number counter) displays "0". At the following time ti5, each symbol row that was displayed as stopped (provisionally stopped) starts to scroll synchronously while maintaining the "heart" symbol combination. In other words, the display transitions from the provisionally stopped display to the re-changing display described above.

At the timing of ti6 when the symbol combination of the "heart" symbols completes one revolution and reaches the valid line L2 again, the value of the remaining number counter is incremented from "0" to "10". The synchronous scrolling of the symbol row continues thereafter, and each time the symbol combination of the "heart" symbols reaches the valid line L2, the value of the remaining number counter is incremented from "10" to "20" to "30" (ti7 timing, ti8 timing). At the timing of ti9 when the symbol combination of the "heart" symbols completes its final revolution and is displayed as stopped on the valid line L2 (final stop display), the value of the remaining number counter is incremented from "30" to "40", the display of the variable symbols on the display unit for the operation port ends, and the symbol corresponding to the special miss result B is displayed as stopped. Then, at the timing of ti10 when the fixed display period has elapsed, the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode is shifted to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A.

The 14th embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot result is reached, the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode (more specifically, high-frequency support mode B) via a special game state (opening/closing execution mode), and if a special miss result is reached, the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode (more specifically, high-frequency support mode A) without going through the special game state (opening/closing execution mode). This diversifies the game flow when the support mode is changed to a higher level, which helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In particular, when a special failure occurs and the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode A, the high-frequency support mode termination reference number is set to any one of 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times, thereby realizing further diversification of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when a special failure occurs, the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result (the symbol combination of "heart" symbols) is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the player is informed that a special failure has occurred. After that, the symbol combination is displayed in a cyclical manner before the final stop display, and the value of the remaining number counter is updated (incremented) in conjunction with the cyclical display. The player can grasp that a special failure has occurred based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result being stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed), and thereafter, the value of the remaining number counter is updated according to the cyclical display of the symbol combination, so that the player can grasp the current termination reference number. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the attention to the game when a transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A is made as a result of a special failure.

If the remaining number counter is incremented each time the "heart" symbol combination goes around, the player will hope that the orbiting action will continue for as long as possible, and this effectively prevents the player from getting the impression that the transition to the normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A is being unnecessarily delayed.

As described above, in a configuration in which the value of the remaining number counter is updated in conjunction with the cyclic display of the symbol combination (the "heart" symbol combination) corresponding to the special miss result, if a situation occurs in which the symbol combination collapses during the cyclical process, it may give the impression that the cyclical process is not going well, i.e., that the value of the remaining number counter is not updated, and attention to the presentation may decrease early. Therefore, if the cyclical display is performed so that the "heart" symbol combination is maintained as shown in this embodiment, or more specifically, if the cyclical display is performed so that each picture row is synchronized, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. Note that such a configuration is also preferable in order to avoid the player misunderstanding that the "heart" symbol combination being displayed as a stopped symbol was a mistake.

In addition, in this embodiment, the other symbol combinations that pass through the pay line during the lap display are configured so that they do not include symbol combinations that correspond to a jackpot result. This configuration can effectively prevent players from being misled by suppressing unnecessary teasing that a jackpot will be reached. This is preferable in terms of preventing a decrease in attention to the update of the remaining number counter value linked to the special lap display.

As shown in this embodiment, if the stop line where the symbol combination of "heart" symbols is displayed stopped (temporarily stopped) is aligned with the stop line that triggers the update of the remaining number counter value, it is possible to prevent players from becoming confused due to the diversification of the presentation. This is preferable for optimally exerting the above-mentioned effect of increasing attention. In particular, in this embodiment, it is possible to end the circular display when the symbol combination of "heart" symbols reaches another active line before the active line (stop line) that triggers the update of the remaining number counter value. This is preferable for realizing the diversification of the presentation.

As shown in this embodiment, if the value of the remaining number counter is kept hidden when the "heart" symbol combination is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped), and the value of the remaining number counter is started to be displayed when the symbol combination reaches the stop line after being displayed variably, it becomes possible to make the symbol combination go around at least once. This is preferable in terms of expanding the range of the set end reference number of times, while preventing the flow of updating the number of times from becoming stale.

<Modification 1>
In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, while the changing display of the pattern is being executed in the operating port display section, the pattern combination corresponding to the special miss result is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stopped display) on the pattern display device 95C, and the process moves to the latter half part, in which a special effect is executed to notify the end reference number of times. However, the specific configuration for securing the time to execute the special effect is arbitrary, and it can also be modified as follows.

For example, in a game round that results in a special miss, a fixed display time longer than the fixed display time of other game rounds may be set, and the special effect may be executed during the fixed display. Also, in a game round that results in special miss result B, the special effect may not be executed, and the special effect may be executed during the first game round after transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A. In this case, it is preferable to set the variable display time in the first game round to be long enough to execute the special effect. If the first game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the symbol combination that is finally stopped and displayed at the end of the special effect may be changed (promoted) from the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result to the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result.

<Modification 2>
In the above fourteenth embodiment, the remaining number counter is incremented by "10" each time the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol goes around once and reaches the target line in the latter half part, but it is not necessarily necessary to limit the incremented value to one type. It is also possible to increment one of a plurality of candidates when the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol goes around once and reaches the target line in the latter half part. For example, the remaining number counter may be incremented by "10" and by "20".

<Modification 3>
In the above fourteenth embodiment, the scrolling speed of the pattern row is accelerated or decelerated during special variable display, but the scrolling speed of the pattern row may be configured to be constant during special variable display.

<Modification 4>
In the special variable display, each symbol row is configured to rotate in synchronization, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is formed at least when the target line is reached, and this does not deny the configuration in which each symbol row rotates asynchronously so that the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is broken during the process.

<Modification 5>
In the above-mentioned fourteenth embodiment, the temporary stop line and the target line that triggers the remaining number counter to count up are the same valid line, but the temporary stop line and the target line that triggers the remaining number counter to count up may also be different.

<Modification 6>
In the above-mentioned fourteenth embodiment, the special variable display is configured to synchronously scroll each symbol row so that the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is maintained, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is formed at least when the target line that triggers the count-up of the remaining number counter is reached, and it is also possible to make the movement of each symbol row asynchronous.

<Modification 7>
In the above fourteenth embodiment, the remaining number counter is configured to display "0" when the "heart" symbol combination is temporarily stopped on the active line and then the circulating display starts (when a period of the same length as the fixed display time has elapsed since the temporary stop), but this is not limited to this. The remaining number counter may be configured to display "0" when the "heart" symbol combination is temporarily stopped on the active line.

In addition, the initial value displayed on the remaining number counter is not limited to "0" and can be set to the minimum value of "10."

<Modification 8>
In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, the remaining number of games is displayed on the number display unit 88C, but this can also be changed to display the remaining number of games on the pattern display device 95C (display screen 95aC).

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, one of the features is that a special notice performance is executed to notify the transition to the fourth normal game state in a game round prior to the game round in which the transition condition to the fourth normal game state is satisfied. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80D (game board 80aD) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80D will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board unit 80D.

The game board 80aD has a number of openings, large and small, that run through it in the thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, etc. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83A, they are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and based on the detection result, a bonus such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is awarded to the player. In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aD, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 86.

The game board 80aD is also provided with numerous game nails 87 for dispersing and adjusting the flow path of the game balls as appropriate, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. The game nails 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 and the like will win with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A, and in particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric device 93A as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

A center frame 96A is provided on the game board 80aD so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the left side, which is similar to the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, the second actuation port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A is changed so that the game ball launched to the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A, and the game ball launched to the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the game ball launched to the left route so that it cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route depending on the game status, it is possible to advance the game in an advantageous manner. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony of the game is prevented.

A reserve display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The reserve display area is composed of a reserve number display area Da, which is displayed in a partitioned manner with unit reserve display areas aligned horizontally in the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls when game balls enter the operating ports 91, 92, and an execution target display area Dc that can display a reserve image (reserve icon) corresponding to the current game round. The reserve number display area Da can be switched between a display mode composed of four unit reserve display areas and a display mode composed of eight unit reserve areas.

The main destination of the game ball flowing down the left route is the first operating port 91A, and during the low-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reservation related to the first operating port 91A. In contrast, the main destination of the game ball flowing down the right route is the second operating port 92A, and during the high-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reservation related to the second operating port 92A. Due to this reason, in many cases, the number of reserved icons displayed in the reserved number display area Da is four or less. For this reason, the display mode of the reserved number display area Da is basically a display mode in which the reserved number display area Da is composed of four unit reserved display areas as shown in FIG. 139, and only when the number of reserved icons exceeds four, the display mode is switched to a display mode composed of eight unit reserved display areas. Note that the function of switching the display mode of the reserved number display area Da according to the situation can be omitted.

In the center frame 96A of the game board unit 80D, in the lower part (lower frame part) of the display screen 95aA, more specifically in a position close to the first unit reserved display area constituting the reserved number display area Da (directly below the execution target display area Dc), a number display unit 88D is provided which is a counter that displays the number of remaining plays until the end of high frequency support mode A. The number display unit 88D is a segment display connected to the notification/presentation control device 140, and is subject to display control by the notification/presentation control device 140. When transitioning to high frequency support mode A, the notification/presentation control device 140 displays the number of times corresponding to the end reference number of times on the number display unit 88D, and controls the display so that the number is subtracted by "1" each time a play round progresses. In other words, in the fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A, each time the reserved icon MP shifts from the reserved number display area Da (specifically, the first unit reserved number display area) to the execution target display area Dc, the remaining number of games displayed in the number display section 88C is subtracted by "1."

In this embodiment, the display of the remaining number of plays on the number of plays display unit 88D is configured not to be executed in game states other than the fourth normal game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of plays may be displayed on the number of plays display unit 88D even in other game states (game states in which a limit is placed on the number of plays) such as the third normal game state.

In addition, on the back side of the game board 80aD, a special effect device 500D is provided that performs a notice of the special miss result (transition to the fourth normal game state) in a game round executed before the game round resulting in the special miss result. The special effect device 500D is disposed in a position overlapping with the right route when viewed from the front of the game machine, specifically below the number display unit 88D described above and to the side of the actuation port unit 82A (specifically the first actuation port 91A), and is visible from the front of the game machine through the game board 80aD. It can also be said that the reserved display area on the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A is surrounded by the special effect device 500D, the pattern change display area ME on the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A, and the first actuation port 91A where the special miss is provided. The specific configuration of the special effect device 500D will be described in detail later.

(Reserved ball storage area)
In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information based on winning into the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that in the first embodiment. Below, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of Figure 140.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserved area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserved area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the second actuation port 92A.

The reserve area Ra for the first actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area. The reserve area Rb for the second actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (reserved information) is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area.

In this embodiment, when reserved information is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When reserved information is not stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port and reserved information is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the configuration was such that a special loss could occur in either the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, but in this embodiment, the configuration is such that a special loss could occur only in one of the lotteries based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, which is different from the first embodiment. Below, the win/loss table for the actuation port in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 58 and 59.

(Actual/invalid table for operating port)
As shown in Figure 141, the hit/miss table for the first operating port is set up as a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for low probability) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for high probability).

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (Fig. 141(a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", a total of six. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Fig. 141(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597", a total of 30. In other words, out of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the jackpot result.

In addition, in a situation where the win/lose table for the low probability mode and the win/lose table for the high probability mode are referenced when drawing a lottery based on a winning entry into the first operating port 91A, the random number values that result in a special miss (i.e., special miss information) are all "2", "4", "6", "12", "14", ... "596", a total of 150. In other words, of the values of the win random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14", ... "596" correspond to special miss results. And all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special miss correspond to miss results (normal miss results).

As shown in FIG. 142, the hit/miss table for the second operating port is set to a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for low probability) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (a group of hit/miss information for high probability).

In a situation where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (Fig. 142(a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", a total of six. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in a situation where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Fig. 142(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597", a total of 30. In other words, out of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to a jackpot result. And all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a losing result (normal losing result). In other words, in a lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A, it is configured so that it does not result in a "special losing" as shown in the first embodiment.

Next, we will explain the pre-confirmation process (see step S306 in FIG. 22) for the hold notice (including the above-mentioned notice performance) and the hold command setting process (step S307 in FIG. 22) that are executed as part of the timer interrupt process by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162.

(Advance confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 143, in the advance confirmation process, first, in step S4301, the active reserved memory number N and the common reserved number CRN stored in the reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432A are read, and the information on the reserved number is stored in the register of the MPU 402. After that, in step S4302, it is confirmed whether the reserved information acquired by this winning includes information corresponding to the big win result or information corresponding to the special miss result. The details of this judgment are the same as the hit/miss judgment process in step S702 above, so the explanation will be omitted.

If the confirmation process of step S4302 confirms that a jackpot will occur, a positive determination is made in step S4303 and the process proceeds to step S4304. In step S4304, jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this advance confirmation process ends. In step S4304, the information for type determination from the reserved information acquired in step S304 above based on the current winning, i.e., the value of the acquired type counter C2, is grasped, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the allocation table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4304 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the confirmation process of step S4302 confirms that a special miss will occur, a negative determination is made in step S4303 and a positive determination is made in step S4350, and the process proceeds to step S4306. In step S4306, the special miss occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. In step S4306, the information for type determination from the pending information acquired in step S304 above based on the current win, i.e., the value of the acquired type counter C2, is grasped, and the type of special miss is determined by referring to the allocation table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4306 includes information related to the type of special miss.

If it is confirmed in the confirmation process of step S4302 that a normal miss will occur, negative judgments are made in steps S4303 and S4350, and the process proceeds to step S4307. In step S4307, a normal miss-time reach confirmation process is executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 already acquired in step S304 is grasped, and a lottery table for the occurrence of a miss reach is referenced to confirm whether or not a miss reach will occur. If a miss reach will not occur (if a complete miss occurs), a negative judgment is made in step S4308, and the pre-confirmation process ends. If a miss reach will occur, a positive judgment is made in step S4308, and the process proceeds to step S4309. In step S4309, the miss reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and the pre-confirmation process ends. Note that the information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4309 includes information on the general type of miss reach (whether it is a super reach or not).

Next, we will explain the process of setting pending commands by referring to the flowchart in Figure 144.

(Setting pending commands)
In the process of setting the reserved command, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If the jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S4402, where a reserved command for the jackpot is set. The reserved command for the jackpot includes information on the type of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4401, i.e., if it is determined that no jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S4403, where it is determined whether or not special miss occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402. If special miss occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S4404, where a special miss response hold command is set. The special miss response hold command includes information regarding the type of special miss.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4403, the process proceeds to step S4405, where it is judged whether or not information on the occurrence of a miss reach is stored in the register of MPU 402. If information on the occurrence of a miss reach is stored, a positive judgment is made in step S4405, and the process proceeds to step S4406, where a miss reach-compatible hold command is set. The miss reach-compatible hold command includes information on the general type of miss reach (whether it is a super reach or not). If a negative judgment is made in step S4405, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, a miss reach-incompatible hold command (complete miss-compatible hold command) is set.

When setting a hold command in steps S4402, S4404, and S4406, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referenced, as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S714 above. The hold command set in this way is sent to the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 can grasp the variable display mode of the pattern, etc. based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time can change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting a game round related to the hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, information related to the variable display time is not stored.

After executing any one of the command setting processes in steps S4402, S4404, S4406, and S4407, in step S4408, a process is executed to set the reserved number information for the reserved command. The information of the reserved command is configured as multiple bytes of information, and in step S4408, the reserved number information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4301 in the immediately preceding advance confirmation process (FIG. 143) is first read, and then the read reserved number information is stored in the bit for the reserved number information in the reserved command already set by an arithmetic process such as a logical OR. As a result, the reserved command set in any one of the processes in steps S4402, S4404, S4406, and S4407 contains information for identifying which reserved information corresponds to the reserved command. After executing the process in step S4408 described above in detail, this reserved command setting process is terminated.

The hold command with the information on the number of hold items included in step S4408 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 by the external output process of step S401 in the next normal processing (Figure 23). By receiving the hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines that the amount of hold information has increased. The notification/performance control device 140 also adds hold notice information, which will be described later, to the hold command and sends it to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 executes processes such as hold display and hold notice based on the received hold command.

Next, we will explain the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140. The process related to the hold notice is broadly divided into a command response process that determines the command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice performance setting process that determines the mode of the hold notice.

(Pending command handling process)
In the hold command response process, when a hold command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, a process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed. The hold command response process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

In the pending command response process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. This command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been previously stored, so that even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the area of the command storage area 461 that is the current target for reading. Note that this configuration for reading commands is the same when reading out other commands, such as a command to start fluctuations.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area 467 has the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8, and each area is configured to store one hold information. The hold information stored in each area is shifted to the lower area side in order by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3 ... eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140, the hold information is stored in chronological order regardless of the ball entry destination, similar to the hold ball storage area 432 (more specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port) of the main control device 162. Specifically, the system identifies the number of pending items included in the currently received command, and stores the various pieces of information listed above in the area corresponding to the identified number of pending items among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

When the hold command described above is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 444, and when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. Each of these flags triggers the setting process for the hold notice performance (hold notice performance setting process) described below, and is erased when the hold notice performance setting process is completed.

The MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 performs a jackpot notice effect setting process based on the information stored in the reserved information storage area. The jackpot notice effect setting process will now be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 145. The jackpot notice effect setting process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 msec), and is executed on the condition that the reserved command or shift command described above is received. In other words, in this embodiment, the trigger for executing the jackpot notice effect is when reserved information is acquired in conjunction with a win at the actuation port 91A, 92A, or when reserved information is consumed in conjunction with the progress of the game.

(Big win notice performance setting process)
In the big win notice effect setting process, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the big win notice effect is being performed. If the determination in step S4501 is affirmative, the big win notice effect setting process is terminated. If the determination in step S4501 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4502.

In step S4502, it is determined whether or not a jackpot preview effect restriction flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a positive determination is made in step S4502, the jackpot preview effect setting process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4502, the process proceeds to step S4503.

In step S4503, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162. If a positive determination is made in step S4503, a lottery process is executed in step S4504 when a hold command is received, and it is determined whether or not a jackpot preview performance will be performed. If a negative determination is made in step S4503, the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S4505, that is, if it is determined that neither a hold command nor a shift command has been received, the jackpot preview performance setting process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4505, a lottery process is executed in step S4506 when a shift command is received, and it is determined whether or not a jackpot preview performance will be performed.

After executing the lottery process of step S4504 or step S4506, proceed to step S4507. In step S4507, it is determined whether or not the jackpot notice performance has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S4507, the jackpot notice performance setting process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S4507, proceed to step S4508. In step S4508, a jackpot notice performance detail determination process is executed. In the following step S4509, a jackpot notice performance flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and in step S4510, a special miss notice performance restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. The jackpot notice performance flag set in step S4509 will be erased when the jackpot notice performance ends. In the above step S4501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot notice performance is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot notice performance flag is set. After that, in step S4511, the jackpot preview selection start process is executed, and the jackpot preview performance setting process ends.

Next, the process of determining the details of the big win preview performance in step S4508 will be described with reference to Figures 146 and 147. Figure 146 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the details of the big win preview performance, and Figure 147 is a schematic diagram showing the big win preview performance.

(Jackpot notice performance details determination process)
As shown in FIG. 146, in the process of determining the details of the big win preview performance, first, in step S4601, the target for changing the display mode is determined.

The big win preview effect shown in this embodiment is executed by changing the state of the reserved display displayed in the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 95A (display screen 95aA) to one that corresponds to the big win preview effect. Specifically, the reserved icon MP displayed in the reserved number display area Da that corresponds to the relevant play count (relevant reserved) is changed (in this embodiment, the color is changed). Specifically, there are multiple color patterns for the reserved icon MP, specifically three patterns: white (level 0), blue (level 1), yellow (level 2), and red (level 3), and the color of the relevant reserved icon MP is changed to a color other than white.

If the reserved number corresponds to a jackpot result, the order of likely selection is level 3 > level 2 > level 1, and if the reserved number corresponds to a normal miss result, the order of likely selection is level 1 > level 2 > level 3. In other words, when the jackpot prediction performance is executed, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation of a jackpot result.

The big win preview effects are broadly divided into fixed preview effects, in which the color of the changed reserved icon MP is maintained until it shifts to the execution target display area Dc, and step-up preview effects, in which the color changes before it shifts to the execution target display area Dc.

In step S4601, the pending icon to be color-changed is determined. In the following step S4602, the final color (display mode) of the pending icon after it is moved to the execution target display area Dc is determined. Then, in step S4603, based on the result, the initial color (display mode) is determined.

After that, in step S4604, the remaining number of shifts until the remaining corresponding pending icons MP are moved to the execution target display area Dc is determined, and the above-mentioned step-up pattern is determined based on the determined number of shifts. Note that if the initial color and the final color match, no step-up occurs.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 performs display control of the hold display area NE, etc., based on the hold commands and shift commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 140. Below, the hold display control command response processing executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 148. The hold display control command response processing is processing executed as part of periodic processing (command response processing) that is activated at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Hold display control command response processing)
In the hold display control command response process, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the notification/performance control device 140. If a positive determination is made in step S4701, the process proceeds to step S4702. In step S4702, the value of the hold number counter (hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is incremented by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4702, proceed to step S4703. In step S4703, an addition flag is set in the work RAM 474. In the hold display control process described below, a process is performed to add a hold icon MP to the hold number display area Da based on this addition flag. Thereafter, this hold display control command response process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4701, if a negative judgment is made in step S4701, i.e., if a hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4704. In step S4704, it is judged whether or not a shift command has been received from the notification/performance control device 140. If a negative judgment is made in step S4704, the process for handling commands for holding display control is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S4704, the process proceeds to step S4705. In step S4705, the value of the hold number counter (hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is decremented by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4705, proceed to step S4706. In step S4706, a shift flag is set in the work RAM 474. In the hold display control process described below, a process is performed to shift the hold icon MP based on this shift flag. Thereafter, this hold display control command response process is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 149, we will explain the pending display process that is executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410.

(Pending display processing)
In the reserved display process, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not an additional flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If the determination in step S4801 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not to change the color of the reserved icon to be added this time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to make the color of the reserved icon to be added this time a color other than white based on the items determined in the big win advance notice performance detail determination process of FIG.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4802, normal addition processing is executed in step S4803. Specifically, if the execution target display area Dc is empty, a white hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the execution target display area Dc. If the execution target display area Dc is filled, a white hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the youngest unit hold display area (closest to the execution target display area Dc) among the unit hold display areas in which a hold icon MP is not displayed (is empty).

If a positive judgment is made in step S4802, a special addition process is performed in step S4804. Specifically, if the execution target display area Dc is empty, a hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the execution target display area Dc in the color (blue, yellow, or red) determined in step S4603. If the execution target display area Dc is filled, a hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the color (blue, yellow, or red) determined in step S4603 in the youngest unit hold display area (closest to the execution target display area Dc) among the unit hold display areas in which a hold icon MP is not displayed (empty).

After executing the processing of step S4803 or step S4804, in step S4805, the additional flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are erased, and the pending display processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4801, if a negative judgment is made in step S4801, the process proceeds to step S4806. In step S4806, it is determined whether or not a shift flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If a negative judgment is made in step S4806, the hold display process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S4806, the process proceeds to step S4807. In step S4807, it is determined whether or not to change the color of the hold icon being displayed during the current shift, based on the items determined in the jackpot advance performance detail determination process of FIG. 146.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4807, a normal shift process is executed in step S4808, and if a positive judgment is made in step S4807, a special shift process is executed in step S4807. In these normal shift processes and special shift processes, the reserved icon MP displayed in the execution target display area Dc is hidden, and then the reserved icon MP displayed in the reserved number display area Da is shifted to the execution target display area Dc side. In detail, the reserved icon MP displayed in the first unit reserved display area is moved to the execution target display area Dc, and the reserved icon MP displayed in the other unit reserved display areas is moved to the unit reserved display area to the left. By repeating such a movement, the displayed reserved icon MP is moved to the execution target display area Dc in order of the oldest, and is erased via the execution target display area Dc. Here, the normal shift process is configured so that the color of all reserved icons does not change before and after the shift, whereas the special shift process is configured so that the color of the corresponding reserved icon among the reserved icons changes with the shift.

After executing the shift process in step S4808 or step S4809, in step S4810, the shift flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are erased, and the pending display process is terminated.

Now, with reference to Figure 150, the flow of the jackpot preview performance will be explained. Figure 150(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first jackpot preview performance that does not support step-up, and Figure 150(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second jackpot preview performance that supports step-up. Note that Figure 150 illustrates an example in which the display mode of the reserved number display area Da is configured with four unit reserved display areas (first unit reserved display area Da1 to fourth unit reserved display area Da4).

In the example shown in FIG. 150(a), a reserved icon MP is added to the third unit reserved display area Da3 based on winning the first operating port 91A. This reserved icon corresponds to a jackpot result, and the color of the reserved icon MP added to the third unit reserved display area Da3 by winning the jackpot preview performance is red. This jackpot preview performance corresponds to the first jackpot preview performance that does not support step-up, and the color of the reserved icon MP is maintained as red as it shifts in the order of FIG. 120(a2) → FIG. 120(a3) → FIG. 120(a4) → FIG. 120(a5). By starting the jackpot preview performance during the game round before the game round related to the reserved icon MP starts, the player can be encouraged to pay attention to the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 150(b), a reserve icon MP is added to the third unit reserve display area Da3 based on an entry into the first operating port 91A. This reserve corresponds to a jackpot result, and the color of the reserve icon MP added to the third unit reserve display area Da3 by winning the jackpot preview performance is blue. This jackpot preview performance corresponds to the step-up compatible second jackpot preview performance, and the color of the reserve icon MP changes from blue to yellow to red as it shifts in the order of FIG. 120(b2) → FIG. 120(b3) → FIG. 120(b4) → FIG. 120(b5).

As shown in FIG. 120(b), the color of the reserved icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the color it ultimately changes to is red, it first changes to a lower color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation, and then steps up (promotes) to a higher color with a higher expectation when the reserved icon MP shifts. By using these two types of jackpot preview effects in combination, even if the color has a lower expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a color with a higher expectation by the time the corresponding game round is played. This prevents attention to the jackpot preview effect from decreasing too early.

As described above in detail, the big win preview effect is executed by the pattern display device 95A for displaying patterns. In contrast, the special miss preview effect is executed by the special effect device 500D provided separately from the pattern display device 95A. Below, a supplementary explanation of the special effect device 500D will be provided with reference to Figure 151. Figure 151 is a front view of the special effect device 500D.

(Special effect device 500D)
The special effect device 500D is a light-emitting effect device that shines light toward the front of the gaming machine through the transparent gaming board 80aD, and the part of the special effect device 500 that faces the back of the gaming board 80aA (opposing part 501D) is provided with a notice decoration part 511D that executes a special miss notice effect, and a notification decoration part 512D that notifies the player that a special miss result has occurred.

The notice decoration 511D and the notification decoration 512D are arranged side by side, with the former on the left and the latter on the right, and the notice decoration 511D is positioned closer to the pending number display area Da, the execution target display area Dc, and the actuation port unit 82A than the notice decoration 512D. The distance from the first actuation port 91A, which may result in a special miss, to the special performance device 500D (more specifically, the notice decoration 511D) is shorter than the distance from the first actuation port 91A to the pattern change display area ME on the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A.

The notification decorative part 512D can be switched between a lit state and an unlit state, and is configured to perform the above notification by switching from an unlit state to a lit state when high-frequency support mode A is entered due to a special miss result. The notification decorative part 512D is configured to be maintained in a lit state during high-frequency support mode A, and to switch to an unlit state when the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the above-mentioned termination reference number and high-frequency support mode A terminates.

The warning decoration 511D consists of a first light-emitting element 521D in blue, a second light-emitting element 522D in yellow, and a third light-emitting element 523D in red, and the first light-emitting element 521D, the second light-emitting element 522D, and the third light-emitting element 523D can be individually switched between a lit state and an unlit state.

The special miss notice performance has step 1 (see FIG. 152(a)) in which only the first light-emitting unit 521D is turned on, step 2 (see FIG. 152(b)) in which the second light-emitting unit 522D is turned on, and step 3 (see FIG. 152(c)) in which the third light-emitting unit 523D is turned on, and the expectation of the special miss result changes as the game progresses. For example, the expectation of the special miss result is set to 30% when step 1 is reached, 50% when step 2 is reached, and 80% when step 3 is reached. In the special miss notice performance corresponding to the special miss result, the notification decoration unit 512D finally turns on to indicate that the special miss result has occurred (see FIG. 152(d) for example), and in the special miss notice performance corresponding to the normal miss result, the notification decoration unit 511D and the notification decoration unit 512D turn off to indicate that the special miss result has not occurred.

In the special miss preview performance shown in this embodiment, the above steps do not necessarily advance when the number of play rounds advances, and there are cases where the steps do not advance even when the number of play rounds advances. Furthermore, the steps do not necessarily advance one step at a time, and there are cases where some steps are skipped. Incidentally, although details will be described later, even in the case of a special miss result, the special miss preview performance does not necessarily occur, and there are also cases where the notification decorative part 512D switches to a lit state without going through the special miss preview performance.

The MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 performs a special miss notice effect setting process based on the information stored in the reserved information storage area. Here, the special miss notice effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 153. The special miss notice effect setting process is a process executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle) during the first normal game state.
(Special miss notice setting process)
In the special miss notice effect setting process, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the confirmation display in the normal miss corresponding game round. If the determination is negative in step S4901, the special miss notice effect setting process ends as it is. If the determination is positive in step S4901, the process proceeds to step S4902.

In step S4902, it is determined whether or not a big win notice performance is currently being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a big win notice performance flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a positive determination is made in step S4902, the special miss notice performance setting process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S4902, the process proceeds to step S4903.

In step S4903, it is determined whether the subsequent reserved items stored include a reserved item corresponding to a special miss. If a positive determination is made in step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4904. In step S4904, it is determined whether the reserved items preceding the reserved item corresponding to the special miss include items corresponding to a miss reach. If a negative determination is made in step S4904, the process proceeds to step S4905. In step S4905, it is determined whether the reserved items preceding the reserved item corresponding to the special miss include items corresponding to a jackpot. If a negative determination is made in step S4905, the process proceeds to step S4906. In step S4906, a lottery process (lottery process corresponding to this premonition) is performed to determine whether or not to execute a special miss premonition performance corresponding to the special miss result. In this lottery process, a lottery table for the special miss premonition performance stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a special miss premonition performance. The probability of winning in this lottery process is 50%. In other words, in roughly half of the cases where a special miss occurs, the special miss result is notified via the special miss preview, while in the remaining half, the special miss result is notified without going through the special miss preview.

Returning to the explanation of step S4903, if a negative judgment is made in step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4907. In step S4907, the latest reserved item is provisionally set as a reserved item to be subjected to the special miss notice performance, and it is judged whether or not the reserved items preceding the provisionally set reserved item include items corresponding to a miss reach. If a negative judgment is made in step S4907, the process proceeds to step S4908. In step S4908, it is judged whether or not the reserved items preceding the provisionally set reserved item include items corresponding to a jackpot. If a negative judgment is made in step S4905, the process proceeds to step S4909. In step S4909, a lottery process (a lottery process corresponding to a false sign) is executed to determine whether or not to execute a special miss notice performance not corresponding to a special miss result. In this lottery process, a lottery table for a false sign stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 for a special miss notice performance is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a special miss notice performance. The probability of winning in this lottery process differs depending on the variable display mode of the provisionally set reserved item. Specifically, if the variable display mode is normal reach A to B, the winning probability is 1%, and if the variable display mode is super reach A to C, the winning probability is 3%.

If the special miss preview performance is selected in the lottery processing of steps S4906 and S4909, a positive judgment is made in step S4910 and the process proceeds to step S4911, where the special miss preview performance detail determination process is executed. If the special miss preview performance is not selected in the lottery processing of steps S4906 and S4909, or if a positive judgment is made in steps S4904, S4905, S4907, and S4908, a negative judgment is made in step S4910 and the special miss preview performance setting process is terminated.

Here, we will explain the process for determining the details of the special miss preview performance by referring to the flowchart in Figure 154.

In the process of determining the details of the special miss notice performance, first, in step S5001, the final display mode of the special performance device 500D is determined. That is, it is determined which of the above steps 1 to 3 will be used. Specifically, whether or not the reserved that triggered the start of this special miss notice performance (hereinafter referred to as the relevant reserved) corresponds to a special miss result, and if it does not correspond to a special miss result, which of steps 1 to 3 will be used is determined based on the variable display mode related to the relevant reserved and the number of reserved preceding the relevant reserved. For example, if the relevant reserved that triggered the start of this special miss notice corresponds to a special miss result, the order is configured so that the probability of being selected is higher in the order of step 1 < step 2 < step 3. If the relevant reserved does not correspond to a special miss result, the order is configured so that the probability of being selected is higher in the order of step 3 < step 2 < step 1. Note that, if the relevant reserved when the special miss notice performance is executed corresponds to a reach display, in the reach display executed by the pattern display device 95A, a reach line with a "heart" pattern is formed on at least one of the effective lines.

In the next step S5002, the number of remaining shifts until the corresponding hold is executed is determined. Then, in step S5003, a step-up pattern is determined based on the final display mode (steps 1 to 3) determined in step S5001 and the number of remaining shifts determined in step S5002.

For example, if the game round corresponds to a special miss result and the final display state is step 3, the step-up pattern to be executed is determined by referring to the remaining number of shifts from among a pattern of step 1 (first light-emitting unit 521D = light-emitting state) → step 2 (second light-emitting unit 522D = light-emitting state) → step 3 (third light-emitting unit 523D = light-emitting state), a pattern of step 1 (first light-emitting unit 521D = light-emitting state) → step 3 (third light-emitting unit 523D = light-emitting state), a pattern of step 2 (second light-emitting unit 522D = light-emitting state) → step 3 (third light-emitting unit 523D = light-emitting state), and a pattern of step 3 (third light-emitting unit 523D = light-emitting state) from the beginning.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 153, after the special miss notice performance detail determination process is executed in step S4911, the process proceeds to step S4912. In step S4912, a special miss notice performance flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. The special miss notice performance flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special miss notice performance is being executed in the MPU 442. In the following step S4913, a big win notice performance restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. The big win notice performance restriction flag set in step S4913 is erased when the special miss notice performance ends. Thereafter, in step S4914, the special miss notice performance start process is executed, and the special miss notice performance setting process is terminated. As described above in detail, in this embodiment, the special miss notice performance is configured to start in a game round that normally results in a miss, and the start timing is the timing of the confirmation display of the pattern combination in that game round.

Next, we will explain the special miss preview performance execution process that is executed as part of the regular processing by MPU442, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 155.

(Special miss notice performance execution process)
In the special miss notice performance execution process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the special miss notice performance flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the special miss notice performance execution process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5101, the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the pattern combination is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the pattern display device 95A. If a positive determination is made in step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, the step-up pattern determined in step S5003 is referenced to determine whether or not a step-up should occur at this timing. If a positive determination is made in step S5103, the process proceeds to step S5104. In step S5104, the step-up pattern determined in step S5003 is referenced to execute a light-emitting target addition process. For example, in the relevant game round corresponding to the special miss result that triggered the start of this special miss notice performance, the notification decorative part 512D is switched from an off state to an on state. After the light-emitting target addition process is executed in step S5104, or if a negative determination is made in step S5103, the special miss notice performance execution process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5102, if a negative judgment is made in step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5105. In step S5105, it is judged whether or not it is the timing for the final display of the pattern combination on the pattern display device 95A to be completed. If a negative judgment is made in step S5105, the process proceeds to step S5106. In step S5106, a light-off process is executed to turn off the notice decoration unit 511D of the special effect device 500D. In other words, regardless of whether the corresponding game round corresponds to a special miss result, the special miss notice effect by the notice decoration unit 511D will end when the final display is completed.

Then, the special miss notice performance flag and the big win notice performance restriction flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 are erased, and the special notice performance execution process is terminated. With the big win notice performance restriction flag cleared, it becomes possible to execute the big win notice performance thereafter.

Here, the flow of the special miss notice presentation will be illustrated with reference to the timing chart in FIG. 156. In the example in FIG. 156, a transition to the fourth normal game state is triggered by a special miss result occurring during the first normal game state, and the special presentation device 500D has notified the player of the special miss result in a game round prior to the current game round.

At the time tj1, the first actuation port display unit D1 starts displaying changing patterns, and the pattern display device 95A starts displaying changing patterns. At the time tj2 during this game, a winning bid occurs in the first actuation port 91A, and the number of reserved bids increases from "2" to "3." This additional reserved bid corresponds to a special miss result.

The game round that started at the timing of tj1 corresponds to a normal losing result, and at the timing of the confirmation display (timing of tj3) where this result is clearly indicated, the special losing notice performance starts. Specifically, the first light-emitting part 521D of the special performance device 500D (notice decoration part 511D) switches from an off state to a lit state (step 1).

The game round that started at the timing of tj4 also corresponds to a normal miss result, and at the timing of the confirmation display (timing of tj5) where this result is clearly displayed, the special miss notice performance has stepped up from step 1 to step 2. Specifically, the second light-emitting part 522D of the special performance device 500D (notice decoration part 511D) has switched from an off state to a lit state.

The game round that started at the timing of tj6 also corresponds to a normal miss result, and at the timing of the confirmation display (timing of tj7) where this result is clearly displayed, the special miss notice performance has stepped up from step 2 to step 3. Specifically, the third light-emitting part 523D of the special performance device 500D (notice decoration part 511D) has switched from an off state to a lit state.

At the next timing of tj8, the game round (corresponding game round) corresponding to the special miss result that triggered this special miss notice performance has started. This game round corresponds to the reach display, and at timing of tj10, it has transitioned to the reach display. Specifically, a reach line is formed by the "heart" pattern on the pattern display device 95A. After that, at the timing of the confirmation display (timing of tj11) in which the special miss result is clearly displayed, the notification decoration part 512D of the special performance device 500D switches from an off state to a lit state.

At the timing of tj12 after the confirmation display time has elapsed, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, and the notification decorative portion 511D (light-emitting portions 521D to 523D) switches from a lit state to an unlit state. In other words, the special miss notification performance ends with the notification decorative portion 512D remaining lit.

The fifteenth embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot result is reached, the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode (more specifically, high-frequency support mode B) via a special game state (open/close execution mode), and if a special miss result is reached, the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode (more specifically, high-frequency support mode A) without going through the special game state. This diversifies the game flow when the high-frequency support mode is changed to a higher mode, which helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Here, in this embodiment, whether or not the result is a jackpot is specified (pre-specified) before the start of the corresponding game round, and a jackpot preview performance (corresponding to the "first special performance") is executed based on the result of the pre-specification. Also, whether or not the result is a special miss is specified (pre-specified) before the start of the corresponding game round, and a special miss preview performance (corresponding to the "second special performance") is executed based on the result of the pre-specification. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to favorably increase the attention to the game from the game round prior to the corresponding game round. However, in a configuration in which a transition to a special game state is triggered by a jackpot result, a player who expects a transition to a special game state will pay attention to the jackpot preview performance. If a jackpot preview performance is started while a special miss preview performance is being executed, it is assumed that the player's attention will be more likely to shift from the special miss preview performance to the jackpot preview performance. It is feared that this will hinder the effect of increasing attention to the game by the special miss preview performance. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if a configuration is adopted that restricts the start of a new big win preview performance when a special miss preview performance is being performed, the above concerns can be suitably alleviated. This is preferable in terms of ensuring the coexistence of the two types of preview performances described above.

As shown in this embodiment, a configuration in which the jackpot preview effect is restricted when the special miss preview effect is executed is preferable in terms of relaxing the constraints on the presentation mode of the special miss preview effect. In other words, not only when the special miss preview effect is started immediately after the execution conditions are met, but also when the start is deliberately delayed when the execution conditions for the special miss preview effect are met internally, it is possible to suitably suppress conflict between the jackpot preview effect and the special miss preview effect, and to suitably relax the constraints on the presentation mode of the second special effect.

As shown in this embodiment, if the conditions for executing the special miss preview performance can be met during the execution of the jackpot preview performance, the opportunity to execute the special miss preview performance can be secured. If the conditions for executing the special miss preview performance are met during the execution of the jackpot preview performance, the jackpot preview performance can be stopped, thereby encouraging the player to pay attention to the special miss preview performance. When stopping the jackpot preview performance as described above, the behavior of the stop itself can be made part of the performance by stopping the jackpot preview performance after the special miss preview performance has started, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized for increasing attention to the game.

As described above, in a configuration in which a preview performance starts in a game round prior to the relevant game round, it is expected that the player's sense of anticipation will increase when the preview performance starts. Therefore, when using a jackpot preview performance and a special miss preview performance in combination, if the timing at which each preview performance starts in a game round is differentiated, it is possible to effectively prevent the start (beginning) of each preview performance from being overlooked. In particular, in this embodiment, the jackpot preview performance is configured to start at the start of a game round (when the shift occurs), while the special miss preview performance is configured to start at the transition to a confirmed display in the game round. Such differences in timing can contribute to increasing attention to the game in each part from the first half to the second half of a game round.

When a special failure occurs, the game immediately transitions to the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game round, so the support mode switch is more likely to be abrupt than when a jackpot occurs. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and lead to wasted investment. In this regard, in the embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, a pattern combination indicating this is displayed in a stopped state on the pattern display device 95A, while a special failure is indicated by a special performance device 500D provided separately from the pattern display device 95A. With this configuration, confusion between a jackpot result and a special failure result can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be suitably suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, whether or not a special losing result will occur is determined in advance (pre-determined), and a special losing prediction effect is executed depending on the result of the pre-determined result. This special losing prediction effect is executed at least in a game turn prior to the game turn related to the reserved information that was the subject of the pre-determined result, so the player can predict in advance that there is a possibility of a special losing result. This type of configuration reduces the sense of abruptness mentioned above, and contributes to further preventing the occurrence of the various inconveniences mentioned above.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is announced by the symbol combination frozen and displayed on the symbol display device 95A, the fact that a non-winning combination (a normal losing result) has been announced can cause a rapid drop in attention to that round of play. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a special losing notice performance is started under such circumstances, that is, a special losing notice performance is started during the confirmation display corresponding to a normal losing result, the rapid drop in attention described above can be effectively prevented by the special losing notice performance.

In addition, in a configuration in which the jackpot result is notified by the symbol display device 95A, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the symbol display device 95A. Therefore, a configuration in which the special miss notice effect starts during the confirmation display, when the need to pay attention to the symbol display device 95A is reduced, is preferable in terms of preventing the notice effect from being overlooked.

In a configuration in which pending information is acquired based on the ball entering the actuation port 91A (actuation port unit 82A), the player may pay attention to the actuation port 91A. Therefore, by positioning the special effect device 500D closer to the actuation port 91A than the pattern display device 95A (more specifically, the variable display area ME), the chances of missing the special miss warning effect can be reduced.

In addition, in a configuration in which pending information is acquired based on the ball entering the actuation port 91A (actuation port unit 82A), the player may pay attention to the actuation port 91A and the movement of the game ball toward the actuation port 91A. Therefore, by disposing the special effect device 500D behind the part of the flow path (left route) in which the game ball flows down toward the actuation port 91A, which is closer to the actuation port 91A, the chances of the special miss warning effect being missed can be suitably reduced.

By configuring the notification decoration section 511D to suggest the possibility that the judgment result is a special miss before the notification decoration section 512D of the special performance device 500D notifies (expresses) that the result is a special miss, it is possible to effectively reduce the chances that the notification in the notification decoration section 512D will be missed.

As described above, in gaming machines in which the game progresses based on the ball entering the actuation port 91A, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the actuation port 91A. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by forming the special performance device 500D so that the notice decorative part 511D of the notice decorative part 511D and the notification decorative part 512D is closer to the actuation port 91A (the actuation port that may result in a special miss), the above-mentioned effect of preventing missed plays can be more effectively achieved.

When the symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 95A, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the symbol display device 95A. Therefore, if the display of the notice decoration 511D is configured to step up (switch the display mode) when the symbol combination is displayed as confirmed (stopped), it is possible to effectively prevent the step-up from being overlooked.

In addition, the static display of the symbol combination may momentarily reduce attention to the game, but as shown in this embodiment, if the display mode of the notice decorative part 511D is configured to switch when the symbol combination is displayed as confirmed (static), the reduction in attention to the game can be effectively suppressed.

In gaming machines of the type that have an upper limit (four) on the number of reserved information acquired and stored based on balls entering the actuation port 91A (actuation port unit 82A), adjustments may be made such as temporarily refraining from firing to avoid unnecessary balls entering. A player who makes such adjustments may pay attention to the movement of the game balls in and around the actuation port 91A, or to the display in the reserved number display area. Therefore, by forming the special performance device 500D so that the notice decoration 511D of the notice decoration 511D and the notification decoration 512D is closer to the reserved number display area as shown in this embodiment, the above-mentioned effect of preventing missed balls can be more effectively achieved.

<Modification 1>
In the above fifteenth embodiment, the configuration is such that whether or not to perform the special miss notice performance is determined at the timing (start timing) when the pattern display device 95A transitions to the confirmed display of the pattern combination, but this is not limited to this. For example, similar to the case of determining whether or not to perform the big win notice performance, it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the special miss notice performance at the timing when a reserve is newly acquired (added) based on the winning of the first operating port 91A.

In addition, the timing for deciding whether or not to perform the special miss preview performance and the timing for starting the special miss preview performance do not necessarily have to be the same; it is also possible to configure the timing for deciding whether or not to perform the special miss preview performance and the timing for starting the special miss preview performance to be different, that is, to configure the special miss preview performance to start with a delay after the decision to perform the special miss preview performance is made. For example, it is also possible to configure the special miss preview performance to be determined while the pattern display device 95A is displaying a changing pattern, and to start the special miss preview performance while the pattern display device 95A is displaying a confirmed pattern.

<Modification 2>
In the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, a step-up of the special miss preview performance by the preview performance device 00D occurs while the pattern (pattern combination) is being displayed in a confirmed manner on the pattern display device 95A. However, instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to configure the step-up of the special miss preview performance to occur while the pattern display device 95A is displaying a changing pattern.

<Modification 3>
In the fifteenth embodiment, when a game corresponding to the reach display can be executed before a predetermined game, the special miss notice performance with the predetermined game as the corresponding game is avoided, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the special miss notice performance with the predetermined game as the corresponding game can be executed regardless of whether a game corresponding to the reach display is executed before the predetermined game.

In place of or in addition to this, if a game round corresponding to a jackpot result can be executed before the specified game round, the special miss notice performance with the specified game round as the relevant game round is avoided, but this is not limited to this. It may also be configured so that the special miss notice performance with the specified game round as the relevant game round can be executed regardless of whether a game round corresponding to a jackpot result can be executed before the specified game round.

<Modification 4>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the execution period of the big win notice effect and the execution period of the special miss notice effect may overlap partially, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the execution period of the big win notice effect and the execution period of the special miss notice effect not to overlap.

<Modification 5>
It is also possible to configure the system so that one of the big win notice performance and the special miss notice performance can be started while the other is being executed. For example, the system may be configured so that the special miss notice performance can be started while the big win notice performance is being executed, but the big win notice performance is not started while the special miss notice performance is being executed, or the system may be configured so that the big win notice performance can be started while the special miss notice performance is being executed, but the special miss notice performance is not started while the big win notice performance is being executed.

<Modification 6>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the special effect device 500D is configured to notify the player of a special miss result, which is one of the triggers for transition to the fourth normal game state, in the preceding game round. Alternatively or in addition to this, the special effect device 500D can be configured to notify the player of a ceiling reaching, which is one of the triggers for transition to the fourth normal game state, in the preceding game round. Specifically, in a game round executed before the game round in which the ceiling is reached in the first normal game state, the first light-emitting unit 521D, the second light-emitting unit 522D, and the third light-emitting unit 523D are lit in this order as the game round progresses, and the notification decorative unit 512D can be switched to a lit state in the game round immediately before the transition to the fourth normal game state (for example, at the timing of the final display).

<Modification 7>
The special miss notice performance shown in the fifteenth embodiment is configured to be executed by the special performance device 500D, which is a dedicated performance device, but is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the special miss notice performance to be executed by the pattern display device 95A in the same way as the big win notice performance. For example, the same performance as that executed by the special performance device 500D may be executed by the pattern display device 95A. Specifically, it is also possible to configure the special miss notice performance to be executed by displaying an image imitating the special performance device 500D on the pattern display device 95A and changing the display mode of this image to steps 1 to 3, etc.

<Modification 8>
In the above fifteenth embodiment, the start condition of the big win notice performance is avoided during the special miss notice performance, and the start condition of the special miss notice performance is avoided during the big win notice performance, but this is not limited to this. The start condition of the big win notice performance may be established during the special miss notice performance, and the start condition of the special miss notice performance may be established during the big win notice performance. For example, if the start condition of the other notice performance is established during one notice performance that has started earlier, it is preferable that the other notice performance is started at the latest step that is reached at the end timing of one notice performance, assuming that the other notice performance has progressed under the water surface.

<Modification 9>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the special miss notice performance is given a higher priority than the big win notice performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big win notice performance may be restricted when the special miss notice performance is being executed, and the special miss notice performance may be restricted when the big win notice performance is being executed.

<Modification 10>
In the above fifteenth embodiment, when a special miss notice performance is started during a big win notice performance, the big win notice performance is stopped midway, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the big win notice performance may be stopped at the time when the special miss notice performance is started, or the big win notice performance may not be stopped, while a new big win notice performance may be restricted from being executed.

<Modification 11>
The configuration may be such that the jackpot preview performance is not started not only by the pending information that triggered the start of the special miss preview performance, but also by other pending information that follows the pending information (other pending information that has already been stored).

<Modification 12>
In the above fifteenth embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the big win notice performance starts at the start of a game round (at the time of shift) and the special miss notice performance starts at the transition to the fixed display, but the start timing of the big win notice performance and the start timing of the special miss notice performance in a game round may be changed arbitrarily. However, in order to effectively exert the effect of increasing attention by the difference in timing, it is preferable to configure the start timing of each notice performance to be different between the first half and the second half of a game round.

<Modification 13>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the special effect device 500D is used to execute an effect suggesting that a special miss has occurred, but instead of or in addition to this, the special effect device 500D may be used to execute an effect suggesting that the ceiling will be reached. In such a configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by providing multiple game plays that will result in the ceiling being reached, as in the other embodiments.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, a special notice performance (special miss notice performance) is executed in a game round before the game round resulting in a special miss result. In this embodiment, the configuration related to this special miss notice performance is different from that of the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment. Specifically, the special miss notice performance shown in the fifteenth embodiment is configured such that even if the special miss notice performance occurs, the result ends in a normal miss and the special miss result is not necessarily confirmed, but the special miss notice performance shown in this embodiment is configured such that the special miss result is confirmed (confirmed performance) at the time the special miss notice performance occurs. In addition, in order to make the special miss notice performance function as a confirmed performance, the configuration related to the notice performance device is changed to enhance the impact of the performance. Below, the notice performance device in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 157 and FIG. 158. FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board unit, and FIG. 158 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the notice performance device.

(Special effect device 500E)
As shown in FIG. 157, when viewed from the front of the game board unit 80E, the special effect device 500E is disposed in a position overlapping with the right route formed in the game area PE, more specifically, below the above-mentioned number display unit 88D and to the side of the actuation port unit 82A (more specifically, the first actuation port 91A).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special effect device 500E comprises an effect mechanism 600E that performs a special miss warning effect, and a base that fixes the effect mechanism 600E to the rear block of the game board unit 80E. When the game board 80aE and the rear block are combined (see FIG. 7), the effect mechanism 600E faces the rear of the game board 80aE with a small gap between them. The game board 80aE is transparent, so the player can see the effect mechanism 600E through the game board 80aE from the front of the game machine.

The performance mechanism 600E includes a light-emitting unit 630E and a case 660E that houses the light-emitting unit 630E. The light-emitting unit 630E is composed of a light-emitting board 640E on which a plurality of light-emitting bodies 641E (more specifically, LEDs) are mounted, and a holder 651E that holds the light-emitting board 640E with the mounting surface of the light-emitting bodies 641E facing the front of the gaming machine. In detail, both the light-emitting board 640E and the holder 651E are disk-shaped, and the light-emitting board 640E is fixed to the holder 651E while fitting into a recess formed in the center of the holder 651E. The light-emitting board 640E is connected to the notification/performance control device 140 via a connection terminal such as a slip ring, and the notification/performance control device 140 controls the light emission of the light-emitting bodies 641E (switching control between the on state and off state).

The case 660E is made up of a rear cover 680E that covers the light-emitting unit 630E from the rear and a front cover 670E that covers the light-emitting unit 630E from the front, which are assembled together from front to back. The front cover 670E is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and light from the light emitter 641E is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the front cover 670E and then through the gaming board 80aE.

The front cover 670E has a disk-shaped facing portion 671E that faces the back of the light-emitting substrate 640E and the game board 80aE, and a cylindrical shaft portion 673E that stands rearward from the facing portion 671E. A bearing hole 652E that penetrates from front to back is formed in the center of the light-emitting unit 630E (light-emitting substrate 640E and holder 651E). The shaft portion 673E is inserted into the bearing hole 652E, making the light-emitting unit 630E rotatable around the shaft portion 673E. In other words, the light-emitting unit 630E is housed in a rotatable state in the case 660E. Hereinafter, the central axis that is the center of rotation of the light-emitting unit 630E is referred to as the "central axis line CL1".

A circular stopper portion 672E that abuts against the holder 651E of the light-emitting unit 630E from the front is formed on the rear portion of the facing portion 671E. This stopper portion 672E restricts the forward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630E. When the light-emitting unit 630E abuts against the stopper portion 672E in this manner, a gap is secured between the light-emitting substrate 640E and the rear surface of the facing portion 671E, and contact between the light-emitting body 641E and the facing portion 671E is avoided. In addition, a protrusion formed in the center of the holder 651E abuts against the rear cover 680E, and the rear cover 680E restricts the rearward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630E.

The rear cover 680E is equipped with a drive mechanism 690E that rotates the light-emitting unit 630E. The drive mechanism 690E is composed of a motor 691E as a drive unit, and gears 653E and 692E for transmitting the power of the motor 691E to the light-emitting unit 630E. The motor 691E is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the motor 691E is driven and controlled by the notification/performance control device 140.

In this embodiment, the front cover 670E is a decorative cover in which multiple decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are formed on the front part of the opposing part 671E. The decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are arranged in the rotation direction of the light-emitting unit 630E, and the positional relationship between the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E and the light-emitting body 641E changes as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1. Below, with reference to Figures 159 and 160, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E formed on the front cover 670E. Figure 159(a) is a front view of the special effect device 500E, Figure 159(b) is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between the passage path of the light-emitting body 641E and the light diffusion part and the non-light diffusion part, and Figure 160 is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the light-emitting unit 630E. Note that decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are omitted from illustration in Figure 160.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the opposing portion 671E is composed of a planar portion 701E and the above-mentioned decorative portions, that is, a first decorative portion 711E, a second decorative portion 721E, and a third decorative portion 731E.

The first decorative portion 711E has multiple (four) annular protrusions 713E that protrude forward from the flat portion 701E. Each annular protrusion 713E has a circular shape centered on a central axis CL5 that extends from front to back, and is arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL5. Small gaps (annular grooves 714E) are provided between each annular protrusion 713E, and these gaps are differentiated so that the further away from the central axis CL5 they are, the larger they are.

The second decorative portion 721E has multiple (four) annular protrusions 723E that protrude forward from the flat portion 701E. Each annular protrusion 723E has a circular shape centered on a central axis CL6 that extends from front to back, and is arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 724E) are provided between each annular protrusion 723E, and these gaps are differentiated so that the further away from the central axis CL5 the gaps are, the larger they are.

The third decorative portion 731E has multiple (four) annular protrusions 733E that protrude forward from the flat portion 701E. Each annular protrusion 733E has a circular shape centered on a central axis CL7 that extends from front to back, and is arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 734E) are provided between each annular protrusion 733E, and these gaps are differentiated so that the further away from the central axis CL6 they are, the larger they are.

Note that the first decorative portion 711E, the second decorative portion 721E, and the third decorative portion 731E are arranged so that the distances from the central axis CL1 to each of the central axes CL5 to CL7 are different, and the diameters (inner and outer diameters) of the annular convex portion 713E of the first decorative portion 711E, the diameters (inner and outer diameters) of the annular convex portion 723E of the second decorative portion 721E, and the diameters (inner and outer diameters) of the annular convex portion 733E of the third decorative portion 731E are different, but the basic structure is the same. In the following explanation, the detailed structure will be described mainly with reference to the first decorative portion 711E, but the detailed structures of the second decorative portion 721E and the third decorative portion 731E are also similar.

As shown in FIG. 160, the side surfaces 718E of the annular protrusion 713E (the inner surface facing the central axis CL5 and the outer surface facing away from the central axis CL5) are both oriented in a direction intersecting the central axis CL5, and the annular protrusion 713E is tapered toward the tip (front end). When light from the light emitter 641E is irradiated onto the annular protrusion 713E of the first decorative part 711E, at least a portion of the light is diffused to the other annular protrusions 713E and the annular grooves 714E, and then emitted forward of the gaming machine through the annular protrusions 713E and the annular grooves 714E (see FIG. 160(b)).

Because the direction of this diffusion is the radial direction (perpendicular direction) of the central axis CL5, the light emission pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is linear (specifically, band-like) extending in the radial direction of the central axis CL5 (see area BE in FIG. 161). In contrast, when light from the light emitter 641E is irradiated to the flat portion 701E (including the partition portion 715E partitioned by the annular convex portion 713E), the light passes through the opposing portion 671E as is and is emitted to the front of the gaming machine with diffusion suppressed (see FIG. 160(a)). In other words, the light emission pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is dot-like (see area SE in FIG. 161). In the following description, the annular convex portions 713E, 723E, 733E and the annular groove portions 714E, 724E, 734E are referred to as "light diffusion portions 712E, 722E, 732E," and the flat portion 701E and the partition portions 715E, 725E, 735E are referred to as "non-light diffusion portions 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E" as appropriate.

The light emitter 641E orbits (displaces) with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E. The orbit PL around which the light emitter 641E orbits is a circle centered on the central axis CL1, and the central axis CL1 is spaced from the central axis CL5 of the first decorative part 711E. Therefore, the distance from the central axis CL5 to the optical axis LA of the light emitter 641E changes with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E, and the light emitter 641E displaces so as to straddle (cross the rear of) the light diffusion part 712E with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E. As a result, the linear (more specifically, band-like) light emitting pattern appearing on the first decorative part 711E changes its position and orientation on the light diffusion part 712E of the first decorative part 711E (see FIG. 161).

Now, referring to Figure 159 (b), we will explain the positional relationship between the orbit PL of the light emitter 641E and the light diffusion and non-light diffusion sections. Note that in Figure 159 (b), the areas with dot hatching are the light diffusion sections, and the areas without dot hatching are the non-light diffusion sections.

First, the light emitter 641E shown in this embodiment is roughly classified into a first light emitter 641aE, a second light emitter 641bE, a third light emitter 641cE, a fourth light emitter 641dE, a fifth light emitter 641eE, and a sixth light emitter 641fE according to the distance from the central axis CL1. Specifically, the distance from the central axis CL1 increases in the order of the first light emitter 641aE < the second light emitter 641bE < the third light emitter 641cE < the fourth light emitter 641dE < the fifth light emitter 641eE < the sixth light emitter 641fE.

The first light emitter 641aE is positioned so that the orbit PLa along which the first light emitter 641aE revolves when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps with the light diffusion section 712E and non-light diffusion section 715E of the first decorative section 711E and the non-light diffusion section 701E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The destination (supply destination) of the light emitted by the first light emitter 641aE repeatedly changes in the order of non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 715E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

The second light emitter 641bE is positioned such that the orbit PLb that the second light emitter 641bE revolves around when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps the light diffusion section 712E and non-light diffusion section 715E of the first decorative section 711E and the light diffusion section 732E and non-light diffusion section 701E of the third decorative section 731E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The destination (supply destination) of the light emitted by the second light emitter 641bE repeatedly changes in the order of non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 715E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

The third light-emitting body 641cE is positioned in such a position that the orbit PLc along which the third light-emitting body 641cE revolves when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps with the light diffusion portion 712E and non-light diffusion portion 715E of the first decorative portion 711E, the light diffusion portion 722E of the second decorative portion 721E, the light diffusion portion 732E and non-light diffusion portion 735E of the third decorative portion 731E, and the non-light diffusion portion 701E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The destination (supply destination) of light from the third light emitter 641cE changes repeatedly in the following order as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates: non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 715E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 722E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 735E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 701E.

The fourth light-emitting element 641dE is positioned in such a position that the orbit PLd along which the fourth light-emitting element 641dE revolves when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps with the light diffusion portion 712E and non-light diffusion portion 715E of the first decorative portion 711E, the light diffusion portion 722E and non-light diffusion portion 725E of the second decorative portion 721E, the light diffusion portion 732E and non-light diffusion portion 735E of the third decorative portion 731E, and the non-light diffusion portion 701E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. As the light-emitting unit 630E rotates, the destination (supply destination) of the light emitted by the fourth light-emitting body 641dE repeatedly changes in the following order: non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 715E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 722E → non-light-diffusing section 725E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 732E → non-light-diffusing section 735E → light-diffusing section 732E → non-light-diffusing section 701E.

The fifth light emitter 641eE is positioned such that the orbit PLe that the fifth light emitter 641eE revolves around when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps with the light diffusion section 712E of the first decorative section 711E, the light diffusion section 722E of the second decorative section 721E, the light diffusion section 732E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light diffusion section 701E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The destination (supply destination) of the light emitted by the fifth light emitter 641eE repeatedly changes in the order of non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 722E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

The sixth light emitter 641fE is positioned such that the orbit PLf that the sixth light emitter 641fE revolves around when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps the light diffusion section 712E of the first decorative section 711E, the light diffusion section 722E of the second decorative section 721E, the light diffusion section 732E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light diffusion section 701E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The destination (supply destination) of the light emitted by the fifth light emitter 641eE repeatedly changes in the order of non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 722E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

In addition, for at least some of the light-emitting bodies that are the targets of light supply to the first decorative part 711E (light diffusion part 712E) (the fourth light-emitting body 641dE, the fifth light-emitting body 641eE, and the sixth light-emitting body 641fE), the diameters of the orbits PLd, PLe, and PLf are larger than the diameters (inner diameter and outer diameter) of the first decorative part 711E, and for all of the light-emitting bodies that are the targets of light supply to the second decorative part 721E (light diffusion part 722E) (the third light-emitting body 641cE, the fourth light-emitting body 641dE, the fifth light-emitting body 641eE, the sixth light-emitting body 6 41fE), the diameters of the orbits PLc, PLd, PLe, PLf are larger than the diameter (inner diameter and outer diameter) of the second decorative part 721E, and for at least some of the light-emitting bodies (third light-emitting body 641cE, fourth light-emitting body 641dE, fifth light-emitting body 641eE, sixth light-emitting body 641fE) that supply light to the third decorative part 731E (light diffusion section 732E), the diameters of the orbits PLc, PLd, PLe, PLf are larger than the diameter (inner diameter and outer diameter) of the third decorative part 731E.

Next, the special failure notice effect by the special effect device 500E will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 162. When a reserve corresponding to a special failure result is obtained based on winning in the first operating port 91A, the player may be notified by the special failure notice effect that a special failure result will occur in the game round preceding the game round corresponding to the reserve. In the special failure notice effect, the light-emitting unit 630E starts rotating at the timing of the confirmation display of the pattern combination in the preceding game round. After the rotation speed reaches a steady rotation speed during the confirmation display, all the light-emitting bodies 641E are switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the special effect device 500E displays a dot-like light-emitting pattern and a line-like (more specifically, a strip-like) light-emitting pattern. This special failure notice effect will continue until the transition to the fourth normal game state. The positional relationship between the light emitters 641A and the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E is stipulated so that when a dot-like light pattern is displayed by one light emitter 641A, at least one of the other light emitters 641A displays a linear (more specifically, strip-like) light pattern. In other words, during the special miss notice performance, a mixture of dot-like and linear (more specifically, strip-like) light patterns is displayed at any rotation angle.

Here, after the light emitter 641A is switched to the lit state, the position and shape of the luminous pattern will change as the rotation angle of the light emitting unit 630E changes while the light emitter 641E is maintained in the lit state, as shown in, for example, FIG. 162(a) → FIG. 162(b) → FIG. 162(c) → FIG. 162(d). In particular, the greater the distance from the central axis CL1 to the light emitter 641E, the higher the pattern displacement speed, but the pattern farther from the central axis CL1 is configured to continue to be displayed for a longer distance compared to a pattern closer to the central axis CL1, preventing a significant decrease in visibility compared to a luminous pattern displayed at a position closer to the central axis CL1.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, by rotating the light-emitting unit 630E, the light-emitting body 641E is displaced so as to pass through a predetermined orbit PL including the position where the light is irradiated to the light diffusion parts 712E, 722E, 732E of the front cover 670E (corresponding to the "decorative cover" and "cover") and the position where the light is irradiated to the non-light diffusion parts 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E of the front cover 670E. The appearance (light-emitting mode) of the special effect device 500D, which is a light-emitting effect device, can be greatly changed when the light from the light-emitting unit 630E (light-emitting body 641E) is irradiated to the non-light diffusion parts 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E and when it is irradiated to the light diffusion parts 712E, 722E, 732E. This can favorably improve the attention to the light-emitting effect using the special effect device 500D. When performing such a light-emitting effect, it is expected that changing the position of the decorated front cover 670E itself will reduce the appearance of the special effect device 500D and the impact of the light-emitting effect. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by rotating the light-emitting unit 630E out of the front cover 670E and the light-emitting unit 630E. In addition, by making the light-emitting unit 630E rotatable, the light-emitting state can be changed repeatedly without interruption, which is also preferable in terms of ensuring a relatively long period of time for the light-emitting effect and suitably strengthening the sustainability of the attention-increasing effect.

As shown in this embodiment, if the light-emitting unit 630E is rotated while the light-emitting body 641E is maintained in a lit state, the light-emitting location (position) can be seamlessly changed in addition to changing the light-emitting pattern, further enhancing the dramatic effect described above.

In the front cover 670E, the light diffusion section is formed by a concave-convex decoration. With this configuration, it is possible to suitably prevent the presence of the light diffusion section from being a factor that reduces the appearance of the front cover 670E. The light diffusion sections 712E, 722E, and 732E are arranged differently in the rotation direction, and the light emitter 641E is configured to move from a position where light is irradiated onto one of the light diffusion sections 712E, 722E, and 732E to another position where light is irradiated onto another light diffusion section as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates, via a position where light is irradiated onto the non-light diffusion sections 701E, 715E, 725E, and 735E. In this way, by configuring the light diffusion section to move from one light diffusion section to another light diffusion section via a position corresponding to the non-light diffusion section, the sharpness of the change in the light emission pattern can be enhanced.

The light-emitting unit 630E is configured so that when any of the multiple light-emitting bodies 641E is irradiating light onto the non-light-diffusion section, any of the other light-emitting bodies 641E will irradiate light onto the light-diffusion section. This configuration makes it possible to simultaneously display light-emitting patterns with and without light diffusion. This is advantageous in improving the appearance of the light-emitting performance and optimally achieving the attention-increasing effect described above.

As shown in this embodiment, by forming projections and recesses on the front side of the facing portion 671E of the front cover 670E that have light diffusion and decorative functions, and making the back side flat, the operating gap between the light-emitting unit 630E and the front cover 670E (more specifically, the facing portion 671E) can be reduced, which can facilitate a thinner special effect device 500D.

The light irradiated to the light diffusion sections 712E, 722E, and 732E is diffused in the arrangement direction of the linear light diffusion sections 712E, 722E, and 732E (a direction intersecting a specified axis). This results in a belt-like light pattern extending in a direction intersecting a specified axis. This belt-like light pattern is displaced by the operation of the light-emitting unit 630E, and the displacement of the belt-like light pattern enhances the visual impact of the light-emitting effect. This can favorably increase the level of attention to the game.

As shown in this embodiment, if the optical axis is displaced so as to cross multiple annular convex portions 713E, etc., the annular convex portions 713E that intersect with the optical axis can cause changes in the light diffusion mode (light emission pattern). Diversifying the light emission pattern in this way is preferable in preventing the light emission performance from becoming monotonous.

In a configuration in which the uneven decoration, such as the annular convex portion 713E, also functions as a light diffusing portion, it is expected that the visual impact will be reduced when the front cover 670E is activated. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the light emitting unit 630E located behind the front cover 670E is activated instead of the front cover 670E, so that such inconvenience can be avoided.

The light-emitting unit 630E is rotatable, and can change the light-emitting state repeatedly without interruption. This is preferable for ensuring a relatively long period for the light-emitting performance and suitably enhancing the sustainability of the attention-increasing effect. In particular, as shown in this embodiment, the central axis CL1, which is the central axis of rotation of the light-emitting unit 630E, is spaced apart from the central axes CL5-CL7 and configured to be parallel to these axes CL5-CL7, which is preferable for causing changes in the light-emitting pattern as the unit rotates.

As shown in this embodiment, if the side surface 718E of the annular convex portion 713E, etc. is inclined with respect to the central axis CL5, etc., a portion of the light from the light emitter 641E can be reflected and guided to the other annular convex portion 713E. This is preferable in terms of lengthening the overall length of the light emission pattern in the form of a strip, and emphasizing the difference in appearance (dot-like/strip-like).

Between the annular convex portions 713E, the bottom of the annular groove portion 714E is formed as a "flat portion", and the rotational orbit through which the light emitter 641E passes and the annular groove portion 714E are formed so as to overlap when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. With this configuration, the shape (e.g., overall length) of the light emitting pattern can be changed between when the light from the light emitter 641E is irradiated onto the side surface 718E and when the light from the light emitter 641E is irradiated onto the bottom of the annular groove portion 714E. In other words, the shape of the light emitting pattern changes as its position changes. This configuration is preferable in terms of preventing the light emitting performance from becoming monotonous.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the bottom width (groove width) of each annular groove 714E to be different, it is possible to more effectively change the shape of the luminous pattern (e.g., the overall length) according to the object of light irradiation.

In addition, the length of the portion where the trajectory of one light emitter passes as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates and the light diffusion section overlaps is different from the length of the portion where the trajectory of another light emitter passes as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates and the light diffusion section overlaps. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the rotation range (angle) in which the light-emitting pattern is displayed in one light diffusion section is different. In a configuration in which the decoration of the cover functions as the light diffusion section, the shape and size of the light diffusion section may be more restricted in order to fulfill its decorative function. Therefore, by configuring the light-emitting device so that multiple light emitters can pass behind one light diffusion section as shown in this embodiment, and then configuring the rotation range to be different, the appearance of the light-emitting performance can be improved while preferably eliminating the inconvenience caused by it.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, the light-emitting unit 630E is rotated to change the rotational position (phase) between the light-emitting unit 630E and the case 660E (more specifically, the opposing portion 671E). However, this is not intended to deny a configuration in which the rotational position (phase) between the light-emitting unit 630E and the case 660E (more specifically, the opposing portion 671E) is changed by rotating the case 660E.

Although the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine, these decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E may be configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine. For example, a translucent sticker or the like having optical transparency may be arranged on the front or back of the gaming board 80aE, and the decorations 711E, 721E, and 731E may be configured to be prevented from being visible by the sticker, while the light from the light-emitting body 641E may be visible from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, when the case 660E is configured to rotate as described above, by making the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E invisible, it is possible to suitably prevent the impact of the presentation from being reduced by noticing that the special miss notice presentation (light-emitting presentation) is about to begin before the special miss notice presentation begins.

<Modification 2>
In the sixteenth embodiment, the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are formed to be circular when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, but the specific shapes of the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E may be changed as desired as long as the luminous pattern is linear and at least one of the direction and position can be changed. For example, the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E may be elliptical or polygonal when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Although non-light-diffusing sections 715E, 725E, and 735E are provided in the central portions of decorative sections 711E, 721E, and 731E, this is not limiting. These non-light-diffusing sections 715E, 725E, and 735E may be omitted.

<Modification 3>
In the sixteenth embodiment, the groove width (gap) of the annular groove 714E is formed to be larger as it is farther from the central axis CL5, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the groove width (gap) of the annular groove 714E may be formed to be smaller as it is farther from the central axis CL5, or the groove width (gap) of the annular groove 714E may be formed to be constant regardless of the distance from the central axis CL5. The other annular grooves 724E and 734E may be modified in the same manner, or the groove width setting patterns may be different for the annular grooves 714E, 724E, and 734E.

<Modification 4>
In the sixteenth embodiment, the annular convex portions 713E, 723E, and 733E are formed so that the cross sections of the annular convex portions 713E, 723E, and 733E are substantially triangular, but this is not limited thereto. The cross sections of the annular convex portions 713E, 723E, and 733E may be arbitrarily changed as long as they can reflect at least a part of the light from the light emitter 641E backward to guide it to other adjacent annular convex portions. For example, they may be formed to be substantially semicircular.

Seventeenth embodiment
In this embodiment, a new special effect device 500F is constructed by applying the configuration of the effect mechanism 600E shown in the sixteenth embodiment to the special effect device 500D shown in the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to Fig. 163 and Fig. 164, special effect device 500F in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifteenth embodiment. Fig. 163 is a horizontal cross-sectional view of special effect device 500F, and Fig. 164 is a front view of special effect device 500F.

(Special effect device 500F)
As shown in Fig. 163, the special effect device 500F comprises an effect mechanism 600F, a base for fixing the effect mechanism 600F to the back block of the game board unit 80F, and a decorative seal 501F fixed to the back of the game board 80aF, and when the game board 80aF and the back block are combined (see Fig. 7), the effect mechanism 600F faces the decorative seal 501F of the game board 80aF with a small gap between them. The game board 80aF is transparent, and the player can see the special effect device 500F, more specifically the decorative seal 501F, through the game board 80aF from the front of the game machine.

The performance mechanism 600F includes a light-emitting unit 630F and a synthetic resin case 660F that houses the light-emitting unit 630F. The light-emitting unit 630F is composed of a light-emitting board 640F on which a plurality of light-emitting bodies 641F (more specifically, LEDs) are mounted, and a holder 651F that holds the light-emitting board 640F with the mounting surface of the light-emitting bodies 641F facing the front of the gaming machine. In detail, both the light-emitting board 640F and the holder 651F are disk-shaped, and the light-emitting board 640F is fixed to the holder 651F while fitting into a recess formed in the center of the holder 651F. The light-emitting board 640F is connected to the notification/performance control device 140 via a connection terminal such as a slip ring, and the notification/performance control device 140 controls the light emission of the light-emitting bodies 641F (switching control between the on state and off state).

The case 660F is made up of a rear cover 680F that covers the light-emitting unit 630F from the rear and a front cover 670F that covers the light-emitting unit 630F from the front, which are combined from front to back. The front cover 670F is optically transparent, and light from the light-emitting body 641F is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the front cover 670F → decorative sticker 501F → gaming board 80aF.

The front cover 670F has a disk-shaped facing portion 671F facing the light-emitting substrate 640F and the decorative sticker 501F, and a cylindrical shaft portion 673F standing rearward from the facing portion 671F. A bearing hole 652F penetrating from front to rear is formed in the center of the light-emitting unit 630F (light-emitting substrate 640F and holder 651F). The shaft portion 673F is inserted into the bearing hole 652F, so that the light-emitting unit 630F can rotate around the shaft portion 673F. In other words, the light-emitting unit 630F is housed in a rotatable state in the case 660F. Hereinafter, the central axis of rotation of the light-emitting unit 630F is referred to as the "central axis line CL1".

A circular stopper portion 672F that abuts against the holder 651F of the light-emitting unit 630F from the front is formed on the back of the facing portion 671F. This stopper portion 672F restricts the forward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630F. When the light-emitting unit 630F abuts against the stopper portion 672F in this manner, a gap is secured between the light-emitting substrate 640F and the back of the facing portion 671F, and contact between the light-emitting body 641F and the facing portion 671F is avoided. In addition, a convex portion formed in the center of the holder 651F abuts against the back cover 680F, and the back cover 680F restricts the rearward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630F.

The rear cover 680F is equipped with a drive mechanism 690F that rotates the light-emitting unit 630F. The drive mechanism 690F is composed of a motor 691F as a drive unit, and gears 653F and 692F for transmitting the power of the motor 691F to the light-emitting unit 630F. The motor 691F is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the motor 691F is driven and controlled by the notification/performance control device 140.

As shown in FIG. 164, in this embodiment, a plurality of bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F that bulge toward the decorative sticker 501F are formed on the front surface of the facing portion 671F of the front cover 670F. In other words, the front surface of the facing portion 671F is roughly divided into a flat portion 701F and bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F that bulge from the flat portion 701F. The bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F are aligned in the rotation direction of the light-emitting unit 630F, and the positional relationship between the bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F and the light-emitting body 641F changes as the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1. Below, a supplementary explanation is given of the bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F formed on the front cover 670F. In addition, bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F are omitted from illustration in FIG. 163.

The first bulge 711F has multiple (four) annular protrusions 713F that protrude forward from the flat surface 701F. Each annular protrusion 713F has a circular shape centered on a central axis CL5 that extends from front to back, and is arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL5. Small gaps (annular grooves 714F) are provided between each annular protrusion 713F, and these gaps are differentiated so that the further away from the central axis CL5 they are, the larger they are.

The second bulge 721F has multiple (four) annular protrusions 723F that protrude forward from the flat surface 701F. Each annular protrusion 723F has a circular shape centered on a central axis CL6 that extends from front to back, and is arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 724F) are provided between each annular protrusion 723F, and these gaps are differentiated so that the further away from the central axis CL5 they are, the larger they are.

The third bulge 731F has multiple (four) annular protrusions 733F that protrude forward from the flat surface 701F. Each annular protrusion 733F has a circular shape centered on a central axis CL7 that extends from front to back, and is arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 734F) are provided between each annular protrusion 733F, and these gaps are differentiated so that the further away from the central axis CL6 they are, the larger they are.

The first bulge 711F, second bulge 721F, and third bulge 731F are arranged so that the distance from the central axis CL1 to each of the central axes CL5 to CL7 is the same, and their external shapes are also standardized. In the following explanation, the detailed structure will be mainly explained with the first bulge 711F, but the detailed structures of the second bulge 721F and third bulge 731F are also similar.

The side surfaces of the annular convex portion 713F (the inner surface facing the central axis CL5 side and the outer surface facing away from the central axis CL5 side) are both oriented in a direction intersecting the central axis CL5, and the annular convex portion 713F is formed so as to taper toward the tip (front end). When light from the light emitter 641F is irradiated onto the annular convex portion 713F of the first bulge portion 711F, at least a portion of the light is diffused to the other annular convex portions 713F and the annular groove portions 714F, and then emitted forward of the gaming machine through those annular convex portions 713F and annular groove portions 714F.

Since this diffusion direction is the radial direction (direction perpendicular to) of the central axis CL5, the illumination pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is linear (band-like) extending in the radial direction of the central axis CL5. In contrast, when light from the light emitter 641F is irradiated onto the flat portion 701F (including the partition portion 715F partitioned by the annular convex portion 713F), the light passes directly through the opposing portion 671F and is emitted to the front of the gaming machine with diffusion suppressed. In other words, the illumination pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is dot-like. The principle behind this change in the illumination pattern is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

In the following description, the annular convex portions 713F, 723F, 733F and the annular groove portions 714F, 724F, 734F are referred to as "light diffusion portions 712F, 722F, 732F", and the flat portion 701F and the partition portions 715F, 725F, 735F are referred to as "non-light diffusion portions 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F" as appropriate.

The light emitter 641F orbits (displaces) with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630F. The orbit PL around which the light emitter 641F orbits is a circle centered on the central axis CL1, and the central axis CL1 is spaced from the central axis CL5 of the first bulging portion 711F. Therefore, the distance from the central axis CL5 to the optical axis of the light emitter 641F changes with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630F, and the light emitter 641F displaces so as to straddle (cross behind) the light diffusion portion 712F with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630F. As a result, the linear light emission pattern appearing on the first bulging portion 711F changes its position and orientation in the light diffusion portion 712F of the first bulging portion 711F.

(Decorative sticker 501F)
Here, a supplementary explanation will be given about the decorative sticker 501F attached to the back of the game board 80aF. The decorative sticker 501F is a transparent seal material having optical transparency, and is provided with a notice decoration part 511F that executes a special miss notice performance, and a notification decoration part 512F that notifies the fact that it is a special miss result. The notice decoration part 511F corresponds to the notice decoration part 511D in the fifteenth embodiment, and the notification decoration part 512F corresponds to the notification decoration part 512D in the fifteenth embodiment.

The notice decoration 511F and the notification decoration 512F are arranged side by side, with the former on the left and the latter on the right, and the notice decoration 511F is positioned closer to the pending number display area Da, the execution target display area Dc, and the actuation port unit 82A than the notice decoration 512F. The distance from the first actuation port 91A, which may result in a special miss, to the special performance device 500F (more specifically, the notice decoration 511F) is shorter than the distance from the first actuation port 91A to the pattern change display area ME on the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A.

The notification decorative part 512F can be switched between a lit state and an unlit state, and is configured to perform the above notification by switching from an unlit state to a lit state when a special miss result is triggered. It is configured to be maintained in a lit state during high-frequency support mode A, and to switch to an unlit state when the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the above-mentioned termination reference number and high-frequency support mode A terminates.

The warning decorative portion 511F consists of a first warning portion 521F in blue, a second warning portion 522F in yellow, and a third warning portion 523F in red, and the first warning portion 521F, the second warning portion 522F, and the third warning portion 523F can be individually switched between a lit state and an unlit state. The first warning portion 521F, the second warning portion 522F, and the third warning portion 523F correspond to the first light-emitting portion 521D, the second light-emitting portion 522D, and the third light-emitting portion 523D shown in the fifteenth embodiment.

The special miss notice performance has step 1 where only the first notice section 521F is turned on, step 2 where the second notice section 522F is turned on, and step 3 where the third notice section 523F is turned on, and the expectation of the special miss result changes as the game progresses. For example, when step 1 is reached, the expectation of the special miss result is set to 30%, when step 2 is reached, the expectation of the special miss result is set to 50%, and when step 3 is reached, the expectation of the special miss result is set to 80%. In the special miss notice performance corresponding to the special miss result, the notification decoration section 512F finally turns on to indicate that a special miss result has occurred, and in the special miss notice performance corresponding to the normal miss result, the notification decoration section 511F and the notification decoration section 512F turn off to indicate that a special miss result has not occurred.

The specific configuration of the special miss notice effect shown in this embodiment is the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment. For example, the above steps do not necessarily advance when the number of play rounds advances, and there are cases where the steps do not advance even when the number of play rounds advances. Furthermore, the steps do not necessarily advance one step at a time, and there are cases where the steps advance by skipping some steps. Incidentally, even in the case of a special miss result, the special miss notice effect does not necessarily occur, and there are also cases where the notification decoration part 512F switches to a lit state without going through the special miss notice effect.

This embodiment differs from the 16th embodiment in that an effect that looks similar to the confirmation effect of the special miss result shown in the 16th embodiment is executed as a teasing effect that indicates that a special miss advance effect will start (is a sign). Below, with reference to FIG. 164, we will explain the device for executing two types of effects (special miss advance effect and teasing effect) using the special effect device 500F.

The light emitters 641F shown in this embodiment are roughly classified into a first light emitter 641aF, a second light emitter 641bF, a third light emitter 641cF, a fourth light emitter 641dF, a fifth light emitter 641eF, and a sixth light emitter 641fF according to the distance from the central axis CL1. Specifically, the distance from the central axis CL1 increases in the order of the first light emitter 641aF < the second light emitter 641bF < the third light emitter 641cF < the fourth light emitter 641dF < the fifth light emitter 641eF < the sixth light emitter 641fF.

The first light emitter 641aF is positioned so that the entire orbit PLa along which the first light emitter 641aF revolves when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates about the central axis CL1 overlaps with the non-light-diffusing portion 701E of the front cover 670 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The first light emitter 641aF is positioned so that a portion of the track PLa overlaps with the notification decorative part 512F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the first light emitter 641aF is positioned behind the notification decorative part 512F when the light emitter 630F is waiting at a waiting position, which is a predetermined rotation position. The light emitter 630F is configured to remain in the waiting position when the above-mentioned fanning performance is not being performed.

The second light emitter 641bF is disposed at a position where the orbit PLb around which the second light emitter 641bF revolves when the light emitter unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps the light diffusion section 712F of the first bulge 711F, the light diffusion section 722F of the second bulge 721F, the light diffusion section 732F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light diffusion section 701F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light emitter unit 630F while keeping the second light emitter 641bF lit, the irradiation destination (supply destination) of the light from the second light emitter 641bF can be repeatedly changed in the order of non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 701E.

The second light emitter 641bF is positioned so that part of the track PLb overlaps with the notification decorative part 512F, the second notice part 522F, and the third notice part 523F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and when the light emitting unit 630F is waiting in the above-mentioned waiting position, the second light emitter 641bF is positioned behind the third notice part 523F. When the second light emitter 641bF is turned on in the waiting position, the third notice part 523F is turned on.

The third light-emitting body 641cF is positioned in such a position that the orbit PLc along which the third light-emitting body 641cF revolves when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps with the light diffusion portion 712F and non-light diffusion portion 715F of the first bulge portion 711F, the light diffusion portion 722F and non-light diffusion portion 725F of the second bulge portion 721F, the light diffusion portion 732F and non-light diffusion portion 735F of the third bulge portion 731F, and the non-light diffusion portion 701F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the third light-emitting body 641cF is turned on, the irradiation destination (supply destination) of the light from the third light-emitting body 641cF can be repeatedly changed in the following order: non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 712F → non-light-diffusing section 715F → light-diffusing section 712F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 722F → non-light-diffusing section 725F → light-diffusing section 722F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 732F → non-light-diffusing section 735F → light-diffusing section 732F → non-light-diffusing section 701E.

The third light emitter 641cF is arranged so that a part of the track PLc overlaps with the notification decorative part 512F, the second notice part 522F, and the third notice part 523F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and when the light emitting unit 630F is waiting in the above-mentioned waiting position, the third light emitter 641cF is located behind the second notice part 522F and behind the notification decorative part 512F. When arranged in the waiting position, the third light emitter 641cF on the second notice part 522F side is turned on, so that the second notice part 522F is turned on. When the notification decorative part 512F is turned on, the third light emitter 641cF on the notification decorative part 512F side is turned on with the light emitting unit 630F arranged in the waiting position.

The fourth light-emitting body 641dF is positioned in such a position that the orbit PLd along which the fourth light-emitting body 641dF revolves when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps with the light diffusion portion 712F and non-light diffusion portion 715F of the first bulge portion 711F, the light diffusion portion 722F and non-light diffusion portion 725F of the second bulge portion 721F, the light diffusion portion 732F and non-light diffusion portion 735F of the third bulge portion 731F, and the non-light diffusion portion 701F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the fourth light-emitting element 641dF is turned on, the illumination destination (supply destination) of the light from the fourth light-emitting element 641dF can be repeatedly changed in the following order: non-light-diffusing portion 701F → light-diffusing portion 712F → non-light-diffusing portion 715F → light-diffusing portion 712F → non-light-diffusing portion 701F → light-diffusing portion 722F → non-light-diffusing portion 725F → light-diffusing portion 722F → non-light-diffusing portion 701F → light-diffusing portion 732F → non-light-diffusing portion 735F → light-diffusing portion 732F → non-light-diffusing portion 701E.

The fourth light emitter 641dF is positioned so that a portion of the track PLd overlaps with the notification decorative portion 512F, the second notice portion 522F, and the third notice portion 523F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and when the light-emitting unit 630F is waiting in the above-mentioned waiting position, the fourth light emitter 641dF is positioned behind the notification decorative portion 512F. When the notification decorative portion 512F is turned on, the fourth light emitter 641dF is turned on with the light-emitting unit 630F placed in the waiting position.

The fifth light emitter 641eF is disposed at a position where the orbit PLe of the fifth light emitter 641eF when the light emitter unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps the light diffusion section 712F of the first bulge 711F, the light diffusion section 722F of the second bulge 721F, the light diffusion section 732F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light diffusion section 701F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light emitter unit 630F while keeping the fifth light emitter 641eF on, the irradiation destination (supply destination) of the light by the fifth light emitter 641eF can be repeatedly changed in the order of non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 701F.

The fifth light emitter 641eF is positioned so that a portion of the track PLe overlaps with the notification decorative part 512F and the first notice part 521F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and when the rotational position of the light emitting unit 630F is waiting in the above-mentioned waiting position, the fifth light emitter 641eF is positioned behind the notification decorative part 512F. When the notification decorative part 512F is turned on, the fifth light emitter 641eF is turned on with the light emitting unit 630F placed in the waiting position.

The sixth light emitter 641fF is disposed at a position where the orbit PLf around which the sixth light emitter 641fF revolves when the light emitter unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1 overlaps the light diffusion section 712F of the first bulge section 711F, the light diffusion section 722F of the second bulge section 721F, the light diffusion section 732F of the third bulge section 731F, and the non-light diffusion section 701F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light emitter unit 630F while keeping the sixth light emitter 641fF lit, the irradiation destination (supply destination) of the light from the sixth light emitter 641fF can be repeatedly changed in the order of non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 701F.

The sixth light emitter 641fF is arranged so that a part of the track PLf overlaps with the notification decorative part 512F and the first notice part 521F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and when the rotational position of the light emitting unit 630F is waiting at the above-mentioned waiting position, the sixth light emitter 641fF is located behind the first notice part 521F and behind the notification decorative part 512F. When arranged at the waiting position, the sixth light emitter 641fF on the first notice part 521F side is turned on, so that the first notice part 521F is turned on. When the notification decorative part 512F is turned on, the sixth light emitter 641fF on the notification decorative part 512F side is turned on with the light emitting unit 630F arranged at the waiting position.

In the fifteenth embodiment described above, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a special miss preview performance at the timing of the transition to the confirmed display, and if a decision is made to execute the special miss preview performance, the special miss preview performance starts at the timing of the transition. In this embodiment, the start timing of the special miss preview performance is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment, but the configuration differs from the fifteenth embodiment in that the decision as to whether or not to execute the special miss preview performance is made at an earlier timing (more specifically, the timing at which the hold is acquired).

Next, the flow of the special miss preview performance will be explained with reference to Figures 165(a) and 165(b).

In the special miss preview performance, the light emission control of each light emitter 641F is executed with the light-emitting unit 630F stopped at the above-mentioned standby position in order to switch the first preview section 521F, the second preview section 522F, and the third preview section 523F between the off state and the on state according to the step-up pattern currently set.

For example, if a special miss result is indicated after stepping up in the order of step 1 → step 2 → step 3, the sixth light emitter 641fF located behind the first notice section 521F is lit at the timing of the confirmation display for the game round prior to the relevant game round. This causes the first notice section 521F to be lit (step 1). At the timing of the confirmation display for the game round executed after the completion of step 1, the third light emitter 641cF located behind the second notice section 522F is lit. This causes the second notice section 522F to be lit (step 2). At the timing of the confirmation display for the game round executed after the completion of step 2, the second light emitter 641bF is lit. This causes the third notice section 523F to be lit (step 3).

In the corresponding game round that is executed after the step-up is completed, the first light-emitting element 641aF, the fourth light-emitting element 641dF, the fifth light-emitting element 641eF, and among the second light-emitting element 641bF, the third light-emitting element 641cF, and the sixth light-emitting element 641fF, those located behind the notification decorative element 512F are newly lit at the timing of the confirmation display. This causes the notification decorative element 512F to be lit (see FIG. 165(b)).

As already explained, before the special miss notice performance is executed, a teasing performance that is a precursor to the special miss notice performance may be executed. In this teasing performance, first, the light-emitting unit 630E starts rotating during the variable display of the symbols in the game round (before the timing of the fixed display of the symbol combination). After the rotation speed reaches a steady rotation speed during the variable display, the first light-emitting body 641aF, a part of the third light-emitting body 641cF (those located behind the second notice section 522F when placed in the standby position), the fourth light-emitting body 641dF, and a part of the sixth light-emitting body 641fF (those located behind the first notice section 521F when placed in the standby position) are lit. As a result, the special performance device 500E dynamically displays a dot-like light-emitting pattern and a line-like light-emitting pattern. In this way, the teasing performance encourages the player to pay attention to the special performance device 500F before the special miss notice performance is started, thereby suppressing the player from missing the special miss notice performance.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the ceiling is reached, the game is switched to a normal game state (fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, so that further investment is suppressed. Although such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game, there is room for improvement in terms of encouraging attention to the change in the flow of the game due to the ceiling being reached. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to take such circumstances into consideration. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) is an asymmetrical gauge, and the arrangement of the various game components provided in the play area PE is changed. Below, the game board unit 80B in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB has a plurality of openings of various sizes that penetrate in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 80aB. A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83B, a through gate 84A, etc. are arranged in each opening. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83B, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player based on the detection result.

In addition, numerous game nails 87 are planted on the game board 80aB to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are arranged. The flow path of the game balls is differentiated by these game nails 87 and various components such as windmills, and is adjusted so that winning the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 etc. occurs with a moderate probability. In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aB, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry parts etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 86.

The operating port unit 82A has a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. The latter of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric device 93A as an opening and closing type ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an opening and closing member (opening and closing means). When the support mode of the electric device 93A is the low frequency support mode, it is practically impossible to win at the second operating port 92A, and by switching to the high frequency support mode, winning at the second operating port 92A is permitted.

A center frame 96A is provided on the game board 80aB so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aB, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the left side, which is similar to the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, the second actuation port 92A, the variable winning device 83B, and the through gate 84A is changed so that a game ball launched to the left route can win a prize in the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A, but cannot win a prize in the variable winning device 83B or the through gate 84A, and a game ball launched to the right route can win a prize in the second actuation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83B, but cannot win a prize in the first actuation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the game ball launched to the left route so that it cannot win a prize in the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route depending on the game status, it is possible to advance the game in an advantageous manner. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony of the game is prevented.

A reserve display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The reserve display area is composed of a reserve number display area Da, which is displayed in a partitioned manner with unit reserve display areas aligned horizontally in the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls when game balls enter the operating ports 91, 92, and an execution target display area Dc that can display a reserve image (reserve icon) corresponding to the current game round. The reserve number display area Da can be switched between a display mode composed of four unit reserve display areas and a display mode composed of eight unit reserve areas.

The main destination of the game ball flowing down the left route is the first operating port 91A, and during the low-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reservation related to the first operating port 91A. In contrast, the main destination of the game ball flowing down the right route is the second operating port 92A, and during the high-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reservation related to the second operating port 92A. Due to this reason, in many cases, the number of reserved icons displayed in the reserved number display area Da is four or less. For this reason, the display mode of the reserved number display area Da is basically a display mode in which the reserved number display area Da is composed of four unit reserved display areas as shown in FIG. 139, and only when the number of reserved icons exceeds four, the display mode is switched to a display mode composed of eight unit reserved display areas. Note that the function of switching the display mode of the reserved number display area Da according to the situation can be omitted.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B differs from that of the variable prize-winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. Below, a supplementary explanation of the specific configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B will be provided with reference to Figure 167. Figure 167 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable prize-winning device 83B.

(Variable winning device 83B)
Inside the variable winning device 83B, a ball passage 332B is formed through which the game balls that flow into the entrance (large winning port 331B) of the variable winning device 83B pass. The ball passage 332B branches into a first branch passage 334B and a second branch passage 335B at an intermediate position, and a flow path switching member 336B that can switch the flow destination of the game ball to the first branch passage 334B side or the second branch passage 335B side is arranged at this branching portion. The drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 336B is configured to wait at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 332B when a drive signal is not input from the main control device 162 (de-energized state), and wait at a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided when a drive signal is input (energized state).

When the flow path switching member 336B is in the protruding position, the inlet of the first branch passage 334B is blocked by the flow path switching member 336B. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 334B, and instead flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 336B and the drive unit is energized, the flow path switching member 336B moves to a retracted position that avoids protruding into the ball passage 332B, and the entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 335B, and these game balls flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the results of a lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A.

An upstream detection sensor 391d is provided in the ball passage 332B upstream of the branching portion, and downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are provided in the downstream of the branching portion, specifically the first branch passage 334B and the second branch passage 335B. The upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to the main control device 162, which determines whether or not a win has been made in the variable winning device 83B based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 391d, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls if a win has occurred. In addition, the remaining game balls are monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, when it is determined that a ball has entered the first branch passage 334B based on detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B, the lottery mode after the special game state (more specifically, the V jackpot game state described below) ends is switched to a high probability mode (a so-called V guaranteed machine). In this embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "favorable ball entry section" or "V", and entry into the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as a "V entry".

(Reserved ball storage area)
Next, in this embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information based on winning into the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration related to the storage of reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of Figure 168.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserved area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserved area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a winning ball is won through the second actuation port 92A.

The reserve area Ra for the first actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area. The reserve area Rb for the second actuation port is made up of the first area to the fourth area, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (reserved information) is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area.

In this embodiment, when reserved information is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When reserved information is not stored in the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port and reserved information is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port, the reserved information stored in the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment, a low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high are provided as lottery modes for performing a lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92. In other words, the hit/miss table for the actuation port to be referenced is switched depending on the lottery mode. In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the hit/miss lottery for the actuation port is performed by referring to the same hit/miss table in any game state. The present embodiment also differs from the first embodiment in that a different hit/miss table is referenced depending on the winning destination of the game ball. Below, the hit/miss table for the actuation port in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 170.

(Actual/invalid table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 169(a), in the win/lose table for the low probability mode that is referenced in the lottery based on the winning of the actuation ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot win (i.e., winning information) are "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507", a total of six. In other words, of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to a jackpot. And, all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a miss (normal miss). This makes the jackpot probability 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 169(b), in the high probability mode win/lose table that is referenced in the lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot win (i.e., winning information) are "7", "37", "57", "97", "107", ... "597", a total of 30. In other words, of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "97", "107", ... "597" correspond to a jackpot. And all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a miss (normal miss). This makes the jackpot probability 1/20.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning at the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A do not include the special loss shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a special loss can occur in a lottery based on winning at the first actuation port 91A, or it may be configured so that a special loss can occur in a lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A, or it may be configured so that a special loss can occur in both a lottery based on winning at the first actuation port 91A and a lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A.

Next, referring to Figure 170, we will explain the allocation table for each operating port 91A, 92A.

(Distribution table for operating ports)
In the distribution table for the first operating port 91A, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0" to "29", a total of 15 values from "0" to "14" correspond to the 3R jackpot A (3R jackpot result A), and a total of 15 values from "15" to "29" correspond to the 3R jackpot B (3R jackpot result B). In other words, when a jackpot is won, the probability of the 3R jackpot result A and the 3R jackpot result B are each 50%.

In contrast, in the distribution table for the second operating port 92A, of the values of the type counter C2 from "0" to "29", a total of 6 values from "0" to "5" correspond to a 6R jackpot A (6R jackpot result A), and a total of 24 values from "6" to "29" correspond to a 6R jackpot B (6R jackpot result B). In other words, when a jackpot is won, approximately 20% of the time it will be a 6R jackpot result A, and the remaining 80% will be a 6R jackpot result B.

As shown in FIG. 171, there is a difference in the number of rounds during the open/close execution mode between a 3R jackpot result and a 6R jackpot result. The number of rounds for the former is "3", while the number of rounds for the latter is "6". In other words, if you get a 6R jackpot result, it's a chance to increase your balls all at once.

In this embodiment, the distribution pattern of the flow path switching member 336B in the variable winning device 83B differs depending on the type of jackpot. This distribution pattern includes a low frequency winning pattern and a high frequency winning pattern.

In the low-frequency winning mode, the flow path switching member 336B switches from the protruding position to the retracted position immediately after the shutter 333B of the variable winning device 83B switches from the closed state to the open state, and immediately thereafter (more specifically, before the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening reaches the branching position), the flow path switching member 336B returns to the protruding position. More specifically, the time from when the shutter 333B switches to the open state until the flow path switching member 336B returns to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening 331B to reach the distribution position at the timing when the shutter 333B switches to the open state. This realizes a configuration that essentially prevents winning into the advantageous ball entry section 334B.

In contrast, in the high frequency winning mode, the flow path switching member 336B switches from the protruding position to the retracted position immediately after the shutter of the variable winning device 83B switches from the closed state to the open state, which is similar to the low frequency winning mode, but the flow path switching member 336B remains in the retracted position for a predetermined time (8 seconds). This time is longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds) x maximum number of winning balls (10 balls) = 6 seconds, and most of the game balls launched to the right route reach the variable winning device 83B, so a configuration is realized in which a winning ball in the advantageous ball section 334B is essentially guaranteed as long as the game balls continue to be launched to the right route.

For the 3R jackpot result A and the 6R jackpot result A, the distribution mode of the flow path switching member 336B is a jackpot result that results in a low-frequency winning mode, and for the 3R jackpot result B and the 6R jackpot result B, the distribution mode of the flow path switching member 336B is a jackpot result that results in a high-frequency winning mode. In other words, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A results in a lottery result in which the lottery mode after the special game state ends has a 50% probability of switching to the high-probability mode, and the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A results in a lottery result in which the lottery mode after the special game state ends has an 80% probability of switching to the high-probability mode (see FIG. 170).

In addition, in the case of a 3R jackpot result A or a 6R jackpot result A, after the special game state ends, the game state transitions to one in which the support mode by the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B. This game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B continues until the number of game plays executed after the special game state ends, more specifically the number of games related to the second operating port 92A, reaches the termination reference number, and when the termination reference number is reached, support by high-frequency support mode B ends. In the case of a 3R jackpot result A, the termination reference number is set to "100 times."

In contrast, when a 3R jackpot result B or a 6R jackpot result B occurs, after the special game state ends, the game state transitions to one in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B. This game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B will continue until the next jackpot result occurs.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 172, the V distribution setting process, which is a control process for the flow path switching member 336B executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, will be described. The V distribution setting process shown in this embodiment is a process executed as part of the large prize opening opening and closing process (FIG. 31).

(V allocation setting process)
In the V allocation setting process, first, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the third round (V challenge round) in the special game state. If it is the start timing of the third round, in step S5202, "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec) is set to the third timer counter TC3 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404. The value (counter value) set in the third timer counter TC3 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a 2 msec cycle.

In the next step S5203, the distribution count counter HC provided in the various counter area 434 is set to "1" and the V distribution setting process is terminated. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution count counter HC is used by the MPU 402 to identify the number of operations of the flow path switching member 336B.

Returning to the explanation of step S5201, if a negative judgment is made in step S5201, the process proceeds to step S5204. In step S5204, it is determined whether the value of the distribution count counter HC is "0". If the value of the distribution count counter HC is "0", a positive judgment is made in step S5204 and the V distribution setting process is terminated. If the value of the distribution count counter HC is not "0", a negative judgment is made in step S5240 and the process proceeds to step S5205.

In step S5205, the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member is used to determine whether or not the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position, which is the distribution side (V winning side) to the favorable ball entry section 334B. If the flow path switching member 336B is not in the retracted position, i.e., if it is in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S5206 to determine whether or not the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the distribution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", the process proceeds to step S5207.

In step S5207, a process is performed to move the flow path switching member 336B from the protruding position to the retracted position. This switches the flow path in the variable winning device 83B to the V winning side. In the following step S5208, it is determined whether the current allocation mode is a high frequency winning mode. If a positive determination is made in step S5208, the process proceeds to step S5209, where the third timer counter TC3 is set to "4000" (equivalent to 8 sec). If a negative determination is made in step S5208, the process proceeds to step S5210, where the third timer counter TC3 is set to "40" (equivalent to 0.08 sec).

Returning to the explanation of step S5205, if a positive judgment is made in step S5205, that is, if the flow path switching member 336B is placed in the retracted position, the process proceeds to step S5211. In step S5211, it is judged whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". In other words, it is judged whether the period for keeping the flow path switching member 336B in the retracted position (V winning side) has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S5211, the process proceeds to step S5212, where the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the protruding position. As a result, winning in the advantageous entry section 334B (V winning) is no longer possible. Thereafter, in step S5213, the process of subtracting "1" from the value of the distribution number counter HC is executed, and the process of this distribution setting is terminated.

Next, the V winning process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 173. The V winning process shown in this embodiment is a process executed as part of the game state transition process (FIG. 30).

(V prize processing)
In the V winning process, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S5302, and it is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 338B) based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 338B provided in the variable winning device 83B.

If it is determined that a V win has occurred, in step S3303, it is determined whether or not the V win is within its valid period. The valid period is the period during which measurement (counting) begins as the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the retracted position, and its length is slightly longer than the period during which the flow path switching member 336B is maintained in the retracted position.

If it is determined that the valid period is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S5304, an error command is set as the target for transmission to the notification/performance control device 140, and then the process for this V winning is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 by the external output process of the normal process (Figure 23), and the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 so that a specified error notification is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the valid period is in progress, the process proceeds to step S5305, where a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S5306, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification/performance control device 140 that a V winning has occurred, and the set V winning command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output processing of the normal processing (Figure 23). When the notification/performance control device 140 receives a V winning command, it controls the display control device 410, etc., so that the pattern display device 95, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 notify the occurrence of a V winning, or a performance such as celebrating the V winning is executed.

After executing step S5306, if a positive judgment is made in step S5301 or a negative judgment is made in step S5302, the V winning process is terminated.

Next, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 174. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode shown in this embodiment is a process executed as part of the game state transition process (FIG. 30).

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, first, in step S5401, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This causes the support mode by the electric role 93A to switch to the high frequency support mode B. In the following step S5402, it is determined whether the current opening and closing execution mode is triggered by either the 3R jackpot result B or the 6R jackpot result B. If a negative determination is made in step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5403, where a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S5404, the continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "100".

The value of the continuation counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played, and high-frequency support mode B ends when the value of the continuation counter reaches "0." In other words, the value of the continuation counter determines the upper limit (the above-mentioned termination reference number) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

After executing the processing of step S5404, or if a positive judgment is made in step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the V prize flag is stored, a positive judgment is made in step S5405, and the process proceeds to step S5406, where the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This causes the lottery mode to become the high probability mode.

After executing the processing of step S5406, or if a negative judgment is made in step S5404, the process proceeds to step S5407. In step S5407, the number of plays counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is cleared (reset) to 0. After that, in step S5408, the various flags (jackpot flag, etc.) for the open/close execution mode stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is stopped.

Next, we will explain the pre-confirmation process (see step S306 in FIG. 22) for the hold notice (including the above-mentioned notice performance) and the hold command setting process (step S307 in FIG. 22) that are executed as part of the timer interrupt process by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162.

(Advance confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 175, in the advance confirmation process, first, in step S5501, the active reserved memory number N and the common reserved number CRN stored in the reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432A are read, and the information on the reserved number is stored in the register of the MPU 402. After that, in step S5502, it is confirmed whether the reserved information acquired by this winning includes information corresponding to the big win result. The details of this judgment are the same as the hit/miss judgment process in step S702, so the explanation will be omitted.

If the confirmation process of step S5502 confirms that a jackpot will occur, a positive judgment is made in step S5503 and the process proceeds to step S5504. In step S5504, jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this advance confirmation process ends. In step S5504, the information for type determination from the reserved information acquired in step S304 above based on the current winning, i.e., the value of the acquired type counter C2, is grasped, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the allocation table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S5504 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the confirmation process in step S5502 confirms that the result will be a miss (normal miss), a negative judgment is made in step S5503 and the process proceeds to step S5505. In step S5505, the process executes a reach confirmation process when the result is a normal miss. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 already acquired in step S304 is grasped, and the lottery table for the occurrence of a miss reach is referred to to confirm whether or not a miss reach will occur. If a miss reach will not occur (if a complete miss occurs), a negative judgment is made in step S5506 and the pre-confirmation process ends. If a miss reach occurs, a positive judgment is made in step S5506 and the process proceeds to step S5507. In step S5507, the miss reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and the pre-confirmation process ends. Note that the information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S5507 includes information on the general type of the miss reach (whether it is a super reach or not).

Next, we will explain the process of setting pending commands by referring to the flowchart in Figure 176.

(Setting pending commands)
In the process of setting the reserved command, first, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If the jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S5602, where a reserved command for the jackpot is set. The reserved command for the jackpot includes information on the type of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S5601, that is, if it is judged that no jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S5603, where it is judged whether or not a miss reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402. If a miss reach occurrence information is stored, a positive judgment is made in step S5603, and the process proceeds to step S5604, where a miss reach corresponding hold command is set. The miss reach corresponding hold command includes information related to the general type of miss reach (whether it is a super reach or not). If a negative judgment is made in step S5603, the process proceeds to step S5605. In step S5605, a miss reach non-compatible hold command (complete miss corresponding hold command) is set.

When setting a hold command in steps S5602, S5604, and S5605, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referenced, as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S714 above. The hold command set in this way is sent to the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 can grasp the variable display mode of the pattern, etc. based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time can change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting a game round related to the hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, information related to the variable display time is not stored.

After executing the command setting process of step S5602, step S5604, or step S5605, a process of setting the reserved number information for the reserved command is executed in step S5606. The information of the reserved command is configured as multiple bytes of information, and in step S4408, the reserved number information stored in the register of MPU402 in step S5501 in the immediately preceding advance confirmation process (FIG. 175) is first read, and then the read reserved number information is stored in the bit for the reserved number information in the reserved command already set by an arithmetic process such as a logical OR. As a result, the reserved command set in the process of step S5602, step S5604, or step S5605 contains information for identifying which reserved information corresponds to the reserved command. After executing the process of step S5606 described above in detail, this reserved command setting process is terminated.

The hold command containing the information on the number of hold items in step S5606 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 by the external output process in step S401 in the next normal processing (Figure 23). By receiving the hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines that the amount of hold information has increased. The notification/performance control device 140 also adds hold notice information, which will be described later, to the hold command and sends it to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 executes processes such as hold display and hold notice based on the received hold command.

Next, we will explain the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140. The process related to the hold notice is broadly divided into a command response process that determines the command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice performance setting process that determines the mode of the hold notice.

(Pending command handling process)
In the hold command response process, when a hold command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, a process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed. The hold command response process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

In the pending command response process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. This command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been previously stored, so that even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the area of the command storage area 461 that is the current target for reading. Note that this configuration for reading commands is the same when reading out other commands, such as a command to start fluctuations.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area 467 has the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8, and each area is configured to store one hold information. The hold information stored in each area is shifted to the lower area side in order by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3 ... eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140, the hold information is stored in chronological order regardless of the ball entry destination, similar to the hold ball storage area 432 (more specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port) of the main control device 162. Specifically, the system identifies the number of pending items included in the currently received command, and stores the various pieces of information listed above in the area corresponding to the identified number of pending items among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

When the above-mentioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 444, and when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. Each of these flags triggers the setting process for the hold notice performance described below, and is erased when the setting process for the hold notice performance is completed.

The MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 performs a jackpot advance notice effect setting process based on the information stored in the reserved information storage area. The jackpot advance notice effect setting process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 msec), and is executed on the condition that the above-mentioned reserved command or shift command is received. In other words, in this embodiment, the trigger for executing the jackpot advance notice effect is when reserved information is acquired in conjunction with a win at the actuation port 91A, 92A, or when reserved information is consumed as the game progresses.

The big win preview effect shown in this embodiment is executed by changing the state of the reserved display displayed in the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 95A (display screen 95aA) to one that corresponds to the big win preview effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, the reserved icon MP displayed in the reserved number display area Da that corresponds to the relevant play count (relevant reserved) is changed (in this embodiment, the color is changed). Specifically, there are multiple color patterns for the reserved icon MP, specifically three patterns: white (level 0), blue (level 1), yellow (level 2), and red (level 3), and the color of the relevant reserved icon MP is changed to a color other than white.

If the reserved number corresponds to a jackpot result, the order of likely selection is level 3 > level 2 > level 1, and if the reserved number corresponds to a normal miss result, the order of likely selection is level 1 > level 2 > level 3. In other words, when the jackpot prediction performance is executed, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation of a jackpot result.

The big win preview effects are broadly divided into non-step-up preview effects (first big win preview effects) in which the color of the changed reserved icon MP is maintained until it shifts to the execution target display area Dc, and step-up preview effects (second big win preview effects) in which the color changes before it shifts to the execution target display area Dc.

In the first jackpot preview performance, the jackpot preview performance starts during the game round before the game round related to the reserved icon MP starts, which encourages the player to pay attention to the game. In contrast, in the second jackpot preview performance, the color of the reserved icon MP changes as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that it will eventually change to is red, it will first be changed to a lower color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation, and then stepped up (promoted) to a higher color with a higher expectation at the timing when the reserved icon MP shifts. By using these two types of jackpot preview performances in combination, even if the color has a lower expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a color with a higher expectation by the time the corresponding game round begins. This prevents the attention to the jackpot preview performance from decreasing too early.

In the gaming machine described above, the game is basically played with the aim of hitting the jackpot, but if the ceiling is reached without hitting the jackpot, not only is the investment suppressed by the high frequency support mode A, but the probability of switching to the high probability mode in the event of a jackpot and the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the event of a jackpot are raised. In other words, when the ceiling is imminent (close to being reached), the expectation of a large number of balls being dispensed increases if the jackpot is reached after the ceiling is reached, rather than before the ceiling is reached. For these reasons, it is assumed that the tension of the game increases when the ceiling is imminent. Although a moderate sense of tension in the game is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game, there is a concern that such a tense state continuing for a long time will cause fatigue in the player. In this embodiment, one of the features is that in some cases when the ceiling is imminent, the ceiling reach confirmation performance is executed in a game round before the game round in which the ceiling is reached, thereby alleviating the above concerns. Below, we will explain the ceiling reach confirmation presentation process that is executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 178.

(Ceiling Reach Confirmation Processing)
In the process for the ceiling reach confirmation effect, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not a ceiling reach confirmation effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. Although details will be described later, the ceiling reach confirmation effect flag is a flag that is stored when the ceiling reach confirmation effect starts and is erased when the ceiling reach confirmation effect ends. If a negative determination is made in step S5791, the process proceeds to step S5702.

In step S5702, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162. If a hold command has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S5702, and the process for the ceiling reached confirmation presentation is terminated. If a hold command has been received, a positive determination is made in step S5702, and the process proceeds to step S5703. In step S5703, it is determined whether a hold has been secured until the ceiling is reached (a hold for the remaining number of plays). If there is insufficient hold, a negative determination is made in step S5703, and the process for the ceiling reached confirmation presentation is terminated. If a hold has been secured, a positive determination is made in step S5703, and the process proceeds to step S5704.

In step S5704, it is determined whether or not the reserved positions consumed until the ceiling is reached include a reserved position corresponding to the jackpot result. If a reserved position corresponding to the jackpot result is not included, a negative determination is made in step S5704 and the process proceeds to step S5705. In step S5705, a lottery process for a confirmed performance is executed. In the lottery process for a confirmed performance, a lottery table for a confirmed performance stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443 is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a ceiling-reached confirmed performance. The probability of winning in this lottery is 50%.

If the lottery in step S5705 is won, a positive judgment is made in step S5706 and the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, a ceiling reach confirmation effect start process is executed. Specifically, a gold effect is displayed on the outer periphery of the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A, and the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to background music corresponding to the ceiling reach confirmation effect.

After the ceiling reach confirmation performance has started, in step S5708, a jackpot preview performance restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. This prevents a new jackpot preview performance from starting until the ceiling reach confirmation performance has ended. If the preview performance restriction flag is set when a jackpot preview performance has not yet started, the jackpot preview performance is stopped without being executed.

In the next step S5709, a ceiling reach confirmation effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. After that, in step S5710, a firing stop suggestion start process is executed, and the ceiling reach confirmation effect process is terminated. The firing stop suggestion start process causes the word "firing stop" to be displayed on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. If a hold until the ceiling is reached is secured, regardless of whether a hold corresponding to a jackpot result is included or whether a ceiling reach confirmation effect occurs, the firing stop suggestion start process is executed in step S5710, and then the ceiling reach confirmation effect process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5701, if a positive judgment is made in step S5701, i.e., if the ceiling reached confirmation effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444, the process proceeds to step S5711. In step S5711, it is determined whether the ceiling has been reached. Specifically, it is determined whether the timing is such that the final game round at which the ceiling will be reached has ended. If a negative judgment is made in step S5711, the process proceeds to step S5712. In step S5712, it is determined whether a jackpot advance notice effect is being executed. If a negative judgment is made in step S5712, the process for the ceiling reached confirmation effect ends as is. If a positive judgment is made in step S5712, the process proceeds to step S713.

In step S5713, it is determined whether it is time to cancel (cancel) the jackpot advance notice performance. Specifically, it is determined whether the cancellation timing, which is the timing during the confirmation display in the game round, has arrived. If a negative determination is made in step S5713, the process for the ceiling reached confirmation performance is terminated as is. If a positive determination is made in step S5713, the jackpot advance notice performance cancellation process is executed in step S5714, and then the process for the ceiling reached confirmation performance is terminated.

In the big win advance notice cancellation process, a sound effect for canceling the big win advance notice is output from the speaker unit 29, and the color of the reserved icon MP, which has been changed to blue, yellow, or red, is changed to white. More specifically, a dynamic display is performed in which a white effect converges from the gold effect displayed on the outer periphery of the display screen 95aA toward the reserved icon MP whose color has been changed, and then the color of the reserved icon MP is changed to white.

Returning to the explanation of step S5711, if a positive judgment is made in step S5711, that is, if the ceiling has been reached, the process proceeds to step S571. In step S5715, the process of ending the firing stop suggestion is executed. As a result, the text "Fire Stop" displayed on the display screen 95aA is hidden. In the following step S5716, the process of ending the ceiling reach confirmation effect is executed. As a result, the background music for the ceiling reach confirmation effect output from the speaker unit 29 is turned off. Specifically, in order to transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling, the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to background music corresponding to the normal game state to which the transition is to be made. In addition, the gold effect displayed on the outer periphery of the display screen 95aA is hidden.

After executing the ceiling reach confirmation effect end process, in step S5717, the jackpot advance notice effect restriction flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is erased. This releases the restriction on the jackpot advance notice effect. After that, in step S5718, the ceiling reach confirmation effect flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 is erased, and the ceiling reach confirmation effect process is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 179, we will illustrate the flow of the ceiling reach confirmation presentation. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing the flow of the ceiling reach confirmation presentation, and illustrates the case where the ceiling reach confirmation presentation starts during the jackpot notice presentation corresponding to a miss result (normal miss result).

At time tk1, with the start of the 395th play round after the end of the special play state, the number of reserved balls related to the first actuation port 91A decreases from "3" to "2". At time tk2 during the 395th play round, a winning ball is entered into the first actuation port 91A, and the number of reserved balls related to the first actuation port 91A increases from "2" to "3". However, at time tk2, although the number of reserved balls has increased, there are not enough reserved balls to reach the ceiling (there are not enough reserved balls).

At time tk3, with the start of the 396th play round after the end of the special play state, the number of reserved balls related to the first actuation port 91A decreases from "3" to "2". At time tk4 during the 396th play round, a winning jackpot is awarded to the first actuation port 91A, and the number of reserved balls related to the first actuation port 91A increases from "2" to "3". Immediately after this, at time tk5, a winning jackpot is awarded to the first actuation port 91A, and the number of reserved balls related to the first actuation port 91A increases from "3" to "4".

At the timing of tk5, the number of reserved balls increases and the reserved balls that will reach the ceiling are secured, and any reserved balls consumed before the ceiling is reached correspond to a miss result (normal miss result). Based on these conditions, a lottery is held to see whether or not to execute the ceiling reach confirmation effect. In the example shown in FIG. 179, the lottery is won, and the ceiling reach confirmation effect starts at the timing of tk5. In addition, in conjunction with the start of the ceiling reach confirmation effect, a suggestion to stop firing starts on the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A.

Here, at the time tk5, the jackpot preview effect is being executed for the 397th play round. This jackpot preview effect is originally scheduled to continue until the time tk8 when the 397th play round ends, but the decision to cancel (cancel) it is made when the ceiling reached confirmation effect is executed. Then, at a time before the time tk8, or more specifically, at the time tk6 during the confirmation display for the 396th play round, the jackpot preview effect is canceled (cancelled).

At the timing of tk7, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "4" to "3" with the start of the 397th game after the special game state ends, at the timing of tk8, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "3" to "2" with the start of the 398th game after the special game state ends, and at the timing of tk9, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "2" to "1" with the start of the 399th game after the special game state ends. Then, at the timing of tk10, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "1" to "0" with the start of the 400th game after the special game state ends. This 400th game is the game in which the ceiling is reached, and at the timing of tk11 when the game ends, the ceiling reach confirmation performance and launch stop suggestion end, and the game transitions to the normal game state (fourth normal game state) compatible with high frequency support mode A.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, if the game progresses without a jackpot result, which is the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (open/close execution mode), the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached), and the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (more specifically, high frequency support mode A). In the high frequency support mode, the electric device 93A attached to the second operating port 92A frequently opens (receives), increasing the frequency of balls entering the second operating port 92A, and further investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable for improving the soundness of the game.

Here, the judgment based on the ball entering the second operating port 92A is more favorable to the player than the judgment based on the ball entering the first operating port 91A. In other words, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is strengthened by switching to the high frequency support mode and the ball entering the second operating port 92A → judgment. In such a configuration, if the result is a jackpot just before the ceiling is reached, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefit. Therefore, it is assumed that a player who expects to reach the ceiling will play in the hope that the result will not be a jackpot at least just before the ceiling is reached. In particular, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, whether or not a transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode will occur due to the ceiling being reached is specified in advance (pre-specified), and a judgment is made based on the specified result before the game round in which the ceiling is reached, and if it is determined that the transition will occur, a performance indicating a transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed before the game round in which the ceiling is reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive tension just before the ceiling is reached, and to give a sense of security to a player who expects to reach the ceiling. This is favorable for improving player satisfaction and drawing more attention to the game.

As shown in this embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not a transition to a normal game state compatible with a high frequency support mode due to reaching the ceiling will occur when the number of stored pending information reaches a number corresponding to the number of remaining times at which the ceiling will be reached, an increase in the control load caused by the implementation of special effects can be suppressed. For example, compared to a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the above transition will occur each time pending information is added, it is possible to suitably reduce the control load. Note that, as shown in this embodiment, a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the above transition will occur when pending information is added is also preferable in terms of starting special effects promptly.

In a configuration in which a judgment based on a ball entering the second operating port 92A to which the electric device 93A is attached is given priority over a judgment based on a ball entering the first operating port 91A, it cannot be denied that there is a possibility that a further ball will enter the first operating port 91A as a result of game balls being released even after the ceiling has been confirmed to be reached in advance. If pending information is obtained due to such a ball entering, an event may occur in which the player is unable to actually enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. This is a concern as it will significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which, when a performance indicating the ceiling has been reached is started, the performance continues at least until the play round in which the ceiling is reached, it is possible to preferably prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring, such as the performance being overlooked.

<Modification 1>
In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, when the ceiling is reached in a game before the game in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling reach confirmation effect is executed as an effect to inform the player that the ceiling has been reached, but this is not limited to this. Instead, when a ceiling reach suggestion effect occurs as an effect related to the ceiling reach in a game before the game in which the ceiling is reached (but within the upper limit number of reserved memory), it is possible to configure the ceiling to be highly likely (or likely) to be reached. In this case, it is also possible to configure one of a plurality of effects with different expectations of reaching the ceiling to be selectively executed. In other words, it is also possible to configure the ceiling to be highly likely to be reached even in some cases where the reserved amount corresponding to the jackpot result is included in the reserved amount when the ceiling is reached.

<Modification 2>
As shown in the 18th embodiment, in the configuration in which the pattern in which the number of games related to the first actuation port 91A is the main one changes to the pattern in which the number of games related to the second actuation port 92A is the main one by transitioning to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A by reaching the ceiling, there is a possibility that the remaining reserved number related to the first actuation port 91A will be consumed even after transitioning to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A. If such a remaining reserved number includes a number corresponding to a jackpot result, the player is likely not to be able to fully enjoy the benefit of reaching the ceiling. In view of this situation, when determining whether or not to execute the ceiling reach confirmation effect, it is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration by determining whether or not the number of games related to the first actuation port 91A executed after transitioning to the high-frequency support mode A includes a number corresponding to a jackpot result, and if a number corresponding to a jackpot result is included, the ceiling reach confirmation effect is avoided. In addition, instead of such a configuration, when determining whether or not to execute the ceiling reach confirmation effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the game times related to the first operating port 91A executed after the transition to the high-frequency support mode A include a jackpot result corresponding to the 3R jackpot result A, which is the unfavorable side, and to avoid the ceiling reach confirmation effect if the game times related to the first operating port 91A executed after the transition to the high-frequency support mode A include a jackpot result corresponding to the 3R jackpot result B, which is the favorable side. Incidentally, in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure so that the ceiling reach confirmation effect can be executed if the game times related to the first operating port 91A executed after the transition to the high-frequency support mode A include a jackpot result corresponding to the 3R jackpot result B, which is the favorable side.

<Modification 3>
In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the ceiling reach confirmation effect can be started at the timing when the reserved amount for the ceiling reach is acquired, but the start timing of the ceiling reach confirmation effect may be changed arbitrarily as long as it is the timing after the execution of the ceiling reach confirmation effect is decided. For example, the ceiling reach confirmation effect may be started in accordance with the start timing of the game round (for example, the game round immediately after) that is executed after the reserved amount for the ceiling reach is secured.

<Modification 4>
In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, when the ceiling reach determination effect starts during the big win notice effect, the big win notice effect is canceled (stopped) midway. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the big win notice effect not to be canceled (stopped) midway when the ceiling reach determination effect starts during the big win notice effect.

The timing for canceling the big win preview effect was set to when the confirmation display for the game round was in progress, but the timing for canceling it is optional. For example, it is also possible to configure the big win preview effect to be cancelled (stopped) in conjunction with the start of the confirmation display for reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 5>
In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the probability of the lottery based on the winning of the first actuation port 91A resulting in a jackpot result (3R jackpot result B) corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode is set to 50%, and the probability of the lottery based on the winning of the second actuation port 92A resulting in a jackpot result (6R jackpot result B) corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode is set to 80%. In other words, the lottery based on the winning of the second actuation port 92A has a higher advantage in the two elements of the probability of transition to the high probability mode and the number of prize balls in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) than the lottery based on the winning of the first actuation port 91A, so that the difference is set. As long as the player's advantage can be increased at least by reaching the ceiling, the specific configuration is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to configure the lottery based on the winning of the second actuation port 92A without a difference in the advantage in one of the above two elements (probability of the special mode and the number of prize balls).

<Modification 6>
In the 18th embodiment described above, a notification (a suggestion to stop firing) is given to refrain from firing game balls when the reserved balls reach the ceiling, but this notification function can also be omitted.

<Modification 7>
In a configuration in which the reach display indicates the result of a win/lose lottery, it is concerned that the reach display will be self-evident as a so-called false display when the ceiling reach confirmation effect begins, and the effect of increasing attention to the game by the reach display will not be fully realized. Taking such circumstances into consideration, it is also possible to configure the ceiling reach confirmation effect to be refrained from being displayed if the reach display is executed in any of the game times executed before the ceiling is reached, even if the ceiling reach is confirmed.

<Modification 8>
In a configuration in which the result of the winning/losing lottery can be suggested by a super reach display with a high expectation of a jackpot, there is a concern that the execution of a super reach display with a high expectation during the ceiling reach confirmation performance will unnecessarily stir up anxiety in the player. This is expected to be a factor in reducing the satisfaction of the player. Therefore, when the ceiling reach is confirmed and the ceiling reach confirmation performance is executed, the mode of the super reach display executed during the ceiling reach confirmation performance can be changed (downgraded) from a display mode with a high expectation (for example, super reach C) to a display mode with a low expectation (super reach A), thereby suitably suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience. In addition, when the ceiling reach is confirmed and the ceiling reach confirmation performance is executed, it is also possible to change (downgraded) the super reach display executed during the ceiling reach confirmation performance to a normal reach, which is a display mode with a lower expectation than the super reach display.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
As shown in the first embodiment, it is preferable to increase the number of opportunities to transition to the high-frequency support mode as a configuration in which a transition to a normal game state (the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is made in response to a jackpot result, a special miss result, or reaching the ceiling is made, so that the probability of winning in the support lottery is changed to about twice that of the low-frequency support mode (specifically, 1/2 to 1/1.1). In contrast, in the high-frequency support mode A, which is transitioned in response to a special miss result or reaching the ceiling, the probability of winning in the support lottery is not changed and remains the same as in the low-frequency support mode (specifically, 1/2 to 1/2). In such a configuration, there is room for improvement in strengthening the support function in the high-frequency support mode A while avoiding excessive winning in the operating port during the low-frequency support mode. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised to solve such problems. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, referring to Figures 180 and 181, the actuation port unit 82G in this embodiment will be described. Figure 180 is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 80G showing the actuation port unit 82G and its surroundings, and Figure 181 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board unit 80G (a vertical cross-sectional view of the actuation port unit 82G).
(Operating port unit 82G)
As shown in FIG. 180, the operating port unit 82G shown in this embodiment includes a first operating port 91G and a second operating port 92G arranged below the first operating port 91G, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. The second operating port 92G is provided with an electric device 93G as an opening/closing type ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 93G includes a pair of movable pieces 901G as left and right shutter members, a spring member (not shown) as a biasing means for biasing the movable piece 901G to the closed position, and a solenoid-type drive unit 911G for driving the movable piece 901G. When the drive unit 911G is in an excited state, the movable piece 901G is displaced from the closed position to the open position against the biasing force of the spring member, and when the drive unit 911G is in a non-excited state, the movable piece 901G is displaced from the open position to the closed position by the biasing force of the spring member. As shown in Figure 180(a), when the movable piece 901G is in the open position, the ball is allowed to enter the second operating port 92G (hereinafter referred to as the open state or assisted state), whereas when the movable piece 901G is in the closed position, the ball is not allowed to enter the second operating port 92G (hereinafter referred to as the closed state or non-assisted state) as shown in Figure 180(b).

Here, we will provide additional information about the specific structure of the actuation port unit 82G. The actuation port unit 82G has a flat base portion 851G that covers an opening 97G (see FIG. 181) formed in the game board 80aG from the front of the gaming machine, and this base portion 851G is fixed to the game board 80a using a fastener such as a screw, thereby being integrated with the game board 80a.

As shown in FIG. 181, the actuation port unit 82G is formed with a first bulge 861G that bulges forward and backward from the base 851G. A ball inlet facing upward is formed in the front bulge of the first bulge 861G, which bulges forward from the base 851G. This inlet functions as the first actuation port 91G. The first bulge 861G is also formed with a first guide passage 865G that guides the game balls that flow into the first actuation port 91G to a recovery passage (more specifically, the first recovery passage 802G) formed in the base body 251G of the rear block 80b.

A detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the first recovery passage 802G to detect a game ball that has reached a predetermined detection position (winning detection position) in the first recovery passage 802G. This detection sensor is connected to the main control device 162, which performs a winning determination for the first operating port 91G based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor.

A second bulge 871G is formed below the first bulge 861G and away from the first bulge 861G. The second bulge 871G also bulges forward and backward from the base 851G, similar to the first bulge 861G. The front bulge portion of the second bulge 871G, which bulges forward of the base 851G, is made up of an opposing portion 872G that faces the base 851G across a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of left and right connecting portions 873G that connect the opposing portion 872G and the base 851G, and is open in both the up and down directions.

The portion of the base portion 851G that is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the opposing portion 872G has an inlet for gaming balls. The inlet faces the front of the gaming machine and functions as the second operating port 92G. The second bulge portion 871G has a second guide passage portion 875G that guides gaming balls that flow into the second operating port 92G to the second recovery passage 803G formed in the base body 251G of the rear block 80b.

A detection sensor 805G is disposed in the second recovery passage 803G to detect a game ball that has reached a predetermined detection position (winning detection position) in the second recovery passage 803G. The detection sensor 805G is connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 performs a winning determination for the second operating port 92G based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 805G.

All game balls that flow into the first operating port 91G are guided to the first recovery passage 801G through the first guide passage section 865G, and all game balls that flow into the second operating port 92G are guided to the second recovery passage 803G through the second guide passage section 875G.

The movable piece 901G is disposed between the base part 851G and the opposing part 872G, separated to the left and right of the second operating port 92G. Specifically, through holes are formed in the base part 851G on both the left and right sides of the second operating port 92G, penetrating in the thickness direction of the base part 851G. A shaft body 902G is inserted into the through holes so as to protrude into the gap between the base part 851G and the opposing part 872G, and the movable piece 901G is fixed to the protruding part (tip) of the shaft body 902G. The shaft body 902G extends in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 80aG, and is supported by the base part 851G so that the central axis coincides with the central axis of the through hole. As a result, the movable piece 901G can rotate around the shaft body 902G and the central axis CL10 of the through hole.

The shaft 902G is connected to the drive unit 911G via a link mechanism, and the driving force of the drive unit 911G is transmitted to the movable piece 901G via the link mechanism and the shaft 902G. Specifically, the driving force of the drive unit 911G causes the movable piece 901G to rotate in the first predetermined direction about the central axis CL10, and the position of the movable piece 901G switches from the open position (see FIG. 182(a)) to the closed position (see FIG. 182(b)).

Incidentally, the link mechanism constituting the electric role 93G includes a connecting portion that connects the movable pieces 901G to each other so that the movement of the two movable pieces 901G is synchronized when switching between the open state and the closed state. However, this connecting portion is optional, and it is also possible to configure the movable pieces 901G so that the connecting portion is not provided and the two movable pieces 901G can operate asynchronously when switching between the open state and the closed state. In other words, when an external force other than the power of the drive unit 911G is applied to one movable piece 901G, the influence of this force on the other piece is suppressed, and the movement of the two movable pieces 901G can be allowed to be asynchronous.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the movable pieces 901G extend in a direction intersecting (specifically perpendicular to) the central axis CL10, for example, in the vertical direction when placed in the closed position. When the movable pieces 901G are placed in the closed position, one end of the movable pieces 901G protrudes upward through the upper opening of the second bulge portion 871G, and the one end is close to the second bulge portion 871G. In this state, the gap between the movable pieces 901G (the one end) and the second bulge portion 871G is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, the gap between the first bulge portion 861G and the second bulge portion 871G is covered from the left and right by the movable pieces 901G, and the inflow of the game ball into the specific area FE surrounded by the first bulge portion 861G, the second bulge portion 871G, and the movable pieces 901G is regulated by the left and right movable pieces 901G.

When each of the left and right movable pieces 901G is placed in the closed position, flat surfaces 905G are formed that face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. These flat surfaces 905G form the side walls of a vertical passage that runs vertically in front of the second actuation port 92G in the specific area FE. The vertical passage is connected to the lower opening 874G of the second bulge 871G, and the game ball that runs vertically (straight through) in front of the second actuation port 92G is returned from the specific area FE to the play area PE through the lower opening 874G without flowing into the second actuation port 92G.

The lower opening 874G is located directly above the variable winning device 83, and game balls that pass through the lower opening 874G flow down (fall) toward the variable winning device 83 (see FIG. 180). In other words, game balls that are returned to the game area PE from the lower opening 874G can win in the variable winning device 83.

As shown in FIG. 182(a)→FIG. 182(b), the upper ends of both movable pieces 901G (hereinafter referred to as first ends 908G) are displaced away from each other as the movable piece 901G rotates in the first predetermined direction, and the gap between the first ends 908G and the first bulge 861G is expanded. Then, when the movable piece 901G reaches the open position (including the maximum rotation position defined by the stopper), the gap between the movable piece 901G (specifically, the first ends 908G) and the first bulge 861G becomes large enough to allow game balls to flow into the specific area FE. In other words, an inlet 921G that allows game balls to flow into the specific area FE appears between the movable piece 901G (specifically, the first ends 908G) and the first bulge 861G.

The lower ends of both movable pieces 901G (hereinafter referred to as second ends 909G) are displaced toward each other as the movable pieces 901G rotate from the closed position to the open position, and the gap between the second ends 909G is reduced to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 182(b), when the movable pieces 901G are arranged in the closed position, the flat surface portion 905G is inclined downward toward the second operating port 92G, and the game ball that flows into the specific area FE from the inlet 921G moves toward the second end 909G along the inclination of the flat surface portion 905G (more specifically, parallel to the front surface of the game board 80a) (hereinafter, this movement is also simply referred to as "parallel movement").

In the following description, the first end 908G side of the flat surface 905G is referred to as the "upstream side" and the second end 909G side of the flat surface 905G is referred to as the "downstream side" in consideration of the flow path along which the game ball moves in parallel.

Here, even when the movable pieces 901G are placed in the closed position, the second ends 909G remain separated from each other, but the gap is reduced so that it is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball, more specifically, the radius dimension. In other words, after the game ball moves parallel to the flat surface portion 905G and moves to the lower end side of the flat surface portion 905G, it is supported from below by both movable pieces 901G in a state where it fits into the gap between both movable pieces 901G (a state where it straddles both movable pieces 901G), and further parallel movement is restricted by both movable pieces 901G. In the following explanation, the position of the game ball supported by both movable pieces 901G is also referred to as the "lower limit position."

When a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the electric device 93G is switched to the open state (specifically, since the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G has begun), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped, and the drive unit 911G switches (returns) from an excited state to a non-excited state. When the driving force from the drive unit 911G disappears, the movable piece 901G rotates in the direction opposite to the first predetermined direction (second predetermined direction) due to the biasing force of the spring member, and returns to the closed position.

The rotation range of the movable piece 901G is determined by a stopper for the standby position and a stopper for the maximum rotation position. Specifically, when the drive unit 911G is in an excited state, the stopper for the maximum rotation position restricts the movable piece 901G from rotating further in a first predetermined direction, and when the drive unit 911G is in a non-excited state, the stopper for the standby position restricts the movable piece 901G from rotating further in a second predetermined direction. Incidentally, when the movable piece 901G is rotated to the open/closed position, the operating range of the first end 908G is determined to be above the central axis CL10, and the operating range of the second end 909G is determined to be above and below the central axis CL10.

The fixed location of the shaft 902G on the movable piece 901G is biased toward the second end 909G. In other words, the distance from the central axis CL10 to the second end 909G is biased so that it is smaller than the distance from the central axis CL10 to the first end 908G. This is a measure to reduce the amount of displacement of the second end 909G when switching between the closed and open states.

When the movable piece 901G rotates in the first predetermined direction from the standby position (closed position), the gap between the second end 909G first becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and then the gap between the first end 908G and the first bulge 861G becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, the outflow of the game ball from the specific area FE is restricted in a situation where the closed state is maintained. In contrast, when the movable piece 901G rotates in the second predetermined direction from the maximum rotation position (open position), the gap between the second end 909G first becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, and then the gap between the first end 908G and the first bulge 861G becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, the outflow of the game ball from the specific area FE is permitted in a situation where the open state is maintained.

However, such a configuration is not essential, and it is also possible to configure the timing when the gap between the second ends 909G becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball and the timing when the gap between the first end 908G and the first bulge 861G becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball to be aligned (coincidence) when the movable piece 901G rotates in the first predetermined direction from the standby position (closed position), or to configure the timing when the gap between the second ends 909G becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball and the timing when the gap between the first end 908G and the first bulge 861G becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball to be aligned (coincidence) when the movable piece 901G rotates in the second predetermined direction from the maximum rotation position (open position).

Here, as shown in FIG. 183, the flat surface 905G is composed of a first surface 903G that is not inclined backward (i.e. perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 80aG) and a second surface 904G that is inclined backward (i.e. not perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 80aG). Specifically, a predetermined range of the flat surface 905G including the edge (lower edge) of the flat surface 905G is the second surface 904G that is inclined backward, and the game ball that reaches the lower limit position is supported by the second surface 904G of each movable piece 901G (see FIG. 182 (b)). The game ball that flows in from the inlet 921G moves parallel to the front surface of the game board 80a along the flat surface 905G toward the second end 909G, and after reaching the lower limit position, moves backward along the inclination of the second surface 904G, that is, toward the second operating port 92G.

As already explained, the second surface portion 904G is formed to include the edge (lower edge) of the flat surface portion 905G on the second end portion 909G side. Details will be described later, but the formation range of the second surface portion 904G is smaller than the formation range of the first surface portion 903G, and is limited to be closer to the second end portion 909G than the imaginary line FL1 that is a projection of the central axis CL10 perpendicularly to the flat surface portion 905G.

Next, with reference to Figs. 184-185, we will explain the electric support process as the process for driving the electric role 93G, which is executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as part of the normal process (see step S406 in Fig. 23). Fig. 184 is a flowchart showing the electric support process, and Fig. 185 is a flowchart showing the electric opening and closing process.

(Electricity support processing)
In the electric role support process, first, in step S5801, it is determined whether or not support by the electric role object 93G is being performed (support in progress). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If support is not being performed, a negative determination is made in step S5801 and the process proceeds to step S5802. In step S5802, it is determined whether or not the timing is the end of the final display of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS. If the timing is not the end of the final display of the pattern, a negative determination is made in step S5802 and the electric role support process is terminated. If the timing is the end of the final display of the pattern, a positive determination is made in step S5802 and the process proceeds to step S5803.

In step S5803, it is determined whether or not a support win has been awarded in the support lottery based on winning through gate 84. If a support win has not been awarded, a negative determination is made in step S5803, and the process for this electric role support ends. If a support win has been awarded in the support lottery based on winning through gate 84, an affirmative determination is made in step S5803, and the process proceeds to step S5804. In step S5804, "2" is set to round counter RC2 provided in various counter area 434 of RAM 404. Round counter RC2 functions as a means for tracking the number of times the electric role 93G has been opened.

In the next step S5805, a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. After that, in step S5806, the opening start process is executed, and then the process for supporting the main electric role is terminated. In the opening start process, a waiting time for the opening is set. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric role 93G will start.

Returning to the explanation of step S5801, if a positive judgment is made in step S5801, the process proceeds to step S5807. In step S5807, it is judged whether or not the opening waiting time set in step S5806 has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative judgment is made in step S5807, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive judgment is made in step S5807, and the process proceeds to step S5808. Here, the electric role opening/closing process in step S5808 will be explained with reference to FIG. 185.

(Electrical switching processing)
In the electric role opening and closing process, first, in step S5901, it is determined whether the electric role 93G is open (open state). Whether the electric role 93G is open is determined by whether the driving unit 911G for the electric role is in a driving state. If the electric role 93G is open, proceed to step S5902 and determine whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric role opening and closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", proceed to step S5903. In step S5903, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is "0". The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time and interval time of the electric role 93G, and its value is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S5903, the electric role opening and closing process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5903, the process proceeds to step S5904.

In step S5904, the electric role opening process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the drive unit 911G for the electric role is started, and the electric role 93G is switched from the closed state to the open state. After that, in step S5905, the second winning counter PC2 is set to "10". In the following step S5906, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A or B. If it is the high frequency support mode A or B, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 sec) (step S5907), and if it is the low frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 sec) (step S5908).

Returning to the explanation of step S5901, if a positive judgment is made in step S5901, that is, if the electric role 93G is open, the process proceeds to step S5909. In step S5909, it is judged whether the timer counter TC2 value is "0". If the timer counter TC2 value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S5910. In step S5910, it is judged whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92G based on a detection signal from the detection sensor 805G for the second operating port 92G. If a win has not occurred, the electric role opening and closing process is terminated. If a win has occurred, the value of the second winning counter PC2 is decremented by 1 in step S5911, and in the following step S5912, it is judged whether the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the electric role opening and closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5912, i.e., if the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S5909 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is judged to be "0"), this means that the condition for ending the opening of the electric role device 93G has been met. In this case, in step S5913, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped to switch the electric role device 93G to the closed state.

In the next step S5914, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the round counter RC2 is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is maintained at "0".

After that, in step S5915, it is determined whether the updated value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S5915, the process proceeds to step S5916, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "500" (corresponding to 1 sec). If a determination is made in step S5915 that the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S5917. In step S5917, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, the waiting time for the electric role support ending is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending that is pre-stored in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 184, after executing the electric role opening and closing process of step S5808, proceed to step S5809. In step S5809, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S5809, the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5809, proceed to step S5810 and determine whether the waiting time for the ending set in step S5917 above has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5810, the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5810, proceed to step S5811. In step S5811, the support flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. This releases the restriction on the support lottery based on winning the through gate 84.

As shown in FIG. 186, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the support is set to 1/2, and the number of times (number of openings) that the electric role 83G is switched to the open state when the support is won is set to 2 times. However, the time that the open state is maintained for each opening (opening time) is set to 0.2 seconds, and the interval time when the open state changes to the closed state and back to the open state is set to 1 second. Also, in the low-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the pattern (normal pattern) on the through gate display unit DS is set to 10 to 20 seconds, and the fixed display time of the pattern is set to 0.5 seconds.

On the other hand, in high frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support is set to 1/1.1, and the number of times (number of openings) that the electric role 83G is switched to the open state when the support is won is set to 2 times. However, the time that the open state is maintained for each opening (opening time) is set to 2 seconds, and the interval time when the open state changes to the closed state and back to the open state is set to 1 second. Also, in high frequency support mode B, the variable display time of the pattern (normal pattern) on the through gate display unit DS is set to 0.1 seconds, and the fixed display time of the pattern is set to 0.5 seconds.

In contrast, in high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support is set to 1/2, and the number of times (number of openings) that the electric role 83G is switched to the open state when the support is won is set to 2. However, the time that the open state is maintained for each opening (opening time) is set to 2 seconds, and the interval time when the open state changes to the closed state and back to the open state is set to 1 second. Also, in high frequency support mode A, the variable display time of the pattern (normal pattern) on the through gate display unit DS is set to 0.1 seconds, and the fixed display time of the pattern is set to 0.5 seconds.

In other words, the rate at which balls are lost when game balls are being fired toward the operating port unit 82G is configured to decrease in the following order: low-frequency support mode > high-frequency support mode A > high-frequency support mode B.

Here, referring again to FIG. 180, a supplementary explanation will be given on the winning route to the second operating port 92G. In the play area PE, as the winning route to the second operating port 92G, a first route R1 that bypasses the side of the first bulge 861G from the left and right, and a second route R2 in which a plurality of game nails are arranged so as to have a downward slope toward the second bulge 871G are provided. The game parts such as game nails that constitute the first route R1 in the play area PE have a function of reducing the energy of the game ball so that the inflow speed (movement speed along the flat surface portion 905) does not become excessively high, and the inflow speed of the game ball when flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is specified to be a first predetermined speed (including a certain degree of variation). In addition, the game components such as the game nails that form the second route R2 in the game area PE also have a function of damping the game ball so that the inflow speed does not become excessively high, and the inflow speed of the game ball when flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2 is also specified to be equal to the first predetermined speed (more specifically, a second predetermined speed that is slightly faster than the first predetermined speed). In this embodiment, the first predetermined speed corresponds to the "predetermined speed".

In this embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is greater than the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2. In other words, the first route R1 is the main route for inflow into the inlet 921G. However, the moving speed (first predetermined speed) of the game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is slower than the moving speed (second predetermined speed) of the game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2, and due to this speed difference, the probability that the game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via each route will win the second operating port 92G is favored in the second route R2. In other words, the main route for winning the second operating port 92G in the low frequency support mode is the second route R2.

However, this is not limited to the above, and the main route for winning into the second operating port 92G in the low-frequency support mode may be the first route R1, or the product of the probability of flowing into the inlet 921G and the probability of winning into the second operating port 92G may be the same for each route R1, R2, so that there is no difference in superiority or inferiority.

In this embodiment, the game balls that have passed through the inlet 921G do not necessarily enter the second operating port 92G, and at least some of the game balls return from the specific area FE to the game area PE without entering the second operating port 92G. By using this configuration, the probability of winning the support during the low-frequency support mode is set to a certain degree, while preventing the difference from the high-frequency support mode from being diluted due to frequent entries into the second operating port 92G during the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, the drive time of the drive unit 911G in the low-frequency support mode and the drive time of the drive unit 911G in the high-frequency support mode (particularly the high-frequency support mode A) are specified based on the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G of the operating port unit 82G at the first predetermined speed to move along the movable piece 901G. Here, the relationship between these various times will be explained with reference to FIG. 187. Figure 187(a) is a schematic diagram showing the movable piece 901G in the open position (more specifically, the maximum rotation position), and Figure 187(b) is a schematic diagram showing the movable piece 901G in the closed position (more specifically, the standby position).

(Relationship between travel time and driving time)
How the weight of the game ball located on the flat surface 905G acts on the movable piece 901G varies greatly depending on which part of the flat surface 905G the game ball is located on, that is, depending on the support point (contact point) of the game ball on the flat surface 905G. Specifically, in a situation where the movable piece 901G is located at the maximum rotation position as shown in FIG. 187(a), when the game ball is located upstream of the second virtual line FL2 on the flat surface 905G (first end 908G side), the weight of the game ball acts to push the movable piece 901G in a first predetermined direction, and when the game ball is located downstream of the second virtual line FL2 on the flat surface 905G (second end 909G side), the weight of the game ball acts to push the movable piece 901G in a second predetermined direction.

The second virtual line FL2 is a line obtained by projecting the central axis CL10 vertically onto the flat surface 905G, and is a line obtained by projecting the central axis CL10 vertically onto the flat surface 905G when the movable piece 901G is positioned at the maximum rotation position. When the movable piece 901G is positioned at the open position (maximum rotation position), the second virtual line FL2 is located downstream (towards the second end 909G) of the first virtual line FL1.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, most of the game balls that flow into the inlet 921G via the above-mentioned first route R1 and second route R2 are configured to land in a predetermined range LE on the first surface 903G, more specifically, in a predetermined range LE that includes the edge (upper edge) on the first end 908G side. The moving speed of the game ball that lands in the predetermined range LE along the first surface 903G is specified to be the first predetermined speed. In the following explanation, the relationship between the passage time and the drive time will be explained assuming such an inflow pattern.

The time T2 required for the game ball that flows into the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inlet 921G to the second virtual line FL2 is shorter than the time (opening time TX1: 0.2 sec) that the electric device 93G is opened in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the game ball that passes through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed immediately after the electric device 93G is opened can move downstream of the second virtual line FL2 before the opening time TX1 has elapsed.

In contrast, the time T3 required for the game ball that flows into the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inlet 921G to the boundary portion BL between the first surface portion 903G and the second surface portion 904G is longer than the opening time TX1 of the electric role 93G in the low-frequency support mode. For this reason, the game ball that passes through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed immediately after the electric role 93G is opened will reach the boundary portion BL after the opening time TX1 has elapsed. In other words, during the low-frequency support mode, even if the game ball flows into the inlet 921G at the right time, the opening time TX1 will elapse immediately after the game ball passes the second virtual line FL2, and the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G of the electric role 93G will be stopped. Then, the weight of the game ball located downstream of the second virtual line FL2 will act to push the movable piece 901G in the second predetermined direction. The game ball continues to move toward the lower limit position and reaches the second surface 904G. Then, as the movable piece 901G rotates from its maximum rotation position to its standby position, the game ball located on the second surface 904G loses support and returns from the specific area FE to the game area PE.

If the moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G is much higher than the above-mentioned predetermined speed, the game ball will enter the second operating port 92G via the second surface portion 904G before it loses support from the movable piece 901G. In other words, even during the low-frequency support mode, there is a chance that some game balls will enter the second operating port 92G.

The time T5 required for the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G to be discharged from the specific area FE is shorter than the waiting time TY1 required for the movable piece 901G to start rotating again toward the maximum rotation position during the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, the required time T5 is sufficiently longer than the interval time (1 sec) when the movable piece 901G is repeatedly placed in the open position during the low-frequency support mode, and the waiting time during which the movable piece 901G is maintained in the waiting position (closed position) from the previous opening to the next opening when the support lottery is consecutively won during the low-frequency support mode, that is, the sum of the variable display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS during the low-frequency support mode, the fixed display time, and the opening time and ending time of the opening of the electric role 93G (approximately 10 sec). Therefore, even if the support lottery is consecutively won during the low-frequency support mode, the game ball passing through the specific area FE does not hinder the switching of the electric role 93G to the open state.

Incidentally, the time required for the game ball to pass through the inlet 921G at the second predetermined speed via the second route R2 to reach the second surface 904G is slightly longer than the output time of the drive signal during the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the output of the drive signal is stopped at the timing when the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G via the second route R2 is located on the second surface 904G immediately after the electric role 93G is opened. Therefore, the probability that the game ball that has flowed through the second route R2 will enter the second operating port 92G is high. However, since the output time of the drive signal is slightly shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the second operating port 92G, not all game balls that have flowed into the inlet 921G via the second route R2 will enter the second operating port 92G.

The above-mentioned time required for the game ball to move is the same for high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B. However, the time required T2 required for the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inlet 921G to the second virtual line FL2, the time required T3 required for the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inlet 921G to the boundary portion BL between the first surface portion 903G and the second surface portion 904G, and the time required T4 required for the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G to move to the second operating port 92G are all shorter than the time (opening time TX2: 2 sec) during high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B that the electric role 93G is opened. In other words, in high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B, even if the game ball moves downstream of the second virtual line FL2, the drive signal continues to be output to the drive unit 911G, and the movable piece 901G is prevented from rotating in the second predetermined direction due to the weight of the game ball. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B, most of the game balls that flow into the inlet 921G will enter the second operating port 92G.

The time T5 required for the game balls that have flowed into the inlet 921G to be discharged from the specific area FE is shorter than the waiting time TY2 required for the movable piece 901G to start rotating again toward the maximum rotation position during high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B. Specifically, the required time T5 is sufficiently longer than the interval time (1 sec) when the movable piece 901G is repeatedly placed in the open position during high-frequency support modes A and B, and the waiting time (1 sec) during which the movable piece 901G is maintained in the waiting position (closed position) from the previous opening to the next opening when the support lottery during high-frequency support modes A and B is consecutively won, i.e., the sum (approximately 1 sec) of the variable display time of the picture on the through-gate display unit DS during high-frequency support modes A and B, the fixed display time, and the opening time and ending time of the opening of the electric role 93G. Therefore, even if the player wins the support lottery consecutively during high-frequency support modes A and B, the game ball passing through the specific area FE will not interfere with switching the electric device 93G to the open state.

Next, referring to FIG. 188, we will explain the movement of the electric device 93G during the low-frequency support mode and the flow of game balls that pass through the inlet 921G.

The game ball that flows into the inlet 921G immediately after the electric device 93G switches to the open state moves parallel to the downstream side along the movable piece 901G as shown in FIG. 188(a)→FIG. 188(b). The output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G continues until the game ball moves downstream across the second virtual line FL2 described above, and stops when the game ball is located downstream of the second virtual line FL2 on the first surface portion 903G. When the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped, the movable piece 901G starts to rotate from the maximum rotation position to the standby position due to the biasing force of the spring member described above. At this time, the weight of the game ball acts to assist the rotation (see FIG. 188(c)).

In particular, when the game ball moves to the second surface portion 904G and is supported by the left and right movable pieces 901G, the effect of the game ball's own weight becomes large, causing the movable pieces 901G to rotate quickly.

When the game ball reaches the second surface 904G, that is, when the required time T3 has elapsed since the game ball passed through the inlet 921G, the second surface 904G and the second guide passage 875G are still in communication, and the game ball is allowed to move from the second surface 904G to the second operating port 92G. However, while the game ball is positioned on the second surface 904G, the second surface 904G continues to descend, and the communication between the second surface 904G and the second guide passage 875G is released (disconnected). This makes it impossible for the game ball to move from the second surface 904G to the second operating port 92G.

As shown in Figure 188(c) → Figure 188(d), the movable piece 901G pushed by the game ball continues to rotate toward the waiting position, and the gap between the second surfaces 904G is expanded to a size that allows the game ball to pass through. As a result, the game ball positioned on the second surfaces 904G loses its support, passes directly in front of the second operating port 92G, and is discharged from the specific area FE.

The 19th embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In the case of a big win, the support mode is changed (upgraded to high-frequency support mode B) via the special game state, and in the case of a special miss or reaching the ceiling, the support mode is changed (upgraded to high-frequency support mode A) without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the support mode to a higher level, and contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Here, although both high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B are configured so that the time (opening time) during which the electric role 93G is in the open state is longer than in the low-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the high-frequency support mode B via the special game state is higher than that in the low-frequency support mode, while the winning probability of the support lottery in the high-frequency support mode A without going through the special game state is the same as that in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, when the low-frequency support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode A without going through the special game state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without change. In this configuration, if you try to increase the probability of winning the support lottery to strengthen the support function in high-frequency support mode A, the opportunities to win the support lottery will increase even in the low-frequency support mode, where the period during which the electric role device 93G is open is short, and the opportunities for the electric role device 93G to be in the open state will also increase. In this configuration, if the electric role device 93G is frequently switched to the open state in a state where it is essentially impossible to score a ball (a state in which the opening time is extremely short), it is likely to give the player the impression that it is annoying, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game.

In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the electric role 93G is opened in the high-frequency support mode A, the electric role 93G is controlled so that the game ball that passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed via the first route R1 is guided to the second operating port 92G through the specific area FE, and when the electric role 93G is opened in the low-frequency support mode, the electric role 93G is controlled so that the game ball that passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed via the first route R1 is returned to the game area PE through the specific area FE. In other words, by ensuring a certain amount of time (opening time) for maintaining the open state even in the low-frequency support mode and allowing the game ball to flow into the electric role 93G (specific area FE), the player's impression can be suppressed from worsening. This effectively prevents excessive winning into the second operating port 92G due to an increase in the number of balls entering the second operating port 92G, and prevents the loss of winning opportunities into other ball entry sections (variable winning devices 83) due to an increase in the number of balls entering the electric device 93G (specific area FE). This makes it possible to more effectively achieve the aforementioned effect of increasing the level of attention.

In addition, since the movable piece 910G starts to move toward the open position before the game ball reaches the second surface portion 904G (corresponding to the "distribution portion"), it is possible to buy time to move the second surface portion 904G to a position that forms a return passage. This is preferable in terms of suppressing excessive ball entry into the second operating port 92G and ensuring the superiority of the high frequency support mode A over the low frequency support mode.

The output time of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G in the low-frequency support mode is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the second surface 904G after passing through the inlet 921G at the second predetermined speed via the second route R2. In this way, a configuration that allows for a winning entry into the second operating port 92G is preferable in terms of encouraging attention to the movement of the movable piece 901G, etc., even in the low-frequency support mode.

As shown in this embodiment, if it is made difficult for the first route R1, which is the main inflow path to the electric role device 93G, to enter the second operating port 92G, it is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration for suppressing excessive winning and ensuring a good balance between the high-frequency support mode A and the low-frequency support mode.

In a configuration in which the passage for game balls formed by the movable piece 901G of the electric device 93G functions as a guide passage to the second operating port 92G and a return passage (discharge passage) to the play area PE, it is disadvantageous to the player if the switching of the electric device 93G to the open state is prevented by a game ball being returned (discharged). Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of the above inconvenience is suppressed by specifying the time from the stop of the output of the drive signal to the start of the output of the drive signal to be longer than the time required for the game ball that passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to be returned (discharged) to the play area PE through the above passage, and the reliability of the game machine can be suppressed from decreasing in order to achieve the above-mentioned effect of increasing the attention level.

When the movable piece 901G functions as a return passage, the inclination of the passage bottom surface (flat surface portion 905G) is configured to be greater than when the movable piece 901G functions as a guide passage. With this configuration, when the movable piece 901G is switched to the closed state, the game ball located within the specific area FE is quickly returned (discharged) from the specific area FE to the game area PE. This is advantageous in preventing the game ball from interfering with the next opening of the electric device 93G and in shortening the interval when the open state is repeated.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped and the state is switched to the closed state, the game ball already moving through the flow path toward the second operating port 92G can also be prevented from entering the second operating port 92G. Specifically, when a game ball is located on the second surface portion 904G (more specifically, the portion of the flat surface portion 905G downstream of the virtual line FL2) of the rolling surface formed by the flat surface portion 905G of the movable piece 901G, the game ball pushes the displacement (return) of the movable piece 901G to the closed position. In other words, when the movable piece 901G returns to the closed position, the force of the spring member as the force-applying means and the weight of the game ball located on the second surface portion 904G can be used to quickly return the movable piece 901G to the closed position. As a result, even if there are more chances of winning in the support lottery in the low-frequency support mode in which the period during which the electric role 93G is open is short, the frequency of winning the second operation port 92G is suppressed, and the above concerns can be suitably eliminated. This is preferable in terms of increasing the attention to the game. In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to take measures such as making the time during which the electric role 93G is open (opening time or receiving time) extremely short (for example, 0.01 sec, etc.) to make it practically impossible to win, but it is concerned that such frequent behavior of the electric role (movable piece) will easily give the player an impression of being bothersome, which will hinder efforts to increase the attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the chances of winning the second operation port 92G while avoiding the opening time during the low-frequency support mode being excessively short. This makes it possible to more suitably exert the above-mentioned effect of increasing the attention.

In the low-frequency support mode, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped after the game ball passes through the virtual line FL2. This prevents the weight of the game ball from acting to hinder the displacement of the movable piece to the second position, and favorably improves the responsiveness of the movable piece returning to the second position.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, the game ball that has reached the second surface portion 904G is supported at a position that spans the gap between the left and right movable pieces 901G. If the game ball is configured to fit into such a gap, it is possible to suppress disturbance in the behavior of the game ball that has reached the lower limit position, and to optimally perform the function of assisting the movable piece 901G in returning to the closed position (return assistance function). In addition, by increasing the distance from the central axis CL10 to the point of contact with the game ball, the weight of the game ball can be optimally utilized.

The gap is expanded when the movable piece 901G is pushed by the game ball stuck in the gap. At this time, the height position of the game ball supported by the movable piece 901G also changes (drops). When this gap becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, the game ball loses its support and falls through the gap. In this configuration, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 92G through the second surface portion 904G before the gap becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, thereby suitably improving responsiveness when preventing entry.

As described above, in a configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to push the movable piece 901G back to the closed position, it is expected that the return assistance function will not be properly performed due to disturbances in the behavior of the game ball on the movable piece 901G (rolling surface). Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, if a configuration is used in which the movement (e.g., return) of the game ball that has reached the second surface 904G to the first surface 903G is restricted, it is possible to prevent the return assistance function from being properly performed.

<Modification 1>
In the above-mentioned 19th embodiment, when the game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G moves along the flat surface portion 905G toward the second actuation port 92G, the direction of movement of the game ball is changed on the second surface portion 904G (lowest limit position) to increase the time the game ball stays on the second surface portion 904G, thereby restricting the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 921G via the first path during the low-frequency support mode from entering the second actuation port 92G, but this is not limited to this. As long as it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second actuation port 92G during the low-frequency support mode, the specific configuration is arbitrary. For example, in order to increase the time that the game ball stays on the second surface 904G in order to push (assist) the rotation (return) of the movable piece 901G to the closed position by using the weight of the game ball, it is also possible to configure the flow path of the game ball moving toward the second operating port 92G on the second surface 904G (more specifically, the portion downstream of the virtual line FL when the flat surface 905G is inclined downward toward the center) to meander. In other words, in order to suppress winning at the second operating port 92G during the low-frequency support mode, it is also possible to apply a deceleration structure that reduces the moving speed of the game ball moving toward the second operating port 92G on the second surface 904G (more specifically, the portion downstream of the virtual line FL when the flat surface 905G is inclined downward toward the center).

<Modification 2>
As shown in the 19th embodiment, in the configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to push the movable piece to the closed position (return), the weight of the game ball can be efficiently utilized as follows, which contributes to further improving responsiveness. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 189(a), the flat surface portion 905H of the movable piece 901H is bent so as to be convex toward the central axis CL10 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, so that the pressing force of the game ball located on the second surface portion 904H is not directed toward the central axis CL10, that is, the pressing force can be efficiently utilized as a force for rotating the movable piece 901G.

<Modification 3>
As shown in the 19th embodiment, in the configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to push the movable piece to the closed position (return), a regulating section that regulates the backflow of the game ball that has reached the lower limit position can be provided to further improve the operational stability of the electric device. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189(b), the boundary between the first surface 903I and the second surface 904I can be made step-shaped (step section 906I) to regulate the movement of the game ball that has moved from the first surface 903I to the second surface 904I toward the first surface 903I.

<Modification 4>
The movable piece 901G shown in the nineteenth embodiment is configured such that the central axis CL10 is biased toward the second end 909G so that the distance from the central axis CL10 to the first end 908G is longer than the distance from the central axis CL10 to the second end 909G, but is not limited to this. The central axis CL10 may be biased toward the first end 908G so that the distance from the central axis CL10 to the second end 909G is longer than the distance from the central axis CL10 to the first end 908G.

<Modification 5>
In the above-mentioned 19th embodiment, when the movable pieces 901G are arranged in the open position, a gap is generated between the second ends 909G of the movable pieces 901G, but this is not limited to the above. When the movable pieces 901G are arranged in the open position, it is also possible to configure the second ends 909G of the movable pieces 901G to abut against each other so that the above-mentioned gap is not generated. However, in a configuration that uses the weight of the game ball to assist the displacement of the movable piece 901G from the open position to the closed position, it is preferable to realize a configuration that efficiently uses the weight of the game ball by moving the contact point with the game ball as far away as possible from the central axis CL10. In view of these circumstances, there is technical significance in configuring the movable pieces 901G so that a gap is generated between the second ends 909G of the movable pieces 901G when they are arranged in the open position, as described above.

<Modification 6>
In the above-mentioned 19th embodiment, the moving direction of the game ball that has reached the second surface portion 904G is changed so that the game ball moves toward the rear of the game machine (the moving direction of the game ball functions as a guide means for guiding the game ball toward the rear of the game machine). However, instead of or in addition to this, a standing portion that stands up from the flat surface portion 905G is provided at the edge of the second end portion 909G side of the flat surface portion 905G of the movable piece 901G, and the moving direction of the game ball that comes into contact with the standing portion is changed so that the game ball moves toward the rear of the game machine. However, in order to smoothly return the game ball to the play area PE, it is preferable to avoid contact between the game ball flowing down the vertical passage and the unevenness of the movable piece 901G as much as possible. In view of these circumstances, there is technical significance in the configuration in which the second surface portion 904G is suppressed so as not to protrude from the extension surface of the first surface portion 903G as shown in the above-mentioned 19th embodiment.

<Modification 7>
In the above-mentioned 19th embodiment, the operating range of the first end 908G when the movable piece 901G is rotated to the open position/closed position is specified to be above the central axis CL10, and the operating range of the second end 909G is specified to be above and below the central axis CL10, but it is also possible for the operating range of the second end 909G to be below the central axis CL10.

<Modification 8>
In the above-mentioned 19th embodiment, the case where a solenoid is applied as the driving unit of the electric role 93G is exemplified, but a motor such as a stepping motor may be applied instead of the solenoid. In this case, it is also possible to configure the electric role to be switched from a closed state to an open state by performing a first drive control so as to rotate the output shaft of the motor in a first direction, while the electric role to be switched from an open state to a closed state by performing a second drive control so as to rotate the output shaft of the motor in a second direction. In this case, when switching to the open state, it is preferable to displace the movable piece 901G to the open position against the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring, and to generate a holding torque capable of restricting the switching to the closed state by maintaining the current-carrying state after switching to the open state.

<Modification 9>
In the 19th embodiment, all game balls that flow into the specific area FE from the inlet 921G and do not enter the second operating port 92G are returned to the game area PE through the lower opening 874G, but this can be changed so that all game balls that flow into the specific area FE from the inlet 921G and do not enter the second operating port 92G are guided to a recovery passage provided on the back side of the game board 80aG without being returned to the game area PE. In addition, for example, all game balls that flow into the inlet 921G and do not enter the second operating port 92G may be configured to enter other ball entry sections such as a general winning port, or may be configured to be discharged directly to the recovery passage without being returned to the game area PE (as out balls).

<Modification 10>
In the above-mentioned 19th embodiment, the moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is configured to be equal to the moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the second route R2, but this is not limited to this.

For example, the moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 may be configured to be slower than the moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the second route R2. In this case, the output time of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G may be determined based on the moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the first route, i.e., the time required to reach each position in the specific area FE.

The moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 may be configured to be faster than the moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the second route R2. In this case, the output time of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G may be determined based on the moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet 921G via the second route, i.e., the time required to reach each position in the specific area FE.

<Modification 11>
In the nineteenth embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 is greater than the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2, but the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 may be less than the number of game balls flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the moving speed of the game balls when flowing into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 to be faster than the moving speed of the game balls when flowing into the inlet 921G via the second route R2, as shown in the tenth modification.

<Modification 12>
In the above-mentioned 19th embodiment, the output time of the drive signal when the support lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode and the electric device 93G is switched to the receiving state is made shorter than the time required for the game ball that flows into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 to pass through the inlet 921G and reach the second surface portion 904G, but this is not limited to this.

For example, the output time of the drive signal when the support lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode and the electric device 93G is switched to the receiving state may be shorter than the time required for the game ball that flows into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 to pass through the inlet 921G and reach the virtual line FL2.

In addition, the output time of the drive signal when the support lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode and the electric device 93G is switched to the receiving state may be longer than the time required for the game ball that flows into the inlet 921G via the first route R1 to pass through the inlet 921G and reach the second surface portion 904G, and shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the second operating port 92G.

<Modification 13>
The time required for the game ball that passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to be returned from the specific area FE to the game area PE should be shorter than the time required for the game ball that passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed to enter the second operating port 92G. Even though the game ball that entered the electric role 93G cannot actually enter the second operating port 92G, staying in the specific area FE for a long time can cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, the above configuration can suitably eliminate such concerns.

<Twentieth embodiment>
In the operating port unit 82G shown in the 19th embodiment, a second surface portion 904G is provided on the edge of the second end portion 909G of the flat surface portion 905G of the movable piece 901G, which is inclined downward toward the second operating port 92G side (rear of the gaming machine) when the movable piece 901G is placed in the open position, and the moving direction of the game ball that has reached the second surface portion 904G is changed from a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board 80aG to the thickness direction of the game board 80aG. In this embodiment, the specific configuration for changing the moving direction of the game ball moving in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board to the thickness direction of the game board is different from that of the 19th embodiment. Below, with reference to FIG. 190, the specific configuration of the operating port unit 82J (movable piece 901J) in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the 19th embodiment. FIG. 190 is a schematic view of the electric role 93J and the second operating port 92J viewed from the front side of the game machine.

The pair of left and right movable pieces 901J that make up the electric device 93J are formed so that the entire flat surface 905J slopes downward toward the rear when the movable pieces 901J are in the maximum rotation position (open position). The game ball that flows in from the inlet 921J is supported by the flat surface 905J and guided rearward, preventing it from floating up from the front surface of the base 851J. In other words, in this embodiment, the entire flat surface 905J of the movable piece 901J is given the function of guiding the game ball rearward.

A gap is maintained between the left and right movable pieces 901J regardless of whether the movable pieces 901J are in the open or closed position, and the size of the gap (gap dimension) is larger than the diameter of the game ball when the movable piece 901J is in the closed position and smaller than the diameter of the game ball when the movable piece 901J is in the open position (see gap dimension LY1). When the movable piece 901J is in the open position, the game ball that moves to the lower limit position along the flat surface portion 905J fits into this gap and is supported by both movable pieces 901J, and moves toward the second operating port 92J.

When the game ball moves along the flat surface portion 905J to the lower limit position, it is prevented from floating up from the front surface of the base portion 851J in the process of reaching the lower limit position, and can enter the second operating port 92J quickly after reaching the lower limit position.

Here, the lower end of the track through which the game ball supported by both movable pieces 901J passes when moving rearward (hereinafter referred to as the virtual guide surface FB) is located above the lower edge of the second operating port 92J when the movable piece 901J is in the open position. A game ball moving rearward under such circumstances is allowed to enter the second operating port 92J. In contrast, when the movable piece 901J is in the closed position, the virtual guide surface FB is located below the lower edge of the second operating port 92J, and when a game ball that has reached the lower limit position attempts to move rearward, the game ball gets caught on the lower edge, preventing it from entering the second operating port 92J.

In this embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode, the time required for the game ball that passed through the inlet 921J at the first predetermined speed to reach the virtual line FL2 on the flat surface portion 905J is specified to be the same as the time to output a drive signal to the drive unit 911J of the electric role 93J. In other words, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911J is stopped when the game ball that flowed into the inlet 921J reaches the virtual line FL2 immediately after the electric role 93J is switched to the open state. In other words, after the output of the drive signal is stopped, the movable piece 901J is pushed in the second predetermined direction by the weight of the game ball. In other words, when the electric role 93J is switched from the open state to the closed state, the virtual guide surface FB is displaced from a position above the lower edge of the second operating port 92G to a position below it under a situation in which the size of the inlet 921J is large enough for the game ball to pass through.

The movable piece 901J continues to rotate in the second predetermined direction until the game ball that has passed through the virtual line FL2 reaches the left and right edges of the second operating port 92J. Then, the angle of the movable piece 901J changes by a predetermined angle (see ANG1) until the game ball reaches the left and right edges of the second operating port 92J, and the above-mentioned virtual guide surface FB drops below the lower edge of the second operating port 92J. This prevents the game ball from entering the second operating port 92J. After that, as the movable piece 901J continues to rotate in the second predetermined direction, the inlet 921J becomes large enough to prevent the game ball from passing through (closed state), and the gap between the movable pieces 910J becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, so that the game ball located in the specific area FE is discharged from the specific area FE without entering the second operating port 92J.

<Modification 1>
In the twentieth embodiment, the rearward inclination angle of the flat surface portion 905J is constant between the first end portion 908J and the second end portion 909J, but this is not limiting and the inclination angle may vary depending on the portion. For example, the inclination angle of the portion of the flat surface portion 905J facing the second end portion 909J may be made larger than the inclination angle of the portion of the flat surface portion 905J facing the first end portion 908J.

<Modification 2>
In the above twentieth embodiment, when the movable piece 901J is disposed in the open position, the virtual guide surface FB is located above the lower edge of the second operating port 92J, and in the process of the movable piece 901J displacing from the open position to the closed position, the virtual guide surface FB is displaced below the lower edge of the second operating port 92J, thereby suppressing winning into the second operating port 92J during the low frequency support mode. However, such a configuration is not essential, and it is also possible to configure the virtual guide surface FB to be located above the lower edge of the second operating port 92J regardless of whether the movable piece 901J is disposed in the open position or the closed position.

<Modification 3>
In the twentieth embodiment, when the electric role 93J is switched from the open state to the closed state, the virtual guide surface FB is displaced from a position above the lower edge of the second operating port 92G to a position below the lower edge of the second operating port 92G under the condition that the size of the inlet 921J is large enough for the game ball to pass through, but this may be changed as follows. That is, when the electric role 93J is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is also possible to configure the virtual guide surface FB to be displaced from a position above the lower edge of the second operating port 92J to a position below the lower edge of the second operating port 92J after the size of the inlet 921J becomes large enough for the game ball to not pass through.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
As described above, in the configuration in which the "special miss result" or "ceiling reach" is used as a trigger to transition to a normal game state (fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode A without going through a special game state, there is a concern that the extremely long waiting time until the player can actually enjoy the benefits of the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A despite the transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A will be a factor that reduces the satisfaction of the player. In this embodiment, one of the features is that a device is provided to avoid an extremely long waiting time until the player can actually enjoy the benefits when the "special miss result" or "ceiling reach" is used as a trigger to transition to a normal game state (fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode A without going through a special game state. The device will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 191, the electric role support process executed as part of the normal process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described.

(Electricity support processing)
In the electric role support process, first, in step S6001, it is determined whether or not the electric role 93 is supporting the player. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the player is not supporting the player, a negative determination is made in step S6001 and the process proceeds to step S6002. In step S6002, it is determined whether or not the timing is the end of the final display of the pattern in the through gate display section DS. If the timing is not the end of the final display of the pattern, a negative determination is made in step S6002 and the electric role support process is terminated. If the timing is the end of the final display of the pattern, a positive determination is made in step S6002 and the process proceeds to step S6003.

In step S6003, it is determined whether or not a support has been won in the support lottery based on winning through gate 84. If a support has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S6003, and the main role support processing ends. If a support has been won in the support lottery based on winning through gate 84, a positive determination is made in step S6003, and the process proceeds to step S6004. In step S6004, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or B.

If the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, in step S6005, the round counter RC2 in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "1", and in the following step S6006, a short support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

If the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or B, in step S6007, the round counter RC2 in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "2", and in the following step S6006, the long support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

After executing the processes of steps S6006 and S6008, the process proceeds to step S6009, where the opening start process is executed, and the process for supporting the main electric role is terminated. In the opening start process, a waiting time (0.5 sec) for opening is set (see FIG. 192). After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric role 93 will start.

The waiting time for the opening is not a required configuration. It is also possible to omit this waiting time and immediately switch the electric role 93 to the open state when a support win is obtained. It is also possible to configure the waiting time for the opening to be different when the short support flag is set and when the long support flag is set.

Returning to the explanation of step S6001, if a positive judgment is made in step S6001, the process proceeds to step S6010. In step S6101, it is judged whether or not the waiting time for opening set in step S6009 has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, a negative judgment is made in step S6010, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, a positive judgment is made in step S6010, and the process proceeds to step S6011. Here, the electric role opening/closing process in step S6011 will be explained with reference to FIG. 193.

(Electrical switching processing)
In the electric role opening/closing process, first, in step S6101, it is determined whether the electric role 93 is open (open state). Whether the electric role 93 is open is determined by whether the driving unit (solenoid) for the electric role is in a driving state (excited state), that is, whether a driving signal is output. If the electric role 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S6102, and it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric role opening/closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S6103. In step S6103, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is "0". The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time and interval time of the electric role 93, and its value is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6103, the electric role opening/closing process ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S6103, the process proceeds to step S6104. In step S6104, the electric role opening process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the drive unit of the electric role is started, and the electric role 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state. After that, in step S6105, the second winning counter PC2 is set to "10".

If the long support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, a positive judgment is made in step S6106 and the process proceeds to step S6107, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec). On the other hand, if the short support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, a negative judgment is made in step S6106 and the process proceeds to step S6108, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec).

Returning to the explanation of step S6101, if a positive judgment is made in step S6101, that is, if the electric role 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S6109. In step S6109, it is judged whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S6110. In step S6110, it is judged whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92 based on a detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If a win has not occurred, the electric role opening and closing process is terminated. If a win has occurred, the value of the second winning counter PC2 is decremented by 1 in step S6111, and in the following step S6112, it is judged whether the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the electric role opening and closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S6112, i.e., if the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S6109 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is judged to be "0"), this means that the condition for ending the opening of the electric role device 93 has been met. In this case, in step S6113, the drive signal being output to the drive unit of the electric role device 93 is stopped to close the electric role device 93.

In the next step S6114, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the round counter RC2 is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is maintained at "0".

Thereafter, in step S6115, it is determined whether or not the updated value of round counter RC2 is 0. If a negative determination is made in step S6115, the process proceeds to step S6116, in which timer counter TC2 is set to 100 (corresponding to 0.2 sec).
If it is determined in step S6115 that the value of round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S6117.

If a long support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, a positive judgment is made in step S6117 and the process proceeds to step S6118. In step S6118, the ending counter EC provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 sec). On the other hand, if a short support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, a negative judgment is made in step S6117 and the process proceeds to step S6119. In step S6119, the ending counter EC provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "7450" (equivalent to 14.9 sec).

The ending counter EC is a counter that is referenced when determining the ending time after the electric role 93 has finished opening, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) is executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 191, after executing the electric role opening and closing process of step S6011, proceed to step S6012. In step S6012, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S6012, the process for supporting the main electric role is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S6012, proceed to step S6013, and determine whether the waiting time for the ending set in steps S6118 and S6119 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S6013, proceed to step S6014. In step S6014, the support flags (short support flags and long support flags) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the process for supporting the main electric role is terminated. This releases the restrictions on the support lottery based on winning the through gate 84 and the restrictions on the variable display of the picture in the through gate display unit DS.

As described above, if the support lottery is won, the support game in which the electric role 93 is opened is started, and the next support lottery and the variable display of the image on the through gate display unit DS are restricted until the support game is finished. The support game is composed of an opening part that waits for the electric role 93 to open, a main part that opens and closes the electric role 93, and an ending part that is performed after the electric role 93 has finished opening and closing, and the execution time of each part is associated with the opening pattern (short opening/long opening). In the short opening, the opening time that is the execution time of the opening part is 0.5 sec, the opening time that is the execution time of the main part is 0.1 sec, and the ending time that is the execution time of the ending part is 14.9 sec. In contrast, in the long opening, the opening time that is the execution time of the opening part is 0.5 sec, the opening and closing time that is the execution time of the main part is 2 sec x 2 + 0.1 sec, and the ending time that is the execution time of the ending part is 0.5 sec. Whether a short or long opening is used is determined based on the support mode at the start of the support game, i.e., whether or not a support mode flag (high frequency support mode flag A, high frequency support mode flag B) is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and the type of the flag.

Here, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 194, we will provide additional explanation on the relationship between the low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode A, and high-frequency support mode B in this embodiment.

In the low-frequency support mode, a support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed by referencing a support lottery table corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. The probability of winning a support lottery through this lottery is 1/2. Simultaneously with this lottery, the variable display of patterns on the through gate display unit DS begins, and the result is clearly indicated to the player when a pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed as a static display (determined display). During the low-frequency support mode, the variable display time of patterns on the through gate display unit DS is "15 sec", and the determined display time of patterns is "0.5 sec".

In the high-frequency support mode A, the support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A. This table is the same as the table referred to during the low-frequency support mode, and the probability of winning the support lottery by the lottery is 1/2. At the same time as this lottery, the variable display of the image on the through gate display unit DS is started, and the image corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed stationary (determined display), and the result is clearly indicated to the player. During the high-frequency support mode A, the variable display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS is "0.5 sec", and the fixed display time of the image is "0.5 sec". Thus, in the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support is the same as in the low-frequency support mode, but the variable display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS, that is, the waiting time from the support win to the electric role 93 opening, is significantly shortened.

In high frequency support mode B, a support lottery process (low probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to a support lottery table corresponding to high frequency support mode B. The probability of winning support through this lottery is 1/1.1, which is more favorable than low frequency support mode and high frequency support mode A. Simultaneously with this lottery, the variable display of the patterns on the through gate display unit DS begins, and the result is clearly indicated to the player by the static display (determined display) of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery. During high frequency support mode A, the variable display time of the patterns on the through gate display unit DS is "0.5 sec", and the determined display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec".

In this way, during the low-frequency support mode, the time for which the image changes on the through-gate display unit DS is longer than in the high-frequency support modes A and B, thereby providing more time for the electric reel 93 to repeatedly switch to the open state, thereby clarifying the difference in the degree of advantage between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support modes A and B.

As already explained, if a jackpot result occurs in the normal game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the low-frequency support mode and low-probability mode, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, the game state transitions to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode via the special game state. In this case, the player can first enjoy the benefit of the jackpot result in the special game state. Therefore, even if the transition to the high-frequency support mode, which is another benefit, is delayed, such a time lag is unlikely to be a factor that significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. It is also expected that the above-mentioned time lag will be less noticeable as the normal game state is interrupted by the intervention of the special game state.

On the other hand, if a special miss occurs or the ceiling is reached in the first normal game state, the time lag until the player can enjoy the benefits of switching to the high-frequency support mode A is large, which is a concern as it will lead to a decrease in the player's satisfaction and a significant decrease in his/her motivation to play. It is expected that such inconvenience will be more pronounced when switching from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode A, since the normal game state continues without passing through the special game state. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned ingenuity regarding the support game prevents the above-mentioned time lag from becoming extremely large. Below, with reference to the timing charts of Figures 195 to 197, the flow of the game when switching from the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (first normal game state) to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A (fourth normal game state) will be described according to the game situation. Note that the examples shown in Figures 195 to 197 illustrate a case where a "special miss result" is used as a trigger to switch to the high-frequency support mode A. The basic flow for transitioning to high-frequency port mode A when "reaching the ceiling" is triggered is similar to the examples shown in Figures 195 to 197, so an explanation will be omitted.

(Pattern 1: When the condition for transition to the high frequency support mode A is met during the variable display of the image corresponding to the non-win of the support on the through gate display unit DS)
Figure 195 (a) illustrates the flow of the game when the condition for transitioning to high frequency support mode A is met while a pattern corresponding to a losing result (non-support win) is being displayed in a changing manner on the through gate display section DS.

At the time tm1, the display of the image changes in the operating port display section D1. This corresponds to a special miss result for this game round, and at the time tm4, the image corresponding to the special miss result is displayed as a static image (confirmed display). At the time tm5 when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A.

Here, at tm3, which is before tm5, the through gate display unit DS starts displaying a varying pattern. This varying display corresponds to a miss (non-win support), and the through gate display unit DS displays a static (confirmed) pattern corresponding to a non-win support result at tm6, which is after tm5. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 195(a), the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is met while the through gate display unit DS is displaying a varying pattern corresponding to a non-win support result.

At the time tm7 when the final display of the image on the through gate display unit DS is completed, the support lottery is executed again, and the display of the changing image based on the result of the support lottery begins on the through gate display unit DS. This time, the support lottery is a win. Because the mode has switched to high frequency support mode A at the time tm7, the display time of the changing image on the through gate display unit DS is significantly shortened.

At the time tm8, when the variable display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time tm7, the image corresponding to the support win is displayed (determined display) on the through gate display unit DS. Then, at the time tm9 when the determinative display of the image on the through gate display unit DS ends, the support game using the electric role device 93 starts.

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At the timing tm10 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive section of the electric role device 93, and the electric role device 93 switches from a closed state to an open state (transition to the main part). This allows winning into the second operating port 92. In the main part, the electric role device 93 goes from an open state (2 sec) to a closed state (0.1 sec) to an open state (2 sec). At the timing tm11 when the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part, and at the timing tm12 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, i.e., at the timing tm12 when the support game ends, the display of the changing patterns in the through gate display section DS begins.

When this happens, there is a time lag between when the condition for switching to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing tm5) and when the player can actually enjoy the benefit. As already explained, this benefit can be broadly divided into two parts: the support lottery in high-frequency support mode A, and switching the electric role device 93 to the open state (support play using the electric role device 93).

The time lag (delay time TW1) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing tm5) to when the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (timing tm6) = the remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + the final display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS. Considering that the maximum variable display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS set in the low-frequency support mode is 15 seconds, the delay time TW1 = 0.5 seconds to 15.5 seconds.

The time lag (delay time TW2) from when the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tm5) until the electric role 93 is opened = remaining variable display time on the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS + variable display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + fixed display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + execution time of the opening in the support game. Considering that the maximum value of the variable display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS set in the low frequency support mode is 15 sec, the delay time TW2 = 2 sec to 17 sec. Note that the probability of winning the support lottery in high frequency support mode A is 1/2, so if you keep losing the support lottery, the delay time TW2 will be longer by that amount.

(Pattern 2: When the condition for switching to the high frequency support mode A is met during the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support win on the through gate display unit DS)
Figure 195 (b) shows an example of the flow of the game when the condition for transitioning to high frequency support mode A is met while a pattern corresponding to a winning result (support win) is being displayed in a changing manner on the through gate display section DS.

At the time tn1, the display of the image changes in the operating port display section D1. This corresponds to the special miss result for this game round, and at the time tn4, the image corresponding to the special miss result is displayed as a static image (confirmed display). At the time tn5, when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode A.

Here, at tn3, which is before tn5, the through gate display unit DS starts displaying a varying pattern. This varying display corresponds to a winning result (support win), and the through gate display unit DS displays a static pattern (confirmed display) corresponding to the support win at tn6, which is after tn5. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 195(b), the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is met while the through gate display unit DS is displaying a varying pattern corresponding to the support win.

At the time tn7, which is the time when the confirmation display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time tn6, the stopped display (confirmation display) of the image corresponding to the support win on the through gate display unit DS ends, and the support game using the electric role device 93 begins.

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At the timing of tn8 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive section of the electric role device 93, and the electric role device 93 switches from a closed state to an open state (transition to the main part). This allows winning into the second operating port 92. In the main part, the electric role device 93 goes from an open state (2 sec) to a closed state (0.1 sec) to an open state (2 sec). At the timing of tn9 when the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part, and at the timing of tn10 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, i.e., at the timing of tn10 when the support game ends, the display of the changing patterns in the through gate display section DS begins.

When this happens, there is a time lag between when the condition for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing tm5) and when the player can actually enjoy the benefit. As already explained, this benefit can be broadly divided into two parts: a support lottery in high-frequency support mode A, and switching the electric role device 93 to the open state (support play using the electric role device 93), and in the example shown in Figure 195 (b), it is the latter.

The time lag (delay time TW3) from when the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is met (timing tn5) until the electric role 93 opens = the remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + the final display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS + the execution time of the opening in the support game. Considering that the maximum variable display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS set in the low frequency support mode is 15 sec, the delay time TW2 = 1 sec to 16 sec.

(Pattern 3: When the condition for transition to the high frequency support mode A is established during the confirmation display of the pattern corresponding to the non-winning support on the through gate display unit DS)
Figure 196 (a) shows an example of the flow of the game when the condition for transitioning to high frequency support mode A is met while a pattern corresponding to a losing result (non-support win) is being displayed in the through gate display section DS.

At the time tp1, the display of the image changes in the operating port display section D1. This corresponds to a special miss result for this game round, and at the time tp4, the image corresponding to the special miss result is displayed as a static image (confirmed display). At the time tp6 when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A.

Here, at tp3, which is prior to tp6, the through gate display unit DS starts displaying a varying pattern. This varying display corresponds to a miss (non-win support), and the through gate display unit DS displays a static (confirmed) pattern corresponding to a non-win support result at tp5, which is between tp4 and tp6. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 196(a), the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is met during the confirmed display of a pattern corresponding to a non-win support result on the through gate display unit DS.

At the timing of tp7 when the final display of the image on the through gate display unit DS is completed, the support lottery is executed again, and the display of the changing image based on the result of the support lottery begins on the through gate display unit DS. This time, the support lottery is a win. Because the mode has switched to high frequency support mode A at the timing of tp7, the display time of the changing image on the through gate display unit DS is significantly shortened.

At tp8, when the variable display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed since tp7, the image corresponding to the support win is displayed as a static image (determined display) on the through gate display unit DS. Then, at tp9, when the determinative display of the image on the through gate display unit DS has ended, the support game using the electric role device 93 has begun.

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At the timing of tp10 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive section of the electric role device 93, and the electric role device 93 switches from a closed state to an open state (transition to the main part). This allows winning into the second operating port 92. In the main part, the electric role device 93 goes from an open state (2 sec) to a closed state (0.1 sec) to an open state (2 sec). At the timing of tp11 when the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part, and at the timing of tp12 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, i.e., at the timing of tp12 when the support game ends, the display of the changing patterns in the through gate display section DS begins.

When this happens, there is a time lag between when the condition for switching to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing tp6) and when the player can actually enjoy the benefits. As already explained, these benefits can be broadly divided into two parts: the support lottery in high-frequency support mode A, and switching the electric role device 93 to the open state (support play using the electric role device 93).

The time lag (delay time TW4) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing tp6) to when the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (timing tp7) = the remaining confirmed display time in the through gate display unit DS. Considering that the maximum confirmed display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS set in the low-frequency support mode is 0.5 sec, the delay time TW1 = 0 sec to 0.5 sec.

The time lag (delay time TW5) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing tp6) until the electric role 93 opens = remaining fixed display time on the through gate display unit DS + variable display time of the picture on the through gate display unit DS (compatible with high-frequency support mode A) + fixed display time of the picture on the through gate display unit DS (compatible with high-frequency support mode A) + execution time of the opening in the support game. Considering that the maximum value of the variable display time of the picture on the through gate display unit DS set in the low-frequency support mode is 0.5 sec, the delay time TW2 = 1.5 sec to 2 sec. Note that the probability of winning the support lottery in high-frequency support mode A is 1/2, so if you keep losing the support lottery, the delay time TW5 will be longer by that amount.

(Pattern 4: When the condition for switching to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the confirmation display of the pattern corresponding to the support win on the through gate display unit DS)
Figure 196 (b) shows an example of the flow of the game when the condition for transitioning to high frequency support mode A is met while a pattern corresponding to a winning result (support win) is being displayed in the through gate display section DS.

At time tq1, the display of the image changes in the operating port display section D1. This corresponds to the special miss result for this game round, and at time tq4, the image corresponding to the special miss result is displayed as a static image (confirmed display). At time tq6, when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode A.

Here, at tq3, which is prior to tq6, the through gate display unit DS starts displaying a varying pattern. This varying display corresponds to a winning result (support win), and the through gate display unit DS displays (confirms) a pattern corresponding to the support win in a static display (determined display) at tq5, between tq4 and tq6. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 195(b), the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is met while the through gate display unit DS is displaying a confirmed pattern corresponding to the support win.

At the time tq7, when the confirmation display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time tq5, the stopped display (confirmation display) of the image corresponding to the support win on the through gate display unit DS ends, and the support game using the electric role device 93 begins.

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At the timing tq8 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive section of the electric role device 93, and the electric role device 93 switches from a closed state to an open state (transition to the main part). This allows winning into the second operating port 92. In the main part, the electric role device 93 goes from an open state (2 sec) to a closed state (0.1 sec) to an open state (2 sec). At the timing tq9 when the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part, and at the timing tq10 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, i.e., at the timing tq10 when the support game ends, the display of the changing patterns in the through gate display section DS begins.

When this happens, there is a time lag between when the condition for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing tm5) and when the player can actually enjoy the benefit. As already explained, this benefit can be broadly divided into two parts: a support lottery in high-frequency support mode A, and switching the electric role device 93 to the open state (support play using the electric role device 93), and in the example shown in Figure 196 (b), it is the latter.

The time lag (delay time TW6) from when the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is met (timing tq6) until the electric role 93 opens = the remaining confirmed display time on the through gate display unit DS + the execution time of the opening in the support game. Considering that the maximum value of the variable display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS set in the low frequency support mode is 0.5 sec, the delay time TW6 = 0.5 sec to 1 sec.

(Pattern 5: When the condition for transition to the high-frequency support mode A is met while the electric role 93 is open)
Figure 197 illustrates an example of the flow of play when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the electric device 93 is open.

At the timing of tr1, the display of the image changes in the operating port display section D1. This corresponds to the special miss result for this game round, and at the timing of tr5, the image corresponding to the special miss result is displayed as a static image (confirmed display). At the timing of tr8, when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round ends, and the support mode switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A.

Here, at the timing of tr3, which is before the timing of tr8, the variable display of the image is started on the through gate display unit DS. This variable display corresponds to the winning result (support win), and the image corresponding to the support win is displayed (confirmed display) on the through gate display unit DS at the timing of tr4, which is before the timing of tr5. At the timing of tr6, when the fixed display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing of tr4, more specifically, at the timing of tr6 between the timing of tr5 and the timing of tr8, the static display (confirmed display) of the image corresponding to the support win on the through gate display unit DS ends, and the support game by the electric role 93 is started. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 197, the condition for transition to the high frequency support mode A is met during the support game (more specifically, while the electric play field 93 is open).

In this support game, the opening part is executed first. At the timing of tr7 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive section of the electric role device 93, and the electric role device 93 switches from a closed state to an open state (transition to the main part). This allows winning into the second operating port 92. In the main part, the electric role device 93 is in an open state (0.1 sec). At the timing of tr9 when the main part ends, the game transitions to the ending part, and at the timing of tr12 when the execution time (14.9 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, i.e., at the timing of tr12 when the support game ends, the display of the changing patterns in the through gate display section DS begins.

When this happens, there is a time lag between when the condition for switching to high-frequency support mode A is met (the timing of tr8) and when the player can actually enjoy the benefits. As already explained, these benefits can be broadly divided into two parts: the support lottery in high-frequency support mode A, and switching the electric role device 93 to the open state (support play using the electric role device 93).

The time lag (delay time TW7) from when the condition for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A is met (tr8 timing) to when the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (tr12 timing) = the remaining execution time of the support game. Considering that the maximum execution time of the support game in low-frequency support mode (short open) is 15.5 sec, delay time TW1 = 0 sec to 15.5 sec.

The time lag (delay time TW8) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is met (timing of tr8) until the electric role 93 opens = remaining execution time of support game + time for displaying the changing image on the through gate display unit DS (compatible with high-frequency support mode A) + time for displaying the final image on the through gate display unit DS (compatible with high-frequency support mode A) + execution time of the opening in the support game. Considering that the maximum execution time of the support game in the low-frequency support mode (short open) is 15.5 sec, the delay time TW2 = 1.5 sec to 17 sec. Note that the probability of winning the support lottery in high-frequency support mode A is 1/2, so if you continue to lose the support lottery, the delay time TW8 will be longer by that amount.

In this embodiment, the average time required when the electric role 93 is opened once during the low-frequency support mode is the probability of not winning support × (time to display the changing patterns on the through gate display unit DS + time to display the finalized patterns on the through gate display unit DS) + probability of winning support × (time to display the changing patterns on the through gate display unit DS + time to display the finalized patterns on the through gate display unit DS + time to execute the support game). In other words, in this embodiment, the average time required is 23.25 sec.

If the above-mentioned ending part and opening part were deleted and the time for displaying the changing patterns on the through gate display unit DS were instead lengthened to ensure the above-mentioned average required time, the time for displaying the changing patterns on the through gate display unit DS would be "23.2 sec." In other words, if the time for displaying the changing patterns on the through gate display unit DS were set to "23.2 sec," the same average required time as in this embodiment would be achieved. However, when comparing such a configuration with the configuration shown in this embodiment, the configuration shown in this embodiment is more advantageous in preventing the above-mentioned delay time from becoming extremely long.

Below, with reference to Figs. 198 to 201, a comparison is made with a configuration that gains time by lengthening the time for which the images are displayed variably on the through gate display unit DS, instead of the opening and ending described above. Group (a) in Figs. 198 to 201 is a timing chart showing the flow of play in the comparison target, and group (b) in Figs. 198 to 201 is a timing chart showing the flow of play in the configuration shown in this embodiment.

(Comparison 1: When the condition for transition to the high frequency support mode A is established in the latter half of the variable display of the image corresponding to the non-win of the support on the through gate display unit DS)
Figure 198 illustrates the flow of gameplay when the condition for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A is met while the through-gate display unit DS is displaying a changing pattern corresponding to a missing result (non-support win), more specifically, when the condition for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A is met in the latter half of the changing display (just before the end).

In the comparative example shown in FIG. 198(a), the support game does not have an opening or ending. Therefore, when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of ts1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. In other words, the time lag (delay time TW11) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing ts1) to when the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (timing ts2) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + final display time of the picture in the through gate display unit DS. In addition, the time lag (delay time TW12) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing ts1) to when the electric role 93 is opened (timing ts3) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS + variable display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + fixed display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A). As described above, if the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied just before the end of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is considered to be approximately 0 sec, the delay time TW11 = approximately 0.5 sec, and the delay time TW12 = approximately 1.5 sec.

In contrast, in this embodiment, an opening and an ending are provided for the support game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 198(b), when the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tt1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. In other words, the time lag (delay time TW13) from the time when the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tt1) to the time when the lottery in high frequency support mode A is executed (timing tt2) = the remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + the fixed display time of the picture in the through gate display unit DS. In addition, the time lag (delay time TW14) from when the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tt1) to when the electric role 93 is opened (timing tt3) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS + variable display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + fixed display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + execution time of the opening in the support game. As described above, if the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is satisfied just before the end of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is considered to be approximately 0 sec, the delay time TW12 = approximately 0.5 sec, and the delay time TW13 = approximately 2 sec.

In other words, there is no difference between delay times TW11 and TW13, and the difference between delay times TW12 and TW14 is minimal (0.5 sec).

(Comparison 2: When the condition for transition to the high frequency support mode A is established during the first half of the variable display of the image corresponding to the non-win of the support on the through gate display unit DS)
Figure 199 illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the through-gate display unit DS is displaying a changing pattern corresponding to a missing result (non-support win), more specifically, when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met in the first half of the changing display (immediately after the start).

In the comparative example shown in FIG. 199(a), the support game does not have an opening or ending. Therefore, when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tu1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. In other words, the time lag (delay time TW15) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tu1) to when the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (timing tu2) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + final display time of the picture in the through gate display unit DS. In addition, the time lag (delay time TW16) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tu1) to when the electric role 93 is opened (timing tu3) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS + variable display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A) + fixed display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high-frequency support mode A). As described above, if the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied immediately after the start of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is considered to be almost MAX, delay time TW15 = approximately 23.7 sec, and delay time TW16 = approximately 24.7 sec.

In contrast, in this embodiment, an opening and an ending are provided for the support game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199(b), when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tv1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. In other words, the time lag (delay time TW17) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tv1) to when the lottery in high-frequency support mode A is executed (timing tv2) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the picture in the through gate display unit DS. In addition, the time lag (delay time TW18) from when the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tv1) to when the electric role 93 is opened (timing tv3) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS + variable display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + fixed display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + execution time of the opening in the support game. As described above, if the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is satisfied immediately after the start of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is considered to be almost MAX, the delay time TW17 = about 15.4 sec, and the delay time TW18 = about 16.9 sec.

In other words, the difference between delay times TW15 and TW16 and delay times TW17 and TW18 is significant (7.8 sec and 8.3 sec).

(Comparison 3: When the condition for transition to the high frequency support mode A is established in the latter half of the display of the pattern corresponding to the support win on the through gate display unit DS)
Figure 200 illustrates an example of the game flow when the condition for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A is met while the through gate display unit DS is displaying a changing pattern corresponding to a winning result (support win), more specifically, when the condition for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A is met in the latter half of the changing display (just before the end).

In the comparative example shown in FIG. 200(a), the support game does not have an opening or ending. Therefore, when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tw1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. In other words, the time lag (delay time TW12) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tw1) to when the electric role 93 is in the open state (timing tw2) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS. As described above, if the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied just before the end of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is considered to be approximately 0 sec, the delay time TW19 = approximately 0.5 sec.

In contrast, in this embodiment, an opening and an ending are provided for the support game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 200(b), when the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tx1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. That is, the time lag (delay time TW20) from when the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tx1) to when the electric role 93 is opened (timing tx2) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS + execution time of the opening in the support game. As described above, if the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is satisfied just before the end of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is considered to be approximately 0 sec, the delay time TW19 = approximately 1 sec.

In other words, the difference between delay time TW18 and delay time TW19 is small (0.5 sec).

(Comparison 4: When the condition for transition to the high frequency support mode A is established during the first half of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support win on the through gate display unit DS)
Figure 201 illustrates the flow of gameplay when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met while the through-gate display unit DS is displaying a changing pattern corresponding to a winning result (support win), or more specifically, when the conditions for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A are met in the first half of the changing display (immediately after the start).

In the comparative example shown in FIG. 201(a), the support game does not have an opening or ending. Therefore, when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of ty1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. In other words, the time lag (delay time TW21) from when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing ty1) to when the electric role 93 is opened (timing ty2) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS. As described above, if the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is satisfied immediately after the start of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is considered to be almost MAX, the delay time TW21 = approximately 23.7 sec.

In contrast, in this embodiment, an opening and an ending are provided for the support game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 201(b), when the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tz1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. That is, the time lag (delay time TW22) from when the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is satisfied (timing tz1) to when the electric role 93 is opened (timing tz2) = remaining variable display time in the through gate display unit DS + fixed display time of the image in the through gate display unit DS + execution time of the opening in the support game. As described above, if the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is satisfied immediately after the start of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is considered to be almost MAX, the delay time TW22 = approximately 16 sec.

In other words, the difference between delay time TW21 and delay time TW22 is significant (7.7 sec).

The 21st embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In the case of a big win, the game moves to the high-frequency support mode via the special game state, and in the case of a special miss, the game moves to the high-frequency support mode without going through the special game state. This diversifies the game flow when changing the support mode to a higher level, and contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Here, when moving from the first normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode via the special game state to the second normal game state or the third game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode B, a large number of balls can be obtained in the special game state. In other words, the player can enjoy the benefit of the big win in the special game state. Therefore, even if the period from returning to the normal game state (especially the third normal game state) until the player can enjoy another benefit becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. On the other hand, when a special miss occurs and the game transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, the time (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefits of the fourth normal game state is extended, even though the game has internally transitioned to the fourth normal game state, and this reduces the smoothness of the game progress. If such a delay becomes significant, it is feared that it will hinder the player's motivation to play. In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third normal game state over the first normal game state, it is not preferable for the electric role 93 to be in the open state frequently in the first normal game state. To simply reduce the frequency of the open state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the time for which the image changes in the through gate display unit DS, but such measures may increase the maximum value of the delay time by lengthening the time for which the image changes.

Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress the increase in the frequency of switching to the open state during the first normal game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display time of the picture in the through gate display unit DS is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay time into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay time can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the open state during the first normal game state and ensuring the advantage of the fourth normal game state, it is possible to suppress the time until the benefit of the fourth normal game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this embodiment, the execution time of the ending part when the support game is started during the first normal game state is shorter than the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time when the variable display of the picture is started in the through gate display unit DS during the first normal game state. This configuration allows the above effects to be optimally achieved.

During the ending part, the player is likely to get the impression that the timing at which the support game stops and the player can enjoy the benefit is being unnecessarily delayed. In contrast, this impression is unlikely to be given while the variable display of the images is being executed. Therefore, if the execution time of the ending part when the support game is started during the first normal game state is configured not to exceed the variable display time when the variable display of the images is started during the first normal game state, there will be fewer opportunities for a transition to the fourth normal game state to occur during the ending part than during the variable display of the images in the through gate display unit DS. This can alleviate the above concerns.

When the above-mentioned delays occur, there is a concern that they will be concentrated in one area, causing localized stress for the player. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the above-mentioned concerns can be alleviated by arranging an opening part and an ending part before and after the main part, and by configuring each of these parts to share the delay function.

If the fourth normal game state is entered during the display of the changing pattern on the through gate display unit DS in the first normal game state (corresponding to a winning result), the support game will correspond to the fourth normal game state. By configuring the state in such a way that the switch to the open state corresponding to the fourth normal game state is not carried over until the next support lottery → winning result, it is possible to contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player. In contrast, if the fourth normal game state is entered under a situation in which the support game has already started (during the support game), it becomes necessary to win the subsequent support lottery and execute the support game. In this way, the support game is executed through at least one support lottery and the display of the changing pattern on the through gate display unit DS, so the delay time may be longer than when the fourth normal game state is entered during the changing display of the pattern. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by configuring the execution time of the ending part when a support game is started during the first normal game state to be shorter than the sum of the variable display time and the final display time when the variable display of the image is started during the first normal game state, it is possible to prevent the time until the electric role 93 is opened (i.e., the time until the benefit can be felt) from becoming extremely long even if a transition to the third normal game state occurs during a support game and the support lottery is subsequently won and the support game is executed.

If an ending part were simply provided, it is expected that the presence of that ending part would hinder smooth game progress in the fourth normal game state. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, such concerns can be eliminated by configuring the execution time of the ending part to be shortened in the fourth normal game state.

When a support game is started during the first normal game state, the execution time of the ending part constituting the support game is longer than the execution time of the main part constituting the support game, and when a support game is started during the fourth normal game state, the execution time of the ending part constituting the support game is shorter than the execution time of the main part constituting the support game. In this way, by configuring the main part to be dominant when a support game is started during the fourth normal game state and the ending part to be dominant when a support game is started during the first normal game state, the effects shown in feature Y2 etc. can be more suitably exhibited.

<Modification 1>
In the twenty-first embodiment, the execution time (14.9 sec) of the ending part at the time of short opening is slightly shorter than the sum (15.5 sec) of the variable display time (15 sec) and the fixed display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS in the low frequency support mode, but this is not limited to this. At least the longest time until the benefit of the high frequency support mode A can be enjoyed should be recognized by the player as the same when the condition for switching to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS and when the condition for switching to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during support play. For example, the difference can be extended to 1.5 sec (about 10% of the above sum). In addition, the sum (15.5 sec) of the varying display time (15 sec) and the final display time (0.5 sec) of the image of the through gate display unit DS in the low frequency support mode may be configured to be the same as the execution time (14.9 sec) of the ending part when the short is opened.

Note that the sum (15.5 sec) of the variable display time (15 sec) and fixed display time (0.5 sec) of the image on the through gate display unit DS in the low-frequency support mode is the same as the execution time (15.5 sec) of the support game when a short is opened, but the execution time of the support game when a short is opened may be changed to be shorter than the sum (15 sec) of the variable display time (15 sec) and fixed display time (0.5 sec) of the image on the through gate display unit DS in the low-frequency support mode.

<Modification 2>
In the above twenty-first embodiment, the support game that begins upon winning the support lottery is composed of three parts: an opening part, a main part, and an ending part. However, it is also possible to change this and have the support game be composed of a main part and an ending part.

It is also possible for the support game to be composed of an opening part and a main part, but in such a configuration, it is preferable to change the execution time of the opening part so that it becomes the sum of the execution time of the opening part and the execution time of the ending part shown in the 21st embodiment above.

<Modification 3>
In the above twenty-first embodiment, the execution time of the ending part in the support game is biased to be longer than the execution time of the opening part, but this may be changed so that the execution time of the opening part in the support game is biased to be longer than the execution time of the ending part, or the execution time of the ending part in the support game and the execution time of the opening part may be aligned to be the same length.

<Modification 4>
In the twenty-first embodiment, the execution time of the ending part in the support game when the support game is executed during the low-frequency support mode is 14.9 sec, but this is not limited to this. When the support game is executed during the low-frequency support mode, multiple candidates may be set as the execution time of the ending part in the support game. For example, it is also possible to configure the execution time of the ending part to differ depending on the type of the support lottery winner.

<Modification 5>
The specific structure of the electric role 93 that determines whether or not a prize is won in the second operating port 92 may be arbitrary. For example, the number of movable pieces as an opening/closing member (shutter) may be one. Also, the movable piece may be a sliding type instead of a rotating type. Furthermore, the operating direction of the movable piece may be changed from a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board 80a to the thickness direction of the game board 80a.

<Modification 6>
In the above twenty-first embodiment, the mode of the support game is set to the timing when the fixed display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS ends (completion), i.e., the start timing of the support game, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the opening to be common to all support modes, and to determine the mode of the support game (opening/closing mode and the execution time of the ending part) at the end timing of the opening part in the support game, i.e., the start timing of the main part. It is also possible to configure the mode of the support game to be determined at the start timing of the fixed display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS or the start timing of the variable display of the pattern.

<Modification 7>
The fixed display time of the picture in the through gate display section DS when the variable display of the picture is started during the high frequency support mode A may be shorter than the fixed display time of the picture in the through gate display section DS when the variable display of the picture is started during the low frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/2, similar to the low frequency support mode, and even if the transition condition of the high frequency support mode A is established, there is a possibility that the support will not be won continuously. Therefore, if the fixed display time is shortened as described above, the time lag from switching to the high frequency support mode A to the actual opening of the electric role object 93 can be reduced. This is preferable in terms of smoothing the game progress and reducing the stress of the player.

<Modification 8>
In the twenty-first embodiment, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode A (both are 1/2), but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the probability of winning the support lottery in the high-frequency support mode A higher than the probability of winning the support lottery in the low-frequency support mode.

<Modification 9>
In the above twenty-first embodiment, the execution time of the ending part when the support game is executed during high-frequency support mode A is the same as the execution time of the ending part when the support game is executed during high-frequency support mode B, but the execution time of the ending part when the support game is executed during high-frequency support mode A and the execution time of the ending part when the support game is executed during high-frequency support mode B may be individually specified. That is, the execution time of the ending part may be different between high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution time of the ending part shorter in high-frequency support mode A than in high-frequency support mode B.

<Modification 10>
As in the other embodiments, a difference in the degree of advantage may be provided between the lottery based on winning through the first operating port 91 and the lottery based on winning through the second operating port 92. For example, it is possible to make the degree of advantage of the lottery based on winning through the second operating port 92 to which the electric role device 93 is attached higher than the degree of advantage of the lottery based on winning through the first operating port 91.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
In the twenty-first embodiment, when a support game is started during the low-frequency support mode, the execution time of the opening part is set to "0.5 sec". This opening part also has a function of suppressing excessively long delay time that occurs when the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is established. In addition, a configuration that secures time in both the opening part and the ending part is preferable in terms of alleviating local stress. However, the existence of such an opening part is harsh for a player who expects to open as soon as possible when winning the support lottery. In this embodiment, one of the features is that a design that takes such circumstances into consideration is made. Below, referring to the schematic diagram of FIG. 202, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the twenty-first embodiment.

In this embodiment as well, the game transitions to the support game when the support lottery is won and the display of the image corresponding to the result is completed. Here, when the support game starts under the circumstances of low frequency support, the execution time of the opening part is set to "0 sec", and the execution time of the ending part is set to "15.4 sec". In other words, in this embodiment, the opening does not occur when the short is opened, and the main part is executed immediately. Then, by adding the time equivalent to the execution time of the opening part shown in the 21st embodiment to the execution time of the ending part, the execution time of the support game when the short is opened is configured to be the same as that of the 21st embodiment (15.5 sec).

In contrast, when a support game is started under the circumstances of high frequency support A or B, the execution time of the opening part is set to "0.8 sec", and the execution time of the ending part is set to "0.2 sec". In other words, in this embodiment, the length relationship between the execution time of the opening part and the execution time of the ending part is reversed during a long opening.

<Modification 1>
In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the execution time of the opening part in the support game corresponding to the short opening is 0 sec, that is, the opening part is not executed, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the execution time is shorter than the execution time of the ending part (15.4 sec) or the execution time of the opening part in the support game corresponding to the long opening (0.8 sec), and this does not deny the configuration in which the opening part is executed in a short time even in the support game corresponding to the short opening.

<Modification 2>
In the twenty-second embodiment, the execution time of the ending part in the support game corresponding to the long opening is set to 0.2 sec, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the support game corresponding to the long opening, the execution time of the ending part can be set to 0 sec, that is, the ending part can be configured not to be executed.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
In the above-mentioned 21st and 22nd embodiments, the opening part is executed even at the time of long opening. As already explained, even if the low frequency support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode A internally, it is necessary to win the support lottery before the electric role 93 is actually opened, but in the high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/2, similar to the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the support lottery is lost consecutively, the time until the electric role 93 is opened may be extended. This may reduce the satisfaction of the player and may be an obstacle to increasing the attention to the game. In this embodiment, one of the features is that the device is designed to take such circumstances into consideration. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the 21st embodiment.

In this embodiment, when a support game (short opening) is started during the low-frequency support mode, the opening part is executed as in the twenty-first embodiment. In contrast, when a support game (long opening) is started during high-frequency support modes A and B, the execution time of the opening part is 0 sec, and the opening part is not executed in effect. With this configuration, during the low-frequency support mode, the opening part is used to prevent the maximum value of the above-mentioned delay time from becoming excessively large, and when the transition condition to high-frequency support mode A is established during the support game and the support lottery is won, and a support game corresponding to a long opening is executed, the time from the establishment of the transition condition to the opening state of the electric role 93 can be shortened.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referenced in the fourth normal game state are common, but the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referenced in the fourth normal game state may be provided separately. In other words, the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the first normal game state may be different from the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the fourth normal game state.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, if the electric role 93 is in an open state when switching from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the electric role 93 is forcibly switched to a closed state to prevent further winning into the second operating port 92. In order to prevent winning into the second operating port 92 after switching to the low-frequency support mode, for example, when switching from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, it is also possible to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode before the end of the game round that triggers the switch (the game round that reaches the end reference number). Specifically, it is also possible to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at a predetermined timing during the variable display in the game round that reaches the end reference number, or to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the fixed display starts in the game round that reaches the end reference number.

(3) In a configuration in which a special miss is determined by a lottery based on winning at the first actuating port 91 and the second actuating port 92, it is also possible to make the probability of a special miss based on winning at the first actuating port 91 different from the probability of a special miss based on winning at the second actuating port. For example, the probability of a special miss based on winning at the first actuating port 91 may be lower than the probability of a special miss based on winning at the second actuating port, and the probability of a special miss based on winning at the first actuating port 91 may be higher than the probability of a special miss based on winning at the second actuating port.

(4) When the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss (for example, the fourth normal game state) is shifted to a game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (for example, the first normal game state) based on the end reference number being reached, and then the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is shifted to. However, whether or not to intervene in the game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode in this manner is optional. For example, when the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the special miss (for example, the fourth normal game state) is shifted to a game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling being reached (for example, the fourth normal game state) based on the end reference number being reached. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, it is possible to configure the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode to continue without intervening in the game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (for example, the first normal game state) when the termination reference number is reached.

(5) If a special miss occurs during a game in which the ceiling is reached, the reaching of the ceiling may be used as a trigger to transition to a high-frequency support mode (a configuration that prioritizes reaching the ceiling), or the special miss may be used as a trigger to transition to a high-frequency support mode (a configuration that prioritizes a special miss).

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the game count counter is updated regardless of whether a game round related to the first actuation port 91 or a game round related to the second actuation port 92 is executed, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the game count counter to be updated when a game round related to the first actuation port 91 is executed, but not updated when a game round related to the second actuation port 92 is executed. It is also possible to configure the game count counter to be updated when a game round related to the second actuation port 92 is executed, but not updated when a game round related to the first actuation port 91 is executed.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, when the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the play count counter starts counting the number of plays after the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling ends, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling), it is also possible to configure the play count counter to start counting the number of plays from the next play after the ceiling is reached.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the play count counter is updated (decremented by "1") at the start of a play round, but the timing of updating the value of the play count counter is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to configure the play count counter to be updated (decremented by "1") when a confirmation display is executed or when a play round ends.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the base (the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot) is set so that the number of balls held is slightly decreased in either the high-frequency support mode A or the high-frequency support mode B, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the base so that the number of balls held is slightly increased for at least one of the support modes.

(10) The variable winning device 83 may be placed at any location in the game area PE. For example, if the flow paths of game balls in the game area PE are a left route that bypasses the variable display unit 85 located in the center of the game board 80a from the left side and a right route that bypasses it from the right side, the variable winning device 83 may be placed on one of the routes, and a restriction may be imposed so that game balls launched on the other route cannot reach the variable winning device 83.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units D1, D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 are started based on the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to start the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units D1, D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 prior to the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the display of the changing patterns on the through gate display unit DS is started based on the support lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to start the display of the changing patterns on the through gate display unit DS prior to the support lottery (determination process) in the main control unit 162.

(13) It is also possible to implement a configuration in which a performance linked to the through gate display unit DS is executed on another display device, such as a pattern display device, and the results of the support lottery are notified to the player through that performance.

(14) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and in which the rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and after the reels are stopped by operating a stop switch, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window, a special reward such as a medal payout is given to the player.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating the effects, etc., as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
The following feature group A has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature A1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a second transition means for transitioning to the specified gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special gaming state when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed via the special game state when the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is reached, and if the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when the judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information is reached, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level can be diversified, which contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. In addition, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level, the frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state differs depending on whether the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. For example, by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached, excessive investment until the transition to the special game state can be suppressed (a decrease in motivation to play can be suppressed), and by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is reached, the sharpness of the game can be enhanced. In particular, by configuring the system to quickly change to the third switching mode when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information that is not a trigger for a large amount of balls being dispensed (a trigger for transitioning to a special game state), it is possible to improve the satisfaction of the player.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature A2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the first gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed via the special game state when the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is reached, and if the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when the judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information is reached, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level can be diversified, which contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. In addition, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level, the frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state differs depending on whether the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. For example, by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached, excessive investment until the transition to the special game state can be suppressed (a decrease in motivation to play can be suppressed), and by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is reached, the sharpness of the game can be enhanced. In particular, by configuring the game to quickly switch to the third game state (third switching mode) when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information that is not a trigger for a large amount of balls being dispensed (a trigger for transition to a special game state), it is possible to improve the satisfaction of the player.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature A3. The judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means performs the judgment is provided with a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively high,
The probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode,
The first gaming state corresponds to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
A gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the third gaming state corresponds to the third switching mode and the low probability mode.

If a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the first game state, the game state transitions to the third game state without passing through the special game state. At this time, the judgment mode remains the low probability mode, but the switching control mode is changed from the first switching mode to the third switching mode. This makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while keeping investment down, and a certain player rescue function is exercised. Since the special game state is not passed through when such a rescue function is exercised as described above, the time required for the function to be exercised can be shortened as much as possible, making it less likely that the player will get the impression that the game is being needlessly delayed.

Feature A4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that the transition period required by the second transition means is configured to be shorter than the transition period required by the first transition means.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached, the switching control mode is quickly changed to the third switching mode, and the time lag until the benefit of the rescue function described above can be enjoyed can be reduced. This is preferable in terms of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play, who is aiming for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (transition to a special game state).

Feature A5. The variable mechanism control means is configured to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state when a lottery (support lottery) based on the game ball passing through a passing portion (e.g., a through gate 84) provided in the game area is won,
The second switching mode is configured to change the probability of winning in the lottery to be higher than that in the first switching mode,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the third switching mode has the same probability of winning in the lottery as the first switching mode, but is configured so that the period required from winning the lottery to entering the accepting state is shorter.

As shown in this feature, when switching from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, the probability of winning in the lottery based on passing through the passing section is changed, and when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the time required from winning to entering the acceptance state is shortened without changing the probability of winning. By using different parameters in this way to differentiate between the second switching mode and the third switching mode, the technical idea shown in feature A1 etc. can be suitably realized.

Feature A6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A5, characterized in that the second switching mode is configured to have a higher ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means to the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching means than the third switching mode.

According to feature A6, the second switching mode increases the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired, i.e., the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the number of game balls fired (hereinafter referred to as the base), compared to the third switching mode, making it possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the loss of balls held. In other words, when the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information and the game transitions to the second switching mode via the special game state, there is a chance to win a large number of balls. In contrast, in the third switching mode, the base is more favorable than in the first switching mode, but the degree of favorability is kept lower than in the second switching mode, so that the rescue function can be prevented from becoming excessive. With this configuration, the game can be made more interesting by using multiple switching modes in combination.

Feature A7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A5, characterized in that the third switching mode is configured to have a higher ratio of the number of gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching means than the second switching mode.

According to feature A7, by switching to the third switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired, i.e., the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the number of game balls fired (hereinafter referred to as the base), becomes higher compared to the second switching mode, making it possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the loss of balls in hand. In other words, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state, although a large number of balls cannot be expected to be paid out at that point, it is possible to wait for an opportunity to win a large number of balls that would result from the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while significantly suppressing the loss of balls in hand. With this configuration, the soundness of the game can be favorably improved.

Feature A8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times a game has been played in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode reaches a reference number of times to end the game (e.g., 40 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

By setting an upper limit (a reference number of times to end) on the number of times play is performed in a specific game state corresponding to the third switching mode, it becomes possible to cause a return from the third switching mode to the first switching mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in tension in the game after entering the third switching mode.

Feature A9. The judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means performs the judgment is provided with a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively high,
The probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode and the low probability mode;
The first transition means is configured to transition to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (a big win result) corresponding to the first determination information occurs in the first gaming state,
The second transition means is configured to transition to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a judgment result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state,
a third transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game is executed in the second gaming state reaches a reference number of times to end the game (for example, 40 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information (a function of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the time-saving period is consumed in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that it is equipped with a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 to transition from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the time-saving period is exhausted) for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of game plays in the third gaming state reaches a termination reference number (e.g., 40 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

According to this feature, an upper limit (a reference number of times to end) is set for the number of times play is performed in the third game state, and when the upper limit is reached, a downgrade (return) from the third game state to the first game state may occur. With this configuration, it is possible to effectively prevent a decrease in tension in the game after transitioning to the third game state.

In addition, a reference number of times to end is set for each of the second and third game states. By providing transition routes to limited advantageous states with upper limits on the number of times to play, both via and not via the special game state, it is possible to contribute to diversifying the game. In this configuration, it is preferable to configure the base in the third switching mode so that the difference between the base in the second switching mode is smaller than the difference between the base in the first switching mode.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, characterized in that it has a means for setting the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means, to a number less than the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the third transition means.

As shown in this feature, setting the reference number of times for ending the third game state to be less than the reference number of times for ending the second game state is advantageous in increasing the frequency of transitions to the third game state and thus the frequency of transitions between game states. This is preferable in preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature A11. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, characterized in that it has a means for setting the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means, to be the same as the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the third transition means.

As shown in this feature, if the termination reference number of times in the third game state is the same as the termination reference number of times in the second game state, it can be made to look as if there are multiple transition routes to one game state (second game state, third game state). This is preferable in terms of realizing diversification of the game while avoiding it becoming a cause of confusion for the player.

Feature A12. A fifth transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state when the number of times the game is executed after the special gaming state ends in the first gaming state reaches an upper limit number of times without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information;
a sixth transition means for transitioning to the first game state when the fifth transition means transitions to the third game state and the number of times the game has been played in the third game state reaches a reference number of times to end the game (e.g., 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and
A gaming machine described in any one of features A9 to A11, characterized in that the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the sixth transition means, is set to be greater than the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the first gaming state, or if the number of times a game is played during the first gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), a transition to a third gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode occurs. In this way, by setting the trigger for transition to the third gaming state to a judgment result that does not correspond to a transition to a special gaming state or reaching the ceiling, and by attempting to rescue the player through the third gaming state, it is possible to contribute to suppressing excessive investment. In particular, by setting the termination reference number of times set in response to reaching the ceiling as a relatively large number and setting the termination reference number of times set in response to a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information as a relatively small number, it is possible to preferably realize diversification of games and strengthening of rescue functions.

Feature A13. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
A second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning to the third gaming state when the number of times a game is executed after the end of the special gaming state in the first gaming state reaches an upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

As shown in this characteristic, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained or the number of times the game is played during the first game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached), the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level, the frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state differs depending on whether the trigger is the determination result corresponding to the first determination information or the determination result corresponding to the second determination information or the ceiling reached. This realizes further diversification of the game. In particular, by setting the trigger for transition to the third game state as a determination result that does not correspond to transition to the special game state or reaching the ceiling, and rescuing the player through the third game state, it can contribute to preventing excessive investment.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature A14. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a means for transitioning the game state to the second game state via the special game state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning to the third gaming state when the number of times a game is executed after the end of the special gaming state in the first gaming state reaches an upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

As shown in this characteristic, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is reached, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the number of times the game is played during the first game state reaches the upper limit (reaching the ceiling), the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level, the frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state differs depending on whether the trigger is the determination result corresponding to the first determination information or reaching the ceiling. This realizes further diversification of the game. In particular, by setting the trigger for transition to the third game state as reaching the ceiling and rescuing the player through the third game state, it is possible to contribute to preventing excessive investment.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

The technical ideas described above in Features A1 to A12 may also be applied to Features A13 to A14.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature B group has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature B1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is performed in accordance with special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being counted as one game round when an operation for a game round (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the high-frequency switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a second normal game state, a third normal game state, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second type game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state in response to a jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a second transition means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first type game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a third transition means for transitioning to the first type game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second type game state reaches a reference number of times to end the game (for example, 40 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information after the transition to the second type game state by the second transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
a fourth transition means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained; (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached);
The fourth transition means is configured to delay the transition to the second type game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit number of game plays after the special game state ends during the second type game state transitioned to by the second transition means, until the number of game plays in the second type game state reaches the termination reference number.

According to feature B1, even if the game proceeds without the transition trigger to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) being established, the game may transition to the second type game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or the reaching of the upper limit number of times of play after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). The high frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game. However, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the reaching of the ceiling are used together as the transition trigger to the second type game state as described above, the following concerns arise. That is, if the reaching of the ceiling is invalidated when the ceiling is reached during the second type game state, or the second type game state is forcibly terminated due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, some of the benefits that the player would have been able to enjoy will be lost, and there is a concern that the satisfaction of the player will be greatly reduced. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the second type game state, the transition to the second type game state triggered by the reaching of the ceiling is delayed until the number of times the game has been played in the second type game state reaches the end reference number. This can eliminate the above concerns and contribute to improving the satisfaction of players.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "a gaming machine having a gaming board (gaming board 80a) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, a gaming ball launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on the player's operation, and a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out gaming balls (prize balls) based on a ball entering an entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable entry device 83) provided in the gaming area, and a special information acquisition means (processing for acquiring reserved information by MPU 402 of main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters a starting entry section (operation openings 91, 92) serving as the entry section. a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result); and a game operation (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means. The game control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls a predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a variable display of a picture that indicates a winning combination is started and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment. As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided, and the judgment result by the judgment means is the first judgment information. a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game states (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the result of the judgment corresponding to the fixed information and the end of the game-cycle operation by the game cycle control means; a variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state; and The game machine is provided with a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state, a variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the accepting state, and a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric support processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, and a first type switching mode (low frequency support mode) as a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means. a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode without passing through the special game state when a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the special miss result occurs); a second transition means (a function of transitioning from a fourth normal game state to a first normal game state triggered by time reduction consumption in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode when the number of times of execution of a game in the predetermined game state reaches a termination reference number (e.g., 40 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and a second transition means (a function of transitioning from a fourth normal game state to a first normal game state triggered by time reduction consumption in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode when the number of times of execution of a game in the predetermined game state reaches a termination reference number (e.g., 40 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information. and a third transition means for transitioning to a predetermined game state (a function for transitioning from the first normal game state to a fourth normal game state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling), the third transition means being configured to delay transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode when the number of game plays reaches the upper limit during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode, which has been transitioned to when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached. until the number of game plays in the predetermined game state reaches the end reference number.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is performed in accordance with special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being counted as one game round when an operation for a game round (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
As the predetermined game states, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode, a second game state (e.g., a second/third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode, and a third game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode are provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state in response to a jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a third transition means for transitioning to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the third game state transitioned by the second transition means reaches a reference number of times to end the game (for example, 40 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information; and
a fourth transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained; (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached);
The fourth transition means is configured to delay the transition to the third game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit number of game plays after the special game state ends during the third game state transitioned to by the second transition means, until the number of game plays in the third game state reaches the termination reference number.

According to feature B2, even if the game proceeds without the transition trigger to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) being established, the game may transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or the reaching of the upper limit number of times of play after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). The third switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game. However, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the reaching of the ceiling are used together as the transition trigger to the third game state as described above, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state and the reaching of the ceiling is invalidated, or the third game state is forcibly terminated due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, some of the benefits that the player would have been able to enjoy will be lost, and there is a concern that the player's satisfaction will be greatly reduced. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the reaching of the ceiling is delayed until the number of times the game has been played in the third gaming state reaches the termination reference number. This can eliminate the above concerns and contribute to improving the satisfaction of players.

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B2, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism when transitioning to the third gaming state by the fourth transition means is configured to be the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism when transitioning to the third gaming state by the second transition means.

As shown in feature B2, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state and a transition to the third game state is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the switching mode of the variable mechanism is made uniform, thereby preventing the benefit of reaching the ceiling from being inferior to the previous behavior.

Feature B4: The termination reference number is a first termination reference number,
a fifth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game is executed in the third gaming state transitioned to by the fourth transition means reaches a second termination reference number (e.g., 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information; (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or Feature B3, wherein the first termination reference number is specified to be less than the second termination reference number.

If the delay function shown in feature B2 is included, it is expected that if the benefit of reaching the ceiling ends immediately after a large delay, this will cause the player to lose motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the first termination reference number < the second termination reference number, excessive delays can be suppressed and the impression that the benefit after reaching the ceiling is stale can be suppressed.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B4, characterized in that, when the number of play times after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit during the third game state to which the transition is made by the second transition means, the fourth transition means transitions to the third game state triggered by reaching the upper limit after the transition to the first game state by the third transition means triggered by the number of play times in the third game state reaching the reference number of times to be ended.

As shown by this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the game state is transitioned from the third game state to the first game state and then returned to the third game state. This adds an accent to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature B6: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The fourth transition means is configured to transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the upper limit number of times after transition to the first gaming state by the third transition means when the number of times of execution of games after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number during the third gaming state transitioned by the second transition means, and to transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the upper limit number of times after transition to the first gaming state by the third transition means triggered by the number of times of execution of games in the third gaming state reaching the end reference number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that the number of games to be executed in the first gaming state transitioned to by the third transition means in a situation where the transition to the third gaming state by the fourth transition means is delayed is specified to be less than the upper limit of the special information that can be stored by the acquired information storage means.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the third game state is transitioned to the first game state and then returned to the third game state, which can add an accent to the rhythm of the game and contribute to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, in a configuration in which the first game state is intervened, the repetition of game rounds in the first game state is likely to give the player the impression that the enjoyment of benefits is being unfairly delayed. In particular, it is expected that such an impression will be strengthened when the number of special information stored becomes zero due to the intervention of the first game state, interrupting the continuous progression of game rounds. In this regard, by limiting the number of games executed in the intervening first game state to be less than the upper limit of the memory of special information, it is possible to avoid interruption of the continuous game rounds when returning to the third game state, and the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably eliminated.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B4, characterized in that the fourth transition means is configured to transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the upper limit number of times after the third transition means transitions to the first gaming state triggered by the number of times played in the third gaming state reaching the reference number of times to be ended, if the number of times played after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit number during the third gaming state transitioned to by the second transition means.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the game state is transitioned from the third gaming state to the first gaming state and then returned to the third gaming state, thereby adding an accent to the rhythm of the game and contributing to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, in a configuration that involves the first gaming state, the repeated play in the first gaming state is likely to give the player the impression that the enjoyment of the benefit is being unduly delayed. In this regard, a configuration that returns to the third gaming state after one play can suitably alleviate the above concerns.

Feature B8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B5 to B7, characterized in that it is provided with a notification means for notifying a player of a transition to the third gaming state during the first gaming state in which the transition to the third gaming state is delayed by the fourth transition means.

Having a configuration that ensures an opportunity to notify the player of the transition to the third game state during the first game state is preferable in encouraging attention to each game round during the third game state before the transition to the first game state.

Feature B9: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The game control means has an operation period setting means capable of setting an operation period of the game operation in accordance with the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The gaming machine described in feature B8, wherein the operation period setting means is configured to set a predetermined operation period for a game performed during the first game state in which the transition to the third game state is delayed by the fourth transition means, regardless of the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

As shown in feature B5, etc., in a configuration in which the game returns to the third game state via the first game state, the following inconveniences may occur due to variations in the operation period of the game-run operation executed during the first game state. That is, if the operation period is relatively short, the time to notify the player of the transition to the third game state may be insufficient, and if the operation period is relatively long, the player may easily get the impression that the transition to the third game state is being unduly delayed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, for game runs in the first game state in which the transition to the third game state is delayed, a predetermined operation period is set regardless of the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the above concerns can be eliminated by making the operation period constant.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B4, wherein the fourth transition means is configured to transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the upper limit number of times after the end of the special gaming state when the number of times the game is played after the transition by the second transition means reaches the upper limit number of times, without going through another gaming state after the end of the third gaming state.

As shown by this feature, if the third game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling are seamlessly connected, the two benefits can be combined into one, enhancing the impact.

Feature B11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B10, characterized in that if the number of times the game is played after the special game state ends during the third game state transitioned to by the second transition means reaches the upper limit number of times, and the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first determination information while the transition to the third game state by the fourth transition means is delayed, the transition to the fourth transition means triggered by reaching the upper limit number of times is invalidated.

As shown in this feature, if a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in a situation where a transition to the third game state is pending due to reaching the ceiling, it is preferable to configure the transition to the third game state due to reaching the ceiling to be invalid in order to prevent excessive rescue functions for the player.

Feature B12. A special effect execution means is provided that can execute a special effect indicating a transition to the third gaming state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches an upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information;
The gaming machine described in any one of Features B2 to B11, wherein the special effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect in the game turn in which the maximum number of plays has been reached if the maximum number of plays has been reached during the first gaming state, and not execute the special effect in the game turn in which the maximum number of plays has been reached if the maximum number of plays has been reached during the third gaming state transitioned to by the second transition means.

If the maximum number of plays is reached (the ceiling is reached) during the first gaming state, a special effect is executed in that gaming round, and a prompt notification is given that a transition to the third gaming state will occur. In contrast, if the maximum number of plays is reached (the ceiling is reached) during the third gaming state, the special effect is avoided in that gaming round. In this way, by deliberately not executing a special effect when the transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the third gaming state, which was triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, before the end of that gaming state.

Feature B13. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B11, characterized in that, when the upper limit number of times is reached during the third gaming state transitioned to by the second transition means, a means is provided for informing the player of the transition to the third gaming state in a game round to be executed after the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached, and which is a game round prior to the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the fourth transition means upon reaching the upper limit number of times.

As shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of plays is reached (ceiling reached) during the third gaming state, the player is notified of the transition to the third gaming state (ceiling reached) in a gaming turn executed after the ceiling is reached, which is before the transition to the third gaming state that is triggered by the reaching of the ceiling. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to have expectations that the third gaming state will be effectively extended by reaching the ceiling, even in a gaming turn other than the one in which the ceiling may be reached.

Feature B14: A special effect execution means is provided that can execute a special effect indicating a transition to the third gaming state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches an upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information;
The gaming machine described in any one of Features B2 to B11, wherein the special effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect in a game turn in which the maximum number of times has been reached, if the maximum number of times has been reached during the third game state and the number of times that game turns in the third game state have been executed is greater than a predetermined number of times, and to execute the special effect in a game turn that is executed after the game turn in which the maximum number of times has been reached, if the maximum number of times has been reached during the third game state and the number of times that game turns in the third game state have been executed is less than the predetermined number of times.

If the upper limit number of times (ceiling reached) is reached during the third gaming state to which the transition is triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, the player's impression may differ depending on the timing. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, the player may be left with the impression that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information was a waste of time. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the above concerns can be alleviated by varying the timing of the occurrence of the special effect, i.e., the timing of the notification that the ceiling has been reached, depending on the number of times play has been performed during the third gaming state (the number of times play has been performed up to that point).

The technical ideas shown in Features B3 to B14 may also be applied to Feature B1.

Incidentally, each of the technical ideas shown in the above feature group A may also be applied to features B1 to B14.

<Characteristics Group C>
The following feature C group has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature C1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the special game state is entered, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the special information,
A judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring at the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section, while a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, there are provided a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set to make it easier to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a second normal game state, a third normal game state, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second type game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state in response to a jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first type game state when the number of times the game is executed during the second type game state reaches a first reference number of times to end (e.g., 20 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the second type game state transitioned to by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the third normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon consumption of a time-saving period);
a third transition means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first type game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first type game state when the number of game plays in the second type game state transitioned to by the third transition means reaches a second termination reference number (e.g., 20 plays) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, said fourth transition means being a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period.

According to feature C1, when a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type game state, the game state transitions to the second type game state via the special game state. The second type game state corresponds to the high frequency switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second start ball entry section. A number of times is limited in the second type game state, and when the number of times a game is executed in the second type game state reaches the first end reference number, the game state transitions to the first type game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to enter the second start ball entry section. Here, the special information acquired based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after the transition from the second type game state to the first type game state, the game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. In the remaining game rounds related to the second start ball entry section, the judgment result may be the one corresponding to the second judgment information. If the remaining game rounds produce a judgment result that corresponds to the second judgment information, the game state will be promptly switched to the second type of game state without going through the special game state, and the high frequency switching mode will be looped. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result that corresponds to the first judgment information while minimizing the loss of balls. In this way, diversification of games can be achieved, which can contribute to increasing interest in the games.

Feature C2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is performed in accordance with special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being counted as one game round when an operation for a game round (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the special game state is entered, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the special information,
A judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring at the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section, while a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section, a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period in which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period in which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode, a second game state (e.g., a second/third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode, and a third game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode are provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state in response to a jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game is played during the second gaming state reaches a first reference number of times to end (e.g., 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second gaming state transitioned to by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
a third transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first game state when, in the third game state transitioned to by the third transition means, the number of game plays in the third game state reaches a second termination reference number (e.g., 20 plays) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, said fourth transition means being a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period.

According to feature C2, when a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, the game state transitions to the second game state via the special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. A number of times is limited in the second game state, and when the number of times a game is executed in the second game state reaches the first end reference number, the game state transitions to the first game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after the transition from the second game state to the first game state, the game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. In the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section, the judgment result may be the one corresponding to the second judgment information. If the remaining game rounds produce a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, the game state transitions to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state, and the high frequency switching mode loops. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the loss of balls. By diversifying the game in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the interest in the game.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is performed in accordance with special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being counted as one game round when an operation for a game round (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the special game state is entered, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
The start ball entry section includes a first start ball entry section (first operating port 91) arranged in a first flow path (left route) in the game area, and a second start ball entry section (second operating port 92) arranged in a second flow path (right route) in the game area,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
A judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring at the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section, while a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section, a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period in which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period in which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode, a second game state (e.g., a second/third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode, and a third game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode are provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state in response to a jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game is played during the second gaming state reaches a first reference number of times to end (e.g., 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second gaming state transitioned to by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
a third transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first game state when, in the third game state transitioned to by the third transition means, the number of game plays in the third game state reaches a second termination reference number (e.g., 20 plays) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, said fourth transition means being a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period.

According to feature C3, when a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, the game state transitions to the second game state via the special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and by launching the game ball to the second route, the number of balls entering the second start ball entry section increases, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed. A number of times is limited in the second game state, and when the number of times a game is executed in the second game state reaches the first end reference number, the game state transitions to the first game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to enter the second start ball entry section. Here, the special information acquired based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after the transition from the second game state to the first game state, the game round is executed based on the special information stored therein. In the remaining game rounds related to the second start ball entry section, the judgment result may be the one corresponding to the second judgment information. If the remaining game rounds produce a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, the game state transitions to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state, and the high frequency switching mode loops. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the loss of balls. By diversifying the game in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the interest in the game.

Feature C4. The gaming machine described in Feature C2 or Feature C3, characterized in that the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is more likely to result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information than a judgment corresponding to the first judgment information.

As described above, when the game state transitions from the second or third game state to the first game state, game rounds related to the second start ball entry section are executed with the number of special information stored in the second storage means as the upper limit. In these game rounds, the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and even if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is not obtained, it is possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information by looping the high frequency switching mode. This configuration contributes to improving the interest of the game without unnecessarily increasing the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

Feature C5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C2 to C4, characterized in that, during the second game state and the third game state, if the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information, the determination result is invalidated.

According to feature C5, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second/third game state, the judgment result is invalidated, whereas if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the remaining game times related to the second start ball entry section when transitioning from the second/third game state to the first game state, the judgment result is used as a trigger to transition to the third game state. With this configuration, the presence or absence of the above-mentioned loop depends on the maximum number of special information related to the second start ball entry section that can be stored. Therefore, when adjusting the degree of advantage by increasing or decreasing the termination reference number in the second/third game state, it is possible to avoid the effect on the loop probability and suitably improve the degree of freedom in setting the termination reference number.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of features C2 to C4, characterized in that during the second game state and the third game state, the determination by the determination means is configured to avoid a determination result corresponding to the second determination information."

Feature C6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C2 to C5, characterized in that the second end reference number is defined to be the same as the first end reference number.

The configuration shown in this feature is preferable in that it encourages the player to recognize that the game states before and after the first game state are the same when the game state progresses from the second game state to the first game state to the third game state.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C2 to C6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode.

The configuration shown in this feature is preferable in that it encourages the player to recognize that the game states before and after the first game state are the same when the game state progresses from the second game state to the first game state to the third game state.

The "switching mode" in this characteristic is composed of three elements: the period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the open state is switched to, and the interval period between open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode" means that there are more identical or similar elements among those three elements than in the "first switching mode."

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of features G2 to G4, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode."

Feature C8. A destination determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the second storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C2 to C6, characterized in that it is equipped with a special effect execution means for executing a special effect based on a specific result by the destination determination means for special information that is to be determined after a transition from the second game state and the third game state to the first game state in response to a transition from the second game state and the third game state to the first game state.

Immediately after transitioning from the second or third game state to the first game state, the remaining reserved play times related to the second starting ball entry section are executed. Then, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in these play times, transition will occur from the first game state to the third game state. Here, as shown in this feature, in the second/third game state, it is determined in advance whether the remaining reserved play times will result in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, and a special performance is performed based on that result, thereby increasing attention to whether or not the above-mentioned loop will occur.

Feature C9. The gaming machine described in Feature C8, characterized in that the destination determination means is configured to perform the determination in the final game round in the second game state and the third game state when transitioning from the second game state and the third game state to the first game state.

If the above determination is made in the final game round in the second/third game state, the special effect will be executed when the amount of special information stored in the second storage means has reached the upper storage limit, and the special effect can effectively demonstrate its function of suggesting the continuation of the above loop.

Feature C10. The gaming machine described in Feature C9, which is configured to start the special performance before the destination determination means determines the final game round.

According to feature C10, by starting the special effect prior to identification by the advance identification means, the constraints on the execution period of the special effect can be relaxed, and the special effect can be prevented from becoming obsolete.

The technical ideas shown in Features C4 to C10 may also be applied to Feature C1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above feature groups A to B may also be applied to feature groups C1 to C10.

<Feature D group>
The following feature group D has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature D1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
a third transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained; and
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect suggesting a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the first transition means transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode;
Equipped with
The special effect execution means is configured to determine the presentation mode of the special effect depending on whether or not the maximum number of times is reached during the specified gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the mode is transitioned.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the ball frequently enters the second starting ball entry section, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progress. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, the game state may transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In this case, a special performance is executed. The performance mode of the special performance is determined depending on whether the ceiling is reached during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the game is transitioned. With this configuration, for example, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, the ceiling is suggested, or conversely, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the trigger for transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or the ceiling is reached, which can contribute to increasing attention to the game by diversifying the game.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
a third transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained; and
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect suggesting a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the first transition means transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode;
The special effect execution means is configured to determine the presentation mode of the special effect based on the termination reference number of times in the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the transition is made and the remaining number of games until the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends (number of times the game is played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the ball frequently enters the second starting ball entry section, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progress. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, the game state may transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In this case, a special performance is executed. The performance mode of the special performance is determined based on the end reference number of times in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the game state is transitioned and the remaining number of times the ceiling will be reached. With this configuration, for example, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, it is possible to suggest that the ceiling has been reached, or conversely, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the trigger for transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or the ceiling has been reached, which can contribute to increasing attention to the game by diversifying the game.

Feature D3. The special effect execution means is a first execution means,
The special effects include a first special effect and a second special effect having different performance modes,
a second execution means for executing the second special performance as a performance suggesting a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the third transition means transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode;
The gaming machine described in feature D2 is characterized in that the first execution means has a means for executing the second special effect when the set termination reference number is greater than the remaining number of games at which the upper limit number of games will be reached.

According to feature D3, when the determination result corresponds to the second determination information and the ceiling is reached during a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the transition is triggered by the determination result, the same special effect (second special effect) as the special effect (second special effect) that is executed when the ceiling is reached during normal play is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ceiling is variable.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in Feature D3, characterized in that the first execution means has a means for executing the first special effect when the set termination reference number is less than the remaining number of games until the upper limit number of games is reached.

According to feature D4, if the set end reference number of times is less than the number of times the game is played until the ceiling is reached, the first special effect is executed instead of the second special effect. This is preferable in terms of exerting the mimetic effect shown in feature D3.

Feature D5. The gaming machine described in Feature D3 or Feature D4, wherein the second execution means is configured not to execute the second special effect when the game state transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the third transition means after the second special effect is executed by the first execution means.

As shown in feature D5, when the ceiling is reached during a specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second special performance is not executed and the reaching of the ceiling is not indicated, thereby making it possible to more effectively exert the mimetic effect shown in feature D3.

Feature D6. The third transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode by the second transition means when the upper limit number of times is reached during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode by the second transition means upon reaching the end reference number of times;
a state suggesting means for suggesting, when the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is reached, that the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is reached;
The gaming machine described in any one of features D3 to D5, characterized in that when the maximum number of times is reached during the second switching mode and the third transition means transitions from the specified gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode via the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode to the specified gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the state suggestion means is configured to provide the state suggestion across these three gaming states.

According to feature D6, when the switching mode changes from the second switching mode to the first switching mode to the second switching mode, the second switching mode is continuously suggested even during the first switching mode, so that the mimicry effect shown in feature D3 can be more effectively exerted.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features D2 to D6, characterized in that the first transition means has a means for setting the end reference number to any number including a first end reference number and a second reference number, which are different numbers, when transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.

By using the first and second end reference counts in combination as shown in feature D7, the pseudo-variable ceiling function as shown in feature D2 etc. can be more effectively utilized.

Feature D8. The first end reference number is less than the upper limit number,
A gaming machine described in feature D7, characterized in that the second termination reference number is the same as or greater than the upper limit number.

According to feature D8, when the first end reference number is set, whether or not the ceiling is reached during the second switching mode depends on the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, and when the second end reference number is set, the ceiling may be reached during the second switching mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferably prevent the function from not being properly performed when the ceiling is pseudo-varied using the second judgment information.

The technical ideas shown in features D3 to D8 above may also be applied to feature D1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to C may also be applied to features D1 to D8.

<Features Group E>
The following feature group E has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature E1. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a special win game state transition process or a big win game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (a special win game state or a big win game state) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., a normal game state or a special game state) based on the result of the determination by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game-use operation by the game-repeater control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83B) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83B by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
The variable ball entry control means is configured to switch the variable ball entry section to the receiving state when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined information (for example, a special winning result or a big winning result) and the special game state is entered,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the special information,
The predetermined information includes first information (e.g., a random number group corresponding to a normal jackpot) and second information (e.g., a random number group corresponding to a probability jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first information,
The determination based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section is more likely to result in a determination corresponding to the second information than the determination based on the ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, there are provided a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a special transition means for transitioning to the specified gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode when the number of game plays executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified information.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified information, the game state transitions to a specified game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. In the high frequency switching mode, the ball can enter the second start ball entry section, and a judgment (lottery) based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section can result in not only a judgment result corresponding to the first information, but also a judgment result corresponding to the second information that is more advantageous to the player than the first information. This greatly increases the degree of advantage in the judgment. In other words, reaching the ceiling transitions to a chance zone that is more advantageous than the previous game state. In this way, if the configuration is such that the transition to the chance zone occurs when the ceiling is reached, the player's desire to play can be favorably stimulated. This is preferable in terms of suppressing monotony in the game and increasing attention to the game.

Feature E2. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the special win game state or a transition process to the big win game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (a special win game state or a big win game state) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., a normal game state or a special game state) based on the result of the determination by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83B) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83B by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the predetermined information, first information (a random number group corresponding to a special winning result) and second information (a random number group corresponding to a big winning result) are provided,
The variable ball entry control means includes:
a means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a first control mode when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (special jackpot result) that corresponds to the first information and transitions to the special game state;
a means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a second control mode when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and transitions to the special game state, or when the determination result becomes the first determination result and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the variable ball entry section;
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the special information,
The second judgment result may occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring at the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section, while the first judgment result may occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, there are provided a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set to make it easier to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the normal gaming state to a third special gaming state when the number of game plays executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified information) that transitions to the specified gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified information, the game state transitions to a specified game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. In the high frequency switching mode, the ball can enter the second start ball entry section, and a judgment (lottery) based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section can result in not only a judgment result corresponding to the first information but also a judgment result corresponding to the second information. This greatly increases the degree of advantage in the judgment (probability of winning or probability of transition to the special game state). In other words, reaching the ceiling transitions to a chance zone with a higher advantage than the previous game state. In this way, a configuration in which a transition to the chance zone occurs when the ceiling is reached can favorably stimulate the player's desire to play. This is preferable in terms of suppressing monotony in the game and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, when the ceiling is reached, the ball will enter the second starting ball entry area, which not only prevents the balls from being consumed but also increases the probability of transitioning to the special game state. With this configuration, the benefits of the second switching mode can be effectively utilized even if the duration of stay in the second switching mode is shortened, and the dragging of gameplay after the ceiling is reached can be effectively prevented.

Feature E3. The special transition means is a first special transition means;
a second special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the number of times a game is executed in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches a reference number of times to end (e.g., 1 time) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information after the first special transition means has transitioned to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (a function of transitioning from a third special game state to a fourth special game state in response to the consumption of a time-saving period in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
The gaming machine described in feature E2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a resetting means (a ceiling resetting function in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) that resets the upper limit number of times when the second special transition means transitions to the specified gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode.

According to feature E3, the number of plays that will result in the ceiling being reached is reset when the high frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. This configuration is preferable for realizing a configuration in which the ceiling is shallow and the benefit of the ceiling is small, and a weak ceiling function is exerted in a short cycle. In other words, it is preferable for preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature E4. The first special transition means is provided with an execution count counter (e.g., a continuation count counter) for grasping the number of times a game has been executed without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information after the game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode has been transitioned to by the first special transition means;
The second special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the value of the execution number counter becomes a value corresponding to the end reference number,
The gaming machine described in feature E3 is characterized in that the execution count counter is updated (counts) when a game round based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section is executed, but is not updated (does not count) when a game round based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section is executed.

As shown in feature E4, by configuring the ending reference number of times to be updated when the ball enters the second starting ball entry area, it is possible to prevent the benefit of reaching the ceiling from being fully enjoyed.

Feature E5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E2 to E4, characterized in that the upper limit number of times M (an integer) is set to be smaller than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., about 1/200) that the judgment by the judgment means will result in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By specifying the upper limit number of times in the manner described above, the chance zones can be generated in short cycles, and the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous can be more effectively achieved.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in any one of features E2 to E4, characterized in that in the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability that the judgment by the judgment means will result in a judgment result corresponding to the specified information is m/N (e.g., approximately 1/200), and the upper limit number of times M (an integer) of the number of times of play is specified so that M < N/m."

Feature E6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E2 to E4, characterized in that the upper limit number of times a game can be played (an integer) is specified to be equal to or less than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., about 1/200) that the judgment by the judgment means will result in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By specifying the upper limit number of times in the manner described above, the chance zones can be generated in short cycles, and the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous can be more effectively achieved.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in any one of features E2 to E4, characterized in that in the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability that the judgment by the judgment means will result in a judgment result corresponding to the specified information is m/N (e.g., approximately 1/200), and the upper limit number of games, M (an integer), is specified so that M ≦ N/m."

Feature E7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E2 to E6, characterized in that the sum (an integer) of the upper limit of the number of special information stored in the second storage means and the reference number of times to end the game is specified to be equal to or less than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/10) that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the first information.

By specifying the maximum number of memories and the reference number of times to end the game in the manner described above, the chance zones can be generated in short cycles, and the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous can be more effectively achieved.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in any one of features E2 to E6, characterized in that the probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the first information is y/X (e.g., 1/10), and the sum S (an integer) of the upper limit of the number of special information stored in the second storage means and the reference number of times to end the game is set so that S ≦ X/y."

Feature E8. The termination reference number is a first termination reference number;
a first transition means for transitioning the game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information occurs in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (a function of transitioning from a normal game state to a first special game state or a second special game state in response to a jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the number of game plays in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches a second termination reference number (e.g., 6 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first information and the second information after transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the first special game state or the second special game state to a fourth special game state in response to consumption of a time-saving period in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A gaming machine described in any one of features E2 to E7, wherein the first termination reference number is defined to be less than the second termination reference number.

As shown in feature E8, by reducing the termination reference number (first termination reference number) set when the ceiling is reached compared to the termination reference number (second termination reference number) set when the judgment result corresponds to the second information, the rescue function due to reaching the ceiling can be optimally exerted while ensuring the superiority of the judgment result (the goal in the game) corresponding to the second judgment information.

The technical ideas described above in Features E3 to E8 may also be applied to Feature E1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to D may also be applied to features E1 to E8.

<Feature Group F>
The following feature group F has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature F1. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the special win game state or a transition process to the big win game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (a special win game state or a big win game state) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., a normal game state or a special game state) based on the result of the determination by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83B) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83B by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the predetermined information, first information (a random number group corresponding to a special winning result) and second information (a random number group corresponding to a big winning result) are provided,
The variable ball entry control means includes:
a means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a first control mode when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (special jackpot result) that corresponds to the first information and transitions to the special game state;
a means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a second control mode when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and transitions to the special game state, or when the determination result becomes the first determination result and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the variable ball entry section;
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second judgment result may occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring at the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section, while the first judgment result may occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, there are provided a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set to make it easier to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode,
a first special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit (ceiling) without being determined to correspond to the predetermined information (a function of transitioning from the normal game state to a third special game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached);
a second special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches a reference number of times to end (e.g., 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information after the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first special transition means (a function of transitioning from a third special game state to a fourth special game state in response to the consumption of a time-saving period in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the sum (integer) of the maximum number of special information that can be stored in the second storage means and the termination reference number of times is specified to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., approximately 1/5) that the judgment result corresponding to the specified information will be obtained in the judgment by the judgment means.

In the configuration shown in this feature, if the number of times the game is executed (the number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified information, the game state transitions to a specified game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. Here, even if the high frequency switching mode is entered, if the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the specified information remains low, the following inconveniences may occur. That is, it is assumed that the period until the player can obtain the sufficient benefit expected by the player (transition to the special game state) is extended even though the ceiling has been reached, or the high frequency switching mode ends before the sufficient benefit is obtained (a rush occurs). This is undesirable because it is a factor that greatly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the ball can enter the second start ball entry section by switching from the low frequency switching mode to the high frequency switching mode, and the judgment (lottery) based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section can result in not only the second judgment result corresponding to the second information but also the first judgment result corresponding to the first information. In other words, the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the specified information, that is, the probability of transitioning to the special game state, is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling. Furthermore, the sum (e.g., 104 times) of the upper limit of the number of special information that can be stored in the second storage means (e.g., 4) and the reference number of times to end the game (e.g., 100 times) is set to be equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information, so that a configuration in which the transition to the special game state is highly likely or substantially certain when the ceiling is reached can be suitably realized. This makes it possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

For example, if there is a limit to the number of plays that can be played in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, there is a greater concern about the above-mentioned rushing. In this regard, the above-mentioned configuration can mitigate the impact of the limit on the number of plays when the ceiling is reached. In other words, even if a high-frequency switching mode with a limit on the number of plays is adopted when the ceiling is reached, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, characterized in that the probability of the first judgment result (e.g., 1/5) in the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is set to be higher than the probability of the second judgment result (e.g., 1/200).

Feature F2 can greatly increase the probability that the judgment result will correspond to the specified information when switching from the low-frequency switching mode to the high-frequency switching mode. This is preferable for exerting the relief function when reaching the ceiling as shown in feature F1, and for shortening the duration of stay in the high-frequency switching mode to suppress the prolongation of the period until the above-mentioned sufficient benefit is granted.

Feature F3. The first special transition means is provided with an execution count counter (e.g., a continuation count counter) for grasping the number of times a game has been executed without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information after the game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode has been transitioned to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode;
The second special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the value of the execution number counter becomes a value corresponding to the end reference number,
The gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2 is characterized in that the execution count counter is configured to be updated (count) when a game round based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section is executed, but is not updated (does not count) when a game round based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section is executed.

According to the configuration shown in feature F3, the number of times the game is played in the second start ball entry section is counted by the execution count counter, whereas the number of times the game is played in the first start ball entry section is not counted by the execution count counter. In this way, by configuring the game so that the number of times the game is played in the second start ball entry section is determined, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the transition to the special game state is highly likely or substantially certain when the ceiling is reached.

Feature F4. The termination reference number is a first termination reference number (e.g., 100 times),
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode via the special game state when a second judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information occurs in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (a function of transitioning from the normal game state to the first special game state or the second special game state in response to a jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the number of game plays in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches a second termination reference number (e.g., 1 time, 3 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information after transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the first special game state or the second special game state to a fourth special game state in response to consumption of a time-saving period in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F3, characterized in that the first termination reference number is specified to be greater than the second termination reference number.

If the second judgment result corresponding to the second information occurs in a predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode via a special game state. In the configuration shown in this feature, the reference number of times to end the high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is greater than the reference number of times to end the high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by the second judgment result, and transitioning to the special game state when the ceiling is reached is favored. With this configuration, the rescue function shown in feature F1 etc. can be effectively exerted.

Feature F5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the upper limit number of plays, M (an integer), is set to be greater than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/200) of the second judgment result being reached in the judgment by the judgment means.

As shown in feature F1, in a configuration in which the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information are both based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section, the bonus is the same when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high-frequency switching mode. In order to improve the satisfaction of the player, it is preferable to increase the bonus when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained, but there is a concern that the effect of increasing the benefit expected when the ceiling is reached will be too strong, and the rescue function due to reaching the ceiling will become excessively strong. In particular, it is expected that the above concern will be greater in a configuration in which the transition to a special game state is highly likely or substantially certain when the ceiling is reached, as shown in feature F1. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is greater than the inverse of the probability of the second judgment result, the above concern can be eliminated by reducing the chances of reaching the ceiling while increasing the benefit expected from reaching the ceiling.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the probability of the second judgment result in the judgment by the judgment means is m/N (e.g., 1/200), and the upper limit number of times of play, M (an integer), is specified so that M > N/m."

Feature F6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the upper limit number of times M (an integer) is specified to be equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/200) that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information will be obtained in the judgment by the judgment means.

As shown in feature F1, in a configuration in which the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information are both based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section, the bonus is the same when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high-frequency switching mode. In order to improve the satisfaction of the player, it is preferable to increase the bonus when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained, but there is a concern that the effect of increasing the benefit expected when the ceiling is reached will be too strong, and the rescue function due to reaching the ceiling will become excessively strong. In particular, it is expected that the above concern will be greater in a configuration in which the transition to a special game state is highly likely or substantially certain when the ceiling is reached, as shown in feature F1. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is set to be equal to or greater than the inverse of the probability of the second judgment result, the above concern can be eliminated by reducing the chances of reaching the ceiling while increasing the benefit expected from reaching the ceiling.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the probability that the judgment by the judgment means will result in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is m/N (e.g., 1/200), and the upper limit number of times M (an integer) of the number of times play is set so that M ≧ N/m."

Feature F7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F6, characterized in that when the judgment by the judgment means in the specified gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode transitioned to by the special transition means results in a judgment result corresponding to the first information, the operation period of the gaming operation is shorter than when the judgment result corresponds to the first information under other circumstances.

As shown in feature F7, in a specified gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode after the ceiling is reached, the operation period of the gaming operation when the first judgment result is reached is shortened, thereby shortening the time required to transition to the special gaming state, allowing the player to quickly enjoy the benefits he or she expects.

Feature F8. The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The game control means is configured to execute the game operation in such a manner that the operation period of the game operation becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the second storage means increases,
As the high-frequency switching modes, a first high-frequency switching mode and a second high-frequency switching mode are provided, in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first high-frequency switching mode, thereby making it easier to score in the second starting scoring section than in the first high-frequency switching mode.
When the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, or when the first determination result is reached and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the variable ball entry section, a means for transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first high frequency switching mode is provided;
The gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the special transition means is configured to transition to the specified gaming state corresponding to the second high frequency switching mode when the number of game plays executed after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified information.

According to feature F8, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second high-frequency switching mode, which is entered when the ceiling is reached, the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first high-frequency switching mode, which is entered when the first judgment result passes through the predetermined area or the second judgment result is entered. In other words, in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, the frequency of balls entering the second starting ball entry section increases, and the amount of special information stored in the second storage means increases. Therefore, the operating period of the game-use operation in the game round after the ceiling is reached is shortened, and the period from reaching the ceiling to enjoying the above-mentioned benefits can be preferably prevented from being extended.

The technical ideas shown in the above features A to E may also be applied to features F1 to F8.

<Feature Group G>
The following feature group G has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature G1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is performed in accordance with special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being counted as one game round when an operation for a game round (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
A judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring at the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section, while a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, there are provided a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a third normal game state, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second type game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a third normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 in response to a jackpot result);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first type game state when the number of times the game is executed during the second type game state reaches a reference number of times to end the game (e.g., 10 times, 20 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the second type game state transitioned to by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the third normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon consumption of a time-saving period);
and a termination reference number resetting means for resetting the termination reference number (for example, resetting to 20 times) when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the second type game state,
The termination reference number resetting means is configured to reset the termination reference number without going through the special game state.

According to the feature G1, when the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type game state, the game state transitions to the second type game state via the special game state. The second type game state corresponds to the high frequency switching mode, and the loss of balls is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second start ball entry section. The second type game state has a number of times limit, and when the number of times the game is executed in the second type game state reaches the end reference number, the game state transitions to the first type game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to enter the second start ball entry section. Here, in the judgment based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section, the judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information may be obtained. When the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the second type game state, the end reference number is reset without passing through the special game state. This causes the second type game state (high frequency switching mode) to be looped (extended). This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing the loss of balls. By diversifying games in this way, we can help increase interest in games.

Feature G2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the special game state is entered, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
A judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring at the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section, while a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section, a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period in which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to score a ball at the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period in which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode, a second game state (e.g., a third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode, and a third game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode are provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is reached in the first game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a third normal game state in response to a jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game has been played in the second gaming state transitioned to by the first transition means reaches a first reference number of times to end the game (for example, 10 times or 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and
a third transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second game state and the game round in which the determination result is obtained ends (a function of transitioning from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first game state when, in the third game state transitioned to by the third transition means, the number of game plays in the third game state reaches a second termination reference number (e.g., 20 plays) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, said fourth transition means being a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period.

According to the feature G2, when the first game state has a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information, the game state transitions to the second game state via the special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the number of balls entering the second start ball entry section is increased to suppress the decrease in the number of balls held. The second game state has a number of times limit, and when the number of times of execution of the game in the second game state reaches the first end reference number, the game state transitions to the first game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to enter the second start ball entry section. Here, in the judgment based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section, the judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information may be obtained. When the judgment result in the second game state corresponds to the second judgment information, the game state transitions to the third game state without passing through the special game state. The third game state corresponds to the third switching mode, and the game round related to the second start ball entry section is executed in the same manner as the second game state, and this state is continued until the number of times of execution of the game reaches the second end reference number. Here, when the game state transitions from the second game state to the third game state, the game round related to the second starting ball entry section continues. This makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing the loss of balls. By realizing diversification of the game in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the interest in the game.

Feature G3. A termination reference number resetting means (a function of resetting the continuation number counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided to reset the second termination reference number when the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the third game state;
The gaming machine described in feature G2 is characterized in that the termination reference number resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special game state.

According to feature G3, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the third game state, the second end reference number is reset. In other words, the third game state is looped. In this loop, the game does not go through the special game state, so the game progresses smoothly even if the loop is repeated.

Feature G4. The gaming machine described in Feature G2 or Feature G3, characterized in that the second termination reference number is specified to be the same number as the first termination reference number or a number greater than the first termination reference number.

According to feature G4, when the second game state changes to the third game state, the player can avoid substantial losses depending on the timing of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (the game round at which the judgment result occurs). This is preferable in that the above-mentioned loop function realizes diversification of games and effectively exerts the effect of increasing attention to the games.

Feature G5. A gaming machine according to Feature G3 or Feature G4, characterized in that in the third gaming state, the probability that the judgment by the judgment means will result in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is set to be higher than the probability that the judgment result will result in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

According to feature G5, during the loop, the probability that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is higher than the probability that the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as frequent judgment results corresponding to the first judgment information, which prevents the above-mentioned loop function from working properly.

Feature G6: A fifth transition means for transitioning to the second game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the third game state (a function for transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the third normal game state in response to a jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a sixth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game is executed in the second gaming state transitioned to by the fifth transition means reaches a third reference number of times to end the game (e.g., 20 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information; and
A gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G5, characterized in that the third termination reference number is specified to be the same number as the second termination reference number or a number greater than the second termination reference number.

According to feature G6, if a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is reached during the above-mentioned loop, the end reference number of times (third end reference number of times) in the second game state to which the game is subsequently transferred becomes equal to or greater than the second end reference number. With this configuration, by reaching a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information during the loop, the player's advantage increases after the end of the special game state compared to during the loop, and an accent can be added to the game during the loop.

Feature G7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features G2 to G6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode.

The configuration shown in this feature is preferable in that it encourages the player to recognize that the game states before and after the transition from the second game state to the third game state are the same.

The "switching mode" in this characteristic is composed of three elements: the period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the open state is switched to, and the interval period between open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode" means that there are more identical or similar elements among those three elements than in the "first switching mode."

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of features G2 to G6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode."

Feature G8. The judgment mode in which the judgment means performs the judgment mode includes a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively high,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G7, characterized in that the judgment mode in the second gaming state is the low probability mode.

Feature G8 makes it possible to prevent the loop function from being buried by, for example, the frequent occurrence of judgment results corresponding to the first judgment information during the above-mentioned loop. This makes it possible to diversify the game while preventing the tendency for gambling to become too intense.

Feature G9. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the special game state is entered, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
A judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring at the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section, while a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, there are provided a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game state, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode are provided,
a transition means for transitioning to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a reference number of times to end the game (e.g., 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second game state (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
and a termination reference number resetting means for resetting the termination reference number (for example, resetting to 20 times) when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the second type game state,
The termination reference number resetting means is configured to reset the termination reference number without going through the special game state.

According to feature G9, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the second type game state, the termination reference number is reset. In other words, the second type game state is looped. In this loop, the special game state is not passed through, so the game progresses smoothly even if the loop is repeated. This realizes diversification of the game and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in Features G3 to G8 above may also be applied to Features G1 and G9.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to F may also be applied to features G1 to G9.

<Feature H Group>
The following feature group H has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature H1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information; and
an upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number of times when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained and a transition is made to the predetermined gaming state via the special gaming state;
a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, first information (a random number group corresponding to a normal jackpot result) which is a transition trigger to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, and second information (a random number group corresponding to a probability jackpot result) which is a transition trigger to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode are provided;
The upper limit number setting means is configured to set the upper limit number to a first number (e.g., 300 times) when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the first information, and to set the upper limit number to a second number (e.g., 100 times) less than the first number when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the second information.

When the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. In this way, the rhythm of the game is forcibly changed, and the monotony of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, the upper limit number of times that the ceiling is reached is the first number (e.g., 300 times) when the judgment result corresponds to the first information, and is the second number less than the first number when the judgment result corresponds to the second information. Here, since the transition to the special game state occurs earlier in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the effect of the above-mentioned ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number to a small number. This can suitably contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information; and
and an upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number of times when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained and a transition is made to the predetermined gaming state via the special gaming state,
a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, first information (e.g., a random number group corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result) which is a transition trigger to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, and second information (e.g., a random number group corresponding to a 2R variable jackpot result) which is a transition trigger to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode are provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is configured to set the upper limit number to be lower when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the second information than when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the first information.

When the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the game state transitions to a specified game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. In this way, the rhythm of the game is forcibly changed, and monotony of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, the upper limit number of times that the ceiling is reached is configured to be smaller (shortened) when the judgment result corresponds to the second information compared to when the judgment result corresponds to the first information. Here, since the transition to the special game state occurs earlier in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the effect of the above-mentioned ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number to be small. This can suitably contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature H3. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information; and
an upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number of times when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained and a transition is made to the predetermined gaming state via the special gaming state;
a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, first information (e.g., a random number group corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result) which is a transition trigger to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, and second information (e.g., a random number group corresponding to a 2R variable jackpot result) which is a transition trigger to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode are provided,
The upper limit number setting means is configured to set the upper limit number to a first number (e.g., 300 times) when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the first information, and to set the upper limit number to a second number (e.g., 100 times) less than the first number when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the second information.

When the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the game state transitions to a specified game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. In this way, the rhythm of the game is forcibly changed, and monotony of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, the upper limit number of times that the ceiling is reached is configured to be smaller (shortened) when the judgment result corresponds to the second information compared to when the judgment result corresponds to the first information. Here, since the transition to the special game state occurs earlier in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the effect of the above-mentioned ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number to be small. This can suitably contribute to increasing attention to the game.

In addition, in a specified game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, even though the mode is set to the high probability mode, the game progresses without a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, which results in a large investment contrary to the player's expectations. This is expected to be a factor that significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this feature, in a specified game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, the above-mentioned upper limit number is lowered and the game is configured to switch to the high frequency switching mode at an early timing to suppress investment, thereby making it possible to optimally exert the effect of diversifying the game (the effect of increasing attention to the game).

Feature H4. The gaming machine described in Feature H3, characterized in that the first number of times is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the low probability mode, and the second number of times is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the high probability mode.

If the ceiling-reaching rescue function shown in feature H3 acts too excessively, the technical significance (diversification of play) of providing predetermined game states corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode may be diminished. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the upper limit number of times so that it is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in each game state, it is possible to favorably coexist the diversification of play and the above-mentioned rescue function.

Feature H5. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information (e.g., four pieces of special information),
The game control means has an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of setting an operation period of the game operation according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
the operation period setting means is configured to set the operation period such that the operation period becomes shorter as the number of pieces of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases,
a means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the number of times a game is executed in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode, which has been transitioned to by the special transition means, reaches a reference number of times to end the game (e.g., 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
A gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4, characterized in that the termination reference number is specified to be greater than the second number.

It is preferable to configure the game so that the operation period of the game operation is shortened by increasing the number of special information stored, in order to facilitate smooth game progress. However, assuming such a configuration, the following inconveniences may occur by applying the configuration shown in the above feature H3. That is, when the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, and the game state is switched to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency switching mode, the game number in the predetermined game state may progress too quickly, and the benefit of reaching the ceiling may end before the benefit is fully felt. This is a concern as a factor that significantly reduces the player's attention to the rescue function. In this regard, as shown in this feature, setting the end reference number of times to be greater than the upper limit number of times (second number of times) can contribute to eliminating the above concern.

Feature H6. In the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, which is switched to when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, a first end reference number is set as the end reference number, and in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, which is switched to when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, a second end reference number is set as the end reference number.
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H5, characterized in that the first termination reference number and the second termination reference number are specified to be the same number.

According to feature H6, using a first end reference number and a second end reference number is preferable in terms of simplifying the game configuration. Even with this configuration, the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information is increased during the high probability mode, so the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information is increased while the rescue function is being exercised. Therefore, it is possible to make it less likely that the above-mentioned inconveniences will occur in a specified game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode.

Feature H7. In the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, which is switched to when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, a first end reference number is set as the end reference number, and in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, which is switched to when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, a second end reference number is set as the end reference number.
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H5, wherein the second termination reference number is defined to be less than the first termination reference number.

According to feature H7, by making the second termination threshold number less than the first termination threshold number, it is possible to prevent the rescue function from becoming a factor that encourages gambling.

Feature H8. As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first actuation port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second actuation port 92A) in which the judgment by the judgment means is more favorable to the player than the first starting ball entry section are provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H7, characterized in that the variable mechanism is configured to be switchable between the accepting state (open state) in which a gaming ball can enter the second starting ball entry portion, and the non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion than in the accepting state.

According to feature H8, a judgment based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section is favored to be more advantageous to the player than a judgment based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section. When the ceiling is reached in a specified game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, not only is investment suppressed, but the judgment result is also favored, thereby doubly fulfilling a rescue function for the player, and when a player gets stuck in a specified game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, expectations of reaching the ceiling increase. This can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

Feature H9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H3 to H8, characterized in that the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section includes a judgment result that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, and the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section does not include a judgment result that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode.

Feature H9 makes it possible to avoid an event in which the ceiling is reached during a specified game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency switching mode, and while the rescue function is being exercised, a determination result is made that triggers a transition back to a specified game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency switching mode, thereby essentially losing the benefit of the ceiling (wasted draw).

Feature H10. The first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are disposed on a predetermined flow path in the game area,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) is provided for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H3 to H9, characterized in that when special information is stored in both the first storage means and the second storage means, the judgment means is configured to prioritize the special information stored in the second storage means as the subject of the judgment.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the ceiling is reached in a specified game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode and the game transitions to a specified game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency switching mode, there is no need to change the destination of the game balls to enjoy the benefits of the rescue function. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the rescue function is suddenly activated without passing through a special game state, it is possible to prevent game balls from being wasted and to appropriately improve satisfaction with the rescue function.

Feature H11. The high-frequency switching mode is a first high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A),
As a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism, a second high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) is provided in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined judgment information, third information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variable jackpot result) which is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second high frequency switching mode is provided,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H10, characterized in that the second high-frequency switching mode is configured so that the ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means to the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching means is higher than in the first high-frequency switching mode.

According to feature H11, when the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first high frequency switching mode, in which the loss of game balls is suppressed more than in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second high frequency switching mode. With this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the advantage of reaching the ceiling and greatly change the rhythm of the game when the ceiling is reached.

The technical ideas described above in Group A to Group G may also be applied to Features H1 to H11.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following group of features I has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature I1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot result B) that is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 that transitions to a normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A when the number of game plays executed after the special gaming state ends reaches an upper limit (ceiling: for example, 50 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information during the specified gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode) that transitions to the specified gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode without passing through the special gaming state.

According to feature I1, if the number of play times after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) during a specified game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode without a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the game state transitions to the high probability mode and the specified game state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately prevent the game from becoming monotonous while ensuring the advantage of the player during the high probability mode.

Feature I2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot result B) that is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode,
The high probability mode is terminated when the number of game times executed after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the second switching mode is terminated when the number of game times executed after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a second reference number (e.g., 50 times) less than the first reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.
a means for shifting the switching control mode to the third switching mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches a third reference number (e.g., 50 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
The third reference number of times is specified to be equal to or greater than the second reference number of times and equal to or less than the first reference number of times.

According to feature I2, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game times executed reaches the second reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the second switching mode ends, and if the number of game times reaches the first reference number, the high probability mode ends. Here, if the number of game times executed after the special game state ends reaches the third reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. This third reference number is equal to or greater than the second reference number and equal to or less than the first reference number, and the switching control mode switches to the third switching mode during the high probability mode. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately suppress monotony of the game while ensuring the advantage of the player during the high probability mode.

Feature I3. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot result B) that is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode,
The high probability mode is terminated when the number of game times executed after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the second switching mode is terminated when the number of game times executed after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a second reference number (e.g., 50 times) less than the first reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.
a means for shifting the switching control mode to the third switching mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state becomes a third reference number (e.g., 50 times) less than the first reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
The gaming machine, wherein the third reference number is defined to be the same as the second reference number.

According to feature I3, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game plays reaches the second reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the second switching mode ends, and if the number of game plays reaches the first reference number, the high probability mode ends. Here, if the number of game plays after the special game state ends reaches the third reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. This third reference number is the same as the second reference number, and the switching control mode switches from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during the high probability mode. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately suppress monotony of the game while ensuring the advantage of the player during the high probability mode.

Feature I4. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot result B) that is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning the lottery mode to the low probability mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times a game is executed after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
a second transition means for transitioning the switching control mode to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of game plays executed after transitioning through the special game state to the specified game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode becomes a second reference number (e.g., 50 times) that is less than the first reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information.

According to feature I4, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game plays reaches the second reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode, and if the number of game plays reaches the first reference number, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. With this configuration, it is possible to optimally prevent the game from becoming monotonous while ensuring the advantage of the player in the high probability mode.

Feature I5. The gaming machine described in Feature I4, characterized in that the third switching mode is configured to have a higher ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means to the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching means than the second switching mode.

As shown in feature I4, in a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) of a type in which an upper limit (first reference number) is set for the number of times a game is played in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode, the likelihood of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information decreases as the number of times a game is played approaches the first reference number, and the player's expectations may decrease significantly. This is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the third switching mode is entered when the ceiling is reached, which increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting ball entry area, thereby suppressing investment. In this way, if the configuration is such that the switching control mode is further favored in the latter half using the ceiling function, the weakness of ST machines (expectations decrease significantly toward the end) can be overcome.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "a gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80aA) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, a gaming ball launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a player's operation, and a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out gaming balls (prize balls) based on a ball entering a ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area, and a special information acquiring means (an MPU 402 of a main control device 162 acquiring reserved information) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters a starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) serving as the ball entry section. a function of executing a process for a game), an acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, a determination means (a function of executing a process for a lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result), and a game operation (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means. a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round being counted as one game round when a variable display of a picture to be displayed is started and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment; and a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for changing a game state to a predetermined game state (a first normal game state to a fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game round operation by the game round control means being ended. a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game area to a special game state (open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; a variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section which can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the accepting state; and a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing of the variable ball entry device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when transitioning to the special game state.
The game machine is provided with a variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state, and a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the variable mechanism, and a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (low frequency support mode) are set as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is longer than that in the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) are provided in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is set longer than in the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is configured so that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball firing means is higher than in the second switching mode, and as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment is made by the judgment means, the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high. a low probability mode having a relatively low probability of reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and a high probability mode having a relatively high probability of reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the predetermined judgment information including specific information (e.g., a random number group corresponding to a 10R special jackpot result B) that serves as a transition trigger to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, a first transition means for transitioning the lottery mode to the low probability mode without passing through the special game state when the number of game rounds executed after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 times) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and a second transition means for transitioning the switching control mode to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of game rounds executed after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a second reference number (e.g., 50 times) that is less than the first reference number without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information. " It is also possible to write it as "

Feature I6. The gaming machine described in Feature I4 or Feature I5, wherein the second transition means is configured to transition from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during a game in which the second reference number of times has been reached.

The configuration shown in feature I6 allows the game to proceed smoothly by seamlessly connecting high support.

Feature I7. The gaming machine described in Feature I4 or Feature I5, characterized in that the second transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode upon completion of a game round that has reached the second reference number (e.g., 50 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information after transitioning through the special gaming state to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, and transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode in the next game round.

According to the configuration shown in feature I7, when the rescue function is activated in response to reaching the ceiling, the switching control mode goes through the first switching mode to the third switching mode. With this configuration, the impact when the switching control mode is changed can be strengthened.

Feature I8. The gaming machine described in Feature I7, characterized in that the second reference number is defined to be equal to or less than the first end reference number and equal to or greater than the difference between the first reference number and the second reference number.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by making the duration of play times corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode shorter than the duration of play times corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, it is possible to dramatically increase the level of attention in the final stages in the advantageous state to which the player transitions after the end of the special game state.

Feature I9. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The game control means has an operation period setting means capable of setting an operation period of the game operation in accordance with the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I4 to I5, characterized in that in the third switching mode, the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the gaming ball is continuously launched toward the starting ball entry portion is configured to be greater than the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the gaming ball is continuously launched toward the starting ball entry portion in the second switching mode.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached, a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode is transitioned to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode, thereby making it possible to change the speed of game progress. This makes it possible to more effectively prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature I10. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section and a second starting ball entry section in which the judgment by the judgment means is more favorable to the player than the first starting ball entry section;
The variable mechanism is configured to be switchable between the receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and the non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the receiving state,
The first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are both disposed in a predetermined flow path in the game area,
The gaming machine described in feature I9 is characterized in that the judgment means is configured to make the judgment in the order of balls entering the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the opportunity to play a game related to the second starting ball entry section increases by transitioning from a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode when the ceiling is reached. As a result, the player's advantage increases significantly when the ceiling is reached, and the attention to the game after the ceiling is reached can be favorably increased.

Feature I11. A third transition means is provided for transitioning the switching control mode to the first switching mode without passing through the special gaming state when the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode by the second transition means reaches a third reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
A gaming machine according to any one of features I4 to I10, wherein the third reference number is defined to be greater than the first reference number.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, after the special game state ends, the game state transitions in the following order: high probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode → high probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode → low probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode → low probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a rapid decrease in attention to the game when the game transitions to the third switching mode and the low probability mode upon reaching the ceiling.

The technical ideas shown in Features I5 to I11 above may also be applied to Features I1 to I3.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to H may also be applied to features I1 to I10.

<Characteristics Group J>
The following feature J group has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature J1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the high-frequency switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game state, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first type game state and when the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends in the first type game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a special miss result and reaching the ceiling are reached);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first type game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second type game state reaches a reference number of times to end the game (for example, 40 times, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained after the transition to the second type game state by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a resetting means (a function of overwriting the value of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for resetting the remaining number of game rounds to be played in the second type game state, which is reached when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit number during the second type game state to which it has been entered as a result of a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information.

According to feature J1, even if the game proceeds without the transition trigger to the special game state (the determination result corresponding to the first determination information) being established, the game state may transition to the second type game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode due to the determination result corresponding to the second determination information or the reaching of the upper limit number of times of play after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). The high frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game. However, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and the reaching of the ceiling are used together as the transition trigger to the second type game state as described above, the following concerns arise. That is, if the reaching of the ceiling is invalidated when the ceiling is reached during the second type game state, some of the benefits that the player would have been able to enjoy will be lost, and there is a concern that the satisfaction of the player will be greatly reduced. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the second type game state, the number of remaining play times is reset. This can eliminate the above concerns and contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player.

The "resetting means" shown in this feature may be configured so that the remaining number of play times set when a transition to the second type game state is triggered by a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is the same as the remaining number of play times set when the number of play times after the special game state ends during the second type game state reaches the upper limit, or the remaining number of play times set when a transition to the second type game state is triggered by a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is different from the remaining number of play times set when the number of play times after the special game state ends during the second type game state reaches the upper limit.

Feature J2. The gaming machine described in Feature J1 is configured such that, when the remaining number of play times is reset by the resetting means, the second type game state is continued without passing through any other game state other than the second type game state.

According to feature J2, when the ceiling is reached during the second type game state and the number of remaining play times is reset, the second type game state continues without transitioning to another game state as a result of the reset. This is preferable in terms of preventing disruption of the rhythm of play in the second type game state.

Feature J3. The gaming machine described in Feature J1 or Feature J2, characterized in that the remaining number of game plays set by the resetting means is configured to be greater than the remaining number of game plays set when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached in the first type gaming state.

Feature J3 prevents the remaining number of play times from decreasing due to reaching the ceiling, which contributes to improving player satisfaction.

Feature J4. The game control means has an operation period setting means for setting an operation period for the game operation,
The operation period includes a first operation period (e.g., 20 sec to 30 sec) and a second operation period (e.g., 3 sec to 14 sec) that is shorter than the first operation period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the operation period setting means is configured to set the second operation period as the operation period for the game number during which the upper limit number of games is reached during the second type of game state.

As shown in feature J4, if the second operation period is set as the operation period when the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state, it is possible to effectively prevent the reset function from impairing the smoothness of game progress.

Feature J5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features J1 to J4, characterized in that when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state and the remaining number of play times is reset by the resetting means, the accepting state is maintained until the accepting period set in conjunction with the switch to the accepting state has elapsed.

Even if the variable mechanism is reset while in an accepting state, as shown in feature J5, the forced termination of the accepting state can be avoided, thereby effectively preventing interruptions to the smooth flow of play.

The technical ideas described above in Group A to Group I may also be applied to Features J1 to J5.

<Feature K group>
The following feature group K has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature K1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the high-frequency switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a second normal game state, a third normal game state, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when a judgment result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first type game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
When a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the second type gaming state, the determination result is invalidated;
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) is provided for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed,
As the display effects, a first display effect and a second display effect are provided,
The display performance execution means includes:
a means for executing the first display effect when a determination result by the determination means does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (usually a miss result);
a means for executing the second display effect when a determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information (a special miss result) under a situation in which the first type game state is established;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing the first display presentation when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information under a situation in which the second type of game state is in effect.

According to feature K1, even if the game proceeds without the transition trigger to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) being established, the game may transition to the second type of game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. The high frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second type of game state, the judgment result is invalid. Although this is preferable in terms of suppressing the increase in gambling, if the player realizes that the judgment result has been obtained, there is a concern that the player will be given the impression that he or she has wasted his or her luck. This can be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (normal miss result), the first display effect is executed, when the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result that corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) in a situation where the first type of game state is in effect, the second display effect is executed, and when the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result that corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) in a situation where the second type of game state is in effect, the first display effect is executed. With this configuration, even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information during the second type of game state, it can be made less noticeable. This can suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences and contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature K2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the high-frequency switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a second normal game state, a third normal game state, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when a judgment result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first type game state (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
When a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the second type gaming state, the determination result is invalidated;
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) is provided for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed,
The display performance execution means includes:
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns) on the display screen;
and a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that, after the plurality of patterns are variably displayed on the display screen, a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed;
The game number control means is configured to control the predetermined notification means so that, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in a game number in which the game is in either the first type game state or the second type game state, a notification result corresponding to the determination result is obtained.
As a symbol combination to be finally displayed on the display screen, a first symbol combination (a symbol combination indicating a normal losing result) and a second symbol combination (a symbol combination indicating a special losing result) are provided,
The display control means
A means for stopping and displaying the first symbol combination when the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (usually a miss result);
a means for stopping and displaying the second pattern combination when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) under a situation in which the first type game state is in progress, and a means for stopping and displaying the first pattern combination when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) under a situation in which the second type game state is in progress.

According to feature K2, even if the game proceeds without the transition trigger to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) being established, the game may transition to the second type of game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. By entering the high frequency switching mode, the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second type of game state, the judgment result is invalid. Although this is preferable in terms of suppressing the increase in gambling, there is a concern that if the player realizes that the judgment result has been obtained, the player will be given the impression that he or she has wasted his or her luck. This can be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, when a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (normal miss result) is obtained, the first pattern combination is displayed as a static display, when a judgment result that corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained in a situation in which the first type of game state is in effect, the second pattern combination is displayed as a static display, and when a judgment result that corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained in a situation in which the second type of game state is in effect, the first pattern combination is displayed as a static display. With this configuration, even if a judgment result that corresponds to the second judgment information is obtained during the second type of game state, it can be made less noticeable. This can suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences and contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature K3. The game control means has an operation period setting means for setting an operation period for the game operation,
The operation period includes a first operation period (e.g., 20 sec to 30 sec) and a second operation period (e.g., 3 sec to 14 sec) that is shorter than the first operation period,
The operation period setting means includes:
a means for setting the first operation period as the operation period when a determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information under a situation in which the first type game state is being performed;
A means for setting the second operation period as the operation period when a determination result by the determination means does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (a normal miss result) under a situation in which the second type game state is being performed;
A gaming machine as described in feature K1 or feature K2, characterized in that it has a means for setting the second operating period as the operating period when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information under a situation in which the second type of game state is in effect.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, if a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the first type of game state, the operation period = the first operation period, if a judgment result (normal miss result) that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period = the second operation period, and if a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period = the second operation period. By setting the operation period in this manner, it is possible to prevent discomfort caused by the operation period and to preferably exert the effects shown in feature K1, etc.

Feature K4: The second operation period is a variable period that is variable within a predetermined range (e.g., 3 sec to 14 sec),
The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The gaming machine described in feature K3 is characterized in that when the second type of game state is reached and the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result that does not correspond to the specified judgment information (normal miss result) or a judgment result that corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result), and the second operation period is set as the operation period, the greater the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the shorter the operation period becomes.

In the second type game state, balls frequently enter the starting ball entry area. Therefore, if the system is configured so that when a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the second type game state, the operating period is shortened according to the number of special information items, just as in the case of a judgment result that does not correspond to the specified judgment information, the game round in which the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information can proceed smoothly and quickly, and it becomes possible to suitably reduce the opportunities for the player to notice the notification result from the specified notification means.

Feature K5: A destination determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A special effect execution means for executing a special effect based on a result specified by the destination determination means in the first type gaming state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that when the second type gaming state is established, the gaming machine is provided with a regulating means for regulating either the determination by the destination determination means or the special effect by the special effect execution means.

The monotony of the game can be effectively prevented by executing a special effect (pre-announcement effect, pre-reading effect) using the determination result corresponding to the second determination information as the subject of identification (so-called pre-reading) by the pre-identification means. However, in such a configuration, if the special effect occurs during the second type game state, not only will it be a cause of confusion for the player, but the reliability of the special effect will be greatly reduced. Therefore, it is preferable to prevent the occurrence of the above inconveniences by configuring the system to restrict either the identification or the special effect during the second type game state.

The technical ideas shown in the above features A to J may also be applied to features K1 to K5.

<Feature L group>
The following group of features L has been made in consideration of the background and problems, etc., of the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, a privilege such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying games (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", and "The above-mentioned type of gaming machine can increase the attention to the gaming machine by promoting the diversification of games, but there is a concern that new problems will arise, such as the management of gaming machines in gaming halls becoming more complicated as a result."

Feature L1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
A first execution count storage means (a game count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404) for storing the number of games executed after the special game state ends;
a first resetting means for resetting (clearing to 0) the number of executions stored in the first number of executions storage means when the result of the judgment by the judging means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information (a function for clearing to 0 the number of game plays counter by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 in normal processing which is periodic processing);
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special gaming state when the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached);
A second execution count storage means (a continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404) for storing the number of times a game has been executed in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the first transition means has been shifted;
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of executions stored in the second execution number storage means reaches a reference number of times to end (e.g., 400 times) in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
a second resetting means for resetting (clearing to zero) the number of times of execution stored in the first number of times of execution storage means when a predetermined resetting operation (turning on the reset switch 166) is performed with the power supply of the gaming machine being turned on (a function for clearing to zero the number of times of execution counter by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 in the main processing executed at the time of starting up);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an alarm means (annular illumination section 26 of the front door frame 14 and an alarm/performance control device 140) that executes a predetermined alarm (special alarm) when the power is turned on without the specified reset operation and the gaming state before the power was cut off was the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode to which it was transitioned by the second transition means.

If the number of times the game is executed (the number of times the game is executed) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the ball frequently enters the starting ball entry section, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, a termination reference number is set for the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the game state transitions due to reaching the ceiling, and even if the ceiling is reached, the predetermined game state may end without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information during the predetermined game state (hereinafter, also referred to as a ceiling run-through). This is preferable in terms of avoiding the benefit of reaching the ceiling becoming excessive and becoming a factor that excessively stimulates gambling. However, after the ceiling run-through, the number of times the game is executed stored in the first execution number storage means remains unreset, and it is impossible to reach the ceiling again. Here, if the power supply of the gaming machine is turned OFF→ON without performing the predetermined reset operation while in the state after the ceiling run-through, a predetermined notification is executed. This allows the arcade manager to know whether or not the game is in a state where the player has run through the ceiling. Supporting the player in understanding the state of the game after running through the ceiling by turning on the power in this way is preferable for improving the convenience of the manager.

Feature L2. A first operating means (performance button 35) and a second operating means (reset switch 166);
a notification canceling means for canceling the predetermined notification when either the first operating means or the second operating means is operated under a situation in which the predetermined notification is being executed,
A gaming machine as described in feature L1, characterized in that the number of executions stored in the first execution count memory means is reset when the second operating means is operated under a situation in which the specified notification is being executed.

The configuration shown in this feature allows the manager of the amusement hall to easily select how to respond to a gaming machine that is issuing a specified notification depending on the business style of the amusement hall, etc. In other words, the manager can select whether to cancel only the specified notification described above and leave the machine in the ceiling-flying state, or to reset the ceiling. This configuration allows the effect shown in feature L1 to be more effectively achieved.

Feature L3. The gaming machine described in Feature L2, characterized in that the first operating means is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine, and the second operating means is disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine.

As shown by this feature, by arranging the second operation means for resetting and canceling the notification on the rear side of the gaming machine and the first operation means for canceling the notification on the front side of the gaming machine, it is possible to improve the convenience for the manager while preventing the inconvenience of the number of executions being reset by the player.

Feature L4: The notification canceling means is a first notification canceling means,
A gaming machine described in feature L2 or feature L3, characterized in that it is equipped with a second notification cancellation means for canceling the specified notification when power is cut off while the specified notification is being executed and then turned on again.

Many gaming machines are often installed in the island facilities of an amusement hall. As the number of gaming machines installed increases, the number of gaming machines for which the above-mentioned specified notification is executed also increases. Here, as shown in this feature, if the specified notification is canceled by turning the power OFF and then ON while the specified notification is being executed, there will be no need to perform the above-mentioned cancellation operation for each gaming machine individually, which will contribute to further improving convenience for the manager.

Feature L5: The notification means performs the predetermined notification by turning on a light-emitting display unit (annular illumination unit 26) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine in a predetermined light-emitting mode (for example, full lighting);
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that it is provided with a regulating means for regulating the specified notification at least when a game round is progressing by the game round control means.

In order to make the specified notification as noticeable as possible, it is technically significant to display the specified notification on a light-emitting display unit provided on the front of the gaming machine. However, if the specified notification is not canceled due to being overlooked, etc., the specified notification will continue even during the business hours of the gaming hall. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, the specified notification is restricted at least when a game round is in progress. This makes it possible to permit the use of the light-emitting display unit for purposes such as presentation. This is preferable in terms of preventing the specified notification from being overlooked while preventing the resulting decline in presentation function.

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this characteristic is as follows: "The notification means performs the predetermined notification by making the light-emitting display unit (annular illumination unit 26) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode (for example, all lights are on).
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that the predetermined notification is cancelled when a game round is started by the game round control means.

The technical ideas shown in the above features A to K may also be applied to features L1 to L5.

<Feature M group>
The following group of features M has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature M1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the high-frequency switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a second normal game state, a third normal game state, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends in the first type game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached);
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
As the display effects, a first display effect indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect not indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided,
As the predetermined judgment information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R jackpot result) are provided,
The display performance execution means includes:
a means for executing a first display effect when a determination result by the determination means in a game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached corresponds to the first information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a second display presentation when the judgment result by the judgment means in a game round in which the maximum number of times is reached becomes a judgment result corresponding to the second information.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game state transitions to the second type of game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. In the second type of game state, the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed by the frequent ball entry into the starting ball entry part. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, there is a possibility that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information will be obtained in the game round in which the ceiling is reached. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the above-mentioned overlap occurs, a different display effect is executed depending on whether the judgment result is a judgment result corresponding to the first information or a judgment result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, if the judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the game round in which the upper limit is reached, a first display effect is executed to indicate that the upper limit has been reached, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the game round in which the upper limit is reached, a second display effect is executed to indicate that the upper limit has been reached. This configuration can help prevent the game presentation from becoming monotonous and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

The description regarding the "predetermined judgment information" can also be written as "The predetermined judgment information includes first information in which the player has a relatively high advantage (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R special jackpot result) and second information in which the player has a relatively low advantage (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R special jackpot result)."

Feature M2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the high-frequency switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game state, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a second normal game state or a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends in the first type game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached);
As the predetermined judgment information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R jackpot result) are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination means;
a means for transitioning to the first type gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained by the determination means;
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
As the display effects, a first display effect indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect not indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided,
The display performance execution means includes:
a means for executing a first display effect when a determination result by the determination means in a game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached corresponds to the first information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a second display presentation when the judgment result by the judgment means in a game round in which the maximum number of times is reached becomes a judgment result corresponding to the second information.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game state transitions to the second type of game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. In the second type of game state, the ball frequently enters the starting ball entry section, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the player's investment will increase when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, if it becomes obvious that the player cannot enjoy the benefit despite having reached the ceiling, it is feared that this will lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play. This is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, if the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the game where the ceiling is reached (if they overlap), a different display performance is executed depending on whether the judgment result is a judgment result corresponding to the first information or a judgment result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, in the game where the upper limit number of times is reached, if the judgment result corresponding to the first information (i.e., the judgment result that the high frequency switching mode will be set after the special game state ends) is reached, a first display effect indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached is executed, and in the game where the upper limit number of times is reached, if the judgment result corresponding to the second information (i.e., the judgment result that the low frequency switching mode will be set after the special game state ends) is reached, a second display effect not indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached is executed. With this configuration, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is reached and the special game state is switched to the high frequency switching mode, the player can imagine that this is the benefit of reaching the ceiling, and when the judgment result corresponding to the second information is reached and the special game state is switched to the low frequency switching mode, the ceiling is not indicated, so that the player can imagine that no benefit has been generated in the first place. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction of the player and preferably achieve an increase in attention to the game.

Feature M3. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the high-frequency switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined game states, a first type game state (e.g., a first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type game state (e.g., a second normal game state, a third normal game state, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends in the first type game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached);
a means for transitioning to the first type gaming state when the number of times a game has been played in the second type gaming state transitioned to by the second transition means reaches a first end reference number (e.g., 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information;
As the predetermined judgment information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R special jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result) are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the first information and a determination result corresponding to the second information are determined by the determination means,
The second type game state to which the transition has been made due to a determination result corresponding to the first information is continued until a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, whereas the second type game state to which the transition has been made due to a determination result corresponding to the second information is transitioned to the first type game state when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, or when the number of game plays in the second type game state reaches a second end reference number (e.g., 40 times) which is less than the first end reference number without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information.
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) is provided for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed,
As the display effects, a first display effect indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect not indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided,
The display performance execution means includes:
a means for executing a first display effect when a determination result by the determination means in a game round in which the upper limit number of times has been reached corresponds to the first information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a second display presentation when the judgment result by the judgment means in a game round in which the maximum number of times is reached becomes a judgment result corresponding to the second information.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game state transitions to the second type of game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. In the second type of game state, the ball frequently enters the starting ball entry section, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the player's investment will increase when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, if it becomes obvious that the player cannot enjoy the benefit despite having reached the ceiling, it is feared that this will lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play. This is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, if the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the game where the ceiling is reached (if they overlap), a different display performance is executed depending on whether the judgment result is a judgment result corresponding to the first information or a judgment result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, in the game where the upper limit number of times is reached, if the judgment result corresponding to the first information (i.e., the judgment result that the long continuation high frequency switching mode will be set after the special game state ends) is reached, a first display effect indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached is executed, and in the game where the upper limit number of times is reached, if the judgment result corresponding to the second information (i.e., the judgment result that the short continuation high frequency switching mode will be set after the special game state ends) is reached, a second display effect not indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached is executed. With this configuration, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is reached and the special game state is switched to the long continuation high frequency switching mode, the player can imagine that this is the benefit of reaching the ceiling, and when the judgment result corresponding to the second information is reached and the special game state is switched to the short continuation high frequency switching mode, the ceiling is not indicated, so that the player can imagine that no benefit has been generated in the first place. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction of the player and preferably achieve an increase in attention to the game.

In addition, the description of this feature that "The second type game state to which the determination result corresponding to the first information is entered is continued until the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, while the second type game state to which the determination result corresponding to the second information is entered is configured to enter the first type game state when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, or when the number of game plays in the second type game state reaches a second end reference number (e.g., 40 times) that is less than the first end reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information" has been changed to "The second type game state to which the determination result corresponding to the first information is entered is configured to enter the first type game state when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, or when the number of game plays in the second type game state reaches a second end reference number (e.g., 40 times) that is less than the first end reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information" It is also possible to change the configuration so that, in the second type game state to which the state has been entered, if the number of game rounds played reaches a second end reference number (e.g., 9999 times) that is greater than the first end reference number without a determination result corresponding to the specified determination information, the state is entered to the first type game state, whereas, in the second type game state to which the state has been entered, if the number of game rounds played reaches a third end reference number (e.g., 40 times) that is greater than the first end reference number without a determination result corresponding to the specified determination information, the state is entered to the first type game state.

Feature M4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features M1 to M3, characterized in that the display effect execution means is configured to execute an effect indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached in the first display effect, and then execute an effect indicating that the judgment result has become corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, whereas the display effect indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached is not executed in the second display effect, and instead executes an effect indicating that the judgment result has become corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the first display effect that is executed when the judgment result corresponds to the first information indicates that the ceiling has been reached, and then indicates that the judgment result corresponds to the specified judgment information. With this configuration, the judgment result that corresponds to the specified judgment information is indicated, and the special game state is entered, so that it is possible to suppress the strangeness of the presentation and make it appear as if two benefits have been granted.

Feature M5. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the starting ball entry area, a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to score a ball in the starting ball entry area than in the first switching mode by making the period in which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to score a ball in the starting ball entry area than in the first switching mode by making the period in which the variable mechanism is in a receiving state longer than in the first switching mode,
As the predetermined judgment information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R jackpot result) are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information;
A second transition means for transitioning the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the second information;
a third transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information; and
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
As the display effects, a first display effect indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect not indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided,
The display performance execution means includes:
a means for executing a first display effect when a determination result by the determination means in a game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached corresponds to the first information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a second display presentation when the judgment result by the judgment means in a game round in which the maximum number of times is reached becomes a judgment result corresponding to the second information.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of times the game is played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode. In this predetermined game state, the ball frequently enters the starting ball entry section, suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in terms of rescuing the player. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the player's investment will increase when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, if it becomes obvious that the player cannot enjoy the benefit despite having reached the ceiling, it is feared that this will lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play. This is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, if the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the game where the ceiling is reached (if they overlap), a different display performance is executed depending on whether the judgment result is a judgment result corresponding to the first information or a judgment result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, in the game where the upper limit number of times is reached, if the judgment result corresponding to the first information (i.e., the judgment result that the second switching mode will be set after the special game state ends) is reached, a first display effect is executed to indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second information is reached in the game where the upper limit number of times is reached (i.e., the judgment result that the first switching mode will be set after the special game state ends), a second display effect is executed that does not indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached. With this configuration, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is reached and the special game state is switched to a high-frequency switching mode (second switching mode), the player can imagine that this is the benefit of reaching the ceiling, and when the judgment result corresponding to the second information is reached and the special game state is switched to a low-frequency switching mode (first switching mode), the ceiling is not indicated, so that the player can imagine that no benefit has been generated in the first place. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction of the player and preferably achieve an increase in attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in features M1 to M4 above may also be applied to feature M5.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to L may also be applied to features M1 to M3.

<Feature N group>
The following group N of features have been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature N1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means includes:
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns) on the display screen;
and a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that, after the plurality of patterns are variably displayed on the display screen, a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed;
The display control means
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function of executing a process for a temporary stop in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means;
A special variable display means (a function of executing a process for re-variable display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for re-variably displaying the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means before the final stop display is reached,
A plurality of reference numbers (e.g., 20, 40, 100) are provided as the reference number of times to end the game, and when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, a reference number of times to end the game is set to one of the plurality of reference numbers as the reference number of times to end the game (a function of executing a setting process of a continuation number counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a correlation information notifying means (a remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and a notification/presentation control device 140) for notifying a player of correlation information (number of times) that is correlated with the end reference number of times set by the end reference number setting means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the correlation information notification means has an information updating means (a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which updates the correlation information being notified based on the specified picture combination being displayed at a specified position via variable display by the special variable display means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. In particular, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, any one of a plurality of reference times is set as the current end reference number, thereby realizing further diversification of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed, so that the player is informed that the determination result corresponds to the second determination information. After that, the configuration is such that the variable display is performed again before the final stop display, and the above correlation information is updated in conjunction with the variable display. The player can know that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information based on the predetermined picture combination being stopped (temporarily stopped), and thereafter, the correlation information is updated each time the picture combination reaches a predetermined position, so that the player can guess or know the current end reference number of times. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is used as a trigger to transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

Feature N2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means includes:
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of pattern rows (left pattern row, center pattern row, right pattern row) on the display screen;
and a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that, after the plurality of pattern rows are variably displayed on the display screen, a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed;
The display control means
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function of executing a process for a temporary stop in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means;
A special lap display means (a function of executing a process for re-variable display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for displaying the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means in a lap before the final stop display is reached,
A plurality of reference numbers (e.g., 20, 40, 100) are provided as the reference number of times to end the game, and when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, a reference number of times to end the game is set to one of the plurality of reference numbers as the reference number of times to end the game (a function of executing a setting process of a continuation number counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a correlation information notifying means (a remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and a notification/presentation control device 140) for notifying a player of correlation information (number of times) that is correlated with the end reference number of times set by the end reference number setting means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the correlation information notification means has an information updating means (a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which updates the correlation information being notified based on the movement of a specified pattern combination when the specified pattern combination is being displayed in a circular motion by the special circular display means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. In particular, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, any one of a plurality of reference times is set as the current end reference number, thereby realizing further diversification of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to clearly indicate to the player that the determination result corresponds to the second determination information. After that, the predetermined pattern combination is displayed in a circle before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the circle display. The player can know that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is stopped (temporarily stopped), and can then guess or know the current end reference number by updating the correlation information. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is used as a trigger to transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

Feature N3. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means includes:
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of pattern rows (left pattern row, center pattern row, right pattern row) on the display screen;
and a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that, after the plurality of pattern rows are variably displayed on the display screen, a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed;
The display control means
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function of executing a process for a temporary stop in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means;
A special lap display means (a function of executing a process for re-variable display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for displaying the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means in a lap before the final stop display,
A plurality of reference numbers (e.g., 20, 40, 100) are provided as the reference number of times to end the game, and when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, a reference number of times to end the game is set to one of the plurality of reference numbers as the reference number of times to end the game (a function of executing a setting process of a continuation number counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a correlation information notifying means (a remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and a notification/presentation control device 140) for notifying a player of correlation information (number of times) that is correlated with the end reference number of times set by the end reference number setting means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the correlation information notification means has an information updating means (a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the completion of the rotation of the specified pattern combination by the special rotation display means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. In particular, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, any one of a plurality of reference times is set as the current end reference number, thereby realizing further diversification of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to clearly indicate to the player that the determination result corresponds to the second determination information. After that, the predetermined pattern combination is displayed in a circle before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the circle display. The player can know that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information based on the predetermined picture combination being stopped (temporarily stopped), and can then guess or know the current end reference number of times by updating the correlation information according to the number of revolutions of the predetermined picture combination. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is used as a trigger to transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

Feature N4. The gaming machine described in Feature N2 or Feature N3, characterized in that the special lap display means is configured to perform the lap display so that the predetermined picture combination is maintained.

In a configuration in which correlation information is updated by displaying a predetermined pattern combination in a cyclical manner as shown in feature N2, etc., if a situation occurs in which the predetermined pattern combination becomes distorted during the cyclical process, it may give the impression that the cyclical process is not going well, i.e., that the correlation information is not being updated, and attention to the presentation may decrease early on. Therefore, if a cyclical display is performed so that the predetermined pattern combination is maintained as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably prevented. Furthermore, such a configuration is also preferable in order to avoid the player misunderstanding that the fact that the predetermined pattern combination was stopped and displayed was a mistake.

Feature N5. The gaming machine described in Feature N2 or Feature N3, characterized in that the special lap display means is configured to perform the lap display by synchronizing the multiple picture rows.

In a configuration in which correlation information is updated by displaying a predetermined pattern combination in a cyclical manner as shown in feature N2, etc., if a situation occurs in which the predetermined pattern combination becomes distorted during the cyclical process, it may give the impression that the cyclical operation is not going well, i.e., that the correlation information is not being updated, and attention to the presentation may decrease early on. Therefore, if the cyclical display is performed by synchronizing each pattern row as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably prevented. Furthermore, such a configuration is also preferable in order to avoid the player misunderstanding that the fact that the predetermined pattern combination was stopped and displayed was a mistake.

Feature N6. The gaming machine described in Feature N4 or Feature N5 is configured such that the other picture combinations displayed in a cyclical fashion in the special cyclical display do not include the picture combination that corresponds to the first judgment information.

Feature N6 can effectively avoid misunderstandings by suppressing unnecessary teasing that the result will be promoted to the result corresponding to the first judgment information. This is preferable in terms of suppressing a decrease in attention to updates of correlation information linked to the special lap display.

Feature N7: The correlation information notifying means is configured to display, as the correlation information, the remaining number of times until the end reference number of times is reached,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N6, wherein the information update means is configured to add and display the remaining number of times as the update each time the specified picture combination is completed.

As shown in feature N7, if the remaining number of times is incremented and displayed each time a specific pattern combination completes a lap, the player will expect the lap action to continue for as long as possible, and this effect will ideally prevent the player from getting the impression that the transition to the specific game state corresponding to the second switching mode is being unnecessarily delayed.

Feature N8: The display control means has a lap number setting means for setting the number of laps by the special lap display means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features N2 to N7, characterized in that the lap count setting means is configured to set the number of laps so that the larger the termination reference number that is set, the larger the number of laps becomes.

The configuration shown in feature N8 makes the player expect the orbiting action to continue for as long as possible, which effectively prevents the player from getting the impression that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode is being unnecessarily delayed by the presentation.

Feature N9. The display screen of the pattern display means has a plurality of pay lines,
The special stop display means is configured to set any one of the plurality of pay lines as a stop line for stopping and displaying the predetermined symbol combination,
A gaming machine described in any one of features N2 to N8, characterized in that the correlation information notification means is configured to update the correlation information when the specified pattern combination reaches the stop line through the cyclic display by the special cyclic display means.

As shown in this feature, if the stop line where a specific picture combination is displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped) is aligned with the stop line that triggers an update of the correlation information, it is possible to prevent players from becoming confused due to the diversification of the presentation. This is preferable in terms of optimally achieving the effect of increasing the level of attention described above.

Feature N10. The gaming machine described in Feature N9, characterized in that the special stop display means is configured to set the stop line so that at least one effective line is secured in front of the stop line in the rotation direction of the image.

This feature allows the rotating display to end when a specific pattern combination reaches another active line before the active line (stop line) that triggers an update of the correlation information. This is preferable for diversifying the presentation.

Feature N11. The gaming machine described in Feature N9 or Feature N10, wherein the correlation information notification means is configured to keep the correlation information hidden when the specified pattern combination is stopped and displayed by the special stop display means, and to start displaying the correlation information when the specified pattern combination reaches the stop line after being variably displayed.

As shown in this feature, if the correlation information remains hidden when a specific pattern combination is displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped), and the correlation information starts to be displayed when the specific pattern combination reaches the stop line after being displayed in a variable state, it becomes possible to make the specific pattern combination go around at least once. This is preferable in terms of expanding the range of the set end reference number of times while preventing the resulting flow of cyclic display → correlation information update from becoming stale.

Feature N12. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means includes:
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns) on the display screen;
and a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that, after the plurality of patterns are variably displayed on the display screen, a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed;
The display control means
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function of executing a process for a temporary stop in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means;
A special variable display means (a function of executing a process for re-variable display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for variably displaying the predetermined picture combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means again before the final stop display is reached,
A plurality of reference numbers (e.g., 20, 40, 100) are provided as the reference number of times to end the game, and when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, a reference number of times to end the game is set to one of the plurality of reference numbers as the reference number of times to end the game (a function of executing a setting process of a continuation number counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a correlation information notifying means (a remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and a notification/presentation control device 140) for notifying a player of correlation information (number of times) that is correlated with the end reference number of times set by the end reference number setting means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the correlation information notification means has an information updating means (a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which updates the correlation information being notified based on the specified picture combination being displayed at a specified position via variable display by the special variable display means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. In particular, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, any one of a plurality of reference times is set as the current end reference number, thereby realizing further diversification of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed, so that the player is informed that the determination result corresponds to the second determination information. After that, the configuration is such that the variable display is performed again before the final stop display, and the above correlation information is updated in conjunction with the variable display. The player can know that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information based on the predetermined pattern combination being displayed (temporarily stopped), and thereafter, the correlation information is updated each time the pattern combination reaches a predetermined position, so that the player can guess or know the current end reference number of times. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is used as a trigger to transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

Feature N13. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display control means
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function of executing a process for a temporary stop in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means;
A special lap display means (a function of executing a process for re-variable display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for displaying the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means in a lap before the final stop display is reached,
A plurality of reference numbers (e.g., 20, 40, 100) are provided as the reference number of times to end the game, and when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, a reference number of times to end the game is set to one of the plurality of reference numbers as the reference number of times to end the game (a function of executing a setting process of a continuation number counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a correlation information notifying means (a remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and a notification/presentation control device 140) for notifying a player of correlation information (number of times) that is correlated with the end reference number of times set by the end reference number setting means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the correlation information notification means has an information updating means (a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which updates the correlation information being notified based on the movement of a specified pattern combination when the specified pattern combination is being displayed in a circular motion by the special circular display means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. In particular, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, any one of a plurality of reference times is set as the current end reference number, thereby realizing further diversification of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to clearly indicate to the player that the determination result corresponds to the second determination information. After that, the predetermined pattern combination is displayed in a circle before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the circle display. The player can know that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information based on the fact that the predetermined picture combination is stopped (temporarily stopped), and can then guess or know the current end reference number by updating the correlation information. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is used as a trigger to transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

Feature N14. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/performance control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display control means
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function of executing a process for a temporary stop in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means;
A special lap display means (a function of executing a process for re-variable display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for displaying the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means in a lap before the final stop display is reached,
A plurality of reference numbers (e.g., 20, 40, 100) are provided as the reference number of times to end the game, and when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, a reference number of times to end the game is set to one of the plurality of reference numbers as the reference number of times to end the game (a function of executing a setting process of a continuation number counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a correlation information notifying means (a remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and a notification/presentation control device 140) for notifying a player of correlation information (number of times) that is correlated with the end reference number of times set by the end reference number setting means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the correlation information notification means has an information updating means (a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the completion of the rotation of the specified pattern combination by the special rotation display means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. In particular, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, any one of a plurality of reference times is set as the current end reference number, thereby realizing further diversification of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to clearly indicate to the player that the determination result corresponds to the second determination information. After that, the predetermined pattern combination is displayed in a circle before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the circle display. The player can know that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information based on the predetermined picture combination being stopped (temporarily stopped), and can then guess or know the current end reference number of times by updating the correlation information according to the number of revolutions of the predetermined picture combination. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is used as a trigger to transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

The technical ideas shown in features N2 to N11 above may also be applied to features N1 and features N12 to N14.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to M may also be applied to features N1 to N14.

<Characteristic group O>
The following feature group O has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature O1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A first determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a big win in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the first determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A first special effect execution means (a function of executing a process for a big win notice effect in the pattern display device 95A, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a first special effect (a big win notice effect) based on the result of the determination by the first destination determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a special miss in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A second special effect execution means (a function of executing a process for a special miss notice effect in the special effect device 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) for executing a second special effect (a special miss notice effect) based on the result specified by the second destination specifying means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode,
The first special effect is an effect executed at least in a game turn prior to a game turn related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect executed at least in a game turn prior to the game turn related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a regulating means (a function of managing an effect regulating flag, etc., in the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140) that regulates the execution of the first special effect and the second special effect when one of the first special effect and the second special effect is being executed.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the first determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "predetermination"), and the first special effect is executed based on the result of the predetermination, and whether or not the determination result corresponds to the second determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "predetermination"), and the second special effect is executed based on the result of the predetermination. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to preferably increase the attention to the game from the game round before the corresponding game round. However, the execution of two types of special effects with different premise results in parallel can be a factor that confuses the player. This is not preferable in terms of increasing the attention to the game through special effects. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted that restricts the execution of one special effect when the other is being executed, the above concerns can be effectively alleviated. This is preferable in terms of ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special effects mentioned above.

The "regulation means" described in this feature has a function to prevent overlapping between the first special effect and the second special effect, and includes a configuration to regulate one special effect from starting while the other special effect is in progress, and a configuration to forcibly terminate (cancel) one special effect if the other special effect starts while the other special effect is in progress.

Feature O2. The gaming machine described in Feature O1, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to regulate the start of the other of the first special effect and the second special effect in response to special information that triggers the start of either the first special effect or the second special effect.

If the first special effect and the second special effect were to be executed in response to a single piece of special information, one special effect would negate the other. This could be a cause of confusion for the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by preventing both the first special effect and the second special effect from being executed in response to a single piece of special information, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be effectively prevented.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature O1, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to regulate so that the other of the first special effect and the second special effect is not started when triggered by special information that triggers the start of either the first special effect or the second special effect and other special information that follows that special information."

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to Feature O1 or Feature O2, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to start the regulation when either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed by the first special effect execution means or the second special effect execution means, and to end the regulation when the one of the special effects ends.

As shown by this feature, a configuration in which one special effect is restricted when the other special effect is executed is preferable in terms of relaxing the constraints on the presentation mode of the special effects. In other words, not only when the special effect is started immediately after the execution conditions are met, but also when the start of the special effect is deliberately delayed even when the execution conditions for the special effect are met internally, two types of special effects can be favorably coexisted, and the constraints on the presentation mode of the special effects can be favorably relaxed.

Feature O4. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A first determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a big win in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the first determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A first special effect execution means (a function of executing the processing of the big win notice effect by the symbol display device 95A, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a first special effect (big win notice effect) based on the result specified by the first destination determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a special miss in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A second special effect execution means (a function of executing a process for a special miss notice effect in the special effect device 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) for executing a second special effect (a special miss notice effect) based on the result specified by the second destination specifying means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode,
The first special effect is an effect executed at least in a game turn prior to a game turn related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect executed at least in a game turn prior to the game turn related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a regulating means (a function of managing a performance regulating flag, etc., in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that regulates the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means when the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the first determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "predetermination"), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of the predetermination, and whether or not the determination result corresponds to the second determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "predetermination"), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of the predetermination. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to preferably increase the attention to the game from the game round before the corresponding game round. However, in a configuration in which the transition to the special game state is triggered by the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a player who expects the transition to the special game state will pay attention to the first special performance. If the first special effect is started while the second special effect is being executed, it is expected that the player's attention will likely shift from the second special effect to the first special effect. This is feared to hinder the second special effect from effectively increasing attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the first special effect is not executed by the first special effect execution means when the second special effect is being executed by the second special effect execution means, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably alleviated. This is preferable in terms of achieving the coexistence of the two types of special effects described above.

The "regulation means" described in this feature has a function to prevent overlap between the first special effect and the second special effect, and includes a configuration to regulate the start of a new first special effect and a configuration to forcibly terminate (cancel) a first special effect that is currently being executed.

Feature O5. The gaming machine described in Feature O4, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to regulate so that the first special effect is not started in response to the special information that triggered the start of the second special effect and other special information that follows that special information.

If the first special effect and the second special effect are executed as a result of one special information being triggered, the other special effect will be negated by one special effect. This is a concern as a factor that will confuse the player. In particular, in a configuration in which the first special effect is more anticipated than the second special effect, the execution of the second special effect may act to reduce the reliability (expectation) of the first special effect. This may be a factor that will significantly reduce the attention paid to the first special effect. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the first special effect is not started as a result of the special information that triggered the start of the second special effect and other special information that follows the special information, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. For example, even if new special information is acquired until the end of the second special effect, it is preferable to restrict the execution of the first special effect triggered by the special information.

Feature O6. The gaming machine described in Feature O4 or Feature O5, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to start the regulating when the second special effect is executed by the second special effect execution means, and to end the regulating when the second special effect ends.

As shown in this feature, restricting the first special effect when the second special effect is executed is preferable in terms of relaxing the constraints on the presentation mode of the second special effect. In other words, not only when the second special effect is started immediately after the execution conditions are met, but also when the start is deliberately delayed when the execution conditions for the second special effect are met internally, it is possible to effectively suppress conflict between the first special effect and the second special effect, and to effectively relax the constraints on the presentation mode of the second special effect.

Feature O7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features O1 to O6, characterized in that it is provided with a stop means for stopping the first special effect when the second special effect is executed by the second special effect execution means under a situation in which the first special effect is being executed by the first special effect execution means.

If the conditions for executing the second special effect can be met while the first special effect is being executed, it is possible to ensure an opportunity to execute the second special effect. Furthermore, if the conditions for executing the second special effect are met while the first special effect is being executed, the first special effect can be stopped, encouraging the player to focus on the second special effect.

Feature O8. The gaming machine described in Feature O7, wherein the canceling means is configured to cancel the first special effect after the start of the second special effect when the second special effect is started by the second special effect execution means while the first special effect is being executed by the first special effect execution means.

When the first special effect is stopped as shown in feature O7, the first special effect can be stopped after the second special effect has begun, making the behavior of the stop itself part of the effect, thus realizing a practically preferable configuration for increasing attention to the game.

Feature O9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features O1 to O8, characterized in that, when a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the specified gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, it is more advantageous for the player to obtain a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in feature O9, if the configuration is such that the advantage increases when a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in a specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the player will expect the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information to become the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and the attention to the second special performance can be preferably increased.

In particular, when combined with feature O7 or feature O8, if the second special effect is started during the first special effect, the first special effect is stopped. In other words, by stopping the first special effect, expectations grow that the judgment result will correspond to the second judgment information, and the performance effect of stopping the first special effect can be more effectively exerted.

Feature O10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features O1 to O9, characterized in that a first special effect start timing at which the first special effect is started by the first special effect execution means in the game round is different from a second special effect start timing at which the second special effect is started by the second special effect execution means in the game round.

As shown in feature O1, etc., in a configuration in which a special effect starts before a corresponding game round, it is expected that the player's sense of anticipation will increase when the special effect starts. Therefore, when using the first special effect and the second special effect together, if the timing at which the special effect starts during a game round is differentiated, it is possible to effectively prevent the start (beginning) of each special effect from being missed.

Feature O11. The gaming machine described in Feature O10, characterized in that one of the first special effect start timing and the second special effect start timing is a timing in the first half of a game round, and the other is a timing in the second half of a game round.

As shown in feature O10, by differentiating the start timing of the first special effect from the start timing of the second special effect, one in the first half of a game round and the other in the second half of a game round, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the game throughout the entire game round.

Feature O12. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A first determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a big win in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the first determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A first special effect execution means (a function of executing a process for a big win notice effect in the pattern display device 95A, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a first special effect (a big win notice effect) based on the result of the determination by the first destination determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a special miss in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A second special effect execution means (a function of executing a process for a special miss notice effect in the special effect device 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) for executing a second special effect (a special miss notice effect) based on the result specified by the second destination specifying means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode,
The first special effect is an effect executed at least in a game turn prior to a game turn related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect executed at least in a game turn prior to the game turn related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a regulating means (a function of managing an effect regulating flag, etc., in the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140) that regulates the execution of the first special effect and the second special effect when one of the first special effect and the second special effect is being executed.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the first determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "predetermination"), and the first special effect is executed based on the result of the predetermination, and whether or not the determination result corresponds to the second determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "predetermination"), and the second special effect is executed based on the result of the predetermination. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to preferably increase the attention to the game from the game round before the corresponding game round. However, the execution of two types of special effects with different premise results in parallel can be a factor that confuses the player. This is not preferable in terms of increasing the attention to the game through special effects. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted that restricts the execution of one special effect when the other is being executed, the above concerns can be effectively alleviated. This is preferable in terms of ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special effects mentioned above.

Feature O13. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A first determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a big win in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the first determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A first special effect execution means (a function of executing a process for a big win notice effect in the pattern display device 95A, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a first special effect (a big win notice effect) based on the result specified by the first destination specifying means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a special miss in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A second special effect execution means (a function of executing a process for a special miss notice effect in the special effect device 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) for executing a second special effect (a special miss notice effect) based on the result specified by the second destination specifying means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode,
The first special effect is an effect executed at least in a game turn prior to a game turn related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect executed at least in a game turn prior to the game turn related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a regulating means (a function of managing a performance regulating flag, etc. in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that regulates the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means when the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the first determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "predetermination"), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of the predetermination, and whether or not the determination result corresponds to the second determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "predetermination"), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of the predetermination. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to preferably increase the attention to the game from the game round before the corresponding game round. However, in a configuration in which the transition to the special game state is triggered by the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a player who expects the transition to the special game state will pay attention to the first special performance. If the first special effect is started while the second special effect is being executed, it is expected that the player's attention will likely shift from the second special effect to the first special effect. This is feared to hinder the second special effect from effectively increasing attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the first special effect is not executed by the first special effect execution means when the second special effect is being executed by the second special effect execution means, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably alleviated. This is preferable in terms of achieving the coexistence of the two types of special effects described above.

The technical ideas shown in Features O2 to O3 and Features O5 to O11 above may also be applied to Features O12 to O13.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to N may be applied to features O1 to O13.

<Feature P group>
The following feature group P has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature P1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a function for executing a process for display control of the pattern display device 95 in the variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means has a pattern display section (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns), and performs display control of the pattern display section (a function of executing processing for pattern display control in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the first judgment information, the display performance execution means is configured to stop and display the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result via variable display,
A special display unit (special effect device 500D, 500F) provided separately from the picture display unit;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a special control means (a function of executing processing for a special miss notice effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit by executing a special effect to suggest or indicate that the result of the judgment by the judgment means is a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information when the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, the game promptly transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switching to the switching control mode is more likely to be abrupt than if the determination result corresponds to the first determination information. This is expected to be a factor that causes confusion for the player and leads to wasteful investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponds to the first determination information, a picture combination indicating this is displayed in a stopped state on the picture display unit, while the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested or clearly indicated by a special effect on the special display unit provided separately from the picture display unit. This configuration can prevent confusion with the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and can effectively prevent the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature P2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a function for executing a process for display control of the pattern display device 95 in the variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means has a pattern display section (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns), and performs display control of the pattern display section (a function of executing processing for pattern display control in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the first judgment information, the display performance execution means is configured to stop and display the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result via variable display,
A destination determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a special miss in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of determination by the determination means;
A special display unit (special effect device 500D, 500F) provided separately from the picture display unit;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a special control means (a function of executing processing for a special miss notice effect in the notification/effect control device 140) which controls the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special effect (special miss notice effect) on the special display unit based on the result specified by the destination determination means when the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, the game promptly transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switching to the switching control mode is more likely to be abrupt than if the determination result corresponds to the first determination information. This is expected to be a factor that causes confusion for the player and leads to wasteful investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponds to the first determination information, a picture combination indicating this is displayed in a stopped state on the picture display unit, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested by a special performance on a special display unit provided separately from the picture display unit. This configuration can prevent confusion with the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and can effectively prevent the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

In particular, this feature is configured such that whether or not the judgment result will correspond to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a future determination means (hereinafter referred to as future determination), and a special performance is executed depending on the result of the future determination, so that the player can predict in advance that there is a possibility that the judgment result will correspond to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the sense of abruptness mentioned above, and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences mentioned above.

Feature P3. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a function for executing a process for display control of the pattern display device 95 in the variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means has a pattern display section (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns), and performs display control of the pattern display section (a function of executing processing for pattern display control in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the first judgment information, the display performance execution means is configured to stop and display the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result via variable display,
A destination determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a special miss in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of determination by the determination means;
A special display unit (special effect device 500D, 500F) provided separately from the picture display unit;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached, a special control means (a function of executing processing for a special miss notice display in the notification/performance control device 140) is provided for controlling the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special display (special miss notice display) on the special display unit based on the result of the specific determination at least before the start of a gaming round related to the special information that has been identified by the destination determination means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, the game promptly transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switching to the switching control mode is more likely to be abrupt than if the determination result corresponds to the first determination information. This is expected to be a factor that causes confusion for the player and leads to wasteful investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponds to the first determination information, a picture combination indicating this is displayed in a stopped state on the picture display unit, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested by a special performance on a special display unit provided separately from the picture display unit. This configuration can prevent confusion with the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and can effectively prevent the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

In particular, this feature is configured such that whether or not the judgment result will correspond to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a future determination means (hereinafter referred to as future determination), and a special effect is executed depending on the result of the future determination. Since this special effect is executed at least in a game turn prior to the game turn related to the special information that was the subject of the future determination, it becomes possible for the player to predict in advance that the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of abruptness mentioned above, and further suppress the occurrence of the various inconveniences mentioned above.

Feature P4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P3, characterized in that the special control means has a means for starting the special effect when a picture combination is displayed frozen on the picture display section.

In a configuration in which the result of the determination is notified by the picture combination stopped and displayed on the picture display section, the level of attention to the game may rapidly decrease when the fact that no winning has been obtained is notified. Therefore, if a special effect is started under such circumstances, the rapid decrease in the level of attention described above can be effectively prevented by the special effect.

In addition, in a configuration in which the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is notified on the picture display section, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the picture display section. Therefore, if a special effect is started during the stopped display period when the need to pay attention to the picture display section decreases, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being overlooked.

Feature P5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P3, characterized in that the special control means has a means for starting the special effect when the execution condition for the special effect is met while the image is being variably displayed on the image display section, by waiting for the image being variably displayed to be displayed still.

In a configuration in which the result of the determination is notified by the combination of symbols displayed in a static manner on the symbol display section, the level of attention to the game may rapidly decrease when the player is notified that they have not won. Therefore, if a special effect is started under such circumstances, the rapid decrease in attention described above can be effectively prevented by the special effect.

In addition, in a configuration in which the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is notified on the picture display unit, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the picture display unit. Therefore, if the conditions for executing a special effect are met while the picture display unit is displaying a variable pattern, the special effect can be started after waiting for the picture being displayed to stop being displayed during the variable display, thereby preventing the special effect from being overlooked.

Feature P6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P5, characterized in that the special display unit is positioned so that the distance from the starting ball entry unit to the special display unit is smaller than the distance from the starting ball entry unit to the picture display unit.

In a configuration in which special information is obtained based on a ball entering the starting ball entry area, the player may focus on the starting ball entry area. Therefore, by positioning the special display area closer to the starting ball entry area compared to the picture display area, the chances of missing the special effects can be effectively reduced.

Feature P7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P6, characterized in that the special display unit is disposed behind a portion of the flow path (left route) along which the gaming ball flows toward the starting ball entry area in the gaming area, the portion being closer to the starting ball entry area.

In a configuration in which special information is obtained based on the ball entering the starting entry area, the player can pay attention to the starting entry area and the movement of the game ball toward the starting entry area. Therefore, by arranging the special display unit behind the part of the flow path (left route) along which the game ball flows toward the starting entry area, which is closer to the starting entry area, the chances of the special performance being missed can be effectively reduced.

Feature P8. The special display unit includes a first display unit (notice decoration unit 511D, 511F) that indicates that the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information, and a second display unit (notification decoration unit 512D, 512F) that clearly indicates that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information;
The special control means has means for, when the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result corresponding to the second information, executing, as the special effect, a first display (preview display) on the first display unit suggesting that the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information, and then executing, on the second display unit, a second display (result display) clearly indicating that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, and when the judgment result by the judgment means is not a judgment result corresponding to the second information, the gaming machine described in any one of features P1 to P7 is configured to execute, as the special effect, the first display on the first display unit while not executing the second display on the second display unit.

If the first display unit is configured to suggest the possibility that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information before the second display unit clearly indicates that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, the chances that the second display on the second display unit will be overlooked can be suitably reduced.

Feature P9. The gaming machine described in Feature P8, characterized in that the special display unit is formed so that the distance from the first display unit to the starting ball entry unit is smaller than the distance from the second display unit to the starting ball entry unit.

In gaming machines where the game progresses based on the ball entering the starting ball entry area, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the starting ball entry area. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by forming a special display section such that the first display section of the first and second display sections is closer to the starting ball entry area (the starting ball entry area where the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is provided), the effect of preventing missed balls as shown in feature P8 can be more effectively achieved.

Feature P10. The display mode of the first display unit is provided with a plurality of display modes having different expectations of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information;
The gaming machine described in feature P8 or feature P9, characterized in that the special control means has a means for switching the display mode of the first display unit when a picture combination is displayed in a stopped state on the picture display unit.

When the image display section variably displays images, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the image display section. Therefore, if the display mode of the first display section is switched when the image combination is statically displayed, it is possible to effectively prevent the switch in the display mode from being overlooked.

In addition, the static display of the picture combination may momentarily reduce attention to the game, but as shown in this feature, if the display mode of the first display unit is configured to switch when the static display of the picture combination is in progress, this can effectively prevent the reduction in attention to the game.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in any one of features P1 to P7, characterized in that a plurality of display modes, each having a different expected degree of a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, are provided as the display mode of the special display unit in the special performance, and the special control means is capable of switching the display mode of the special display unit under a situation in which a picture combination is displayed in a stopped state on the picture display unit."

Feature P11. The number of special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means is limited (for example, four).
The picture display unit is provided with a memory number display unit (a reserved display area of the picture display device 95A) that displays the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features P8 to P10, characterized in that the special display unit is formed so that the distance from the first display unit to the memory number display unit is smaller than the distance from the second display unit to the memory number display unit.

In gaming machines of the type that have an upper limit on the amount of special information acquired and stored based on a ball entering the starting ball entry area, adjustments may be made such as temporarily refraining from firing to avoid unnecessary ball entries. A player who makes such adjustments will pay attention to the movement of the gaming ball in and around the starting ball entry area, or to the display in the memory count display area. Therefore, by forming the special display area so that the first of the first and second display areas is closer to the memory count display area as shown in this feature, the effect of preventing missed balls as shown in feature P8 etc. can be more effectively achieved.

Feature P12. When the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends in the first game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without being judged to correspond to the first judgment information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.
A gaming machine described in any one of features P1 to P11, characterized in that the special control means has a means for executing the special effect at least in a game play prior to the game play in which the upper limit number of times is reached when the upper limit number of times is reached.

As shown in feature P12, if the game is configured to transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the upper limit number of times is reached, excessive investment can be suppressed and the soundness of the game can be strengthened. Even in such a case, by configuring the above-mentioned special effect to be executed from the previous game round, the occurrence of the special effect (success pattern) can be favorably improved to encourage the recognition that the occurrence of the special effect means there is a possibility of transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

Feature P13. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times the game is executed during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times to be ended (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a function for executing a process for display control of the pattern display device 95 in the variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means has a pattern display section (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns), and performs display control of the pattern display section (a function of executing processing for pattern display control in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the first judgment information, the display performance execution means is configured to stop and display the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result via variable display,
A special display unit (special effect device 500D, 500F) provided separately from the picture display unit;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a special control means (a function of executing processing for a special miss notice effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit by executing a special effect to suggest or indicate that the result of the judgment by the judgment means is a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information when the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, the game promptly transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switching to the switching control mode is more likely to be abrupt than if the determination result corresponds to the first determination information. This is expected to be a factor that causes confusion for the player and leads to wasteful investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponds to the first determination information, a picture combination indicating this is displayed in a stopped state on the picture display unit, while the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested or clearly indicated by a special effect on the special display unit provided separately from the picture display unit. This configuration can prevent confusion with the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and can effectively prevent the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature P14. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times of execution of games in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times of termination (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a function for executing a process for display control of the pattern display device 95 in the variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means has a pattern display section (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns), and performs display control of the pattern display section (a function of executing processing for pattern display control in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the first judgment information, the display performance execution means is configured to stop and display the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result via variable display,
A destination determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a special miss in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of determination by the determination means;
A special display unit (special effect device 500D, 500F) provided separately from the picture display unit;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a special control means (a function of executing processing for a special miss notice effect in the notification/effect control device 140) which controls the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special effect (special miss notice effect) on the special display unit based on the result specified by the destination determination means when the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, the game promptly transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switching to the switching control mode is more likely to be abrupt than if the determination result corresponds to the first determination information. This is expected to be a factor that causes confusion for the player and leads to wasteful investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponds to the first determination information, a picture combination indicating this is displayed in a stopped state on the picture display unit, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested by a special performance on a special display unit provided separately from the picture display unit. This configuration can prevent confusion with the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and can effectively prevent the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

In particular, this feature is configured such that whether or not the judgment result will correspond to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a future determination means (hereinafter referred to as future determination), and a special performance is executed depending on the result of the future determination, so that the player can predict in advance that there is a possibility that the judgment result will correspond to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the sense of abruptness mentioned above, and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences mentioned above.

Feature P15. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating openings 91, 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times of execution of games in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times of termination (e.g., 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 upon expiration of a time-saving period);
A display performance execution means (a function for executing a process for display control of the pattern display device 95 in the variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) that executes a display performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed;
The display performance execution means has a pattern display section (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns), and performs display control of the pattern display section (a function of executing processing for pattern display control in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the first judgment information, the display performance execution means is configured to stop and display the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result via variable display,
A destination determination means (a function of executing a process for confirming a special miss in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of determination by the determination means;
A special display unit (special effect device 500D, 500F) provided separately from the picture display unit;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached, a special control means (a function of executing processing for a special miss notice display in the notification/performance control device 140) is provided for controlling the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special display (special miss notice display) on the special display unit based on the result of the specific determination at least before the start of a gaming round related to the special information that has been identified by the destination determination means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, the game promptly transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switching to the switching control mode is more likely to be abrupt than if the determination result corresponds to the first determination information. This is expected to be a factor that causes confusion for the player and leads to wasteful investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponds to the first determination information, a picture combination indicating this is displayed in a stopped state on the picture display unit, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested by a special performance on a special display unit provided separately from the picture display unit. This configuration can prevent confusion with the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and can effectively prevent the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

In particular, this feature is configured such that whether or not the judgment result will correspond to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a future determination means (hereinafter referred to as future determination), and a special effect is executed depending on the result of the future determination. Since this special effect is executed at least in a game turn prior to the game turn related to the special information that was the subject of the future determination, it becomes possible for the player to predict in advance that the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of abruptness mentioned above, and further suppress the occurrence of the various inconveniences mentioned above.

The technical ideas shown in features P4 to P12 above may also be applied to features P13 to P15.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above feature group A to feature group O may be applied to feature P1 to feature P15.

<Feature Q group>
The following feature Q group has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature Q1. A gaming machine having a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) provided with a light-emitting body (light-emitting body 641E, 641F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, and a light-emitting performance device (special performance device 500E, 500F) configured so that light from the light-emitting unit is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through a light-transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a driving means (driving mechanisms 690E, 690F and an alarm/performance control device 140) that drives the light-emitting unit so that the light-emitting body is displaced within a predetermined operating range that includes a first position where light from the light-emitting body is irradiated to a light diffusion area (light diffusion areas 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light-transmitting section, and a second position where light from the light-emitting body is irradiated to a non-light diffusion area (non-light diffusion areas 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F) in the light-transmitting section.

According to the configuration shown in feature Q1, by driving the light-emitting unit, the light-emitting body is displaced within a predetermined operating range including a first position where light is irradiated onto the light diffusion area of the decorative cover and a second position where light is irradiated onto the non-light diffusion area of the decorative cover. The appearance (light-emitting state) of the light-emitting performance device can be significantly changed when light from the light-emitting unit (light-emitting body) is irradiated onto the non-light diffusion area and when it is irradiated onto the light diffusion area. This can suitably increase the attention to the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting performance device. When performing such a light-emitting performance, it is assumed that a change in the position of the decoration itself will reduce the appearance of the light-emitting performance device and the impact of the light-emitting performance. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by moving the light-emitting unit of the decorative cover and the light-emitting unit.

Feature Q2. A gaming machine having a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, and a light-emitting performance device (special performance device 500E, 500F) configured so that light from the light-emitting unit is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the light-transmitting part (opposing part 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover,
A driving means (a driving mechanism 690E and a notification/performance control device 140) for rotating the light-emitting unit in a predetermined direction is provided,
the light-emitting unit is configured to rotate in the predetermined direction so that the light-emitting body (light-emitting body 641E, 641F) provided in the light-emitting unit passes through a predetermined path (orbits PLa to PLf) that includes a first position where the light-emitting body irradiates light onto a light diffusion region (light diffusion portions 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light-transmitting portion, and a second position where the light-transmitting body irradiates light onto a non-light diffusion region (non-light diffusion portions 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F).

According to the configuration shown in feature Q2, by rotating the light-emitting unit, the light-emitting body is displaced so as to pass through a predetermined path including a first position where light is irradiated to the light diffusion area of the decorative cover and a second position where light is irradiated to the non-light diffusion area of the decorative cover. The appearance (light-emitting state) of the light-emitting performance device can be significantly changed when the light from the light-emitting unit (light-emitting body) is irradiated to the non-light diffusion area and when it is irradiated to the light diffusion area. This can suitably improve the attention to the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting performance device. When performing such a light-emitting performance, it is assumed that a change in the position of the decoration itself will reduce the appearance of the light-emitting performance device and the impact of the light-emitting performance. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by rotating the light-emitting unit of the decorative cover and the light-emitting unit. In addition, by making the light-emitting unit rotatable, the light-emitting state can be changed repeatedly without interruption, which is also preferable in terms of ensuring a certain degree of length for the execution period of the light-emitting performance and suitably strengthening the sustainability of the attention-improving effect.

Feature Q3. The gaming machine described in Feature Q2, characterized in that the driving means is configured to rotate the light-emitting unit while the light-emitting body is maintained in a lit state.

As shown in this feature, if the light-emitting unit is rotated while the light-emitting body is kept on, the light-emitting location (position) can be seamlessly changed in addition to changing the light-emitting pattern, further enhancing the dramatic effect shown in feature Q2.

Feature Q4. The gaming machine described in Feature Q2 or Feature Q3, characterized in that the light diffusion area is a concave-convex decoration provided on the decorative cover.

As shown in this feature, by forming a light diffusion area with a concave-convex decoration, the presence of the light diffusion area can be effectively prevented from detracting from the appearance of the decorative cover.

Feature Q5. The light diffusion region is provided in a plurality of regions so that the arrangement in the predetermined direction is different;
A gaming machine described in any one of Features Q2 to Q4, characterized in that the light-emitting body is configured to move from the first position where it irradiates light onto one of the multiple light diffusion areas to another first position where it irradiates light onto another of the multiple light diffusion areas, via the second position, as the light-emitting unit rotates.

According to feature Q5, when moving from one light diffusion region to another light diffusion region, the light diffusion region passes through a second position corresponding to a non-light diffusion region, thereby enhancing the sharpness of the change in the light emission pattern.

Feature Q6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features Q2 to Q5, characterized in that the light emitting pattern is linear when light is irradiated onto the light diffusion area, and the light emitting pattern is dotted when light is irradiated onto the non-light diffusion area.

As shown by this feature, if the light emission pattern can be changed between dots and lines, the appearance can be greatly changed.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of features Q2 to Q5, characterized in that the light emission pattern when light is irradiated onto the light diffusion area is different from the light emission pattern when light is irradiated onto the non-light diffusion area."

Feature Q7. The light-emitting device has a plurality of light-emitting bodies;
A gaming machine described in any one of Features Q2 to Q6, characterized in that the light-emitting unit is configured such that when any one of the multiple light-emitting elements is located at the second position, any one of the other light-emitting elements is located at the first position.

This characteristic configuration makes it possible to simultaneously display luminous patterns with and without light diffusion. This is advantageous in improving the appearance of the luminous effects and optimally achieving the attention-increasing effect described above.

Feature Q8. The light transmitting portion has a surface shape that intersects with the rotation axis of the light emitting unit;
A gaming machine described in any one of Features Q2 to Q7, characterized in that the surface portion of the light-transmitting portion facing the light-emitting unit is flat, and the surface portion of the light-transmitting portion facing away from the light-emitting unit is formed with an uneven decoration.

As shown in feature Q8, by forming projections and recesses on the front side of the light-transmitting section that have the functions of diffusing light and providing decoration, and making the back side flat, the operating gap between the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover can be reduced, promoting the thinning of the light-emitting performance device.

Feature Q9. A gaming machine having a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) that covers the light-emitting unit, and a light-emitting performance device (special performance device 500E, 500F) configured so that light from the light-emitting unit is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the light-transmitting part (opposing part 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover,
one of the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover is a movable body that can rotate about an axis (a central axis CL1) that extends in a direction in which the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover are arranged side by side;
A driving means (a driving mechanism 690E and a notification/performance control device 140) for rotating the movable body around the axis is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the movable body is configured to rotate around the axis to enter a first state in which light from the light-emitting body is irradiated to a light diffusion area in the light-transmitting section (light diffusion areas 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) and a second state in which light from the light-emitting body is irradiated to a non-light diffusion area in the light-transmitting section (non-light diffusion areas 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F).

According to the configuration shown in feature Q9, the relationship between the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover changes as the movable body rotates between a relationship in which light is irradiated onto the light diffusion area and a relationship in which light is irradiated onto the non-light diffusion area. Since the appearance (light-emitting state) of the light-emitting performance device changes significantly when light from the light-emitting unit (light-emitting body) is irradiated onto the non-light diffusion area and when it is irradiated onto the light diffusion area, it is possible to suitably increase the attention-grabbing effect of the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting performance device. Furthermore, by making the movable body rotatable, it is possible to repeatedly change the light-emitting state without interruption, which is also preferable in terms of ensuring a relatively long period for the light-emitting performance to be performed and suitably enhancing the sustainability of the attention-grabbing effect.

Feature Q10. The gaming machine described in Feature Q9, characterized in that the driving means is configured to rotate the movable body while the light-emitting body is maintained in a lit state.

According to feature Q10, if the light-emitting unit is rotated while the light-emitting body is maintained in a lit state, the light-emitting pattern can be changed and the light-emitting location (position) can be changed seamlessly, further enhancing the presentation effect described in feature Q2.

The technical ideas shown in Features Q3 to Q8 above may also be applied to Features Q1, Q9, and Q10.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above feature group A to feature group P may be applied to feature Q1 to feature Q10.

<Feature R group>
The following feature R group has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature R1. A gaming machine including a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) provided with a light-emitting body (light-emitting body 641E, 641F) and a cover (front cover 670E, 670F) that covers the light-emitting unit, and a light-emitting performance device (special performance device 500E, 500F) configured to emit light from the light-emitting unit through the cover to the front of the gaming machine,
one of the light-emitting unit and the cover is a movable body that operates while maintaining a distance relationship between the light-emitting unit and the cover;
A driving means (a driving mechanism 690E and a notification/performance control device 140) for operating the movable body is provided,
The cover is provided with a light diffusion region (light diffusion portions 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in which a plurality of linear light diffusion portions (e.g., annular convex portions 713E, 723E, 733E, 713F, 723F, 733F) are arranged in a radial direction with respect to a predetermined axis extending in a direction in which the light-emitting units and the cover are arranged side by side,
The light-emitting unit is configured such that an optical axis of the light-emitting body faces the juxtaposition direction,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the driving means is configured to drive the movable body so as to change the distance from the specified axis line to the optical axis of the light-emitting body while maintaining overlap between the optical axis of the light-emitting body and the light diffusion area in the parallel arrangement direction.

According to the configuration shown in feature R1, the light irradiated to the light diffusion area is diffused in the direction in which the linear light diffusion sections are arranged (a direction intersecting with a specified axis). This results in a strip-like (linear) light emission pattern extending in a direction intersecting with a specified axis. This strip-like light emission pattern is displaced by the movement of the movable body, and the displacement of the strip-like light emission pattern can enhance the visual impact of the light emission presentation. This can favorably increase the attention to the game.

Feature R2. A gaming machine including a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) provided with a light-emitting body (light-emitting body 641E, 641F) and a cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, and a light-emitting performance device (special performance device 500E, 500F) configured to emit light from the light-emitting unit through the cover to the front of the gaming machine,
A driving means (a driving mechanism 690E and a notification/performance control device 140) is provided to operate the light-emitting unit while maintaining a distance relationship between the light-emitting unit and the cover,
The cover is provided with a light diffusion region (light diffusion portions 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in which a plurality of linear light diffusion portions (e.g., annular convex portions) are arranged in a radial direction with respect to a predetermined axis extending in a direction in which the light-emitting units and the cover are arranged side by side,
The light-emitting unit is configured such that an optical axis of the light-emitting body faces the juxtaposition direction,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the driving means is configured to drive the light-emitting unit so as to change the distance from the specified axis to the optical axis of the light-emitting body while maintaining the overlap between the optical axis of the light-emitting body and the light diffusion area in the parallel arrangement direction.

According to the configuration shown in feature R2, the light irradiated to the light diffusion area is diffused in the direction in which the linear light diffusion sections are arranged (a direction intersecting with a specified axis). This results in a strip-like (linear) light emission pattern extending in a direction intersecting with a specified axis. This strip-like light emission pattern is displaced by the movement of the movable body, and the displacement of the strip-like light emission pattern can enhance the visual impact of the light emission presentation. This can favorably increase the attention to the game.

Feature R3. The gaming machine according to Feature R2, characterized in that when the light-emitting unit is driven by the driving means, the optical axis of the light-emitting body is displaced so as to straddle the multiple light diffusion sections in accordance with the operation of the light-emitting unit.

As shown in this feature, if the optical axis is displaced so as to cross multiple light diffusion sections, the light diffusion manner (light emission pattern) can be changed depending on the light diffusion sections that intersect with the optical axis. Diversifying the light emission patterns in this way is preferable in preventing the light emission performance from becoming monotonous.

Feature R4. The gaming machine described in Feature R2 or Feature R3, characterized in that the light diffusion portion is a concave-convex decoration formed on the cover.

According to feature R4, in a configuration in which the uneven decoration also functions as a light diffusing section, it is expected that the visual impact will be reduced by the operation of the cover. In this regard, when combined with feature R2, the configuration operates not the cover but the light-emitting unit located behind it, thereby avoiding the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature R5. The light emitting unit is rotatable,
A gaming machine described in any one of features R2 to R4, characterized in that the central axis of rotation (central axis CL1) of the light-emitting unit is separated from the specified axis and parallel to the specified axis.

If the light-emitting unit is of a rotating type, the light-emitting state can be changed repeatedly without interruption. This is preferable for ensuring a relatively long period for the light-emitting performance, and for suitably enhancing the sustainability of the attention-increasing effect. In particular, as shown in this characteristic, if the central axis of rotation of the light-emitting unit is configured to be separated from a predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis, it is preferable for the light-emitting pattern to change with rotation.

For example, the light diffusion section may be arc-shaped, and the radius of the path (orbits PLa to PLf) along which the light emitter passes as the light-emitting unit rotates may be different from the radius of the light diffusion section.

Feature R6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features R2 to R5, characterized in that the light diffusion section has a protrusion or groove shape.

As shown by this feature, by making the light diffusion section shaped like a protrusion or groove, it is possible to ideally realize a configuration that diffuses light in the direction of the light diffusion section arrangement by using three-dimensional decoration.

Feature R7. The gaming machine described in Feature R6, characterized in that the light diffusion section is formed so that all of the side surfaces (side surface 718E) of the light diffusion section are inclined surfaces that are inclined with respect to the predetermined axis line.

As shown in this feature, if the side of the light diffusion section is inclined relative to a specific axis, a portion of the light from the light emitter can be reflected and guided to another light diffusion section. This is preferable in that it increases the overall length of the light emission pattern in the form of a strip, emphasizing the difference in appearance (dot-like/strip-like).

Feature R8. A planar portion is formed between the light diffusion portions,
A gaming machine described in feature R7, characterized in that the rotational orbit through which the light-emitting body passes and the planar portion are formed so as to overlap when viewed in the direction of the central axis of rotation.

The configuration shown in feature R8 makes it possible to change the shape (e.g., overall length) of the luminous pattern when the light from the luminous body is irradiated onto an inclined surface and when the light from the luminous body is irradiated onto a flat surface. In other words, the shape of the luminous pattern changes as its position changes. This configuration is preferable for preventing the luminous performance from becoming monotonous.

Feature R9. The light diffusion portion includes a first light diffusion portion, a second light diffusion portion, and a third light diffusion portion,
A gaming machine described in feature R8, characterized in that the width of the planar portion formed between the first light diffusion portion and the second light diffusion portion is different from the width of the planar portion formed between the second light diffusion portion and the third light diffusion portion.

As shown by this feature, by configuring the width (length in the arrangement direction) of each flat surface to be different, it is possible to more effectively change the shape of the luminous pattern (e.g., the overall length) according to the object being illuminated by light.

Feature R10. The light emitting unit is rotatable,
The rotational center axis (center axis CL1) of the light-emitting unit is separated from the predetermined axis and is parallel to the predetermined axis,
The light emitter includes a first light emitter and a second light emitter that is different in distance from the rotation central axis from the first light emitter,
A gaming machine described in any one of features R2 to R9, characterized in that the length of a portion of a path (e.g., path PLe) through which the first light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates that overlaps with the light diffusion area when viewed in the juxtaposition direction is different from the length of a portion of a path (e.g., path PLg) through which the second light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates that overlaps with the light diffusion area when viewed in the juxtaposition direction.

If the light-emitting unit is of a rotating type, the light-emitting state can be changed repeatedly without interruption. This is preferable for ensuring a relatively long period for the light-emitting performance, and for suitably enhancing the sustainability of the attention-increasing effect. In particular, as shown in this characteristic, if the central axis of rotation of the light-emitting unit is configured to be separated from a predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis, it is preferable for the light-emitting pattern to change with rotation.

In addition, if the length of the portion of the path through which the first light emitter passes as the light-emitting unit rotates, when viewed in the juxtaposition direction, that overlaps with the light diffusion area, is different from the length of the portion of the path through which the second light emitter passes as the light-emitting unit rotates, when viewed in the juxtaposition direction, then a configuration in which the rotation range (angle) in which the light-emitting pattern is displayed in one light diffusion area is different can be suitably realized. In a configuration in which the decoration of the cover functions as a light diffusion section, the shape and size of the light diffusion section may be subject to strict constraints in order to fulfill its decorative function. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which multiple light emitters can pass behind one light diffusion area as shown in this feature, and the rotation range is made different, the appearance of the light-emitting performance can be improved while suitably eliminating the inconvenience caused by it.

For example, the light diffusion section may be arc-shaped, and the radius of the orbit (orbits PLa to PLf) along which the light emitter passes as the light-emitting unit rotates may be different from the radius of the light diffusion section. Also, the "orbit" in this characteristic may be a "predetermined path."

The technical ideas shown in Features R3 to R10 above may also be applied to Feature R1.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above feature group A to feature group Q may be applied to feature group R1 to feature group R10.

<Characteristics Group S>
The following group of features S has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature S1. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of times of execution of the game after the special game state ends in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode reaches an upper limit number (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
a destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information before the special information becomes the subject of the judgment;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means under a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in effect, prior to the game number that will reach the upper limit number of times, based on a result of the determination by the destination determination means;
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number that reaches the maximum number of times when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means.

According to feature S1, if play continues without the trigger for transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information) being established, the number of play times after the special game state ends will reach the upper limit (ceiling reached) and the game will transition to a specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the starting ball entry section will frequently enter the receiving state, increasing the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section, and further investment will be suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game.

Here, in particular, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means is determined before the game number that will reach the upper limit based on the result specified by the destination determination means, and if it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the game number that will reach the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the tension from becoming excessively high just before the ceiling is reached, and to give a sense of security to players who are hoping to reach the ceiling. This is preferable for improving player satisfaction and further increasing attention to the game.

This feature further includes "a destination determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination," "a transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means will occur before the game number that reaches the upper limit number of times, based on the result of determination by the destination determination means, in a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached, and "when it is determined by the transition determination means that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means, "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be "transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means in a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached before the game number that reaches the upper limit number of times" and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means."

In addition, the description "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means" may be changed to "special effect execution means for executing a special effect before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, based on the determination result by the transition determination means." Incidentally, the description "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means" may be changed to "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating the upper limit number of times is reached before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means."

Feature S2. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section are provided,
a determination by said determination means based on the special information stored in said first storage means is configured to be more advantageous to a player than a determination by said determination means based on the special information stored in said second storage means;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second switching mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode,
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of times of execution of the game after the special game state ends in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode reaches an upper limit number (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
a destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information before the special information becomes the subject of the judgment;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means under a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in effect, prior to the game number that will reach the upper limit number of times, based on a result specified by the destination determination means;
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number that reaches the maximum number of times when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means.

According to feature S2, if the game continues without the trigger for transition to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) being established, the number of times the game is played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (reaching the ceiling), and the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the second start ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of balls entering the second start ball entry section, and further investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game.

Here, the judgment based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section is more favorable to the player than the judgment based on the ball entering the first start ball entry section. In other words, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is strengthened by switching to the second switching mode and entering the second start ball entry section → judgment. In such a configuration, if the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information just before the ceiling is reached, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefit. Therefore, it is assumed that a player who expects to reach the ceiling will play in the hope that the judgment result will not correspond to the predetermined judgment information at least just before the ceiling is reached. In particular, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs is determined based on the specific result by the destination determination means before the game number when the upper limit number of times is reached, and if it is determined that the transition occurs, a special effect indicating a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the game number when the upper limit number of times is reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive tension just before the ceiling is reached and to give a sense of security to a player who expects to reach the ceiling. This is favorable for improving player satisfaction and drawing more attention to the game.

This feature further includes "a destination determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination," "a transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means will occur before the game number that reaches the upper limit number of times, based on the result of determination by the destination determination means, in a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached, and "when it is determined by the transition determination means that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means, "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be "transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means in a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached before the game number that reaches the upper limit number of times" and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means."

In addition, the description "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means" may be changed to "special effect execution means for executing a special effect before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, based on the determination result by the transition determination means." Incidentally, the description "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means" may be changed to "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating the upper limit number of times is reached before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means."

Feature S3. The gaming machine according to Feature S2, wherein the transition determination means is configured to determine that a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means when the destination determination means determines that none of the game times executed before the upper limit number of times is reached will result in a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, and to determine that a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode will not occur by the special transition means when the destination determination means determines that any of the game times executed before the upper limit number of times is reached will result in a determination result that corresponds to the predetermined determination information.

As shown in feature S3, if it is determined in advance that any of the game times executed before the upper limit is reached will result in a judgment result that does not correspond to the specified judgment information, it is determined that a state transition will occur by the special transition means, and if it is determined in advance that any of the game times executed before the upper limit is reached will result in a judgment result that corresponds to the specified judgment information, it is determined that no state transition will occur by the special transition means, then the technical idea shown in feature S2 can be suitably embodied.

Feature S4. The gaming machine according to Feature S2 or Feature S3, characterized in that the transition determination means has a memory number determination means for determining whether or not the memory number, which is the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, has reached a number corresponding to the number of remaining game plays until the upper limit number of times has been reached, and is configured to determine whether or not a transition will occur by the special transition means when the memory number determination means determines that the memory number has reached the corresponding number.

As shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not a transition will occur using a special transition means when the number of stored special information reaches a number corresponding to the number of remaining executions when the upper limit number of times is reached, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load caused by the implementation of special effects. For example, compared to a configuration in which it is determined whether or not a transition will occur using a special transition means each time special information is added, it is possible to suitably reduce the control load.

Feature S5. The gaming machine described in Feature S4, wherein the memory number determination means is configured to determine whether the memory number has reached the corresponding number when special information is acquired by the special information acquisition means.

As shown in this feature, if a configuration is used to determine whether or not a transition will occur using a special transition means when special information is added, the special performance can be started quickly.

Feature S6. As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a jackpot result A corresponding to a low probability mode) and a second judgment information (a jackpot result B corresponding to a high probability mode) are provided,
a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is configured to be more advantageous to a player than a determination result corresponding to the first determination information;
A gaming machine described in any one of features S2 to S5, characterized in that the judgment based on a ball scoring at the second starting ball scoring section is configured to more likely result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information than the judgment based on a ball scoring at the first starting ball scoring section.

As shown by this feature, in a gaming machine in which a judgment based on a ball entering the second start ball entry section is favored over a judgment based on a ball entering the first start ball entry section, the player benefits more when the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information by transitioning to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In such a configuration, by using a special effect to notify the player early on that the ceiling has been reached, it is possible to preferably prevent an event from occurring in which the player is unable to actually enjoy the benefit of reaching the ceiling. Specifically, even after the ceiling has been reached, the game ball continues to be fired toward the first start ball entry section, and a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information may occur in the game round related to the special information obtained (the game round after the ceiling has been reached), but the occurrence of such inconveniences can be preferably prevented.

Feature S7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features S2 to S6, characterized in that the special effects are configured to start in a game played before the game played when the upper limit is reached, and to continue at least until the game played when the upper limit is reached.

In a configuration in which a judgment based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section, which is equipped with a variable mechanism, is given higher priority than a judgment based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, it cannot be denied that there is a possibility that a further ball will enter the first starting ball entry section as a result of game balls being fired even after the upper limit number of times has been reached (reaching the ceiling) has been determined in advance. If special information is obtained from such a ball entry, an event may occur in which the player is unable to actually enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. This is feared to be a factor that significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which when a special effect is started, the special effect continues at least until the number of times the ceiling is reached, it is possible to preferably prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring, such as the special effect being overlooked.

Feature S8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features S2 to S7, characterized in that the special effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect when a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means and none of the game times executed until the upper limit number of times is reached corresponds to a reach display, which is one of the game time effects executed in parallel with the game time operation.

In a configuration in which the reach display indicates that the judgment result will correspond to the specified judgment information, there is a concern that the reach display will obviously be a false effect when a special effect is started, and the effect of increasing attention to the game by the reach display will not be fully realized. This is expected to be a factor in reducing the reliability of the reach display. Therefore, in this feature, if the reach display is executed before the upper limit number of times (ceiling reaching) is confirmed, the special effect is refrained from. This allows the special effect function and the reach display function to coexist optimally.

Feature S9. A first reach display mode and a second reach display mode having a lower expectation of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information than the first reach display mode are provided as a reach display mode, which is one of the game round presentations executed in parallel with the game round operation;
A gaming machine described in any one of features S2 to S7, characterized in that when a transition to the specified gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means and any of the gaming times executed until the maximum number of times is reached corresponds to the reach display of the second reach display mode, the gaming machine is provided with a means for changing the mode of the reach display to the first reach display mode.

In a configuration in which the reach display indicates that a judgment result will correspond to predetermined judgment information, there is concern that the reach display being executed in the second reach display mode, which has a higher expectation level, during a special effect may unnecessarily increase the player's anxiety. This may be a factor in reducing the player's satisfaction. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when it is confirmed that the upper limit number of times has been reached (the ceiling has been reached) and a special effect is executed, the reach display mode executed during the special effect is changed from the second reach display mode, which has a relatively higher expectation level, to the first display mode, which has a relatively lower expectation level, thereby making it possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature S10. A suggestion effect execution means is provided for executing a suggestion effect that suggests that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information will be obtained before the corresponding special information is subjected to the judgment by the judgment means, based on the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features S2 to S9, characterized in that after the special effect is started by the special effect execution means, the suggestion effect is not executed by the suggestion effect execution means until at least the game round in which the maximum number of times is reached is completed.

In a configuration in which a suggestive effect suggests that a judgment result will be obtained that corresponds to predetermined judgment information, there is a concern that the player will be confused by the overlap of the suggestive effect and the special effect. This is undesirable as it can become a detrimental effect due to the diversification of the effects. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above concern can be suitably resolved by configuring the system to restrict the suggestive effect from being executed while a special effect is being executed.

Feature S11. A suggestion effect execution means is provided for executing a suggestion effect that suggests that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information will be obtained before the corresponding special information becomes the subject of the judgment by the judgment means, based on the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means;
The special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect during the execution of the suggested effect,
A gaming machine according to any one of features S2 to S10, further comprising a canceling means for canceling the suggestive effect if the special effect starts before the suggestive effect ends.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the special effect to be executable even during a suggested effect, it is possible to preferably ensure opportunities for the special effect to be executed. As shown in this feature, by configuring the suggested effect to be stopped when a special effect is started, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special effect has cancelled out the suggested effect (the impression that an advantage has been secured), and to preferably improve the player's satisfaction.

Feature S12. The gaming machine described in Feature S11, characterized in that the timing for stopping the suggestive effect by the stopping means is configured to be a predetermined timing after the start of the special effect.

As shown in this feature, by shifting the timing for the suggestive effect to stop after the timing for the special effect to start, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the suggestive effect being stopped from being overlooked, and to optimally achieve the effect shown in feature S11.

Feature S13. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable winning section control means for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of times of execution of the game after the special game state ends in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode reaches an upper limit number (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
a destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information before the special information becomes the subject of the judgment;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means under a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in effect, prior to the game number that will reach the upper limit number of times, based on a result specified by the destination determination means;
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number that reaches the maximum number of times when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means.

According to feature S13, if the game continues without the trigger for transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information) being established, the number of times the game has been played after the special game state ends will reach the upper limit (ceiling reached) and the game will transition to a specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the starting ball entry section will frequently enter the receiving state, increasing the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section, and further investment will be suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game.

Here, in particular, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means is determined before the game number that will reach the upper limit based on the result specified by the destination determination means, and if it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the game number that will reach the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the tension from becoming excessively high just before the ceiling is reached, and to give a sense of security to players who are hoping to reach the ceiling. This is preferable for improving player satisfaction and further increasing attention to the game.

This feature further includes "a destination determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination," "a transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means will occur before the game number that reaches the upper limit number of times, based on the result of determination by the destination determination means, in a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached, and "when it is determined by the transition determination means that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means, "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be "transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means in a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached before the game number that reaches the upper limit number of times" and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means."

Feature S14. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display sections D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is performed in accordance with special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being counted as one game round when an operation for a game round (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display sections D1, D2) is started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the special game state is entered, a variable winning section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable winning section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (a reserve area for a first operating port Ra) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area for a second operating port Rb) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section are provided,
a determination by the determination means based on the special information stored in the first storage means is configured to be more advantageous to a player than a determination by the determination means based on the special information stored in the second storage means;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state,
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of times of execution of the game after the special game state ends in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode reaches an upper limit number (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
a destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information before the special information becomes the subject of the judgment;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means under a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in effect, prior to the game number that will reach the upper limit number of times, based on a result of the determination by the destination determination means;
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number that reaches the maximum number of times when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means.

According to feature S14, if the game continues without the trigger for transition to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) being established, the number of times the game is played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (reaching the ceiling), and the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the second start ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of balls entering the second start ball entry section, and further investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game.

Here, the judgment based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section is more favorable to the player than the judgment based on the ball entering the first start ball entry section. In other words, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is strengthened by switching to the second switching mode and entering the second start ball entry section → judgment. In such a configuration, if the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information just before the ceiling is reached, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefit. Therefore, it is assumed that a player who expects to reach the ceiling will play in the hope that the judgment result will not correspond to the predetermined judgment information at least just before the ceiling is reached. In particular, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs is determined based on the specific result by the destination determination means before the game number when the upper limit number of times is reached, and if it is determined that the transition occurs, a special effect indicating a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the game number when the upper limit number of times is reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive tension just before the ceiling is reached and to give a sense of security to a player who expects to reach the ceiling. This is favorable for improving player satisfaction and drawing more attention to the game.

This feature further includes "a destination determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination," "a transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means will occur before the game number that reaches the upper limit number of times, based on the result of determination by the destination determination means, in a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached, and "when it is determined by the transition determination means that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means, "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be "transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means in a situation in which the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is reached before the game number that reaches the upper limit number of times" and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means."

In addition, the description "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means" may be changed to "special effect execution means for executing a special effect before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, based on the determination result by the transition determination means." Incidentally, the description "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means" may be changed to "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating the upper limit number of times is reached before the game number at which the upper limit number of times is reached, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur by the special transition means."

The technical ideas shown in Features S3 to S12 above may also be applied to Features S1 and Features S13 to S14.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to R may be applied to features S1 to S14.

<Feature T group>
The following feature group T has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature T1. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901I) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when it is displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
In the variable mechanism, a predetermined passage through which the game balls flowing in from an inlet portion (e.g., an inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism pass is formed by the movable piece,
When the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, the predetermined passage functions as a guide passage that guides the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the starting ball entry section, and when the variable mechanism is in the non-receiving state, the predetermined passage functions as a return passage that returns the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding it to the starting ball entry section,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the variable mechanism control means controls the variable mechanism so that a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage, and, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the variable mechanism control means controls the variable mechanism so that a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry section through the predetermined passage.

As shown in this feature, using the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode in combination can contribute to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Here, the second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode, but while the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode is higher than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode is the same as that of the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without change. In such a configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a state in which it is practically impossible to enter the ball (a state in which the receiving period described later is extremely short), it is likely to give the player the impression that it is annoying, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the third switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry part through a predetermined passage, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. In other words, by allowing the flow of game balls into the variable mechanism by securing a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first switching mode, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. In addition, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry part due to an increase in the number of balls entering, and the loss of opportunities for balls to enter other ball entry parts such as the variable ball entry part due to an increase in the number of balls entering the variable mechanism. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the above-mentioned effect of increasing the level of attention.

Feature T2. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
In the variable mechanism, a predetermined passage through which the game balls flowing in from an inlet portion (e.g., an inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism pass is formed by the movable piece,
When the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, the predetermined passage functions as a guide passage that guides the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the starting ball entry section, and when the variable mechanism is in the non-receiving state, the predetermined passage functions as a return passage that returns the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding it to the starting ball entry section,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the variable mechanism control means controls the variable mechanism so that a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage, and, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the variable mechanism control means controls the variable mechanism so that a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry section through the predetermined passage.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than that in the first switching mode, while the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode not via the special game state is the same as that in the first switching mode. In other words, when the first switching mode is changed from the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In this configuration, if you try to increase the probability of winning the support lottery to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery will increase even in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is short, and the chances of the variable mechanism being in the receiving state will also increase. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a state where it is essentially impossible to score a ball (a state in which the receiving period, described below, is extremely short), it is likely to give the player the impression that it is annoying, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the third switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry part through a predetermined passage, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. In other words, by allowing the flow of game balls into the variable mechanism by securing a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first switching mode, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. In addition, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive ball entry into the starting ball entry part due to an increase in the number of balls entering, and the loss of opportunities for balls to enter other ball entry parts such as the variable ball entry part due to an increase in the number of balls entering the variable mechanism. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the above-mentioned effect of increasing the level of attention.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature T3: The variable mechanism has a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and is configured such that a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the accepted state, and output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the non-accepted state,
The variable mechanism control means is
When the variable mechanism is in the receiving state under a situation where the switching control mode is the first switching mode, an output period is set for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit so that the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage,
A gaming machine described in feature T1 or feature T2, characterized in that when the variable mechanism is set to the accepting state when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is set so that the gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in the specified manner is guided to the starting ball entry portion through the specified passage.

The movable piece shown in this feature is maintained in a first position while the drive signal is being output, and is displaced to a second position by the force of the biasing means when the output of the drive signal is stopped. When the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the output period of the drive signal is set so that a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the third switching mode, the output period of the drive signal is set so that a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry part through a predetermined passage, thereby making it possible to preferably exert the effects shown in feature T1, etc.

Feature T4: The variable mechanism is configured such that, when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is located at a specific portion of the movable piece (e.g., the second surface portion 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the game ball pushing the movable piece is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means;
When a game ball is located in a non-specific portion of the movable piece (a portion upstream of the virtual line FL2 in the planar portions 905G to 905I), the movable piece is pushed by the game ball in a direction opposite to the direction of the biasing force by the biasing means,
The specific portion and the non-specific portion are located on the entrance portion side and the specific portion is located on the starting ball entry portion side,
The gaming machine described in feature T3, characterized in that the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state under a situation in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode, is specified to be longer than the period required for a gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in the specified manner to pass through the non-specific portion.

According to the configuration shown in this characteristic, in the first switching mode, the output of the drive signal is stopped after the game ball passes through the non-specific portion. This prevents the weight of the game ball from acting to hinder the displacement of the movable piece to the second position, and can favorably improve the responsiveness of the movable piece to return to the second position.

Feature T5. The variable mechanism is configured such that, when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is located at a specific portion of the movable piece (e.g., the second surface portion 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the game ball pushing the movable piece is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means;
A gaming machine described in feature T3 or feature T4, characterized in that the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state under a situation in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode is specified to be longer than the period required for a gaming ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in the specified manner to reach the specific part.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the output of the drive signal is stopped when the game ball reaches a specific portion. This causes the movable piece to be displaced to the second position by both the weight of the game ball and the biasing force of the biasing means, and the displacement speed of the movable piece can be suitably increased. This is preferable in terms of improving the responsiveness of the movable piece in returning to the second position.

Feature T6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features T3 to T5, characterized in that in any of the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode, the period from when the output of the drive signal is stopped to when the output of the drive signal is next started is longer than the period required for a gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in the specified manner to be discharged into the gaming area through the specified passage.

As shown in feature T1, etc., in a configuration in which a predetermined flow path formed by the movable piece of the variable mechanism functions as a guide passage and a discharge passage, it is disadvantageous to the player if a game ball being discharged prevents the switch to the receiving state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by specifying the period from when the drive signal output stops to when the drive signal output starts to be longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner to be discharged into the play area through a predetermined passage, the occurrence of the above inconvenience is suppressed, and a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine in achieving the effects shown in feature T1, etc. can be suppressed.

Feature T7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features T1 to T6, characterized in that the time required for a gaming ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in the specified mode to be discharged to the gaming area through the specified passage is shorter than the time required for a gaming ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in the specified mode to enter the starting ball entry part through the specified passage.

Even though the game ball that has entered the variable mechanism cannot enter the starting ball entry area, if it stays in the specified passage for a long time, this can cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is preferable to configure the system so that the time required for the ball to be discharged through the specified passage into the game area is shorter than the time required for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area through the specified passage.

Feature T8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features T1 to T7, characterized in that when the specified passage functions as the discharge passage, the inclination of the passage bottom surface is greater than when the specified passage functions as the guide passage.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the state is switched to the non-receiving state, a game ball located in a specified passage is quickly discharged from the specified passage. This is advantageous in that it prevents the game ball from interfering with the next switching of the variable mechanism to the receiving state, and shortens the interval when the open state is repeated.

Feature T9. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901I) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when it is displaced from the first position to the second position,
In the variable mechanism, a predetermined passage through which the game balls flowing in from an inlet portion of the variable mechanism pass is formed by the movable piece,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first mode,
When the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, the predetermined passage functions as a guide passage that guides the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the starting ball entry section, and when the variable mechanism is in the non-receiving state, the predetermined passage functions as a return passage that returns the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding it to the starting ball entry section,
The variable mechanism control means is
When the variable mechanism is in the receiving state under a situation where the switching control mode is the first mode, an output period is set for outputting a drive signal to the drive unit so that the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the variable mechanism is set to the accepting state when the switching control mode is in the second mode, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is set so that a gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in the specified manner is guided to the starting ball entry portion through the specified passage.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the second mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry part through a predetermined passage, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. In other words, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first mode and allowing game balls to flow into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. In addition, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive balls entering the starting ball entry part due to an increase in the number of balls entering, and the loss of opportunities to enter other ball entry parts such as the variable ball entry part due to an increase in the number of balls entering the variable mechanism. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the above-mentioned effect of increasing the level of attention.

Feature T10. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901J) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when it is displaced from the first position to the second position,
In the variable mechanism, a predetermined passage through which the game balls flowing in from an inlet portion of the variable mechanism pass is formed by the movable piece,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first mode,
When the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, the predetermined passage functions as a guide passage that guides the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the starting ball entry section, and when the variable mechanism is in the non-receiving state, the predetermined passage functions as a return passage that returns the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding it to the starting ball entry section,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state when the switching control mode is the first mode, the variable mechanism control means controls the variable mechanism so that a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage, and, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state when the switching control mode is the second mode, the variable mechanism control means controls the variable mechanism so that a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in the predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry section through the predetermined passage.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the second mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry part through a predetermined passage, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. In other words, by allowing the flow of game balls into the variable mechanism by securing a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first mode, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. In addition, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive balls entering the starting ball entry part due to an increase in the number of balls entering, and the loss of opportunities for balls to enter other ball entry parts such as the variable ball entry part due to an increase in the number of balls entering the variable mechanism. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the above-mentioned effect of increasing the level of attention.

The technical ideas shown in Features T3 to T8 above may also be applied to Features T9 to T10.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to S may be applied to features T1 to T10.

<Characteristic U group>
The following feature group U has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature U1 (Main) A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display unit D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable piece 901G-901I) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when it is displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface portions 904G to 904I) that distributes the game ball to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface portions 903G to 903I) that guides the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and is configured such that when the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the distribution section is located at a first flow path forming position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is arranged at the second position, the distribution section is located at a position that forms the second flow path.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to drive and control the drive unit so that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for the game ball to pass through the entrance portion to reach the distribution section, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the control means drives and controls the drive unit so that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the period required for the game ball to pass through the entrance portion to reach the distribution section.

As shown in this feature, using the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode in combination can contribute to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Here, the second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode, but while the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode is higher than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode is the same as that of the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without change. In such a configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a state in which it is practically impossible to enter the ball (a state in which the receiving period described later is extremely short), it is likely to give the player the impression that it is annoying, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the third switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry section through the first flow path, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first switching mode and allowing game balls to flow into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing in. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the effect of increasing the level of attention described above.

In addition, since the movable piece (distribution section) starts to move toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution section, it is possible to buy time to displace the distribution section from the first flow path forming position to the second flow path forming position. This is preferable in terms of suppressing excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Feature U2. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface portions 904G to 904I) that distributes the game ball to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface portions 903G to 903I) that guides the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and is configured such that when the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the distribution section is located at a first flow path forming position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is arranged at the second position, the distribution section is located at a position that forms the second flow path.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to drive and control the drive unit so that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance portion to reach the distribution section, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the control means drives and controls the drive unit so that the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance portion to reach the distribution section.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than that in the first switching mode, while the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode not via the special game state is the same as that in the first switching mode. In other words, when the first switching mode is changed from the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In this configuration, if you try to increase the probability of winning the support lottery to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery will increase even in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is short, and the chances of the variable mechanism being in the receiving state will also increase. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a state where it is essentially impossible to score a ball (a state in which the receiving period, described below, is extremely short), it is likely to give the player the impression that it is annoying, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the third switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry section through the first flow path, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first switching mode and allowing game balls to flow into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing in. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the effect of increasing the level of attention described above.

In addition, since the movable piece (distribution section) starts to move toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution section, it is possible to buy time to displace the distribution section from the first flow path forming position to the second flow path forming position. This is preferable in terms of suppressing excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Incidentally, it is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature U3. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display unit D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901I) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when it is displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface portions 904G to 904I) that distributes the game ball to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface portions 903G to 903I) that guides the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and is configured such that when the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the distribution section is located at a first flow path forming position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is arranged at the second position, the distribution section is located at a position that forms the second flow path.
In the play area, a first inflow passage (first route R1) and a second inflow passage (second route R2) are formed as inflow passages leading to an inlet portion of the variable mechanism,
A moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inlet passage is configured to be slower than a moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inlet passage,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the variable mechanism control means drives and controls the drive unit so that the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution part, and, when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the control means drives and controls the drive unit so that the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution part.

As shown in this feature, using the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode in combination can contribute to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Here, the second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode, but while the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode is higher than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode is the same as that of the first switching mode. In other words, when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without change. In such a configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a state in which it is practically impossible to enter the ball (a state in which the receiving period described later is extremely short), it is likely to give the player the impression that it is annoying, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the third switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path is guided to the starting ball entry section via the first flow path, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path is prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, by allowing the flow of game balls into the variable mechanism by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first switching mode, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls entering. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the effect of increasing the level of attention described above.

In addition, since the movable piece (distribution section) starts to move toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution section, it is possible to buy time to displace the distribution section from the first flow path forming position to the second flow path forming position. This is preferable in terms of suppressing excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Feature U4. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern in the operation port display section D2) being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, counting this as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface portions 904G to 904I) that distributes the game ball to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface portions 903G to 903I) that guides the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and is configured such that when the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the distribution section is located at a first flow path forming position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is arranged at the second position, the distribution section is located at a position that forms the second flow path.
In the play area, a first inflow passage (first route R1) and a second inflow passage (second route R2) are formed as inflow passages leading to an inlet portion of the variable mechanism,
A moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inlet passage is configured to be slower than a moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inlet passage,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the variable mechanism control means drives and controls the drive unit so that the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution part, and, when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the control means drives and controls the drive unit so that the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution part.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than that in the first switching mode, while the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode not via the special game state is the same as that in the first switching mode. In other words, when the first switching mode is changed from the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In this configuration, if you try to increase the probability of winning the support lottery to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery will increase even in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is short, and the chances of the variable mechanism being in the receiving state will also increase. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a state where it is essentially impossible to score a ball (a state in which the receiving period, described below, is extremely short), it is likely to give the player the impression that it is annoying, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the third switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path is guided to the starting ball entry section via the first flow path, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path is prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, by allowing the flow of game balls into the variable mechanism by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first switching mode, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls entering. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the effect of increasing the level of attention described above.

In addition, since the movable piece (distribution section) starts to move toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution section, it is possible to buy time to displace the distribution section from the first flow path forming position to the second flow path forming position. This is preferable in terms of suppressing excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Incidentally, it is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature U5. A gaming machine according to Feature U3 or Feature U4, characterized in that the output period of the drive signal by the variable mechanism control means when the switching control mode is the first switching mode is set to be longer than the period required for a gaming ball that has passed through the inlet part of the variable mechanism via the second inflow path to reach the distribution part.

In the configuration shown in this characteristic, a game ball that flows into the variable mechanism via the second inlet passage can enter the starting ball entry section. In this way, a configuration that allows room for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section even during the first switching mode is preferable in terms of encouraging attention to the movement of the movable piece, etc., even in the first switching mode.

Feature U6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features U3 to U5, characterized in that the number of gaming balls flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inlet passage is greater than the number of gaming balls flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the second inlet passage.

By making it difficult for the first flow path, which is the main inlet path to the variable mechanism, to enter the starting ball entry section, the effects shown in feature U3 etc. can be effectively achieved.

Feature U7: The variable mechanism has a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and is configured such that a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the accepted state, and the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the non-accepted state,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features U3 to U6, characterized in that when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a gaming ball is located in the distribution unit of the movable piece, the variable mechanism is configured so that the direction in which the movable piece is displaced when pushed by the gaming ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.

As shown by this feature, when the output of the drive vibration is stopped and a game ball is located in the distribution section, the game ball pushes the movable piece to the second position. This makes it possible to prevent a game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path from entering the starting ball entry section in the first switching mode, while making it possible to lengthen the output period of the drive signal in the first switching mode as much as possible.

Feature U8. The variable mechanism is configured such that when a game ball is located at a predetermined portion of the guide portion (a portion upstream of the virtual line FL2), the game ball acts to push the movable piece to the first position,
The gaming machine described in feature U7, characterized in that the output period of a drive signal by the variable mechanism control means when the switching control mode is the first switching mode is specified to be shorter than the period required for a gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution section, and longer than the period required for the gaming ball to pass through the specified portion.

By specifying the output period of the drive signal during the first switching mode to be shorter than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow passage to reach the distribution section and longer than the period required for the game ball to pass through the specified portion, the weight of the game ball located on the movable piece is prevented from acting to prevent the movable piece from displacing to the second position, and responsiveness when switching to the non-receiving state can be improved.

Feature U9. The variable mechanism has a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and is configured such that a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the accepted state, and the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the non-accepted state,
The variable mechanism is configured such that, when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and the movable piece is located at a specific portion (a portion downstream of the virtual line FL2) including the distribution unit, the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by being pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features U3 to U6, characterized in that the output period of a drive signal by the variable mechanism control means when the switching control mode is the first switching mode is specified to be shorter than the period required for a gaming ball that has passed through the inlet part of the variable mechanism via the first flow path to reach the distribution part, and longer than the period required for the gaming ball to reach the specific part at the specific part.

As shown by this feature, in a configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to push the movable piece to the second position, the game ball's own weight and biasing force can be used to start the ball's displacement to the second position prior to reaching the sorting section, thereby favorably improving responsiveness when switching to a non-accepting state.

Feature U10. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface portions 904G to 904I) that distributes the game ball to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface portions 903G to 903I) that guides the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and is configured such that when the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the distribution section is located at a first flow path forming position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is arranged at the second position, the distribution section is located at a position that forms the second flow path.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to drive and control the drive unit so that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion to reach the start ball entry portion, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the control means drives and controls the drive unit so that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion to reach the distribution portion and the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the period required for the game ball to reach the start ball entry portion.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than that in the first switching mode, while the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode not via the special game state is the same as that in the first switching mode. In other words, when the first switching mode is changed from the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In this configuration, if you try to increase the probability of winning the support lottery to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery will increase even in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is short, and the chances of the variable mechanism being in the receiving state will also increase. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a state where it is essentially impossible to score a ball (a state in which the receiving period, described below, is extremely short), it is likely to give the player the impression that it is annoying, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the third switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is guided to the starting ball entry section through the first flow path, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first switching mode and allowing game balls to flow into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls flowing in. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the effect of increasing the level of attention described above.

In addition, because the movable piece (distribution part) starts to displace toward the second position when the game ball is located on the distribution part, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the movable piece from being disturbed by speed changes during the displacement process. This is preferable in terms of improving the operational stability of the movable piece.

Incidentally, it is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature U11. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that the movable piece is in the accepting state when displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-accepting state when displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The movable piece has a distribution section (second surface portions 904G to 904I) that distributes the game ball to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section, and a guide section (first surface portions 903G to 903I) that guides the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inlet 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and is configured such that when the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the distribution section is located at a first flow path forming position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is arranged at the second position, the distribution section is located at a position that forms the second flow path.
In the play area, a first inflow passage (first route R1) and a second inflow passage (second route R2) are formed as inflow passages leading to an inlet portion of the variable mechanism,
A moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inlet passage is configured to be slower than a moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inlet passage,
The variable mechanism control means is configured to drive and control the drive unit so that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion via the first inflow path to reach the start ball entry portion, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion via the first inflow path to reach the distribution portion and the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the period required for the game ball to reach the start ball entry portion.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than that in the first switching mode, while the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode not via the special game state is the same as that in the first switching mode. In other words, when the first switching mode is changed from the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In this configuration, if you try to increase the probability of winning the support lottery to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery will increase even in the first switching mode, where the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is short, and the chances of the variable mechanism being in the receiving state will also increase. In this configuration, if the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a state where it is essentially impossible to score a ball (a state in which the receiving period, described below, is extremely short), it is likely to give the player the impression that it is annoying, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the third switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path is guided to the starting ball entry section via the first flow path, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path is prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, by allowing the flow of game balls into the variable mechanism by ensuring a certain period of time (receiving period) during which the receiving state is maintained even in the first switching mode, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the player's impression. Furthermore, it is possible to preferably suppress excessive balls entering the starting ball entry section due to an increase in the number of balls entering. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the effect of increasing the level of attention described above.

In addition, because the movable piece (distribution part) starts to displace toward the second position when the game ball is located on the distribution part, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the movable piece from being disturbed by speed changes during the displacement process. This is preferable in terms of improving the operational stability of the movable piece.

Incidentally, it is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

The technical ideas shown in Features U5 to U9 above may also be applied to Features U10 to U11.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to T may be applied to features U1 to U11.

<Feature V Group>
The following feature V group has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature V1. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (e.g., the operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901J) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that makes it more difficult for the game ball to flow into the flow path than the first position, a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the accepting state, and the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the non-accepting state,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
When the movable piece is disposed in the first position, the movable piece forms a rolling surface for the game ball in the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion,
The variable mechanism is configured so that when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is located at a specific portion of the movable piece (a portion of movable pieces 901G to 901J that is downstream of virtual line FL2, for example, second surface portions 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced when pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.

As shown in this feature, the use of the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode in combination can contribute to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode is higher than that of the first switching mode, whereas the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode is the same as that of the first switching mode. In other words, when the first switching mode is changed to the third switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without change. Therefore, if one tries to increase the winning probability of the support lottery in order to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the opportunities to win the support lottery will increase even in the first switching mode, in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is short, and the opportunities to enter the starting ball entry section will also increase. This is assumed to be an obstacle to increasing the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit is stopped and the state is switched to the non-receiving state, the game ball already moving through the flow path toward the starting ball entry section can be prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. Specifically, when the game ball is located on a specific part of the rolling surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball pushes the movable piece to the second position (return). In other words, when the movable piece returns to the second position, the movable piece can be quickly returned to the second position by using the biasing force of the biasing means and the weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface (specific part). As a result, even if there are more opportunities to win the support lottery in the first switching mode in which the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is short, the frequent occurrence of balls entering the starting ball entry section can be suppressed, and the above concerns can be suitably eliminated. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. It is possible to take measures such as making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state (receiving period) extremely short (for example, 0.01 seconds) in the first switching mode, making it practically impossible for a ball to be scored; however, frequent behavior of such a variable mechanism (movable piece) can easily give the player the impression that it is annoying, and is a concern that this may hinder efforts to increase attention to the game. In this regard, the configuration shown in this characteristic makes it possible to reduce the opportunities for a ball to be scored in the starting ball scoring section while avoiding an excessively short receiving period during the first switching mode. This allows the aforementioned effect of increasing attention to be exerted even more effectively.

Feature V2. A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (e.g., the operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901J) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the game ball from flowing into the flow path from the first position, a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured so that a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the accepting state, and the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the non-accepting state,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
When the movable piece is disposed in the first position, the movable piece forms a rolling surface for the game ball in the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion,
The variable mechanism is configured so that when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is located at a specific portion of the rolling surface (a portion of movable pieces 901G to 901J that is downstream of virtual line FL2, for example, second surface portions 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced when pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the second switching mode via the special game state is higher than that in the first switching mode, while the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode not via the special game state is the same as that in the first switching mode. In other words, when the first switching mode is changed from the third switching mode without going through the special game state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. Therefore, if the support function in the third switching mode is to be strengthened and the winning probability of the support lottery is increased, the chances of winning the support lottery will increase even in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a short period of time, and the chances of the ball entering the starting ball entry section will also increase. This is assumed to be an obstacle to increasing the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit is stopped and the state is switched to the non-receiving state, the game ball that is already moving through the flow path toward the starting ball entry section can be prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. Specifically, when a game ball is located on a specific part of the rolling surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball pushes the displacement (return) of the movable piece to the second position. In other words, when the movable piece returns to the second position, the movable piece can be quickly returned to the second position by utilizing the biasing force of the biasing means and the weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface (specific part). As a result, even if there are more chances of winning the support lottery in the first switching mode in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is short, the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section can be suppressed, and the above concerns can be suitably eliminated. This is preferable in terms of increasing the attention to the game. It is possible to take measures such as making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state (receiving period) extremely short (for example, 0.01 sec, etc.) in the first switching mode to make it practically impossible to enter the ball, but the frequent behavior of such a variable mechanism (movable piece) is likely to give the player an impression of being bothersome, and there is a concern that this will hinder efforts to increase the attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this characteristic, it is possible to reduce the chances of balls entering the starting ball entry section while avoiding the receiving period during the first switching mode being excessively short. This makes it possible to more suitably exert the above-mentioned effect of increasing the attention to the game.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature V3. The gaming machine described in Feature V1 or Feature V2, characterized in that the variable mechanism has a deceleration means (second end 909G-909J) that decelerates the gaming ball that has reached the specific portion.

As shown in feature V1, etc., in a configuration in which the weight of a game ball located at a specific part is used to assist the return of the movable piece to the second position, the return assistance function can be stably exerted by decelerating the game ball that has reached the specific part. This makes it possible to prevent excessive balls from entering the starting ball entry part.

Feature V4. The movable piece is supported rotatably around a central axis (central axis CL10) extending in the thickness direction of the game board, and is displaced from the second position to the first position by rotating in a first direction (first predetermined direction) around the central axis, and is displaced from the first position to the second position by rotating in a second direction (second predetermined direction) opposite to the first direction around the central axis.
The rolling surface is configured to be inclined downwardly toward the starting ball entry portion when the movable piece is disposed at the first position,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features V1 to V3, characterized in that the specific portion is formed in a specific range on the rolling surface between the central axis and the end portion on the starting ball entry portion side, and includes the end portion on the rolling surface on the starting ball entry portion side.

When the movable piece is of a rotating type, the above-mentioned specific portion is formed so as to include the end of the rolling surface on the starting ball entry side between the central axis and the end on the starting ball entry side, thereby making it possible to optimally exert the function of pushing the movable piece back to the second position with the weight of the game ball (return assistance function).

Feature V5. The starting ball entry section opens to the front of the gaming machine,
The movable pieces are located forward of the starting ball entry portion and are disposed on the left and right sides of the starting ball entry portion,
the variable mechanism is configured such that, when the movable pieces are disposed at the first position, a gap smaller than a diameter of a game ball is formed between the specific portions of the movable pieces;
The gaming machine described in feature V4, wherein the specific portion is inclined backward so as to be able to guide a gaming ball stuck in the gap toward the opening.

According to the configuration shown in feature V5, the game ball that reaches the specific part is supported at a position straddling the movable pieces, and is guided to the starting ball entry part via the specific part. If the game ball is configured to fit into such a gap, it is possible to suppress disturbance of the game ball's behavior at the specific part and to optimally perform the above-mentioned return assistance function. In addition, by increasing the distance from the center of rotation to the point of contact with the game ball on the rolling surface, the weight of the game ball can be optimally utilized.

Feature V6. The gaming machine described in Feature V5, characterized in that the gap is expanded by the movable piece disposed at the first position rotating in the second direction, and it becomes impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section through the specific portion before the gap is expanded to be larger than the diameter dimension of the gaming ball.

The gap is expanded when the movable piece is pushed by the game ball stuck in the gap. At this time, the height position of the game ball supported by the movable piece also changes (drops). When this gap becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, the game ball loses its support and falls through the gap. In this configuration, it becomes impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section through the specific part before the gap becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, thereby making it possible to suitably improve responsiveness when preventing the ball from entering the gap.

Feature V7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features V1 to V6, characterized in that the movable piece is formed with a restricting portion (e.g., step portion 906I) that restricts the gaming ball from returning to a non-specific portion (e.g., first surface portion 903I) that is a portion of the rolling surface other than the specific portion when the gaming ball reaches the specific portion.

As shown in feature V1, etc., in a configuration that uses the weight of the game ball to push the movable piece back to the second position, it is expected that the return assistance function will not be properly performed due to disturbances in the behavior of the game ball on the movable piece (rolling surface). Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is used that restricts the game ball from returning after reaching a specific part, it is possible to prevent the return assistance function from being properly performed.

Feature V8. The gaming machine described in Feature V7, wherein the regulating portion is a step formed at the boundary between the specific portion and the non-specific portion.

As shown by this feature, by making the boundary between the specific portion and the non-specific portion step-shaped, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has reached the specific portion from returning to the non-specific portion with a simple structure.

Feature V9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features V1 to V8, characterized in that the specific portion is formed so that, when the movable piece is disposed in the first position, the component that faces upward is greater than the non-specific portion, which is the portion of the rolling surface other than the specific portion.

As shown by this feature, when the movable piece is positioned in the first position, the specific part of the rolling surface is configured to have a larger component facing upward than the non-specific part, thereby making it possible to efficiently convert the weight of the game ball into a force that rotates the movable piece.

Feature V10 (zero). A game board (game board 80aG) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901J) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position (closed position) that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, a biasing means (spring member) that biases the movable piece toward the second position, and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and is configured such that a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the accepting state, and the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means to enter the non-accepting state,
When the movable piece is disposed in the first position, the movable piece forms a rolling surface for the game ball in the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion,
The variable mechanism is configured so that when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and a game ball is located at a specific portion of the movable piece (a portion of movable pieces 901G to 901J that is downstream of virtual line FL2, for example, second surface portions 904G to 904I), the direction in which the movable piece is displaced when pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means.

In the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit is stopped and the state is switched to the non-receiving state, the game ball already moving through the flow path toward the starting ball entry section can also be prevented from entering the starting ball entry section. Specifically, when the game ball is located on a specific part of the rolling surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball pushes the movable piece to the second position (return). In other words, when the movable piece returns to the second position, the movable piece can be quickly returned to the second position by using the biasing force of the biasing means and the weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface (specific part). In addition, depending on the game situation, it is possible to take measures such as making the period (receiving period) during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state extremely short (for example, 0.01 sec, etc.) to make it practically impossible for the ball to enter, but it is concerned that frequent behavior of such a variable mechanism (movable piece) will easily give the player the impression that it is annoying, etc., and will hinder efforts to increase attention to the game. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature makes it possible to reduce the chances of the ball scoring in the starting scoring area while still ensuring a certain amount of reception time.

The technical ideas shown in Features V3 to V9 above may also be applied to Feature V10.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to U may be applied to features V1 to V10.

<Feature W group>
The following feature group W has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," in which "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to facilitate the smooth progress of the game."

Feature W1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode A) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first mode,
The second mode is defined so that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first mode;
A second gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second mode is provided,
a special transition means for transitioning to the second game state without passing through the special game state when a special condition (a special miss result, reaching a ceiling) is established in the first game state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and an ending part that is executed after the main part ends and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state,
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when variable display of the picture is started on the picture display section during the first game state.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed without going through a special game state, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level can be diversified, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. When a special condition is met to transition from the first game state to the second game state, even though the game has internally transitioned to the second game state, the period until the benefit of the transition (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, which reduces the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes noticeable, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the second game state over the first game state, it is not desirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the picture in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the variable display period of the picture.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the superiority of the second game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the second game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this feature, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is a period of the same length as the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the variable display of the picture is started during the first game state, or a period shorter than said sum. This configuration allows the above effects to be optimally achieved.

Feature W2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a special condition (a special miss result, reaching a ceiling) is established in the first gaming state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and an ending part that is executed after the main part ends and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state,
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when variable display of the picture is started on the picture display section during the first game state.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if a special condition is established, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when the first game state is transitioned to the third game state via the special game state, a set number of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until the player can enjoy another benefit becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained and the game state is transitioned from the first game state to the third game state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefit (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, even though the game state has been internally transitioned to the third game state, and the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that they could hinder players' motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the advantage of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this feature, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the variable display of the picture is started during the first game state. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned effect can be preferably exerted.

Feature W3. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and an ending part that is executed after the main part ends and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state,
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when variable display of the picture is started on the picture display section during the first game state.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when moving from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from moving to the third switching mode until the other benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In contrast, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the transition to the third gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, reducing the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes significant, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is not preferable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the advantage of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this feature, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the variable display of the picture is started during the first game state. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned effect can be preferably exerted.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature W4. A gaming machine as described in Feature W2 or Feature W3, characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first gaming state is configured to be shorter than the variable display period when variable display of the picture is started on the picture display unit during the first gaming state.

During the ending part, the player is likely to get the impression that the timing at which the support game stops and the player can enjoy the benefit is being unnecessarily delayed. In contrast, this impression is unlikely to be given while the variable display of the pictures is being executed. Therefore, if the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured not to exceed the variable display period when the variable display of the pictures is started during the first game state, there will be fewer opportunities for the second transition means to transition to the third game state during the ending part than during the variable display of the pictures. This can alleviate the above concerns.

Feature W5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features W2 to W4, characterized in that the execution period of the support game when the support game is started during the first gaming state is configured to be a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when variable display of the picture is started on the picture display unit during the first gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the execution period of the support game is configured not to exceed the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period, the effects shown in feature W2 etc. can be effectively achieved.

Feature W6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features W2 to W5, characterized in that the sum of the execution period of the ending part and the execution period of the main part when the support game is started during the first gaming state is configured to be a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when variable display of a picture is started on the picture display unit during the first gaming state.

As shown in the configuration of this feature, by determining the execution period of the main part and the ending part according to the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period, the effect of the smoothing shown in feature W2 etc. can be more effectively achieved.

Feature W7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features W2 to W6, characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state is configured to be shorter than the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state.

If an ending part is provided, it is expected that the presence of the ending part will hinder smooth game progress in the third game state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the execution period of the ending part to be shortened in the third game state, such concerns can be eliminated.

Feature W8. The support game includes an opening part that is executed before the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features W2 to W7, characterized in that the sum of the execution period of the opening part, the execution period of the main part, and the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when variable display of the picture is started in the picture display section during the first game state.

When the delays shown in feature W2 occur, there is a concern that the delays will be concentrated in one area, causing stress to the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above concerns can be alleviated by distributing an opening part and an ending part before and after the main part, and dividing the delay period between these parts.

Feature W9. The execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first gaming state is configured to be shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the variable display of the picture is started on the picture display unit during the first gaming state;
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, a variable display period of the picture in the picture display section is configured to be shorter than that in the first gaming state,
When the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the picture display unit is executing a variable display of a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result, the support game corresponds to the third game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features W2 to W8, characterized in that when the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the third game state.

When the game state transitions to the third game state during the variable display of the image in the first game state (corresponding to a winning result), the support game corresponds to the third game state. By configuring the game state so that the switch to the receiving state corresponding to the third game state is not carried over until the next support lottery → winning result, it is possible to contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player. In contrast, when the game state transitions to the third game state when the support game has already started (during support game), it becomes necessary to win the subsequent support lottery and execute the support game. In this way, the support game is executed via at least one support lottery and variable display of the image, so the delay period may be longer than when the game state transitions to the third game state during variable display. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the execution period of the ending part when a support game is started during the first game state to be shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when variable display of images is started during the first game state, it is possible to prevent the period until the variable mechanism enters the accepting state from becoming extremely long, even if a transition to the third game state occurs during a support game and the support lottery is subsequently won and the support game is executed.

Feature W10. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and an ending part that is executed after the main part ends and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state,
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
A gaming machine characterized in that the sum of the execution period of the ending part and the execution period of the main part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when variable display of the picture is started on the picture display section during the first game state.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when moving from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a group of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from moving to the third switching mode until the other benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In contrast, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the transition to the third gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, reducing the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes significant, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display period and the ending period (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the advantage of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this feature, the sum of the execution period of the ending part and the execution period of the main part when the support game is started during the first game state is a period of the same length as or shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the variable display of the picture is started during the first game state. This configuration allows the above effects to be optimally achieved.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

The technical ideas shown in features W4 to W9 above may also be applied to features W1 and W10.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to V may be applied to features W1 to W10.

<Characteristics Group X>
The following feature X group has been made in consideration of the background and problems, etc., that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to facilitate smooth progress of the game," with regard to the background technology that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a game area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the game area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The ball entrance section is made variable and is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state according to the game situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)."

Feature X1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode A) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first mode,
The second mode is defined so that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first mode;
A second gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second mode is provided,
a special transition means for transitioning to the second game state without passing through the special game state when a special condition (a special miss result, reaching a ceiling) is established in the first game state;
When a transition to the third game state is made by the second transition means during the support game, the period required for the player to enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition, and when a transition to the third game state is made by the second transition means during the variably displayed picture, the period required for the player to enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the longest period of time required when transitioning to the third game state during the support game is the same or approximately the same as the longest period of time required when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the image.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed without going through a special game state, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level can be diversified, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. When a special condition is met to transition from the first game state to the second game state, even though the game has internally transitioned to the second game state, the period until the benefit of the transition (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, which reduces the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes noticeable, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

Here, as shown in this feature, when a transition to the second game state occurs during a support game, the period required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the second game state differs depending on the timing of the transition, and when a transition to the second game state occurs during variable display of pictures, the period required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the second game state differs depending on the timing of the transition, in a configuration in which the delay period is greatly influenced by the length of the support game execution period and the length of the variable display period. In other words, the longer the remaining period at the timing of the transition, the longer the delay period, and the shorter the remaining period, the shorter the delay period. Therefore, if the longest period required to transition to the second game state during a support game is set to be the same or approximately the same as the longest period required to transition to the second game state during variable display of the image, the delay period can be prevented from becoming extremely long (the maximum value becomes extremely large) in either the case where the transition occurs during a support game or the case where the transition occurs during variable display, which contributes to smooth game progress. This is preferable in terms of optimally demonstrating the increased attention to the game due to the diversification of the game.

Incidentally, "the longest period of time required to transition to the third game state during the support game and the longest period of time required to transition to the third game state while the image is being variably displayed" being "substantially the same" means that the player recognizes these longest periods of time as being the same, and includes cases where the difference is kept to around 10%, for example.

Feature X2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a special condition (a special miss result, reaching a ceiling) is established in the first gaming state;
When a transition to the third game state is made by the second transition means during the support game, the period required for the player to enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition, and when a transition to the third game state is made by the second transition means during the variably displayed picture, the period required for the player to enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the longest period of time required when transitioning to the third game state during the support game is the same or approximately the same as the longest period of time required when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the image.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if a special condition is established, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when the first game state is transitioned to the third game state via the special game state, a set number of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until the player can enjoy another benefit becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained and the game state is transitioned from the first game state to the third game state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefit (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, even though the game state has been internally transitioned to the third game state, and the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that they could hinder players' motivation to play.

Here, as shown in this feature, when a transition to the third game state occurs during a support game, the period required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition, and when a transition to the third game state occurs during variable display of pictures, the period required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition, in a configuration in which the delay period is greatly influenced by the length of the support game execution period and the length of the variable display period. In other words, the longer the remaining period at the timing of the transition, the longer the delay period, and the shorter the remaining period, the shorter the delay period. Therefore, if the longest period required to transition to the third game state during a support game is set to be the same or approximately the same as the longest period required to transition to the third game state during variable display of the image, the delay period can be prevented from becoming extremely long (the maximum value becomes extremely large) in either the case where the transition occurs during a support game or the case where the transition occurs during variable display, which contributes to smooth game progress. This is preferable in terms of optimally demonstrating the increased attention to the game due to the diversification of the game.

Note that "the longest period of time required to transition to the third game state during the support game and the longest period of time required to transition to the third game state while the image is being variably displayed" being "substantially the same" means that the player recognizes these longest periods of time as being the same, and includes cases where the difference is kept to around 10%, for example.

Feature X3. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
When a transition to the third game state is made by the second transition means during the support game, the period required for the player to enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition, and when a transition to the third game state is made by the second transition means during the variably displayed picture, the period required for the player to enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the longest period of time required when transitioning to the third game state during the support game is configured to be the same or approximately the same as the longest period of time required when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the image.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when moving from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a group of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from moving to the third switching mode until the other benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In contrast, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the transition to the third gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, reducing the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes significant, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

Here, as shown in this feature, when a transition to the third game state occurs during a support game, the period required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition, and when a transition to the third game state occurs during variable display of pictures, the period required until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third game state differs depending on the timing of the transition, in a configuration in which the delay period is greatly influenced by the length of the support game execution period and the length of the variable display period. In other words, the longer the remaining period at the timing of the transition, the longer the delay period, and the shorter the remaining period, the shorter the delay period. Therefore, if the longest period required to transition to the third game state during a support game is set to be the same or approximately the same as the longest period required to transition to the third game state during variable display of the image, the delay period can be prevented from becoming extremely long (the maximum value becomes extremely large) in either the case where the transition occurs during a support game or the case where the transition occurs during variable display, which contributes to smooth game progress. This is preferable in terms of optimally demonstrating the increased attention to the game due to the diversification of the game.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Incidentally, "the longest period of time required to transition to the third game state during the support game and the longest period of time required to transition to the third game state while the image is being variably displayed" being "substantially the same" means that the player recognizes these longest periods of time as being the same, and includes cases where the difference is kept to around 10%, for example.

Feature X4. When the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the picture display unit is executing a variable display of a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result, the support game corresponds to the third game state,
When the game state is transitioned to the third game state by the second transition means while the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed, the support game remains the one corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the third game state,
The gaming machine according to feature X2 or feature X3, characterized in that the longest period of time required when the game state is transitioned to the third game state during the support game is shorter than the longest period of time required when the game state is transitioned to the third game state during the variable display of the picture.

When the game state is transitioned to the third game state during the variable display of the image in the first normal game state (corresponding to a winning result), the support game corresponds to the third game state. By configuring the game state so that the switching to the receiving state corresponding to the third game state is not carried over until the next support lottery → winning result, it is possible to contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player. In contrast, when the game state is transitioned to the third game state under a situation where the support game has already started (during the support game), it is necessary to win the subsequent support lottery and execute the support game. In this way, since the support game is executed through at least one support lottery and variable display of the image, the period until the variable mechanism becomes the receiving state may be longer than when the game state is transitioned to the third game state during the variable display. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above concern can be alleviated by making the longest period required when the game state is transitioned to the third game state during the support game shorter than the longest period required when the game state is transitioned to the third game state during the variable display of the image.

Feature X5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features X2 to X4, characterized in that the support game has a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and a standby part that is executed at least either before or after the execution of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state.

In the configuration shown in this characteristic, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the standby part to be executed at least either before or after the execution of the main part of the support game. Specifically, by providing a standby part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, the increase in frequency can be suppressed even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the image is reduced. In addition, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (e.g., smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensure the advantage of the third game state, while suppressing the length of time until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smooth game progress).

Feature X6. During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
A gaming machine according to any one of features X2 to X5, characterized in that a sum of an execution period of the main part and an execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first gaming state is configured to be the same or approximately the same as a sum of a variable display period and a fixed display period when variable display of a picture is started on the picture display unit during the first gaming state.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the standby part to be executed at least either before or after the execution of the main part of the support game. Specifically, by providing the standby part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the advantage of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this feature, the sum of the execution period of the main part and the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state is the same or approximately the same as the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the variable display of the picture is started during the first game state. This configuration allows the above effects to be optimally achieved.

Feature X7. The gaming machine described in Feature X6 is configured so that the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state is longer than the execution period of the main part.

The configuration shown in this feature allows the effect shown in feature X6 to be effectively achieved.

The technical ideas shown in Features X4 to X7 above may also be applied to Feature X1.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to W may be applied to features X1 to X7.

<Characteristic Group Y>
The following feature Y group has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," in which "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to facilitate the smooth progress of the game."

Feature Y1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode A) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first mode,
The second mode is defined so that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first mode;
A second gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second mode is provided,
a special transition means for transitioning to the second game state without passing through the special game state when a special condition (a special miss result, reaching a ceiling) is established in the first game state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and an ending part that is executed after the main part ends and maintains the variable mechanism in a non-accepting state,
A first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided as an execution period of the ending part,
The support game execution means is characterized in that it has a means for setting the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state as the first period, and for setting the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the second game state as the second period.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed without going through a special game state, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level can be diversified, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. When a special condition is met to transition from the first game state to the second game state, even though the game has internally transitioned to the second game state, the period until the benefit of the transition (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, which reduces the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes noticeable, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the second game state over the first game state, it is not desirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the picture in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the variable display period of the picture.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the superiority of the second game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the second game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). However, if an ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the ending part will hinder smooth game progress in the second game state. Therefore, as shown in this characteristic, such concerns can be eliminated by configuring the execution period of the ending part to be shortened in the second game state.

Feature Y2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a special condition (a special miss result, reaching a ceiling) is established in the first gaming state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and an ending part that is executed after the main part ends and maintains the variable mechanism in a non-accepting state,
A first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided as an execution period of the ending part,
The support game execution means is characterized in that it has a means for setting the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state as the first period, and for setting the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state as the second period.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if a special condition is established, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when the first game state is transitioned to the third game state via the special game state, a set number of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until the player can enjoy another benefit becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained and the game state is transitioned from the first game state to the third game state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefit (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, even though the game state has been internally transitioned to the third game state, and the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that they could hinder players' motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the superiority of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). However, if an ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the ending part will hinder smooth game progress in the third game state. Therefore, by configuring the execution period of the ending part to be shortened in the third game state as shown in this characteristic, such concerns can be eliminated.

Feature Y3. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern in the operation port display section D2) being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, counting this as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and an ending part that is executed after the main part ends and maintains the variable mechanism in a non-accepting state,
A first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided as an execution period of the ending part,
The support game execution means is characterized in that it has a means for setting the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state as the first period, and for setting the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state as the second period.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when moving from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a group of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from moving to the third switching mode until the other benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In contrast, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the transition to the third gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, reducing the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes significant, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the superiority of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). However, if an ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the ending part will hinder smooth game progress in the third game state. Therefore, by configuring the execution period of the ending part to be shortened in the third game state as shown in this characteristic, such concerns can be eliminated.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature Y4. A gaming machine according to feature Y2 or feature Y3, characterized in that when the support game is started during the first gaming state, the execution period of the ending part constituting the support game is longer than the execution period of the main part constituting the support game, and when the support game is started during the third gaming state, the execution period of the ending part constituting the support game is shorter than the execution period of the main part constituting the support game.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the game so that the main part becomes dominant when a support game is started during the third game state, and the ending part becomes dominant when a support game is started during the first game state, the effects shown in feature Y2 etc. can be more effectively achieved.

Feature Y5. During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
A gaming machine described in any one of features Y2 to Y4, characterized in that when the support game is started during the first game state, the support game is continued from the start of the ending part until the first period has elapsed, even if the support game is transitioned to the third game state by the second transition means during the support game.

This characteristic configuration can help reduce the variance in the delay period while preventing the frequency of winning the support lottery in the first game state and causing the variable mechanism to enter the accepting state from increasing.

Feature Y6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features Y2 to Y5, characterized in that the second period is defined to be shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the variable display of the image on the image display section is executed in the third gaming state.

As shown in this feature, by making the second period set during the third game state shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the image, it is possible to make the existence of the ending part less noticeable. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the existence of the ending part is bothersome.

Feature Y7. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern in the operation port display section D2) being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, counting this as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the receiving state by the variable mechanism control means, and a standby part that is executed either before or after the execution of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-receiving state;
A first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided as an execution period of the standby part,
The support game execution means is characterized in that it has a means for setting the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state as the first period, and for setting the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the third game state as the second period.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when moving from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a group of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from moving to the third switching mode until the other benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In contrast, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the transition to the third gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, reducing the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes significant, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the standby part to be executed either before or after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the standby part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the superiority of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). However, if a standby part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the standby part will hinder smooth game progress in the third game state. Therefore, by configuring the execution period of the standby part to be shortened in the third game state as shown in this characteristic, such concerns can be eliminated.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature Y8. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and an ending part that is executed after the main part ends and maintains the variable mechanism in a non-accepting state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first gaming state is configured to be different from the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when moving from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a large number of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from moving to the third switching mode until the other benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In contrast, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the transition to the third gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, reducing the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes significant, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the advantage of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). If the execution time of the ending part is configured to be different between when the support game is started during the first game state and when the support game is started during the third game state, it can contribute to further smooth game progress as described above.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in Features Y4 to Y6 above may also be applied to Features Y1, Y7, and Y8.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to X may be applied to features Y1 to Y8.

<Characteristics Group Z>
The following feature Z group has been made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payment of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is made variable and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," in which "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to facilitate the smooth progress of the game."

Feature Z1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching mechanism (110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern in the operation port display section D2) being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, counting this as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode A) are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, the second mode being set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first mode,
The second mode is defined so that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first mode;
A second gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second mode is provided,
a special transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a special condition (a special miss result, reaching a ceiling) is established in the first gaming state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and a standby part that is executed at least one of before and after the execution of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state,
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
In the second gaming state, a variable display period of the picture in the picture display section is configured to be shorter than that in the first gaming state,
When the special transition means transitions to the second game state while the picture display unit is executing a variable display of a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result, the support game corresponds to the second game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a transition to the second game state is made by the special transition means while a support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the second game state.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed without going through a special game state, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher level can be diversified, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous. When a special condition is met to transition from the first game state to the second game state, even though the game has internally transitioned to the second game state, the period until the benefit of the transition (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, which reduces the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes noticeable, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the second game state over the first game state, it is not desirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the picture in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the variable display period of the picture.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing a standby part in the support game, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensure the superiority of the second game state, while suppressing the length of time until the benefit of the second game state can be enjoyed (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this feature, when transitioning to the second game state during the variable display of the picture, the benefit can be enjoyed from the current support game. On the other hand, when transitioning to the third game state during the support game, the variable display period of the picture is delayed by the standby part, but from the next time, the variable display period of the picture is shortened. In other words, delays caused by waiting parts and delays caused by long-term variable displays do not occur at the same time, and excessive delays are suppressed, so the disadvantages of having waiting parts can be reduced.

Feature Z2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern in the operation port display section D2) being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, counting this as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the passing of the game ball through a passing part (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a special condition (a special miss result, reaching a ceiling) is established in the first gaming state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and a standby part that is executed at least one of before and after the execution of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state,
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, a variable display period of the picture in the picture display section is configured to be shorter than that in the first gaming state,
When the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the picture display unit is executing a variable display of a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result, the support game corresponds to the third game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the third game state.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if a special condition is established, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when the first game state is transitioned to the third game state via the special game state, a set number of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until the player can enjoy another benefit becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained and the game state is transitioned from the first game state to the third game state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefit (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, even though the game state has been internally transitioned to the third game state, and the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that they could hinder players' motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing a standby part in the support game, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the superiority of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this feature, when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the picture, the benefit can be enjoyed from the current support game. On the other hand, when transitioning to the third game state during the support game, although it is delayed by the standby part, the variable display period of the picture is shortened from the next time. In other words, the delay due to the standby part and the delay due to the long-term variable display do not occur at the same time, and excessive delays are suppressed, so the disadvantages caused by providing a standby part can be suppressed.

Feature Z3. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment,
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first game state;
The support game includes a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and a standby part that is executed at least one of before and after the execution of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state,
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, a variable display period of the picture in the picture display section is configured to be shorter than that in the first gaming state,
When the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the picture display unit is executing a variable display of a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result, the support game corresponds to the third game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the third game state.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when moving from the first game state to the third game state via the special game state, a group of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from moving to the third switching mode until the other benefit can be enjoyed becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. In contrast, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is reached and a transition is made from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the transition to the third gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, reducing the smoothness of game progress. If such a delay becomes significant, it is feared that it will hinder efforts to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing a standby part in the support game, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the standby part side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the superiority of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this feature, when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the picture, the benefit can be enjoyed from the current support game. On the other hand, when transitioning to the third game state during the support game, although it is delayed by the standby part, the variable display period of the picture is shortened from the next time. In other words, the delay due to the standby part and the delay due to the long-term variable display do not occur at the same time, and excessive delays are suppressed, so the disadvantages caused by providing a standby part can be suppressed.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this characteristic to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature Z4. A first display period and a second display period shorter than the first display period are provided as a variable display period of the picture in the picture display section,
the display control means has means for setting the first display period as a variable display period of the picture in the first gaming state, and for setting the second display period as a variable display period of the picture in the third gaming state;
A gaming machine described in feature Z2 or feature Z3, characterized in that the execution period of the support game started in the first gaming state is configured to be a period not exceeding the sum of the first display period and the determined display period of the picture.

After the benefit of the transition to the third gaming state can be enjoyed, the variable mechanism can actually be in an accepting state, and the benefit can be experienced. However, as described above, if the transition to the third gaming state occurs while a support game corresponding to the first gaming state is being executed, the support game remains that corresponding to the first gaming state, and the next support game corresponds to the third gaming state. In this configuration, in order to experience the above benefit, the player must win the support lottery again and go through the variable display and fixed display of the image. For this reason, the period until the benefit can be experienced tends to be long. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by specifying that the execution period of the support game started in the first gaming state is a period not exceeding the sum of the first display period and the fixed display period, the period until the benefit can be experienced can be prevented from being extended even in the above case.

Feature Z5. The display control means, when the game state is transitioned to the third game state by the second transition means while the picture display unit is executing a variable display of a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a non-winning result under the first game state, executes the determination display based on the fact that the first display period has elapsed since the variable display started, and has a means for setting the second display period as the variable display period of the picture after transitioning to the third game state;
The gaming machine described in feature Z4, characterized in that the execution period of the support game started in the first game state is a period not exceeding the sum of the first display period and the fixed display period of the pattern, and the difference from said sum is specified to be smaller than the sum of the second display period and the fixed display period.

If the game state is changed to the third game state while the variable display of the image corresponding to the non-winning result is being executed in the first game state, the variable display continues as it is, and the variable display period is shortened to the second display period from the next time. In this case, in order to experience the above-mentioned benefit, it is necessary to win the support lottery again and go through the variable display and the fixed display of the image. As shown in feature Z4, by specifying the execution period of the support game started in the first game state to be a period not exceeding the sum of the first display period and the fixed display period, it is possible to prevent the period until the benefit can be experienced from being extended even in the above-mentioned case, but if the difference becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult to effectively exert the various effects described above. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the above difference is specified to be smaller than the sum of the second display period and the fixed display period, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature Z6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features Z2 to Z5, characterized in that the waiting part is an ending part that is executed after the main part.

If a support game is started during the first game state, there is a possibility that the game will transition to the third game state after the start of the support game but before the variable mechanism enters the receiving state. Even in such a case, there is a concern that the player's satisfaction will decrease if the receiving state is executed in a manner corresponding to the first game state. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the waiting part is composed of an ending part that is executed after the main part, the opportunities for the above-mentioned events to occur can be reduced, and the existence of the waiting part can be prevented from becoming a factor that reduces the player's desire to play.

Feature Z7. The gaming machine described in Feature Z6 is configured so that the start timing of the support game coincides with the start timing of the main part.

If the game state transitions to the third game state during a support game, the player can experience the benefits of the third game state by winning the support lottery again after the support game ends and triggering a support game. In this configuration, by making the waiting part the ending part, if the player wins the support lottery again and triggers a support game, the variable mechanism quickly switches to the receiving state, and the delay before the benefit can be experienced can be suppressed.

Feature Z8. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating port 92) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern in the operation port display section D2) being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, counting this as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, a first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a big win result) and a second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that executes a support lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area;
A picture display unit (through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display unit so that a variable display of a picture in the picture display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery being performed by the support lottery means, and a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery is definitively displayed;
A variable mechanism (e.g., an electric device 93G) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role opening/closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls the variable mechanism, and a support game execution means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes a support game that switches the variable mechanism to an acceptance state based on the result of the support lottery being a winning result and the display control means having finished displaying the confirmed image.
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
A first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first gaming state;
The support game is composed of a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepting state by the variable mechanism control means, and an ending part which is executed after the execution of the main part and in which the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state,
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the picture are restricted.
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, a variable display period of the picture in the picture display section is configured to be shorter than that in the first gaming state,
When the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the picture display unit is executing a variable display of a picture corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a winning result, the support game corresponds to the third game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second transition means transitions to the third game state while the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state, while the next support game corresponds to the third game state.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if a special condition is established, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, and contributes to suppressing monotony of the game. Here, when the first game state is transitioned to the third game state via the special game state, a set number of game balls can be acquired in the special game state. In other words, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the special game state, even if the period from transitioning to the third switching mode until the player can enjoy another benefit becomes somewhat long, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained and the game state is transitioned from the first game state to the third game state, the period until the player can enjoy the benefit (hereinafter also referred to as the delay period) is extended, even though the game state has been internally transitioned to the third game state, and the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such delays become significant, there are concerns that they could hinder players' motivation to play.

In addition, in order to ensure the superiority of the third game state over the first game state, it is undesirable for the variable mechanism to frequently enter the accepting state in the first game state. To simply reduce the frequency of entering the accepting state, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed in the picture display section, but such measures are expected to increase the maximum value of the delay period by lengthening the period during which the picture is variable displayed.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing an ending part in the support game, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the receiving state during the first game state. In other words, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the picture is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. And, by dividing the delay period into the variable display side and the ending part side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing frequent switching to the receiving state during the first game state and ensuring the superiority of the third game state, it is possible to suppress the period until the benefit of the third game state can be enjoyed from being extended (contributing to smooth game progress). And, in particular, in this feature, when transitioning to the third game state during the variable display of the picture, the benefit can be enjoyed from the current support game. On the other hand, when transitioning to the third game state during the support game, although it is delayed by the ending part, the variable display period of the picture will be shorter from the next time. In other words, delays caused by the ending part and delays caused by long-term variable display do not occur at the same time, and excessive delays are suppressed, so the disadvantages of having an ending part can be reduced.

The technical ideas shown in Features Z4 to Z6 above may also be applied to Features Z1 and Z8.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to Y may be applied to features Z1 to Z8.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (guide rail 100) that guides the launched game ball to a specified game area (game area PE), and various game components (nails, etc.) arranged within the game area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section (general winning opening 81, etc.) among the various game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern sequence, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operating means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 41... Game ball launching handle, 80... Game board unit, 80a... Game board, 82... Operation port unit, 83... Variable winning device, 84... Through gate, 86... Outlet, 91... First operation port, 92... Second operation port, 93... Electric role, 95... Pattern display device, 95a... Display screen, 99... Main display unit, 110... Game ball launching mechanism, 140... Notification/performance control device, 162... Main control device, 224... Payout device, 242... Payout control device, 402... MPU, 403... ROM, 404... RAM, 410... Display control device Control device, 421... Win/lose table storage area, 422... Allocation table storage area, 423... Variable display time table storage area, 431... Lottery counter buffer, 432... Reserved ball storage area, 433... Electric role reserve area, 442... MPU, 500D, 500E, 500F... Special performance device, 511D, 511F... Notice section, 512D, 512F... Notification section, 630E, 630F... Light-emitting unit, 641E, 641F... Light-emitting body, 670E, 670F... Front cover, 671E, 671F... Opposing section, 690E, 690F... Drive mechanism, 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F...Non-light diffusion portion, 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F...Light diffusion portion, 713E, 723E, 733E, 713F, 723F, 733F...Annular convex portion, 801G...Recovery passage, 802G...Detection sensor, 851G...Base portion, 861G...First bulge portion, 871G...Second bulge portion, 872G...Facing portion, 874G...Lower opening portion, 901G, 901H, 901I, 901J...Movable body, 902G...Shaft body, 903G, 903H, 903I...first surface portion, 904G, 904H, 904I...second surface portion, 905G, 905H, 905I, 905J...flat portion, 906I...step portion, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J...first end portion, 909G, 909J, 909I, 909J...second end portion, 911G...drive portion, 921G, 921J...inlet, CL1...central axis, CL5-CL7...central axis, CL10...central axis, FB...virtual surface, FE...specific area, FL2...virtual line, ME...variation display area, NE...reserved number display area, PLa-PLf...track, PE...play area.

Claims (5)

A game board on which a game area is formed;
A game ball launching means capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine including a payout means for paying out gaming balls based on a ball entering a ball entry portion provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball is scored into the starting scoring section as the scoring section;
an acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
a game round control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation being started prior to the judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, which is counted as one game round;
The predetermined determination information includes first determination information and second determination information,
a special game state transition means for transitioning a game state to a special game state which is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined game state, based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game round operation by the game round control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section as the ball entry section that can be switched between an entry state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-entry state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the entry state;
A variable ball entry section control means for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism that can be switched between an acceptance state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism,
The variable mechanism has a movable piece that can be displaced to a first position that allows the game ball to flow into the flow path toward the starting ball entry section and a second position that does not allow the game ball to flow into the flow path, and a drive unit that drives the movable piece, and is configured such that the movable piece is in the receiving state when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, and is in the non-receiving state when it is displaced from the first position to the second position,
the variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit when a predetermined support lottery is won, to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state;
As switching control modes of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode, a second switching mode set so that a period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepted state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode set so that a period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepted state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is defined so that a probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode,
As the predetermined game state,
a first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode;
A third game state corresponding to the third switching mode is provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
The movable piece has a distribution section that distributes the game ball to a first flow path that guides the game ball to a start ball entry section and a second flow path that does not guide the game ball to the start ball entry section, and a guide section that guides the game ball that has passed through an inlet portion of the variable mechanism to the distribution section, and is configured such that when the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the distribution section is located at a first flow path forming position that forms the first flow path, and when the movable piece is arranged at the second position, the distribution section is located at a position that forms the second flow path,
A first inflow passage and a second inflow passage are formed in the play area as inflow passages into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism,
A moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inlet passage is configured to be slower than a moving speed of the game ball when it flows into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inlet passage,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the variable mechanism control means drives and controls the drive unit so that the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution part, and, when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the control means drives and controls the drive unit so that the output period of a drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the entrance part of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution part. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that the output period of the drive signal by the variable mechanism control means when the switching control mode is the first switching mode is set to be longer than the period required for a gaming ball that has passed through the inlet part of the variable mechanism via the second inflow path to reach the distribution part. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the number of game balls flowing into the inlet of the variable mechanism via the first inlet passage is configured to be greater than the number of game balls flowing into the inlet of the variable mechanism via the second inlet passage. the variable mechanism has a biasing means for biasing the movable piece toward the second position, and is configured such that a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the accepted state, and output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby entering the non-accepted state,
A gaming machine as described in any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that when the drive signal output to the drive section is stopped and a game ball is located in the distribution section of the movable piece, the direction in which the movable piece is displaced when pushed by the game ball is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing means. The variable mechanism is configured such that, when a game ball is located at a predetermined portion of the guide portion, the game ball acts to push the movable piece toward the first position,
The gaming machine described in claim 4, characterized in that the output period of the drive signal by the variable mechanism control means when the switching control mode is the first switching mode is specified to be shorter than the period required for a gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path to reach the distribution section, and longer than the period required for the gaming ball to pass through the specified portion.

Images